IX1 Acquisition SW MAN00022 RevA Part1

iX1 Seismic Acquisition Software
MAN00022
Rev A
Version EN User Manual
January 11, 2018 Part 1
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started ............................................................................................................................... 1
Chapter 2 iX1 Hardware................................................................................................................................. 39
Chapter 3 iX1 Acquisition ............................................................................................................................. 49
Chapter 4 Project Parameters..................................................................................................................... 153
Chapter 5 iX1 Map ........................................................................................................................................ 223
Chapter 6 iX1 Channel and Sensor Tests .................................................................................................. 421
Chapter 7 iX1 ObNotes ................................................................................................................................ 445
Chapter 8 iX1 Media ..................................................................................................................................... 489
Chapter 9 iX1 VideoPlot .............................................................................................................................. 519
Chapter 10 Correlation Theory ................................................................................................................... 595
Chapter 11 Diversity Stack.......................................................................................................................... 597
Chapter 12 Slip Sweep and DSSS (HPVS) ................................................................................................. 599
Chapter 13 RTI Time Delays ....................................................................................................................... 613
i
User Manual
ii
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Getting Started
System Requirements
The iX1 Software can be installed on the following modules:
Microsoft Windows 7 or higher Microsoft Windows 2008 Enterprise R2 x64
Personal Computer (x64) SPM Standard PCIe
SPM Extended PCIe
QCM PCIe
SPM Lite PCIe
Network Test Unit (NTU)
Ensure each system meets the following requirements:
Minimum Recommended
Processor 1 GHz
RAM 1 GB 4 GB
Hard Drive Space 8 GB 72 GB
• Install the iX1 acquisition software package on the Seismic Processing Module (SPM and NTU).
• Install iX1 Demo software on the Quality Control Module (QCM).
• iX1 Demo is a demonstration software and may be installed on any PC using Windows 7 (x64) or Windows 2008
(Enterprise R2 x64) operating system.
• iX1 ObNotes program can be installed on any PC (doesn’t need a license) and networked to the main acquisition
system, if required.
iX1 Software Version 6.006.02 1

User Manual
Dongle
The Dongle limits the use of the software license to a particular version or its predecessors. It can also be used to limit the period
of time the software license is valid.
The dongle is checked each time the software is started to make sure it is running within the licensed parameters. For a time-
limited license, the dongle is checked every hour to determine if the expiry date is nearing. Starting 15 days before the license
expiry, the user will be notified of the pending expiration. The notification will occur every 8 hours until a new key that extends the
license is entered. On the expiration date the software will no longer function.
For a time-limited license, the system clock cannot be moved back any more than 90 minutes and cannot be moved to a previous
date. If the system clock must be moved back farther than this limitation then a new key must be requested.
Installing INOVA iX1 Software
1. To install iX1 Software, start the computer (if not already running).
Important!
Important!
A dongle (physical or software) is required when installing any iX1 Software.
Install Microsoft Windows SQL Server 2012, close all programs and remove all CDs from the CD-ROM
drive(s) before the iX1 Software installation.
2. Copy iX1 software installation folder to SPM.
3. Open iX1 software installation folder.
4. Double-click .
5. Click Next> on the Welcome to the Inova iX1 Setup Wizard window.
2 iX1 Software Version 6.006.02

Chapter 1 Getting Started
6. Select I accept the agreement and click Next> on the License Agreement window.
7. Select one of the following to install and click Next> on the Select Components window:
• iX1 ObNotes - Installs iX1 ObNotes and SourceQC applications on a remote PC which can be networked to the
main acquisition system.
• iX1 DEMO - Installs a demonstration version of iX1 Software on any PC using Windows 7 or higher operating
system.
• iX1 - Installs the iX1 acquisition software package.
• Field Tool - Installs software on Hawk Field QC tool.
Note
In this example, the iX1 acquisition software package is being installed on a SPM.
8. Click Next> on the Select Destination Location window.

User Manual
9. Click Next> on the Select Additional Tasks window.
10. Click Install to begin the installation from the Ready to Install window.
The Installing window with progress bar displays.
11. Click OK for each popup that displays.

12. System automatically opens the command window. Wait until it finishes the Fiberport driver installation.
13. Select Yes, restart the computer now on the Completing the INOVA iX1 Setup window.
14. Click Finish to restart the computer.

User Manual
Quick Start
The iX1 Software consists of the iX1 Hardware and iX1 Acquisition programs (including linked programs). Figure 1 illustrates a
high-level overview of the workflow commonly used to setup the system for seismic data acquisition.
Figure 1. iX1 Workflow Overview
To quickly setup and begin using the INOVA iX1 Software, complete the following:
1. Double-click iX1 Hardware.exe located on your desktop.
2. Define the type of operation including the sensor type (analog or digital).
3. Click OK to save the configurations. Click Close to exit.

4. From your desktop, double-click to open iX1 Acquisition.
5. From iX1 Vib (Acquisition), select File > New (Ctrl+N) from the drop menu or click on the toolbar. The
Project Name popup displays.
6. Enter a new project name (16 character maximum, no spaces or special characters) and click OK.
7. Click Next or Previous to navigate among the displayed parameter windows.
Note
Once started, the process of creation cannot be canceled or aborted. Project parameters can be
changed at any time after the new project setup is complete.
8. Click Finish to complete the new project setup. iX1 Map automatically opens with the New Sub-Project Name
pop-up:
9. Enter the name of the sub-project (16 character maximum, no spaces or special characters) and click OK.

User Manual
10. In iX1 Map, select the 3D or 2D tabs and define the sub-project with the system built source/receiver coordinates as
follows:
3D 2D
• Receiver coordinates (Rxy tab/Build 3D) • Receiver coordinates (Rxy tab/Build 2D)
• Source coordinates (Sxy tab/Build 3D) • Source coordinates (Sxy tab/Build 2D)
• Patch definitions (Patch tab) • Patch definitions (Patch tab/Build 2D)
• RAM and cable definitions (Layout tab) • RAM and cable definitions (Layout tab)
• Network definitions (Net tab) • Network definitions (Net tab)
Note
iX1 Map also allows the user to import the Source/Receiver coordinates and patches from SEGP1, SPS
and PRJ files.
11. Select File > Save Sub-Project from the menu.
12. Return to iX1 Vib (Acquisition) and click icon to open and setup iX1 ObNotes.
13. From iX1 Vib, click icon to open and setup iX1 Media.
14. Edit the command line settings in iX1 Vib and click in the command line window.
15. Click in the command line to start the seismic data acquisition.

Software Overview
The iX1 software is designed to work with G3i HD (cable), Hawk (cable-less (nodal)) and combined (hybrid) G3i HD and Hawk
seismic data acquisition equipment to perform seismic exploration for oil and gas industry.
The iX1 software allows users to:
• Control and monitor field seismic recording equipment
• Manage, synchronize and perform the quality control of seismic source equipment
• Acquire and record the seismic data from different types of sensors
• Display and perform the quality control of acquired seismic data
• Monitor field seismic operations
Any
Software License System Micro Vibroseis
Impulse HPVS
Type Type Type Seismic Source
Source
iX1 G3i Standard Cable   

iX1 G3i HPVS Cable    
iX1 Hawk Standard Nodal   
iX1 Hawk HPVS Nodal    
iX1 G3i-Hawk Standard Hybrid   
iX1 G3i-Hawk HPVS Hybrid    
iX1 Hardware
iX1 Hardware defines the internal and peripheral hardware in use. An interactive program (opens with the iX1 Hardware
program) tests the acquisition system integrity.
Important!
Important!
All iX1 software programs must be closed to run iX1 Hardware. iX1 Hardware runs independently of
other INOVA iX1 software.
iX1 Acquisition
All functions for acquisition and quality control of seismic survey data, the seismic program, and projects are performed through
iX1 Acquisition.
The Acquisition (iX1 Vib) window is where all of the linked programs are accessed. These programs must be initiated from
acquisition to ensure they are operating in the same database. iX1 Acquisition is where the process of building a new project
begins and where existing projects can be opened. It also acts as a network monitor while acquiring data. This active network
can be viewed graphically in the digital view, in text format, or with the scope. There are several other viewers associated with
the iX1 Acquisition window including a comport monitor, COG failure log, output patch, drill log, and a GPS viewer.

User Manual
Linked programs included in the iX1 Acquisition software are as follows:
• Command Line is used to acquire data as well as to monitor the progress of acquisition.
iX1 Map is used to define, edit, and test the actual survey. The parameters for the seismic survey are
defined in the new project setup in the Acquisition software. iX1 Map automatically creates a sub-project based
on the defined parameters. One project can have several sub-projects. Receiver testing, channel testing, shot
tracking, field device tracking, and importing XY’s are all performed in Map.
iX1 Media is used to sort and organize data files. It then writes data to and/or receives data from
removable hard drives, CD, DVD, removable hard disc, and/or tape.
iX1 ObNotes is used to view, find, edit the shot logs, print tape labels, import drill logs, and create daily
reports based on the client requests. Opening iX1 ObNotes links the current project database with the iX1
ObNotes program for automatic updating during acquisition.
iX1 Video Plot is used to plot seismic data records on a video monitor to visualize and analyze the
quality of recorded data. Several quality control and analysis tools are available.

Figure 2. iX1 Software Block-Diagram

User Manual
Directory Tree
All executables, project folders, and files for the software are located in the Inova_iX1 directory.
Project sub-directory folders are automatically created by the system when a new project is built. The project database is stored
inside the new project folder along with several control files. There are seven sub-directories located in the project directory and
are as follows:
Directory Description
backup The backup directory stores the *.spf file of the active sub-project when selected in iX1 Map.
doc The doc directory is used for importing and exporting numerous file types such as, SegP1, PRJ, and SPS.
Generated reports and seismic survey database projects are exported into *.sps files and then stored in the
doc directory. A *.mdf database file is automatically created for GPS and QC in the doc directory.
GDC The GDC directory stores any Geophysical Data Characterization (GDC) files that are produced in iX1
VideoPlot.
sweep The sweep directory stores all acquired vibroseis acquisition sweep files.
temp The temp directory temporarily stores reports produced from tests run in iX1 Map.
logs Stores HawkSyncDebug files.
Datastore Contains inter-exchange information between iX1, Field Tools and TX1 software.

Database
iX1 Acquisition (iX1 Vib), and all of the linked programs, use an integrated Microsoft Windows SQL Server 2012 database
(*.mdf) to store all project information.
A seismic survey is set in the software as a new project. Each project that is created has its own unique database. All data that is
entered into iX1 Vib (including linked programs) is stored in the database for the project. Though the project database cannot be
accessed directly, the reporting software is utilized. The seismic survey data can be exported into SPS, Text, and Excel files for
each project from various locations throughout the software application.
The shot identifier is the file number produced during acquisition. The system reserves files 1 – 1,000,000 for this purpose. If
there is a need to record tests in sequential file numbers, the “interleave” option can be used (refer to “Output Data Path / Sub
Path” on page 162 for additional information). Once recorded, a file number cannot be re-used inside the project.
Note
All data acquired by the iX1 Central Recording System is first stored on an internal hard disk drive,
which is usually identified as the F:\ drive. It is recorded in SEG-Y rev. 0 Internal Disk Format with a
*.SGY extension.

User Manual
System Overview
The complete system consists of:
• Central Recording System (SPM+TDM+PSU)
• Data Download System (Transcriber + Download Racks)
• Ground Equipment (G3i HD + Hawk FSU)
• Software (iX1 + TX1)

Central Recording System
The G3i HD Central Recording System (CRS) is a complete system that is used to monitor, manage, and record seismic data.
The CRS consist of the following:
• Seismic Processing Module (SPM - Lite, Standard, and Extended)
• Power Supply Module (PSM)
• Tape Drive Module (TDM)
• Multiple monitors (maximum of five)
• Keyboard and Mouse
• Network Plotter
• Low Clearance Rack (3 or 4 Units)
The SPM, TDM, and PSM are mounted in a rack for permanent installation.

User Manual
Seismic Processing Module (SPM)
The SPM is the core component of the Central Recording System (CRS), which functions as the software and hardware interface
between the ground equipment, other modules, and the peripherals that comprise the CRS.
INOVA offers three types of SPMs:
Channel
SPM Recommended Seismic Operations
Capacity
• Portable 2D acquisition
SPM Lite 2,000 • Mining surveys
• Small channel count 3D and TZ projects
• 2D and 3D acquisition
SPM Standard 120,000
• TZ and HPVS projects
• Large channel count 3D acquisition

SPM Extended 240,000
• Large channel count TZ and HPVS projects

G3i HD Ground Equipment
RAM (Remote Acquisition Module)
A G3i HD RAM is packaged in an extruded 6063 aluminum case with aluminum faceplates. The 2x12-pin G3i HD connectors are
made of 6061 aluminum. There is a digital board and an analog board located inside the case and lightning protection board
mounted on each faceplate. The RAMs are bi-directional and can be powered from the G3i HD Fiber TAP Unit (FTU) or G3i HD
Power Supply Unit (PSU).
Features
• 24-bit Delta-Sigma A/D Conversion
• 4 channels per RAM
• Automatic error free transmission
• Supports SMT compatible phone testing
• Positive Operation LEDs provide instant verification of connectivity, power, and telemetry functions
• Low distortion oscillator (LDO) test allows contractors to test channels and geophones with end-user specified signals
• In-field programmable firmware allows logic upgrades to be performed on all G3i HD RAMs connected to the Central
Recording System
Specifications
Instantaneous Maximum Input Equivalent Input

Gain
Dynamic Range * (RMS) Noise * (RMS)
0dB 127dB 1.768V 0.79µV
12dB 126dB 0.442V 0.22µV
24dB 121dB 0.110V 0.098µV

User Manual
System Dynamic Range* 145dB Phase Accuracy +/- 10μs (-40˚C to +70˚C)
Total Harmonic Distortion* <0.0001% Frequency Response 0 Hz to 1652 Hz
Common Mode Rejection* >110dB Operating Voltage PDL Input of 32.5V to 65V
Crossfeed Isolation* >130dB Power Consumption* 775mW max in full test mode
Anti-alias Filters -3dB @ 0.826ƒN (Nyquist) 715mW typical in acquisition mode
Rejection 130dB @ ƒN (Nyquist) Maximum distance between RAMs Up to 440m (1444 ft.)
Input Impedance 20 KΩ (differential mode) Sample Rates 4ms, 2ms, 1ms, 1/2ms, 1/4ms
Channel Matching Better than 1.0%
Operation
G3i HD RAMs are typically placed at four station intervals and are connected to each other with receiver cables. RAMs acquire
analog seismic signals (generated by geophones) and convert them to digital signals. The RAMs then transmit data packets to
the FTU, which retransmits the data to the Central Recording System (CRS). Each RAM also operates as a repeater to retransmit
data from one RAM to the next along the same line until data reaches the FTU.
The RAMs do not require individual batteries as each device draws power from the down-line FTUs or PSUs.
A full bank of channel and sensor tests can be performed by the RAMs via the iX1 Acquisition Software.
Physical
Packaging 6063 Aluminum

Connectors 6061 Aluminum
Size 25.0cm(L) x 8.5cm(W) x 6cm(H) (9.8 in.(L) x 3.3 in.(W) x 2.4 in.(H))
Weight 1.31kg (2.88 lb.)
Operating Temperature -40˚C to +70˚C
Storage Temperature -45˚C to +85˚C
Humidity 0% - 100%
Water Depth 5m fully operational (fresh water)
*Typical specifications @ 2ms sampling at 25˚C (77˚F).

FTU (Fiber TAP Unit)
The G3i HD Fiber TAP Unit (FTU) is a self-contained unit. Its primary functions are to provide transmission along the fiber
baseline and retransmit data from the RAMs to the Central Recording System (CRS).
The FTUs are laid out at intersecting points of receiver lines and baselines. The FTUs are interconnected to each other and the
CRS through the fiber baseline. They are then connected to the RAMs via receiver telemetry cables.
The FTU is also used on receiver lines to supply power to the RAMs.
Features
• Provides connection between receiver lines and cross lines
• Provides power to the RAMs
• Hot-swappable dual battery ports
• Automatic error-free data transmission
• In-field programmable firmware allows logic upgrades to be performed on all FTUs connected to the CRS
• Incorporates four G3i HD A/D Channels and provides full RAM capabilities

User Manual
Capabilities
Receiver Line Capacity 1,800 Channels @ 2ms, uncompressed

55m interval (one side of FTU)
Baseline Capacity 75,000 Channels @ 2ms, uncompressed
Specifications
Operating Voltage 10.5V DC to 18 V DC (12V nominal)

PDL Support Up to 24 RAMs @ 55m
Power Consumption* Standby 0.91W max
Active 3.78W + PDL Power Draw
PDL Power Draw @ 55m takeout interval in acquisition mode
1-way with 24 RAMs 3.78W + 21.4W
Maximum distance between FTUs Up to 7000m with single cable, maximum

Up to 2000m full baseline capacity
Standard cables are 250 or 500m
Physical

Size 31.0cm(L) x 17.0cm(W) x 14.0cm(H) (12.2 in.(L) x 6.7 in.(W) x 5.52 in.(H))
Weight 4.35kg (9.59 lbs.)
Humidity 0% - 100%
Water Depth 5m fully operational
*Typical specifications @ 2ms sampling at 25 ˚C (77 ˚F).

PSU (Power Supply Unit)
The G3i HD Power Supply Unit (PSU) is a self-contained unit and is used on receiver lines to supply power to the RAMs. The
PSU contains hot-swappable dual battery ports ensuring uninterrupted power supply to the RAMs during battery replacement.
The PSU also maintains four fully functioning analog channels.
Features
• Provides power to the G3i HD RAMs
• In-field programmable firmware allows logic upgrades to be performed on all PSUs connected to the Central Recording
System
• Automatic Error Free Transmission
• Incorporates four G3i HD A-D channels and provides full RAM capabilities
Specifications
Operating Voltage 10.5V DC - 18V DC (12V nominal)

PDL Support Up to 12 RAMs @ 55m takeout intervals
Power Consumption* Standby 0.715W max
Active 1.65W+ PDL Power
PDL Power Draw @ 55m takeout interval in acquisition mode
1-way with 12 RAMs 1.65W + 10.7W
*Typical specifications @ 2ms sampling at 25˚C (77˚F).

User Manual
Physical

Humidity 0% - 100%
Water Depth 5m fully operational

G3i HD NetLink
The G3i HD NetLink provides a receiver line wireless link for telemetry signals over a typical distance of 3km line of sight in areas
where cable cannot extend across railway tracks, deep ravines, etc. The mast extends the antenna to 2m in height without
additional guide-wires. The NetLink and mast are designed for easy setup, and quick alignment through the local WiFi link.
Features
• Worldwide license-free radio operation
• Configurable RF channels to avoid local interference
• Interference free operation even in high density environments
• Supports full G3i HD receiver line capacity
• Intuitive, rapid in situ configuration, link planning, and alignment through local WiFi link
• In-field programmable firmware allows logic upgrades to be performed on all Netlinks connected to the Central
Recording System

User Manual
Specifications
Operating Frequency 5725-6200 MHz (Subject to local regulations)

Modulation Configurable from ¼ rate QPSK to 1024 QAM
with forward error correction
Range 3km typical
Output Power 20dBm-50dBm (Subject to local regulation)
Power Consumption* 50W (typical)
Maximum Radio Module Height 2m without guide-wires in standard configuration
Physical
Mast with transport case

Size* 137.2cm x 38.1cm x 38.1cm (54 in. x 15 in. x 15 in.)
Weight* 42.6kg (94lb)
Ground electronics with transport case

Size 1.36m x 86.4cm x 67.3cm (53.6 in. x 34 in. x 26.5 in.)
Weight 57kg (125lb)

Humidity 0% - 95%
*Per each of 2 NetLink units that comprise a “link”

Hawk SN-11 Ground Equipment
FSU (Field Station Unit)
The Hawk FSU is designed to work without the need for radio communication with the Central Recording System. It acquires
GPS signal for timing and communicates locally to the user through WiFi technology. The field units have 16GB of local data
storage and support up to 3 analog sensor channels or 3 digital sensor channels. Constructed of aircraft grade aluminum alloy,
the housing protects the ground station electronics from rough handling of seismic field crews while continuing to function in the
harshest terrains. The FSUs are powered up using external battery packs that are offered in 192 or 288WHr capacity.
Features
• Compact design – small, form factor allows easier equipment deployment across challenging terrains and dense
vegetation
• Aluminum enclosure – provides ruggedness and added protection of ground electronics for extended product life
• WiFi technology – delivers communication between the user and equipment to improve field operations involving
deployment and equipment status collection with minimal power consumption
• Operational flexibility – the fully populated Hawk station can support 3 analog sensor channels and 3 digital sensor
channels sensors within the same field station unit
• Ethernet connectivity is also included for routine data downloading when connected to the Transcriber computer
• Positive Operation LEDs provide instant verification of Station Health, Sensor Health, GPS Signal, Battery Voltage

User Manual
Specifications
Instantaneous Maximum Input Equivalent Input

Gain
Dynamic Range * (RMS) Noise * (RMS)
0dB 127dB 1.768V 0.79µV
12dB 126dB 0.442V 0.22µV
24dB 121dB 0.110V 0.098µV
System Dynamic Range* 145dB Phase Accuracy +/- 25μs (-40˚C to +70˚C)
Total Harmonic Distortion* <0.0001% Frequency Response 0 Hz to 1652 Hz
Common Mode Rejection* >110dB Operating Voltage 11-17V
Crossfeed Isolation* >130dB Power Consumption* 309mW (1-channel analog)
Anti-alias Filters -3dB @ 0.826ƒN (Nyquist) 380mW (3-channel analog)
Rejection 130dB @ ƒN (Nyquist)
Input Impedance 20 KΩ (differential mode) Sample Rates 4ms, 2ms, 1ms, 1/2ms, 1/4ms
Data Storage Capacity 16GB non-volatile flash memory
Operation
The Hawk FSUs with an external battery pack are typically placed at every receiver station. Either digital sensor or analog
geophone can be connected to the FSU. After connecting the sensor and battery, the FSU boots and the Box LED is red. When
boot up is complete, the Box LED is green and WiFi function is ready to use.
After that FSU completes BITs test and GPS fix. Normally all 4 LEDs are steady green when FSU is awake and working properly.
If the LED is red, this indicates a problem with that component. Now the FieldTool can be connected to the unit to finish the
deployment, perform QC or troubleshooting, if required.
Physical

Connectors Dynacon
Humidity 0% - 100%
Immersion: 24 hours, 3m depth (fresh water)

External Battery Pack
Specifications
Capacity • 192WHr (standard)

• 288Whr (high capacity)
Charge Time • 192WHr - 4 hours

• 288WHr - 6 hours
Charge Temperature Range 0ºC to +40ºC (32ºF to 104º F)
Discharge Temperature Range -40ºC to +60ºC (-40ºF to 140º F)
Physical
Size • Standard Pack 19.56cm x 9.65cm x 7.37cm (7.7 in x 3.8 in x 2.9 in)
• High Capacity Pack 19.56cm x 13.72cm x 7.37cm (7.7 in x 5.4 in x 2.9 in)
Weight • Standard Pack 2.49kg (5.5 lb)

• High Capacity Pack 3.45kg (7.6 lb)
Transportation Certification Tested to ensure compliance with UN/IATA requirements for Lithium-Ion batteries

User Manual
Field Deployment, Harvest and QC Tools
The Field QC Tool is used in the Hawk system for local communication with the FSU. The Field QC Tool is a Trimble Yuma hand-
held computer or Alzig Tablet.
The Field QC Tool uses WiFi communication protocol and can quickly acquire QC and status information from deployed FSUs on
foot or from a vehicle. The Field QC Tool requires no user-interaction allowing station QC and status information to be collected
efficiently while moving through the spread. The Field QC Tool can also be used to collect seismic data from Hawk FSUs in the
field.

Data Download System
The Hawk Data Download System consists of the Transcriber computer and data download racks which house FSUs when
cycled from the field for data download.
Transcriber Computer
The Transcriber is a complete data archive and QC computer. It includes a RAID array constructed of Solid State Drive (SSDs)
for data storage and eSATA interface for writing data to delivery media. The Transcriber provides detailed reporting capabilities
including trace recovery, inventory management and geophysical QC functions.
The Transcriber Server is connected via an Ethernet switch to the Data Download modules, and uses three disk types to hold
and process the information from the FSUs.
Features
• Multi-processor PC with RAID storage running Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 OS and MS SQL Server 2012
database server
• Data collection status monitoring
• Data sorting and display
• Data collection management
• FSU diagnostic hardware tests
• SEG-Y data output to external USB or eSATA hard drives
• Internal level SSD RAID 6 with up to 12 TB and external RAID up to 132 TB of storage

User Manual
• Data output support for seismic data QC with iX1 AVP compatibility
• Phase and power spectrum
• Time series trace displays
• Graphical and tabular reports
• Trace attribute QC
• Trace yield
• Equipment and data management
Specifications Physical
Input Voltage 110-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Size 44.5cm x 19.3cm x 36.6 cm

(17.5 in x 7.6 in x 14.4 in)
Operating Temperature +5ºC to +35ºC Weight 6.9kg (15.2 lb)
Storage Temperature -40ºC to +75ºC Rack Dimensions 73.7cm x 53.3 cm x 50.8cm

(29 in x 21 in x20 in)
Humidity 20%-80% non-condensing Rack Weight 68kg (150 lb)
Standard Monitors 26” flat screen,1920x1200

resolution (4 with system)
Data Download Racks
Features
• Data download racks (or modules) are designed to accommodate 24 FSUs each.
• The units are dimensioned to fit into a standard 19” equipment rack and can be cascaded as needed to scale up in order
to suite system size.
• The download racks include an Ethernet switch and power supply unit.
• FSU plugs directly into the rack without interconnecting cable.
Specifications Physical
Input Voltage • 110 VAC, 16A Cabinet Size 167.2cm (H) x 56.1cm (W) x 68.3cm (D)
• 240 VAC, 12.1A (63.7 in (H) x 22.1 in (W) x 26.9 in (D)
Operating Temperature 0ºC to +40ºC Total Weight • 150.6kg (332 lb) (110/120V)
• 134.3kg (296 lb) (200-240V)
Storage Temperature -15ºC to +50ºC
Humidity 10%-90% non-condensing

G3i Architecture (Analog System)
Fundamentals
• RAMs are 4-channel units (two channels on each side)
• PSUs and FTUs incorporate four analog channels (two channels on each side)
• PSUs with battery packs are placed on the ground at 12 RAM (max) intervals @55m takeouts (depends on cable length
between devices Table 3 on page 32)
• Receiver cables are used to:
• Connect the RAMs, PSUs, and FTUs to the sensors and to other RAMs and PSUs
• Supply power to the RAMs from FTUs and PSUs
• Fiber optic baseline cables are used to:
• Interconnect FTUs
• Connect the receiver lines to the Central Recording System

User Manual
Power Down the Line (PDL) (Analog)
The rotating sequence of power supply units depends upon the length of receiver line cables and should be taken into
consideration before deployment.
Table 3. PDL distribution limits
Max RAM to RAM Distance Takeout Interval Number of RAMs per PSU
(m) (m) (max)
55 13.75 22
110 27.5 16
220 55 12
300 75 10
The PSUs and FTUs are configured in the Central Recording System (CRS) to supply power in the 1-Way PDL option.
1-Way PDL
In a 1-way scenario, the FTU provides power to the RAMs on both A and B sides (max 24 RAMs@55m takeout intervals). PSUs
then supply power to the next 12 RAMs on its away from the truck side and so on.

2D Deployment
There are two options available for the field crew when deploying the RAMs:
1. The first RAM is placed at the beginning of a 2D line and then every four stations after that. This layout results in losing
two channels on one side of the RAM.
2. The first RAM is placed between the 2nd and 3rd stations on the line and utilizes all four channels of that RAM.
RAMs are deployed in four station intervals after that.
A standardized placement according to flag number can be developed to use these methods. Wherever the RAMs are placed, it
is the observer’s job to emulate that layout when he builds the network in iX1 Map.
The RAMs are bi-directional. The receiver cables can be plugged into either of the two cable ports.

User Manual
3D Deployment
Before 3D deployment, the following factors should be considered to fully utilize the G3i HD field equipment:
• Baseline location (often the priority for a baseline is ease of access so roads and trails facilitate quicker and simpler
deployment)
• Quantity of RAMs, PSUs, FTUs, cables, and batteries
• Existence of possible line breaks and obstacles
By default, the software places the first RAM location between the 2nd and 3rd stations from the beginning of the line (BOL). RAM
locations are the same on all receiver lines.
The software can select the RAM locations individually for each line to minimize the number of RAMs needed. This is known as
the Optimize option and is used to achieve maximum channel usage. The drawback is the lack of consistency in RAM location
flag numbers.
The receiver line cables connect to the “A” and “B” ports of the FTUs. By default, the low number side connects to the “A” port.
The fiber baseline cables connect to the ports labeled “Left” and “Right” with one cable running back in the direction of the Central
Recording System and the other towards the next receiver line.

Loops
Receiver lines can be “snaked” together with loops (receiver line cables). If the maximum cable distance between devices is
exceeded, repeater RAMs or PSUs must be used.

User Manual
Down Line FTU
The G3i HD system is a true multi-path telemetry recording system. That enables the use of receiver lines to act as baselines.
Secondary baselines can be used to network around line breaks or obstacles. This is referred to as a down line tapping.
The procedure for connection on the ground of the down line FTU is to place another FTU at a RAM location, on the last
continuous receiver line where the secondary baseline is going to be run.
1. Connect the receiver line cables into the appropriate “A” or “B” side (by default, the low flag number side connects to the
“A” port).
2. Connect a baseline cable into the “LEFT” or “RIGHT” side of the FTU (by default, the low line number side connects
to the “L” port) and run that cable towards the other line segments; this is critical.
3. Place FTUs at RAM locations on the line segments that are to be networked.
4. Connect the receiver cable to the appropriate “A” or “B” side of the FTU.
5. Connect the baseline cable to either the “LEFT” or “RIGHT” side of these FTUs.

NetLink (Wireless Telemetry Link)
In situations where cable telemetry is not feasible, such as river, highway crossings, etc., a pair of NetLinks can be used to
accomplish RF telemetry.

User Manual

Chapter 2
iX1 Hardware
iX1 Hardware
The iX1 Hardware application performs the following functions:
• Identifies the iX1 Hardware configurations that are in use
• Provides a place to change the hardware configurations
• Runs the FiberPort diagnostics
• Upgrades the FiberPort firmware
Important!
Important!
All iX1 software programs must be closed to run iX1 Hardware. iX1 Hardware runs independently of
other INOVA iX1 applications.
1. Close all iX1 applications running on the SPM.
2. To open iX1 Hardware, double-click on the desktop. The iX1 Hardware window displays.
Select the instrument:

• Hybrid System (G3i + Hawk + G3i Aux FTUs)
Instruments
• Cable System (G3i + G3i Aux FTUs)
• Nodal System (Hawk + FSU Aux)
The Base Line speed is automatically selected for FTUs.
Transmission Speed
Select a transmission speed from the Receiver Line drop menu. Table 1 on page 40
Select the sensor type:

• Analog (geophones)
Sensor Type
• Digital (SL11-3 or ML21) (Cable)
• Digital (SL11-3 or SVSM) (Nodal)

User Manual
Station Interval
Takeout Interval Cable Length TX Rate
System (max)
(meter) (meter) (Mbps)
(meter)
13.75 12.5 55 18
27.5 25 110 18
• Analog
55 50 220 10
75 70 300 6
41.25 13.75 165 20

• Digital (SL11-3)
55 18.33 220 10
13.75 12.5 55 20
• Digital (ML21) 27.5 25 110 20
55 50 220 10
Table 1: G3i HD Receiver Line Transmission Speed

Chapter 2 iX1 Hardware
Drop Menu
There are three drop menus located at the top of the iX1 Hardware window.
Drop Menu Sub-Menus Hot Keys Description

• File Print... Ctrl+P Print the hardware settings
Print Preview View the hardware settings before printing
Print Window Print a screenshot of the iX1 Hardware window
Exit with Save Save hardware settings and exit iX1 Hardware
Abort Exit iX1 Hardware with saving changes to the hardware settings
• Help About iX1Hardware... Display the software version number
• Generate Diagnostic File Opens Generate Support File utility.
Generate Support File
Generate Support File utility is created to help the users to gather the indispensable information about the system/software
performance and normally requested by the system support team for troubleshooting.
• Click Generate Support File. The following window popup.
• Include Project Files option is enabled by default.
• E:\Inova_iX1\ProjectName is default output path.
• Click Generate to start. After the system finishes gathering information the following popup displays.
• Click OK to close the application.
• Send Diagnostic.zip file to INOVA Customer Support Team.

User Manual
Diagnostics
FiberPort Diagnostic Test
1. To access and run the FiberPort diagnostics, click Diagnostic at the bottom of the iX1 Hardware window.
The following information displays in the Fport Diagnostics window:
Operating system
Basic computer hardware information
FiberPort specifications and current status
Current status of PPS signal that comes from the external GPS receiver

2. To run a FiberPort diagnostic test, click Run.
A progress bar displays at the bottom of the window.The results display in the main window when the tests are
complete.
3. To save the test results as a *.txt file, click Save Report at the bottom of the Fport Diagnostics window.
4. Click Save to save the file in the Inova_iX1 directory (default directory).

User Manual
FiberPort Firmware Upgrade
Important!
Important!
Required upgrades to the FiberPort firmware will be indicated in the latest software release
documentation. Do not run the firmware upgrade if it is not necessary.
1. To apply an upgrade to the FiberPort firmware, click Upgrade Firmware at the bottom left of the Fport Diagnostics
window. The following warning displays:
2. Click Continue to proceed with the firmware upgrade or Abort to discard.
Important!
Important!
Do not disrupt the power supply to the system during the upgrade process. After the upgrade is
complete, the system will shut down.
The Load Firmware window displays:

3. Click Program to start the FiberPort firmware upgrade.
A progress bar displays at the bottom of the window.
4. When the upgrade is complete, the following pop-up will display indicating that the system will shut down:
5. Click OK to shut down the system and complete the FiberPort firmware upgrade.

User Manual
iX1 CRS Network Configuration
Hybrid / Cable System
Nodal System

iX1 CRS Cabling
Hybrid/Cable System
Figure 2. Cabling to VIB PRO HD (Hybrid/Cable)
• Use G3i HD-to-VIB PRO HD (SFL97931) interface cable to interconnect G3i HD SPM with VIB PRO HD and Radio.
Note
All other Source Controllers must be used with a specially designed interface cables.
Please contact Customer Support for additional information.
• G3i HD baselines can be connected through the Port Panel or directly to FB ports of G3i HD SPM.

User Manual
Nodal System
Figure 3. Cabling to VIB PRO HD (Nodal)
• Use VIB PRO HD-to-AUX FSU (SFL30078) interface cable to interconnect VIB PRO HD with Aux. FSUs and Radio.
Note
All other Source Controllers must be used with a specially designed interface cables.
Please contact Customer Support for additional information.
• Use AUX FSU Power and Network (SFL30083) cable to link Aux. FSUs with G3i HD SPM.

Chapter 3
iX1 Acquisition
iX1 Acquisition
All functions for acquisition and quality control of the seismic survey data are performed through the iX1 Acquisition software.
• Open iX1 Acquisition program by double-clicking on the icon on the desktop. The iX1 Vib window opens.
Drop Menu (page 50) Command Line (page 127)
Toolbar (page 118) Current Error Bar (page 119)
Display Tabs (page 120) Status Bar (page 119)
Data Display (page 124)

User Manual
Drop Menu
There are 11 drop menus located at the top of the iX1 Vib window that are used to access the tools and perform the various
functions within the program.

New Ctrl+N Create a new project database (page 52)
Open... Ctrl+O Open an existing project database (page 52)
Save As... Ctrl+A Save the active project with a new name (page 53)
Delete Project Delete a project (page 53)
File Print Project Parameters... Ctrl+P Select a plotter (page 54)
Preview Project Parameters Display project parameters and print (page 54)
Save Parameters... Save project parameters to a text file (page 55)
<Recent Project List► List the last four projects opened
Exit Close iX1 Acquisition
Text Print... Open a file in the doc directory (page 56)
Plotter Form Feed Feed paper through a plotter (page 57)
Purge All Print Jobs Delete print jobs from queue (page 57)
Toolbar Show/hide Toolbar (page 119)
Status Bar Show/hide Status Bar (page 119)
Scope Show/hide Scope tab (page 120)
View detailed information about the RAMs in a separate pop-up
Text
(page 126)
Command Line View Command Line in separate pop-up (page 127)
Drill Log View Drill Log for current shot in separate pop-up (page 134)
Patch View Patch in separate pop-up (page 135)
COG Err Log View GPS COG Location Error Log in separate pop-up (page 59)
View
GPS View GPS viewer in separate pop-up (page 61)
Port Monitor View COM Port Monitor in separate pop-up (page 136)
Ready Messages View Ready Message monitor in separate pop-up (page 138)
Gator Messages View Gator Message monitor in separate pop-up
QC Aux View QC Aux monitor in separate pop-up (page 139)
Plot Files View Plot Files in separate pop-up (page 142)
Line Alerts View the Line Alert messages in separate pop-up (page 151)
Remote Encoder View Remote Encoder in separate pop-up (page 152)
Hawk Schedule View Hawk Schedule in separate pop-up (page 152)

Chapter 3 iX1 Acquisition

Enter/edit General/Header/Project/Survey & GPS info and Coordinate
Project Header...
System content (page 155)
Critical Parameters... Enter/edit project critical parameters (page 161)
Encoder and Communications... Edit Encoder and communication ports settings (page 166)
Define/edit vibrator and fleet configuration, auxiliary devices, source
Parameters Source Table... controls, GPS/COG thresholds, recording parameters and modify plot
decks (page 190)
Define/edit the FSU work/test schedule and recording parameters
Hawk Config
(page 68)
Line Power... Alt+L Define/edit number of baselines (page 67)
Toggle Line Power Shift+L Power on/off the baselines (page 67)
Patch + All In Z Zoom to the network and display in Scope or Digital windows (page 122)
Patch Only Shift+Z Zoom to the current patch in Scope or Digital windows (page 122)
Zoom Box Ctrl+Shift+Z Use the mouse to zoom and view selected area (page 123)
Zoom UnZoom U Return to last view (page 123)
Icon Scale (100)... Increase/decrease icon size (page 123)
Rotate... Rotate digital or scope display (page 123)
Refresh F Refresh digital display (page 125)
Shot A Acquire a shot (page 70)
Increment Shift+I Move to next shot in command line (page 70)
Acquisition
Decrement Shift+D Move to previous shot in command line (page 70)
Clear Errors Clear errors from text and digital windows (page 70)
Battery Report Export the battery report as a text file (page 71)
Export
Low Batteries Export the low battery report as a text file (page 71)
Video Plot... Open iX1 Video Plot (page 519)
Map... Open iX1 Map (page 223)
Ob Notes... Open iX1 Observer Notes (page 445)
Media... Open iX1 Media (page 489)
Source Config Open Source Config application (page 73)
Source QC Open Source QC application (page 83)
Tools PSS Retrieval Open PSS Retrieval application (page 98)
Radio Similarities Open Radio Similarities application (page 80)
Hawk Sync... Open Hawk Sync application (page 99)
Composite Builder Open Composite Builder tool (page 102)
Near Trace Open Near Trace tool (page 105)
Open Wireline Analysis utility to verify the zero-time adjustment and
Wireline Analysis
vibrator performance (page 108)
On F6 Power the scope On/Off (page 120)
Scope AutoScope Alt+F6 Automatically change scope display from noise to shot (page 121)
Scope Properties... Ctrl+F6 Define scope display settings (page 121)

User Manual

Default Settings Return to INOVA default settings (page 115)
Open... Open different user window setups (page 115)
Window Save iX1VibBarSettings Save current window setup (page 115)
Save As... Save a user window setup (page 116)
G3iVibBarSettings Open INOVA default settings (page 115)
Hot Keys List the hot keys available in iX1 Vib (page 117)
Help
About iX1 Vib... Display the software version number (page 116)
File Drop Menu
The File drop menu is used to name, open, save, print, and preview projects and project parameters
New Project
• To create a new project, select File ► New (Ctrl+N) from the drop menu. The Project Name window displays.
Refer to “Create a New Project” on page 153 for information on creating a new project.
Open an Existing Project
1. To open an existing project, select File ► Open from the drop menu. The Open Project window displays.
2. Select the desired file and click OK.

Save As Project
1. To save a project, select File ► Save As from the drop menu. The Project Name pop-up displays.
2. Enter a project name (maximum 16 characters without spaces or special characters) and click OK.
Delete Project
Any project that is not currently open can be deleted.
1. To delete a project, select File ► Delete Project from the drop menu. The Delete Project window displays.
2. Select the project to delete and click Del Project. The following pop-up displays.
3. Click Yes to delete the project.
4. Click Close on the Delete Project window to return to the iX1 Vib screen.

User Manual
Print Project Parameters
1. To print project parameters in text format via a plotter or printer, select File ► Print Project Parameters... (Ctrl+P) from
the drop menu. The Select Plotter pop-up display
2. Select the desired plotter (select Other to use a printer) from the drop menu and click OK. If Other is selected, the
standard Print window displays.
3. Select the printing options and click OK.
Preview Project Parameters
1. To display the project parameter sheet(s) for review before printing, select File ► Preview Project Parameters from the
drop menu. The Print Setup dialog box displays.
2. Select the printer from the drop menu or click Network to select a network printer/plotter.

3. Click OK. The Project Parameter sheet(s) displays.
4. Click Print to print the project parameters or Close to return to the iX1 Vib window.
Save Project Parameters
1. To save project parameters to a text file, select File ► Save Parameters from the drop menu. The Save As window
displays (defaults to the doc directory for the project).
2. Enter a file name and click Save.

User Manual
Plotter Drop Menu
Text Print...
1. To print the text files that reside in the doc directory, select Plotter ► Text Print... from the drop menu or click on
the side toolbar. The doc directory window displays.
1. Select a file and click Open. The Select Plotter pop-up display
2. Select the desired plotter (select Other to use a printer) from the drop menu and click OK. If Other is selected, the
standard Print window displays.
3. Select the printing options and click OK.

Form Feed
• To remotely advance paper for the selected plotter, select Plotter ► Form Feed from the drop menu or click on
the side toolbar.
Purge All Print Jobs
• To purge print jobs that have been sent to the default plotter/printer, select Plotter ► Purge All Print Jobs from the
drop menu or click on the side toolbar.

User Manual
View Drop Menu
Selected tabs can be open and display as a separate window. When the window is open (undocked), the tab does not display in
the iX1 Vib window. Click X in the upper right corner of the window to re-dock the tab in iX1 Vib.
For more information, refer to the following pages:
• Toolbar (page 118) • Scope (page 120)
• Status Bar (page 119) • Text (page 126)
• Status View (page 122) • Command Line (page 127)
• Drill Log (page 134)
• Patch (page 135)
• COG Err Log (page 59)
• GPS (page 61)
• Port Monitor (page 136)
• Ready Messages (page 138)
• QC Aux (page 139)
• Plot Files (page 142)
• Line Alerts (page 151)
• Remote Encoder (page 152)
• Hawk Schedule (page 152)

COG Err Log
The COG Err (Error) Log is a text based log containing Centre of Gravity (COG) failures. When a COG failure occurs, an entry
is written to a database that is automatically named ProjectName_GPS.mdf and stored in the doc directory of the project. As
COG failures occur, the database is updated and the failure information displays in the COG log.
The COG log displays the Time, Sline, Flag, Composite, Offset (in relation to the projected COG) as well as the Easting and
Northing (of the actual COG) details.
• Select View ► COG Err Log from the drop menu to display the GPS COG Error Log window.
COG Time Limit
1. To sort the COG log by time, click in the upper left of the COG log. The Time Limit pop-up displays.
2. In the Limit [24] field, enter or select a time limit.
3. Enable the Sort By Time [X] and Sort Inverse [X] checkboxes.
4. Click OK to apply the time limit, or click Cancel to exit and return to the COG log.
5. From the COG log, click to display the log files in consecutive order beginning with the first file. To display
the log files in consecutive order starting with the last file, click .
For existing COG files, the COG Log tab displays as yellow and provides the number of entries in the COG
Log.

User Manual
Recording Source Array Calculated Center of Gravity (CCOG) Position to Tape
When this option is selected positional data received from the source control system over the RS232 or Ethernet interface are
used to calculate an estimated COG and elevation of the source array. Source positional information is normally received in a
$GPGGA message string with the position in Geodetic (Lat / Long) format with GPS status information (number of satellites, GPS
quality, and HDOP value) included in the message. The geodetic positions are converted to Northing and Easting (X, Y) values
based on a user selected conversion process provided in the iX1 software.
The following process is used to calculate a source array Centre of Gravity:
• The user selects a Geodetic conversion option in the iX1software.
• The user defines source array groups and the units within the groups which have GPS enabled. Only actual received
GPS position messages are used to calculate COG, no theoretical source positions can be defined or used.
• The user defines GPS quality tolerances (number of satellites, GPS quality, and HDOP) for each unit equipped with
GPS. These QC tolerances will be stored in the project database with the raw data.
• The user specifies a “Must Pass” tolerance for the number of composites of a shot which must have acceptable GPS
quality for each unit (minimum 1).
• The iX1 software will use the selected Geodetic conversion to calculate an X,Y position for each unit for each composite
recorded. Each raw GPS message as well as the converted position is recorded to the database along with the GPS
quality values and QC tolerances.
• At the end of the shot an average X,Y,Z position is calculated for each unit using the individual messages which met the
specified QC tolerances. The average unit position and elevation is recorded to the database.
• A COG position and elevation is then calculated from the average X,Y,Z positions. This calculated COG and elevation is
recorded to the database and SEG-Y and SEG-D tape headers.
• In the event that no valid or acceptable position messages are received from one or more units a COG will still be
calculated and recorded, however an error condition will be set and recorded to the database and displayed under
system comments in the iX1 ObNotes program.
Note
In this situation the software gives multiple warnings to the operator prior to the end of the shot.
• For internal SEG-Y files and SEG-Y Rev.0 tape and tape-image files the calculated COG will be recorded in bytes 45-48
(average COG Elevation), 73-76 (X coordinate), 77-80 (Y coordinate) of the 240 byte trace headers.
• For SEG-D Rev.2 and Rev.3 tape and tape image files the COG and average position for each unit will be recorded in
the extended header as an ASCII string. The calculated COG will also be recorded in the SEG-D external file header
bytes 14-17 (X coordinate), 18-21 (Y coordinate), 22-25 (average COG Elevation).
• If SPS files are exported from the system the source point position in S01 file will be updated with the calculated COG
and elevation.
• The average unit positions and COG may also be exported to an Excel document from the ObNotes program.

GPS
The GPS Viewer tab is used to display the GPS position of vibrators (in relation to the current shot point). The tolerances should
be properly defined in Parameters ► Source Table... ► Sort Configuration ►Vib Configuration window to receive the
correct QC warning messages in GPS Viewer.
The GPS data (Ready, PSS, GPGGA messages) is received over a communication link established between the Encoder and
CRS and must be defined in Parameters ► Encoder and Communications.
Note
To use the GPS Viewer, the vibrator controllers (decoders) must be equipped with GPS enabled
hardware.
• Select View ► GPS from the iX1 Vib drop menu or double-click to GPS tab to open as separate window that then can
be moved and resized.
When the cursor is placed over a shot point (SP) or vibrator icon, the ID, location, or error information displays. The background
color of the information section indicates the following:
• White - The GPS position meets defined tolerance
• Red
• GPS QC tolerances set for COG, HDOP, Quality, # Satellites not met
• Source is outside of the set maximum offset tolerance (Unit Offset / COG Offset)

User Manual
The GPS Viewer uses icons to graphically indicate the location of vibrators in relation to the current shot point and uses different
colors to display the status.
Icon Description
Current Shot Point
Vibrator within the allowable tolerances
Vibrator that has not yet met tolerance criteria
Vibrator out of tolerance
Current Shot Point
The current source (shot) point in the command line displays as , and is positioned in the center of the GPS Viewer.
Calculated Centre of Gravity (CCOG)
The CCOG is calculated after the last composite for the current source point and displays as a magenta dot in the GPS viewer
with CCOG in cyan. See example below, where the vibrators are “dragged” every composite. Even all composite COGs are
outside of the COG Offset circle, the final CCOG for the current source point passed QC tolerance and will be recorded in the
SEG-Y header.
• Define the COG threshold under the Parameters ►Project Header ►GPS
• Enable GPS Source Location to File Headers (Calculated COG if Fleet)
• Enable QC Shot Point GPS Location and set distance (xx.xx)

Calculated Fleet COG per Composite
The COG threshold (maximum offset from the current shot point) displays as a circle in GPS Viewer. The calculated fleet COG
displays as a small circle with a cross.
• If calculated fleet COG is inside, the COG circle has a cyan color
• If calculated fleet COG is outside, the COG circle has a magenta color
• Define the COG threshold under the Parameters ►Project Header ►GPS
• Enable GPS Source Location to File Headers (Calculated COG if Fleet)
• Enable QC Shot Point GPS Location and set distance (xx.xx))

User Manual
Unit Offset Threshold
The system converts the GPS position of the vibrators and compares it to the current source point coordinates. The unit offset
circle displays an acceptable offset distance from the current shot point.
• If current position of the vibrator is inside, the unit offset circle is green
• If current position of the vibrator is outside, the unit offset circle is yellow
• Define the unit offset threshold under the Parameters ►Source Type # ► Source Configuration ►Vib
Configuration (Fleet # > Unit Offset (M))
GPS Button
• If View per Fleet and Show All Fleets are disabled, click to request the GPS position from the vibrator
controller (fleet) for the active (highlighted) sub-command line. The Lock, Zoom In, Zoom Out options are available for
this setup only.
• If View per Fleet and Show All Fleets are enabled, click to request the GPS position from all vibrator controllers
(fleets) defined in all sub-command lines. Use the mouse scroll wheel to adjust zoom for all views.
• If View per Fleet and Enabled Fleets Only are enabled, click to request the GPS position from the vibrator
controllers (fleets) defined in the enabled sub-command lines. Use the mouse scroll wheel to adjust zoom for all views.
Note
Only vibrator controllers that respond display in the GPS Viewer.

Wait Time per Vibrator
1. To define the duration of time (mS) to wait for a return message, right-click . The Wait Time per Vibrator pop-up
displays.
2. In the Wait (sec) (#) field, select the time in seconds to wait for a return message.
3. Click OK to apply the wait time, or click Cancel to exit and return to the GPS Viewer screen.
Trk Button
The option tracks and displays the vibrators position in between acquisition source points and is used when vibrator fleets
are on detours.
A GPS position request message is transmitted via encoder’s radio. A message is sent periodically according to Repeat Every
(sec) settings. The sequence is repeated until is clicked in the GPS Viewer, or a Ready message is received. Current
vibrator positions are updated in the GPS Viewer and iX1 Map.
1. Right-click on to set the tracking parameters. The Tracking Parameters pop-up displays:
2. In the Wait (sec) (#) field, select the time in seconds to wait for a return message.
3. In the Repeat Every(sec) field, select a waiting period between a position request messages.
4. Enable the Master Vib Only per Fleet checkbox to query only the Master Vibe in the fleet.
5. Click OK to apply the selections, or click Cancel to exit and return to the GPS Viewer.
6. Click to begin tracking. Click at any time to stop tracking.
Reset All Locations Button
• Click to clear the GPS Viewer screens.
Lock Button
• Click (depressed) to prevent the GPS viewer from automatically zooming in to the current shot point. Click again
(not depressed) to enable the GPS viewer to automatically zoom to the latest shot point.

User Manual
Zoom In Button
• Click to zoom in around the current shot point icon.
Zoom Out Button
• Click to zoom out around the current shot point icon.
Zoom Full Out Button
• Click to zoom in/out to display the default view range.
Halt Button
• Click to terminate a GPS position request made by using or .

Parameters Drop Menu
For more information, refer to the following pages:
• Project Header... (page 155)
• Critical Parameters... (page 161)
• Encoder and Communications... (page 166)
• Source Table... (page 190)
• Hawk Config...(page 68)
Line Power
1. To enable/disable fiber ports using the Line Power option, select Parameters ► Line Power (Alt+L) from the drop
menu. The Line Power window displays.
2. Check the required box to enable/disable the fiber ports (checkmark = enabled). Click All On or All Off to enable/
disable all fiber ports.
3. Click OK to return to the iX1 Vib window.
Toggle Line Power
From iX1 Vib window, line power can be globally enabled/disabled. Line Power Off displays in blue in the current error bar at the
bottom of the iX1 Vib window.
• To enable line power, click Parameters ► Toggle Line Power (Shift+ L) in the drop menu (checkmark displays), or
click on the side toolbar.

User Manual
Hawk Config
The Hawk Config application is used to setup the acquisition parameters for Hawk FSUs in accordance with G3i HD settings
(hybrid system). These parameters are saved in the project database and transferred to TX1 system for the FSU programming
before field deployment.
Note
All times should be entered as UTC time.
1. Set the FSU work schedule
• Initial Wakeup (mm/dd/yyyy) - the date when FSU wakes up to start recording
• Daily Wakeup in UTC (hh:mm) - the time when FSU wakes up every day to start recording
• Recording Duration (hh) - the every day recording time duration
2. Set Built in Tests (BITs) test schedule in UTC (up to 7 events).
Note
The system stops acquisition during the BITs time period.
• Move slider to enable the required amount of events
• Set a test start time (hh:mm) for every event
3. Set a recording parameters
• Geophone Configuration (One Station or Multi-Station (3))
• Default Sensor Table from the list
• Preamp Gain must match G3i HD settings (hybrid mode)
• High Cut Filter is set in the Parameters ►Critical Parameters and matches the G3i HD settings
4. Click OK to save the settings in the project database and return to main window.

Zoom Drop Menu
For information about the Zoom drop menu options, refer to (page 123).

User Manual
Acquisition Drop Menu
The commands under the Acquisition drop menu are used primarily to acquire data.
Shot
• To initiate the acquisition sequence (take a shot), select Acquisition ► Shot from the drop menu, press A on the
keyboard, or click located at the top right corner of the Command Line.
Increment
• To scroll through shot point numbers in increments of one, select Acquisition ► Increment (Shift+l) from the drop
menu or click located above the command line.
Decrement
• To scroll through shot point numbers in decrements of one, select Acquisition ► Decrement (Shift+D) from the drop
menu or click located above the command line.
Clear Errors
• The Clear Errors option is used to manually clear posted errors from the Status View and Digital tab windows. Errors
that are not manually cleared are automatically cleared with the start of next acquisition. To clear errors, select
Acquisition ► Clear Errors from the drop menu.

Export Drop Menu
The Export drop menu is used to export battery reports as text documents which are stored in the doc directory.
Battery Reports / Low Battery
The Battery Report displays the battery voltage on the selected by user equipment (G3i/Hawk/Both). The Low Batteries report
displays only the equipment that are reached a low battery voltage threshold defined in Critical Parameters.
1. To view and export the battery or low battery report as a *.txt file, select Export ► Battery Report ► G3i/Hawk/Both
or Low Batteries from the drop menu. The report displays in a separate window.
2. Select one of the following options from the toolbar:
Toolbar Icon Toolbar Name Function and Description
Open an existing battery report by browsing or selecting from a drop-down list by clicking
Open
on the ▼.
Save Save the current battery report.
Highlight a portion of the report and click this button to save it to a clipboard prior to pasting
Copy
it to another document.
Print Select the plotter to print the battery report.
Form Feed Advance the paper in the plotter.
Find Search for a word in the current battery report.

User Manual
Tools Drop Menu
Refer to the following sections for more information.
• Video Plot... (page 519)
• Map... (page 223)
• Ob Notes... (page 445)
• Media... (page 489)
• Source Config (page 73)
• Source QC (page 83)
• PSS Retrieval (page 98)
• Radio Similarities (page 80)
• Hawk Sync... (page 99)
• Composite Builder (page 102)
• Near Trace (page 105)
• Wireline Analyses (page 108)
Notepad
The default editor for INOVA iX1 software is Notepad. The Notepad option is used to view, edit, and search text files created by
the system. Notepad is a Microsoft product. Refer to the Notepad Help menu for additional information.
1. To view or edit text files, select Tools ► Notepad from the drop menu or click on the toolbar.
2. Select a file to view from the drop menu.

Source Configuration (SourceConfig)
The program is used to configure, send, receive and store operational parameters for VIB PRO HD/Vib Pro units. This program
normally runs when parameters need to be changed.
Ethernet Interface Setup
To use the Ethernet connection, G3i HD CRS and VPHD/Vib Pro must be correctly connected and functioning on the network.
• Connect Data A Ethernet port (VPE) directly to the G3i HD CRS LAN1 port using network cable.
• Power on VPHD Encoder (VPE).
• Power on G3i HD CRS and set static IP address for the LAN1 port (IP:172.16.16.1).
• Open iX1 Vib.
• Click Vibrator Configuration icon then Ethernet Configuration tab.
• Set Source Controller Kind: to VibProHD or Vib Pro
• Click Get Information. If the SourceConfig is able to communicate with the VPHD/Vib Pro Ethernet Interface Card it
displays the information about the established connectivity, such as:
• IP address of hosting CRS (Local IP)
• IP address of VPE (Reported IP)
• VPE serial number
• Click Set IP Address. It changes the current IP address of the VPE Ethernet Interface to a new address according to the
information specified in the IP Address and Unit Serial text boxes.

User Manual
Fleet Setup
Note
Vibrator Fleets must match Fleet Configuration in the iX1 SW.
• Click Fleet Setup. The following popup displays.
Parameter Description
1 Vibe Parking Lot Create the vibrator fleets by dragging Vibe # into the Fleet # panel
2 Max Fleet Count Configure number of fleets (visible panels)
3 Crew Number Must match in VPE and VPDs
4 Start Code Must match in VPE and VPDs
5 Assign Decoder per Fleet Automatically assigns one Vibe # to every Fleet #
6 Clear All Assignments Clears all Vibe # to Fleet # assignments
7 Fleet Name Put the fleet name (optional)
8 Status Indicator Shows Ethernet Connection Status between G3iHD and VPHD Encoder
Shows last notification message from the Message Log

9 Last Event Indicator
• Click to display the Message Log

Sweep Table Setup
• Click Sweep Table. The following popup displays.
The sweep generator calculates a sweep, using the sweep frequencies, sweep type/length and taper type/length as inputs. The
Sweep Table supports up to 16 sweeps with 16 segments each.
1 Sweep Entry Input or edit the sweep parameters
2 Copy Allows user to copy already created sweep entry to any other sweep entry or to all sweep entries.
3 Save... Saves current sweep table parameters in text format (E:\InovaG3\SourceConfig directory).
4 Load... Loads sweep table parameters from previously saved text file.
5 Compare... Compares current sweep table parameters with previously saved text file.
6 Send... Sends current sweep table parameters to VPHD
7 Receive... Compares current sweep table parameters with VPHD sweep tables
8 Segmented Allows user to create a segmented sweep entries.

User Manual
Send Sweep Table to the VIB PRO HD units
• Click Send... from the Sweep Table menu. The following popup displays.
• Select Fleets and/or Encoder to send the sweep table data. Follow the Color Legend to identify the active fleets and
VPE.
• Click OK.
The revised settings are sent to the directly connected VPE and to VPDs over the radio.The Last Event Indicator displays the
status of the last executed command.
• Click Last Event Indicator to open the Message Log.The following popup displays.

Receive Sweep Table from the VIB PRO HD units
• Click Receive... from the Sweep Table menu. The following popup displays.
• Select Fleets and/or Encoder to receive the loaded sweep table.
• Click OK.
The loaded sweep table settings are received from the directly connected VPE and from VPDs over the radio.The Last Event
Indicator displays the status of the last executed command.
• Click Last Event Indicator to open the Message Log.The following popup displays.
If application finds any mismatch between the current sweep table and loaded into the Vib Pro HD units the following popup
displays.

User Manual
• Click Select All or select Overwrite App? for individual parameter.
• Click Modify Selected to update the current sweep table.
• Click Close. The current sweep table is updated now.

Vibrator Parameters Setup
• Vibe Parameters are organized into collapsible categories and mirrors the VIB PRO HD / Vib Pro menu screens.
• The application remembers the last configuration of collapsible categories.
• Vibe Parameter Grid displays all known (active) Vibes with Encoder in the first column.
Right click on Category header to bring up context menu:

• Copy... copies category entries (current view) from Vibe# to any known Vibe#
1 Category • Send... sends category entries (current view) to any known VPHD
• Receive... requests category parameters from selected VPHD and compares it with the
category entries (current view)
Right click on Vibe # header to bring up context menu:

• Copy To All Vibes copies all parameters from selected Vibe# to all known Vibe# (current view)
• Copy... copies all parameters from selected Vibe# to any other Vibe# (current view)
• Send... sends all parameters from selected Vibe# (current view) to VPHD
2 Vibe # • Compare... request all parameters from selected VPHD and compares it with Vibe# (current
view)
• Save... saves selected Vibe# (current view) to *.VibeParams file
• Load... loads all parameters from selected *.VibeParams file to the selected Vibe# (current
view)
• Delete deletes selected unassigned to fleet Vibe#
3 Entry Can be modified with the value that is legal to send and receive
Loads vibe parameters from the canned defaults or external files to the any known Vibe# (current
4 Load...
view)
Copies selected vibe parameters (categories) from selected Vibe# to any known Vibe# (current
5 Copy...
view)
Requests selected vibe parameters (categories) from VPHD and compares it with Vibe# (current
6 Receive...
view)
Compares all parameters (current view) between any two Vibe# or Vibe# and previously saved text
7 Compare...
files.
8 Send... Sends selected vibe parameters to any known VPHD.

User Manual
Radio Similarity Analysis
Overview
The radio similarity tests are used to verify that all vibrators are performing similarly and within specified limits.
Note
At the initiation of the sweep a radio similarity may be requested from the single vibrator only.
The output from the vibrator (Sim GF) is modulated over the radio by the VIB PRO HD /Vib Pro Decoder (VPD) then demodulated
by the VPE to produce an analog output signal known as RADIO_VIB_OUT, which can be recorded by the CRS on the Aux-4
channel. This signal is also converted to digital form (16-bit resolution) and transferred over TCP/IP protocol for the Radio
Similarity Analysis.
The Radio Similarity Analysis is performed by using SourceSignature (SrcSig) program and verifies the quality of the vibrator
performance comparing the RADIO_VIB_OUT with the assigned reference signal.
Radio Similarity Operation
The radio similarity operation uses iX1 Acquisition Software with embedded SourceSignature (SrcSig) program and VIB PRO HD
Encoder (VPE).
Note
Zero-Time Adjustment and Wireline Analyses (of the truck) must be performed before the radio
similarity operation.
1. Verify that signal for Radio and Wireline similarities is set to Sim GF on all VPDs. (Phase Control ► Similarity Signal
Code).
2. Click iX1 Vib to open the Acquisition window.
3. Click Radio Similarity from the side tool bar or select Tools ►Radio Similarities. The following window
displays.
4. Select Vibrator ID from the list.
5. Select Sweep Number (Kbd or Stored) from the list.

6. Click SrcSig to open the SourceSignature program. The window similar to the following appears.
7. Preset (open) the default plots for the Radio Similarity Analysis (Phase, Amplitude Spectrum, Correlation) and
Signals in the Plot Area.
8. Click Acquire to start a sweep.
9. Check if Reference and Vib Out signals are received in the Signal plot.
10. Analyze the acquired data. Obtain the radio similarity delay from the Phase plot.
11. Add (4) to existing Radio Similarity Delay value in the Radio Control menu (VPE).

User Manual
12. Click Acquire again to verify the adjustment.
13. Save acquired data as the reference point for every vibrator involved in the current seismic operation. Select File ►
Save from the drop menu. A window similar to the following displays.
14. Click Yes. The following window appears.
15. Name the file for example as VibSim_SN_after_Zero_time and save it as SEG-Y Tape Format (*.sgy).
Note
The default location of the similarity files is F:/G3DATA/PROJECT/SIM.
16. Before shot is fired, click Arm (Auto) to automatically output the analog RADIO_VIB_OUT signal (JE connector)
after initiation of the sweep (shot). The signal is recorded by CRS on Aux-4 channel (RVIB).

Source QC (Post Sweep QC Data Analysis)
Introduction
Source QC is the program used to display and analyze the real time quality control information in the CRS. This includes:
• PSS data and correlation wavelets (vibroseis)
• PFS data and uphole signals (dynamite)
The Source QC program can process data from the following source controllers:
• Vib Pro / VIB PRO HD
• Shot Pro II / BoomBox3
Note
The use of vibrator controllers and dynamite shooters in the same project is also supported.
The program automatically switches modes to display the returning PSS/PFS data appropriately.This feature simplifies
operations by allowing both energy sources to be controlled from the single screen setup. The Source QC program is the part of
iX1 SW and receives the PSS data accessing the source database in real time during the seismic data acquisition.
Note
Source QC automatically connects to the source database (source.mdf) of the current project.
There are many types of PSS data messages, however all of them based on the following data sets:
PSS Vibrator Cross- GPS VSS

Types Status Correlation Data Status
PSS 1 ◙
PSS 2 ◙ ◙
PSS 4 ◙ ◙
PSS 5 ◙ ◙ ◙
PSS 10 ◙
PSS 11 ◙ ◙
PSS 12 ◙ ◙ ◙
PSS 14 ◙ ◙ ◙
PSS 15 ◙ ◙ ◙ ◙
The following PSS messages are mostly used in the current vibroseis operations:
• PSS 12 (Normal Vibroseis, HPVS)
• PSS 15 (VSS, HFVS)

User Manual
The Vibrator Status portion of PSS message includes the following data:
• Phase Error (Maximum / Average)
• Fundamental Force* (Maximum / Minimum / Average)
• THD (Maximum / Average)
• Stiffness (Maximum / Minimum / Average)
• Viscosity (Maximum / Minimum / Average)
• Sweep Checksum
• Parameters Checksum
• Status 1 (DSP Errors & Warnings)
• Status 2 (DSP Control Limits)
• Status 3 (MCU Errors)
• Status 4 (Error Indication Flags)
* Fundamental Force - The part of the vibrator’s Ground Force signal remaining after all distortion components, harmonic and otherwise,
have been removed.
*Peak Force - The component of Ground Force indicating one or more of the extremes of the vibrator’s ground force signal.

Basic Screen Setup (Vibroseis)
Field Description
1 Drop Menus Typical menus to access the program features.
2 Vibrator Status Panel Displays the vibrator current status.
3 Production Statistic Panel Shows production statistic for the project up to date and the selected date.
4 Productivity Chart Displays the productivity report.
PSS Message Table Displays the PSS data in text format.

5
PFS Message Table Displays the PFS data in text format.
Displays the vibrator phase, force and distortion bar graphs for the current or highlighted Shot in
Plots
the PSS Message Table.
Displays the PSS correlation wavelet, amplitude spectrum and phase graph for the current or
6 Correlation Analysis Plots
highlighted Shot# in the PSS Message Table.
Displays the uphole signal waveform and uphole time for the current or highlighted Shot in the
Uphole Analysis Plots
PFS Message Table.
Note
All windows can be docked/undocked, shown/hidden, and added to the tab groups as preferred.

User Manual
Source QC Thresholds Setup
1. Click iX1 Vib to open the Acquisition window.
2. Click Source QC from the side tool bar or select Tools ►Source QC.
3. Click QC Settings ► Vibroseis... The following windows displays.
4. Click Threshold and enter the threshold values.
Force • Average (minimum acceptable value)
(percent) • Peak (minimum acceptable value)
Phase • Average (maximum acceptable value)
(degrees) • Peak (maximum acceptable value)
Distortion • Average (maximum acceptable value)
(percent) • Peak (maximum acceptable value)
• Select PDOP/Number of Satellites (minimum)

GPS
• Select GPS Quality (minimum)
Note
The system compares the PSS data against the threshold values and then flags it in red color in
the PSS Massage Table, Productivity Chart and Plots Area.

5. Click Checksums. The following window displays.
6. To set the expected checksum values, click OK to return to the main screen.
7. In the PSS Message Table, right-click to the field in SChks column and click Set as expected Sweep Checksum.
The following window displays.
8. Select Vibrator ID to activate the comparison functionality and click OK.

User Manual
9. To set:
• Expected Parameter Checksum right-click to the field in PChks column and click Set as expected Sweep
Checksum.
• Encoder Sweep Checksum right-click to the field in SChksEnc column and click Set as expected Sweep
Checksum.
• Encoder Parameter Checksum right-click to the field in PChksEnc column and click Set as expected Sweep
Checksum.
10. Click QC Settings ► Vibroseis... ►Threshold to verify the settings. A window similar to the following displays.
11. Click on the appropriate check-box to activate/deactivate comparison for particular vibrator, if necessary.
Note
The activated check-box triggers a warning window to alert operator.
12. Click Apply.

13. Click PSS Status.The following windows appears.
14. Select the types of errors to report or keep all of them activated.
Note
All types of errors are selected by default. The PSS flag failure triggers a warning pop-up to alert
operator.
15. Click OK to exit and save the settings.

User Manual
Vibrator Status Panels
The Vibrator Status Panel allows users to monitor the vibrator performance in the color-coded status panels. Observer is able to
see all vibrators at a glance and open the Vibrator Production Panel by hovering the cursor over the individual Vibrator Status
Panel.

Productivity Chart
The Productivity Chart displays a rate of productivity for individual fleets/vibrators and works in conjunction with the PSS
Message Table, if necessary.
The user can adjust the zoom level by clicking on the particular time interval icon or with the mouse wheel.
Production Statistics Panel
The Production Statics Panel displays the number of unique shot points swept for the current project to-date, and the selected
(highlighted) day in the PSS/PFS Message Table.
The information is broken-down by crew, fleet and individual vibrator.

User Manual
PSS Message Table
The PSS/PFS Message Table displays the acquired PSS/PFS information in text format.
• One row is assigned per sweep, per vibrator (PSS Table)
• One row is assigned per shooter (PFS Table)
• Red-colored row means the sweep is failed against configured thresholds. The cell in dark red color flags the failed QC
parameter.
• Columns are configurable (show, hide, reorder)
Figure 1. PSS Table
Note
The PFS Message Table has a different column names.
Figure 2. PFS Table

Table 3. Scroll Panel
Icon Description Icon Description
Go to the First Shot Row Down
Jump up by number of rows (configurable).

Page Down
Right click to the icon to change.
Jump down by number of rows (configurable).

Page Up
Right click to the icon to change.
Go to the Last Shot.

Row Up
Lock to the End.
Go to the Shot. Go to the Date.

Enter the shot number. Choose the date from calendar.
Table 4. Right-Click Header Options
Option Description
Show Group By Box Sorts the data by box numbers.
Remove This Column Removes the column from the table.
Allows to add more columns to the table from the Customization list.
Double-click to the option to be added to the table. It appears as the
Column Chooser
last column.
Grab and drag it to the desired position inside the table, if necessary.
Best Fit Resizes the entire column with the best resolution.
Best Fit (all columns) Resizes all columns with the best resolution.
Filter Editor Sorts the data according to the filter settings. (by column values)
Show Find Panel Shows the Find Panel at the top of header.
Hide Find Panel Hides the Find Panel.
Table 5. Right-Click Table Options
Option Description
Export to verbose APS Converts the PSS/PFS data to APS format.
Reset View Resets the current view with the best resolution.

User Manual
Plots Panel
Force / Phase / Distortion Graph Bars
The system automatically adjusts the vertical scaling of each individual graph bar.
Right-click on the graph bar then Set Y Range and set the Y-axis
scaling parameters manually, if required.

Correlation Analysis Plots (Vibroseis)
The Correlation Analysis Plots displays:
• PSS correlation data for each vibrator
• Amplitude spectrum of the PSS correlation data for each vibrator
• Phase of the PSS correlation data for each vibrator
Right-click to any plot to set the axis range (X-range, Y-range) manually, if desired. Click Reset to automatically adjust the X and
Y ranges with the best resolution.
Uphole Voltage Plot (Impulse)
The Uphole Voltage Plot displays:
• Uphole Time
• Uphole Signal Waveform

User Manual
Output Files (APS Format)
Click File ► Export ► PSS to verbose APS to output the Vibrator Attribute Record Specifications file (*.txt). The file is similar in
format to SPS file.
Table 6. Verbose APS Vibrator Attributes
Definition Cols Format Range Units
1 Record Identification 1 A1 A
2 Line 2-17 4A4 With 0,1 or 2 DP
3 Station 18-25 2A4 With 0, 1 or 2 DP
4 Point Index 26 I1 0(unknown), 1-9
5 Vibe Fleet 27 A1 1 to W
6 Vibe Decoder ID 28-29 I2 1 to 32
0 (high) or non-
7 Vibe Drive Level 30-32 I3
zero (low)
8 Average Phase 33-36 I4 -180 to 180 deg
9 Peak Phase 37-40 I4 -180 to 180 deg
10 Average Distortion 41-43 I3 0 to 100 %
11 Peak Distortion 44-46 I3 0 to 100 %
12 Average Force 47-49 I3 0 to 200 %
13 Peak Force 50-52 I3 0 to 200 %
14 Average Ground Stiffness 53-55 I3
15 Average Ground Viscosity 56-58 I3
16 Easting 59-67 F9.1 m/ft
17 Northing 68-77 F10.1 m/ft
18 Elevation 78-83 F6.1 m/ft
19 Shot Sequence Number 84-88 I5 1 to 99999
20 Energy Point 89-90 I2
21 Vibe Fleet 91-92 I2 1 to 32
22 Vibe Status Code 93-94 I2 1 to 98
23 Mass 1 Warning 95 A1 Space or W
26 Plate 1 Warning 100 A1 Space or W

Definition Cols Format Range Units
32 Force Overload 106 A1 Space or F
33 Pressure Overload 107 A1 Space or P
34 Mass Overload 108 A1 Space or M
35 Valve Overload 109 A1 Space or V
36 Excitation Overload 110 A1 Space or E
37 Stacking Fold 111-112 I2 1 to 32
38 Computation Domain 113 A1 Space, T or F
39 Vibe Decoder Version 114-117 A4
40 Day of Year 118-120 I3 1 to 999
41 Time 121-126 3I2 000000 to 235959 hhmmss
42 HDOP 127-130 F4.1 0 to 99.9
Figure 7. APS file (example)

User Manual
PSS Retrieval
If PSS data is not received for some reasons (radio interference, etc) from the vibrators during production time it can be requested
from the Decoders later.
Note
Encoder: Sweep Length for the particular sweep must be set to 0 before PSS Retrieval procedure.
• Click PSS Retrieval icon. The following window displays.
• Click . The system sends a Start Code to particular Decoder over the radio interface requesting a
missed PSS according to the SweepID number. If requested PSS exist in the decoder’s memory it will be send back to
the CRS the same way as during normal operation.
• Click to reset the window. The entries with PSS not available and Retrieved will be deleted from the
list.
• Right-click to any entry then click to permanently remove the entry from the list before retrieval.
• Click to close the application.

Hawk Sync
The Hawk Sync application is used to transfer data between iX1, TX1 systems and Field Tools “Data Exchange Path” on
page 99.
Hawk Sync:
• Creates a portable database based on the configuration settings from Hawk Config, Hawk Schedule and iX1 database.
• Exports the portable database to Datastore folder on the USB flash drive. This data is used to create the Hawk FSU
configuration file, Shot Log file, as well to describe sweeps, source / receiver points and patch definitions in TX1.
Note
The USB 3.0-capable drives are recommended.
• Imports the FSU status information from Field Tool which allows to verify geometry and association of FSU to flags in
the snapping window and results of Built-In-Tests (BITs) in iX1 Map.
• Allows user to adjust Hawk FSU deployments via snap override functionality in Map and Check tab.
Figure 8 Data Exchange Path

User Manual
Operation (To Field)
1. Insert USB flash drive into the iX1 system.
2. Click Hawk Sync icon or Tools ► Hawk Sync... from drop menu. The following window displays.
3. Click Create Datastore button. The Datastore folder is generated and exported to USB flash drive automatically.
ToField_32576_2017032140907.sqlite database file will be used to upload the information to TX1.
• 32576 - Unique project identification number. Set in the Critical Parameters during the project creation.
• 2017032140907 - Time stamp.

4. Click Examine FSU Config to verify the FSU configuration parameters. The window similar to the following
appears.
5. Eject the USB flash drive. Now a Datastore information can be imported to Field Tools and TX1 to update its SQL
Server instance.
Operation (To Base)
1. Insert USB flash drive into the iX1 system.
2. Click Hawk Sync icon or Tools ► Hawk Sync... from drop menu. The following window displays.
3. Click Import button. The system updates the iX1 current project database from
ToBase_ProjectID_TimeStamp.sqlite file according to the project identification number and time stamp.

User Manual
Composite Builder
The Composite Builder is used for quality control and testing mainly during startups. The Composite Builder is used to
determine the optimum number of composites per vibration point (VP) for the particular area. It is also used to test the parameters
for diversity stack and/or noise burst editing before applying it to the production data. It stacks the seismic data files and produces
a file that can be evaluated by iX1 Video Plot analysis tools.
1. To use the Composite Builder option, select Tools ► Composite Builder from the drop menu. The Composite window
displays.
2. To select a file to be added to the processing pool, click the file number in the data directory . The selected file
information displays in the file description area of the Composite window .
3. Click to add the selected file to the Process File pool window .

4. Repeat step 2 and 3 to add files to the processing pool.
Note
All files must have the same size and file description. Click the Size column header to sort the files by size.
5. To compare two files (maximum), ensure the Difference checkbox is enabled in the Pre-Process section and then
click . Any difference(s) between the two selected files displays.
• If the selected files are uncorrelated, the Correlate, Noise Burst Edit and Diversity Stack options are available to
edit. /
• If the selected files are correlated, only the Noise Burst Edit option is available to edit.
6. If required, enable the Plot Data checkbox.
7. Assign a file number for the file after stacking in the File Number field.
8. Click to correlate and/or stack data as specified. As the stacked file is being produced, a progress bar
displays at the bottom of the Composite window. The stacked file (begins with D followed by the assigned number)
displays in the upper left section of the window. When the process is completed, the following pop-up displays.
9. Click OK to close. The system outputs file D0000002.sgy (this example) to F:/G3DATA/ProjectName folder and
can be open in iX1 Video Plot application for analysis.
Correlate Options
• Enable the Post-Stack or Pre-Stack checkbox.
Correlate with Sweep File
1. To correlate with a sweep file, click With Sweep File in the Correlate section. The Add Sweep File button becomes
active.
2. Click Add Sweep File. The available sweep files display in the pop-up window.
3. Double-click to select the desired sweep file. The file displays in the field on the right side of the Add Sweep File
button. To deselect a sweep file, double-click the file using the right mouse button.
4. Click OK to complete the edit.

User Manual
Correlate with Aux Trace
1. To correlate with an auxiliary trace, click With Aux Trace in the Correlate section. When enabled, a checkmark displays
in the Aux Trace and Sweep Length checkbox, and Extended Correlation becomes available for editing.
2. Select the Aux Trace from the Aux Trace drop menu. The Aux Trace Delay displays.
3. Enter the sweep length.
• If required, click the radio button to enable Extended Correlation.
• If required, enter the extended correlation field time (in ms) as follows:
• Greater than or equal to the listen time
• Less than or equal to the acquisition time (sweep length + listening time)
Noise Burst Edit
1. Enable the Noise Burst Edit checkbox to remove any unwanted noise spikes or noise bursts from the seismic data.
2. Enter the Ratio number (greater than 6.0) that represents the level at which a sample is considered a noise burst.
3. Enter the Window Width, which is the number of samples used to calculate the average amplitude (between 64
and 256 ms).
Note
A smaller sample window is more effective when seismic data amplitudes are changing quickly.
4. Enter a value in the Mute* field to specify the amount of samples to be muted (applicable to both sides of the
sample being edited).
*Example: If 8 is entered, then 4 samples on each side of the edited sample are muted.
Diversity Stack
1. Enable the Diversity Stack checkbox to eliminate a long-duration noise patterns such as traffic related noise.
2. Enter the Window Width, which specifies the length of segments where the average amplitude of energy is
calculated (between 64 and 2000 ms).
Plot Data
1. To plot the results of the composite builder, enable the Plot Data checkbox at the bottom right of the Composite window.
The Plot Deck window displays.
2. Edit the plot deck as required.
3. Click OK to apply the edits.

File Number
1. Enter a file number to name next composite builder file, and then click Run. Composite Builder saves a file to the hard
disk according to assigned path in Critical Parameters (F:\G3Data\ProjectName) and automatically tags it with D (e.g.
D0000001.sgy).
Near Trace
Near Trace Gather utility is used to evaluate the traces gathered from different records for the same channels, same offsets
from a shot point, and/or same receiver points (one trace only from any *.sgy file).
Automatic Mode
1. Click Select First File. The First List pop-up displays.
2. Select the file to start with and click OK. The selected file name is published instead of Select First File.
3. Choose the trace type to be gathered into one output file. Refer to the “Trace Types for Near Trace Gather” on
page 106.
• Aux Trace - Appends to the output file selected auxiliary trace
• Trace Number Within File - Appends to the output file a trace with the same trace number within file
• Source Point (+/-) Trace Number - Appends to the output file traces with the same offset from the shot point
• Receiver Flag Within File (Component + Receiver Line Name) - Appends to the output file a trace with specified
station and line number.
4. Assign a file name for the output near trace file in the Output File field (e.g., ntrace1), and then click Run. Continue
the seismic data acquisition normally.

User Manual
5. Click Stop at the end of production day.The Near Trace program saves a file (e.g., ntrace1.sgy) to the hard disk
according to the assigned path in Critical Parameters (normally F:\G3Data\ProjectName).
Figure 9Trace Types for Near Trace Gather
Manual Mode
The Near Trace program in manual mode allows the user to gather the required traces from already acquired seismic (test) data
files.
1. Select required for analyses files from the left data pool.
2. Click Add to move the selected files to the Process File pool.

3. Choose a trace type to gather.
4. Assign the output file name and click Run. The Near Trace program saves a file to the hard disk according to
assigned path in Critical Parameters (normally F:\G3Data\ProjectName).
• Enable Append File to add the traces to already existing output file.
• Click Select All to move all files from the left data pool to the right processing pool.
• Click Remove All to remove all files from the processing pool.

User Manual
Wireline Analysis
The purpose of Wireline Analysis is to verify vibrator instruments are programmed correctly.
The signals typically used are Wireline References (WREF), which is filtered True Reference available from the VPE and VPD
units, and Similarity Vibrator Out from VPD. Comparing VPE and VPD reference signals ensures the VPDs start at the zero time
and generate the correct sweep. Ground Force is the most commonly used signal for Similarity Vibrator Out and used to verify
the vibrator performance.
If the actual energy from the vibrator has the desired phase relationship with the WREF signal from the VPE and if the equipment
has been adjusted properly, then Ground Force and WREF should have an appropriate phase relation across the seismic
frequency spectrum.
Proper Wireline Analysis data must be acquired using the first G3i HD RAMs outside of recording truck from all (maximum 4)
vibrators simultaneously. Once acquired, it can be analyzed by the Wireline Analysis tool. The plotted information is checked
closely for the measured time zero after correction.
Note
If the first Wireline Analysis is not performed using the first RAM outside the recorder truck, the
linear phase of a real time zero error can be interpreted as cable skew and removed, thus causing
a problem in timing that will not be indicated. Once the zero time is adjusted after the first wireline
analysis off the truck, additional wireline analyses can be performed anywhere in the network.
Acquire Wireline Record
1. Connect all vibrators (maximum of four) to the recording system via the wireline box, as shown below.
2. Create a new subproject in iX1 Map with a simple 2D line.
3. Build an eight channel patch.
4. Acquire an uncorrelated wireline record with the following recording parameters.
Correlation None
Composite 1
Record Length Equal to sweep length

Input Settings
Section Field Comments
Select the start and end time for the wireline analysis in ms. For example, if the sweep length is 12s,
1 - By Time
the input is 12,000ms.
Only enable By Sample to perform analysis by specific sample numbers. To perform analysis by
1 - By Sample
time, enter a start and end time in the input fields (1).
Enable the applicable checkbox(es) for analysis. Up to eight traces can be entered and labeled from
2
the data file for Wireline Analysis.
2 - Trace Select the number of the trace to analyze.

Input
2 - Label Enter an annotation label (1-8 characters).
If the polarity of the data traces are reversed, enable the applicable Rev checkbox(es).
2 - Rev
Normally Ground Force (Sim GF) has reversed polarity (Vib Pro / VIB PRO HD.
Select the reference auxiliary trace number that is used to cross correlate with the selected data
2 - Ref
traces. Normally trace -3 (WREF).
2 - Aux The annotation label is published automatically.
Full Length Plot Enable the Full Length Plot checkbox to plot the WREF trace from Encoder.
3
Output Wireline Enable the Output Wireline checkbox to plot the wireline analyses.
Enable the Raw Data checkbox to display a correlation wavelet and to specify the size of the
Raw Data
window from the center of the wavelet.
4 - Plots Enable the Amp Spectrum checkbox to display frequency vs amplitude (vertical displacement in
Amp Spectrum
dB) of the data in relation to the start and end time input parameters.
Phase Plot Enable the Phase Plot checkbox to display the phase analysis.

User Manual
Section Field Comments
Freq. Select the required minimum and maximum frequencies.
Select the minimum and maximum amplitudes to display in the amplitude spectrum plots.
Power
Normally from -160 to 0dB.
5 - Plot
Parameters
Select the minimum and maximum phase limits for the phase spectrum.
Phase
Normally from -5 to 5 degrees.
Smoothing Select a value to smooth the phase plot (recommended value is 10).
6 - Phase In the Freq field, select the start and stop frequencies.
Freq.
Correction
Perform a Wireline Analysis
1. Select Tools ► Wireline Analysis from the Acquisition drop menu. The Wireline Analysis window displays:
2. Select the required file for analysis from the list on the left side of the Wireline window.
3. Select an option to correlate with Aux.Trace or Sweep File .
4. Define the parameters required to plot the Wireline Analysis in the right side of the Wireline window.
5. Click Preview to display the Spectrum analysis.

Spectrum Analysis
Normal (Vibe#1)
Bad (Vibe#4)

User Manual
Plot Wireline Analysis
1. To plot the wireline analysis, select a file in the Wireline Analysis window and click .
The following information is included at the end of the plot:
Vibe#4 had been set up incorrectly. After fixing the problem, another wireline file has been acquired and the
Wireline Analysis is performed again.
This time all four vibes passed the test.
2. Click Close to return to the Wireline Analysis window.
3. Click Close to return to the main Acquisition window.

Spectrum Analysis Views
• To view the spectrum analysis, select a file in the Wireline Analysis window and click
To change the wireline view from horizontal to vertical, disable the Horiz checkbox at the bottom right-hand
side of any of the spectrum analysis tabs.
• Raw - Amplitude / Time (ms)
• Amp - Gain (dB) /Frequency (Hz)
• Phase - Phase (Degrees) / Frequency (Hz)

User Manual
• All - Raw, Amp, and Phase
• Click to save current view as a bitmap file.
• Click to exit to Wireline window.
• To plot the wireline analysis for the next trace use the scroll buttons .
• Click File ►Print from the drop menu to plot the current view.
• Click File ►PlotAll from the drop menu to print all views.
• Click File ►Close from the drop menu to exit to Wireline window.

Scope Drop Menu
For information about the Scope drop menu options, refer to “Scope Tab” on page 120.
Window Drop Menu
The Window drop menu options are used to locate and display iX1 Vib software windows on the monitors. Different window
configurations can be defined for various user profiles and display requirements.
Default Settings
• To apply the IX1 software windows default settings, select Window ► Default Settings.
Open
1. To open an existing user profile, select Window ► Open... from the drop menu. The Open Profile pop-up displays.
2. Select a user profile from the drop menu.
3. Click OK to apply the user profile.
Save User Profile
1. To save changes to a user profile that is currently in use, click Save.

User Manual
Save As
1. To rename an existing user profile or create a new user profile, select Window ► Save As from the drop menu. The
Save Profile pop-up displays.
2. Enter a name to rename an existing user profile or to create a new user profile.
3. Click OK to apply the changes.
Note
The previous four user profiles are listed at the bottom of the Window drop menu.
Help Drop Menu
About iX1 Vib
• Select Help ► About iX1... to display the iX1 Vib software version number.

Hot Keys
To view a list of hot keys available for use in iX1 Vib, select Help ► Hot Keys... from the drop menu.

User Manual
Toolbar
The toolbar buttons are used to perform a variety of functions including opening different elements of the iX1 Acquisition software
and linked programs. The toolbar can be displayed, moved, hidden, or docked.
Toolbar Toolbar Button

Toolbar Button Function and Description
Button Icon Name
New Create a new project database (page 52)
Open Open an existing project database (page 52)
Print Select a plotter/print and print project parameters (page 54)
Click and drag over the display area and click again to zoom into the area selected
Zoom
(page 66)
Toggle Enable/disable the Line Power (results visible under the Digital Tab) (page 69)
iX1 Map Open iX1 Map and create sub-projects (page 223)
Open Video Plot to plot, monitor and review acquired seismic records via video monitors
iX1 Video Plot
(page 519)
Open iX1 Media to transfer data to/from CD, DVD, removable drives, and/or tape cartridges
iX1 Media
(page 489)
Open iX1 ObNotes to track/produce Observer Notes and tape labels as well as import drill
iX1 ObNotes
logs (page 445)
Open Hawk Sync to transfer configuration data to TX1 and Hawk status data from Field QC
Hawk Sync
Tool to iX1 (page 99).
Source QC Open Source QC to display and analyze the PSS/PFS data (page 83).
Open Source Config to configure, send, receive and store operational parameters from VIB
Source Config
PRO HD/Vib Pro units (page 73).
PSS Retrieval Open PSS Retrieval to request the missing PSS data from the Decoders (page 98).
Open Radio Similarities to verify that all vibrators are performing similarly and within
Radio Similarities
specified limits (page 80).
Text Edit Opens reports in a simple text editor (Notepad) (page 72)
Text Print Print text files (page 56)
Form Feed Move the paper forward on the plotter (page 57)
Purge Delete all print jobs (page 57)

• Display/Hide Toolbar - Select View ►Toolbar from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Toolbar indicates it is
displaying. Click Toolbar again to remove the checkmark from the drop menu. The toolbar no longer displays. If the
toolbar is floating outside the window, click X in the upper right of the toolbar to hide. A docked toolbar does not have X
and must be hidden using the drop menu.
• Move Toolbar - Click, hold, and drag to the desired location. Release the mouse button. When the toolbar is dragged
below the program title bar, to the far left, right, or bottom edge of the window, the toolbar snaps into place on the edge
of the window and becomes a docked toolbar.
Current Error Bar
The current error bar only display the errors in the existing patch.
Multiple errors display in red. If the

Noise suppression enabled line power is off, displays as blue.
along with the value
NBE
When the Noise Burst Edit (NBE) option is enabled under Parameters ►Source Table... ► Record, NBE displays in the
current error bar. If noise is detected, NBE displays as follows:
• Channel and percentage display on a yellow background.
• If more than 10% of the samples detect noise, NBE displays in red.
Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the iX1 Vib window and displays the current activity, as well as the date and time.
• Display/Hide Status Bar - Select View ►Status Bar from the drop menu. Click on Status Bar to enable/disable the
status bar.
• If the cursor is placed over a button in the toolbar, a function description displays. Left-click to perform that function.
• If a second description displays and is highlighted cyan, right-click on the button to perform the secondary function.

User Manual
Display Tabs
There are thirteen tabs to select available by default in the iX1 Vib software. When a tab is selected, the information displays in
the Data Display section.
Note
With exception to the Digital tab, if a function is selected from the iX1 drop menu (not the tab) and a
pop-up displays, the tab no longer displays in the iX1 window until the pop-up is closed. Not all tabs
display in the iX1 window by default (specific parameters must be defined for some tabs to display).
Scope Tab
The Scope Tab opens a screen that acts as a noise and shot monitor for the current active patch. It displays the RMS amplitude
measurements for the ambient noise and an instantaneous amplitude (shot monitor) for each receiver in the patch.
Note
The Scope window can also be opened (undocked) by double-clicking the button on the Scope tab or by
selecting View > Scope from the iX1 Vib drop menu. Opening Scope as a separate window allows both
the Scope and Digital views to display simultaneously.
Data Display (page 121)
Noise Bar Graph (page 121)
Scope Properties Menu (page 121)
Scope Drop Menu (page 121)

Scope Drop Menu
• To start/stop the Scope, select Scope ►On from the drop menu (F6), or toggle (enable) (disable) on the
command line. By default, scope is disabled when the iX1 Vib is first opened.
• Click Auto Scope to activate automatic switch function from any tab opened before the shot initiation to the shot
monitor data display. When the acquired seismic data is downloaded to the system, the view automatically returns to
the original tab view.
Scope Properties Menu
• To control the scope viewer settings, select Scope ► Scope Properties (Ctrl+F6) from the drop menu, or right-click on
(enable)/ (disable). The Scope Properties window displays.
• Enable the Sensor Table Noise Limits option to use the noise threshold limit (defined under Edit ► Sensor Types►
Geophone Noise/Hydrophone Noise field in iX1 Map).
• Enable Max noise (µV) and select a maximum noise threshold. If noise exceeds the defined value, icons in the Scope
window light yellow/red indicating the noise threshold is exceeded. The noise monitor is used for ambient noise
evaluation prior taking a shot.
• In the Max shot (µV) field, select a value for the shot monitor. According to the set value the individual graph bar in the
data display changes the color from green to red depending of the measured shot energy by the sensor. The shot
monitor is used to visually evaluate the shot energy.
• In the Warning level field, select a value to define the percentage of failures allowed before the warning level on the
Noise Bar Graph lights red.
• If multiple components are defined to display in the scope, select them from the drop menu: (G = Geophone,
G/H = Geophone + Hydrophone).
• In the Auto Off field, enter a time value that defines the number of seconds the scope runs before shutting off.
Note
A cyan colored horizontal bar shows the time remaining before the scope shuts off.
• Select Smooth to level (straighten) the receiver coordinates.
• Select Actual to display the true layout view of the receiver coordinates.
Scope Value Display
• Place the cursor over an individual receiver graph bar and right-click to display the Scope Value status window.
Noise Bar Graph
The noise bar graph is an active view that displays the percentage for the total number of receivers (in the patch) that exceed the
specified noise tolerance (Sensor Table Noise Limits or Max Noise (µV) defined in Scope Properties).
• If the percentage of the total number of receivers in the patch exceed Warning Level threshold defined in Scope
Properties, the Noise Bar Graph instantly become red warning observer about the bad ambient noise conditions.

User Manual
Digital Tab
The Digital Tab opens a window that graphically displays all equipment in the active patch and illustrates the communication link
between the patch and the recorder. The icons used in the Digital window change color and shape to provide different information
about the equipment and the communications between the equipment.
Note
The Digital window is a fixed window and cannot change to a floating window.
Digital and Scope Zoom Functions
The Zoom options (including the mouse wheel utility) are only available for the Scope and Digital tabs in the iX1 Vib. If the mouse
is equipped with a wheel, roll the wheel forward to zoom in and roll backward to zoom out.
Patch + All In
• To display the current patch including devices in repeater mode in either the Digital or Scope view, select Zoom ►Patch
+ All In (Z) from the drop menu.
Patch Only
• To display the current active patch in either the Digital or Scope view, select Zoom ► Patch Only (Shift+Z) from the
drop menu.

Zoom Box
1. To allow a selected section of the Digital or Scope view to be magnified, select Zoom ► Zoom Box (Ctrl+Shift+Z) from
the drop menu or click in the toolbar. The cursor changes to .
2. Place on the section to magnify. Click, hold, and drag diagonally to outline the desired area.
3. When the area is selected, release and click the mouse button again.
UnZoom
• To return to the previous view, select Zoom ► UnZoom (U) from the drop menu.
Icon Scale
1. To increase or decrease the size of the RAM/FTU/PSU/FSU icons that display in the Digital view, select Zoom ► Icon
Scale from the drop menu.
2. In the Scale field, select a new percentage value (increments of 10) from the drop menu and click OK to change
the icon size.
Rotate
The Rotate feature rotates a project in the Digital or Scope view.
Example: If the receiver lines display diagonally, use Rotate to change to a horizontal view.
1. Click Digital tab.
2. Select Zoom ► Rotate... from the drop menu.
3. Choose one of the following options:
• Select Bearing and enter a degree to rotate.
• Select No Rotation to return the project view to its original position.
• Select To Near Axis to rotate the project view clockwise (up to 90 degrees to the closest horizontal or vertical axis).
Example: A receiver line aligned at 45 degrees rotates to horizontal.
4. Click OK to rotate.

User Manual
Digital Display Screen Legend

Device Status View
The Device Status pop-up displays device status information, device error information, and/or network status information.
The status of a specific device displays and includes the following information:
• Receiver line location
• Device number
• A or B side of a FTU
• LIU/Port number
• Status
• Serial number
• Battery level.
If a device contains system detected errors, the Device Status View also displays the following:
• Low Batteries / Critical Low Batteries
• Digital Errors
• Line configuration errors
• Missing RAM errors
• Clip errors
When the system detects a network error or warning, it automatically displays a message in the Device Status View. Information
displays as follows:
• Critical Errors - display as red text
• Warnings - display as yellow text
1. Select View ► Status View from the iX1 Vib drop menu to open the Device Status View.
2. In the Digital window, place the cursor over a RAM/FTU/PSU/FSU icon to populate the Device Status View. Or
right-click, hold, and drag the cursor. A pop-ups similar to the following appear:
Refresh
• To update the Digital view with all recent edits, select Zoom ► Refresh (F) from the drop menu.

User Manual
Text Tab
The Text Tab displays detailed information about different kind of errors in text format.
Note
The tab displays yellow when an error message occurs. Text tab displays red when transmission or line
errors occur.
The Text tab is organized into the following three sections:
• Error Messages - Displays Noise Burst Edit (NBE) information, if enabled (comp, channel, percentage).
• Clip Errors - Displays a clipping error data contained in the shot records.
• Transmit Errors - Displays a transmission error information.
Refer to the following table for additional information about the sections.
Section Field Description
File The file number in which a clip error has occurred
Comp The composite where the error occurred
Clip Errors Clip Time The time (in mS) when the clip error occurred on the shot record
RLine The receiver line number on which the clipped error occurred
Station The station number on which the clipped error occurred
Type Defines type of error
LIU The LIU that incurred the error
Rline Receiver Line number

Transmit
Errors Box
Flag Number
Location
Num Boxes The number of the affected boxes
Comp The composite that incurred the error
Error
NBE (Noise Burst Edit if enabled) comp, channel, percentage
Messages

Command Line
The command line is used to manage, monitor, and control the seismic data acquisition. The following functions can be
performed from the command line:
• Edit command lines
• Monitor the progress of the data acquisition
• Halt or abort the current shot
• Display recording parameter information
• Open and edit source types
Note
The command line is only active after a sub-project is created and saved in iX1 Map.
Refer to “Command Line Options” on page 163 to define the number of command lines to display and
the spin button actions.
Command Line Group Tabs (page 128) Acquire a Shot (page 129)
File Number (page 129) Command Line Fields (page 130)
Source Point Increment/Decrement (page 129) Edit Selected Source Type (page 131)
Font Point Size (page 129) Continuous Mode (page 132)
Toggle Scope (page 129) Plot Data (page 132)
Information Window
Each command line defines the following:
• Source line / Source point / Patches
• Fleet Number (Shooter) / Sweep Number
• Plot data output repetitiveness

User Manual
To activate any changes on the command line, click Apply (on the command line). A background color may display in specific
fields to indicate the following:
Cyan Current activity

Yellow Something has changed since the last set up
Red Something is invalid
Orange Spin to Next Not Shot is selected in the Critical Parameters
The command line displays (by default) at the bottom of the iX1 Vib window. It can also display as a Command Line tab or as a
separate pop-up.
1. To display the Command Line as a separate window, double-click the Command Line tab or select View ► Command
Line from the iX1 Vib drop menu.
2. At the top of the window, click, hold, and drag to the new location.
3. Place the cursor on any edge of the window. The cursor changes to a double-arrow.
4. Using the double-arrow cursor, click, hold, and drag the edge of window to increase the size.
5. To re-dock the command line, click X in the top right corner.
Command Line Group Tabs
The command line group tab(s) allows up to 32 command lines to be organized into a group. Up to 10 groups can be created. For
example, create and name a group tab for each shooter.
The number of groups to display in the command line is defined under Parameters ►Critical Parameters... (Command Line
Options / Command Lines) in the drop menu.
When group tabs are initially created, they are blank.
Unnamed
Group Tabs
1. To customize the name of a group tab, right-click on a tab. The Command Line Label pop-up displays.
2. Enter a name in the Label field for the group tab and click OK.
Note
The group tab order cannot be changed.

File Number
• The file box displays the file number for the current shot point. The file number advances each time a file is
acquired and cannot be reused in the same project.
Source Point Increment/Decrement
• Highlight a particular sub-command line, click (Decrement) and (Increment) to decrease/increase the shot point
number by one in the From field, regardless of the increment defined in the By field (very useful option in Slave Mode).
Font Point Size
1. To adjust the font size of the command line, click . The Font Point Size pop-up displays:
2. Select the desired font size and click OK.
Toggle Scope
• Click the Scope button or press F6 to toggle between enable and disable. Refer to “Scope Tab” on page 120
for additional information on the scope.
Acquire a Shot
• Click (Start Acquisition) or press A to start an acquisition sequence. When acquisition begins, the arrow
changes to pink .

User Manual
Command Line Fields
Source
Field Description
Type
• Indicates the sub-command line number which corresponds to the Fleet / Box number in Parameters ► Source
# Imp/Vib Table... ► Source Configuration ►Vib (Box) Configuration. When a sub-command line is disabled (the Enable
field is unchecked), the # field is yellow.
Enable Imp/Vib • Click in the Enable checkbox field to enable a sub-command line.
• The messages in the Progress field change throughout the active acquisition process to indicate the step currently in
Progress Imp/Vib
progress. A progress bar also displays in this field.
Status Imp/Vib • The Status field indicates the current status of the sub-command line.
• The Label field displays the name set in Parameters ►Source Table... ►Source Configuration ► Fleet (Box)
Label Imp/Vib
Configuration.
Encoder 1 Imp/Vib • Indicates the Encoder in use.
Box ID Imp • The Box ID field displays Decoder ID #. Click in the field and use scroll buttons to define the Box ID number.
Sweep# Vib • Define the sweep number.
Comps Vib/Imp • Shows the number of composites set in the Parameters ►Source Table...►Recording Parameters ►Record.
• If more than one source header is defined in Parameters ► Source Table... ► Source Header, select the
Src.Hdr Imp
applicable one from the select menu in the Src.Hdr field.
• The Sline (Source Line) field represents the source line number for a sub-command line. Any source line previously
created (imported) and saved in iX1 Map for the project can be entered into this field. The source line entered must
Sline Imp/Vib match the source line number defined for the project in iX1 Map.
Use a scroll buttons to set a source line from the project database.
• The From (Source Point From) field defines the next shot point. As shots are taken, the From value changes
according to increment value in the By field ensure the next shot point is loaded and displays. Any shot point
From Imp/Vib previously created (imported) and saved in iX1 Map for the project can be entered into this field.
Use a scroll buttons to set a shot point from the project database.
• The To (Source Point To) field defines the last shot point for the source line number defined in the Sline field for the
sub-command line.
• If the Use Command Line Table field is selected in Parameters ► Critical Parameters..., the word Table
To Imp/Vib
automatically displays in the To field. The Command Line Table option allows the shooting sequence to be defined
on the iX1 Map.
Use a scroll buttons to set a shot point from the project database.
The By field refers to how a shot point number increments through existing in the database shot points.
• If 0 is entered in the By field, the energy source (shot point) remains the same in the From field after the shot is
taken.
• If 1 is entered, the shot point advances to the next shot point with increment 1 on the same source line after shot is
By Imp/Vib
taken.(e.g. from SP101 to SP102).
• If 2 is entered, the shot point advances to the next shot point with increment 2 on the same source line after shot is
taken.(e.g. from SP101 to SP103).
• If N (Next) is entered, the shot point is assigned by the system according to the GPS position in the Ready message.

Source
Field Description
Type
When checked, the Lk (Lock Patch) field is used in combination with the Pat field to override the patch definition
associated with the source point (From) entered in the sub-command line.
Warning!
Lk Imp/Vib This operation is prohibited and should be used only during the test
shots, if necessary.
Enable the Lk checkbox in the command line and select a new patch number in the Pat field.
Each patch (created or imported) has association with the source point in the project database.
Note
One shot point can have only one patch assigned in the project database.
Pat Imp/Vib
The Pat field displays the patch number for the current source point (From) that is entered in the sub-command line.
After entering a source point (From), click Apply and system loads the associated patch number from the project
database to Pat field and automatically configures the active spread (can be seen in Digital tab) for the shot.
• Click Apply to implement all edits made to the Command Line, as well as configure and verify the network for
Apply acquisition.
• Click the corresponding sub-command line number located below the Apply button to update only this particular line.
Halt • To pause the acquisition, click Halt. After that the user have a choice to Resume, Redo Composite or Abort Shot.
View Selected Source Type
In the Command Line, a variety of source types can be defined for a project. The currently selected source type name displays
on the button as defined in the Parameters ► Source Table... ►Source Type # in the Label field. To view a description for the
source type, click in the Command Line. The Source Type window displays.
Note
Refer to “Source Type 1 (Vibroseis, VIB PRO HD Encoder and Decoders)” on page 193 for
procedures on editing the Source Type.

User Manual
Continuous Mode
Note
The option is available when only one fleet or shooter is defined (one sub-command line).
When enabled, the Continuous Mode option instructs the system to continue to acquire data for the specified number of shot
points at the specified interval between shots.
1. From the Command Line, click to enable Continuous mode ( = enabled / = disabled). The Continuous Mode
pop-up displays.
2. Enable the Enable ( ) checkbox.
3. In the Every (0) field, select All or a specified number of shots to acquire.
4. In the Delay [ms] [0] field, select a time interval between shots.
5. Click OK to return to the command line.
6. Start acquisition.
Plot Data
When enabled, the Plot Data feature instructs the system to automatically output recorded data in specified increments to a
plotter. For example, when Plot Data is enabled and an increment value of 2 is entered, the system automatically plots data for
every other shot record in the current command line.
1. Enable / Disable the Plot Data button in the Command Line ( = disabled / = enabled). The Plot pop-up displays.
2. Enable the Enable checkbox.

3. In the Every field, select the increment of records to plot.
4. Enter 0 in Skip Next field.
5. Click OK to return to the Command Line and click Apply.
Note
If Lock Print Every is enabled and an interval is defined under Parameters ► Critical Parameters...,
the only option in the Plot Data field of the Command Line is to enable or disable the function.
Information Window
The Information Window contains the following information:
• Recording Parameters
• Active Patch Status
• Current Sweep Definition
• GPS (PPS) Synchronization Status
• Ethernet Link Status with Encoder
A background color may display in specific fields to indicate the following:
Yellow Something has changed since the last set up

Red Something is invalid

User Manual
Drill Tab
The Drill tab displays the following:
• Line number and flag number for the current shot point (updates after every shot)
• Units of energy sources
• Depth of shot
• Size of charge
• Skid and offset of the current shot point
• Comments (as entered in ObNotes) that are associated with the shot point
• Safety Warnings displays in yellow. This feature warns the observer after Start Acquisition is initiated. The
system issues a warning message similar to following.
Note
Comments and shot information can be imported using iX1 ObNotes Import > Logs feature or single
comments may be added by entering comments into the Not Shot table in iX1 ObNotes. Refer to “Export
Drop Menu” on page 472 for information about importing and populating the Drill Log.
• To display the drill log as a separate window, select View ► Drill Log from the drop menu. or double-click to Drill tab.
When drill logs are imported from or into iX1 ObNotes, the following occurs:
• Safety warning feature is enabled
• Field under the affected shot point lights yellow
• Text contained in the comment field displays

Patch Tab
The Patch tab is read-only and displays the current active patch description for the shot point that is selected in the sub-
command line.
The output patch displays the following:
• Patch number (Shot Point) (Number of Traces)
• Receiver line description (Rline)
• Receiver flag (From and To)
• Receiver flag increment (By field)
• Trace number (Trc From and Trc To) inside the patch
• Sensor type
• Status of the trace
To display the output patch as a separate window, select View ► Patch from the drop menu or double-click to Patch tab.

User Manual
Port Monitor Tab
The Port Monitor (PortMon) tab displays the communication dialogs between devices (mostly with Source Controllers) that are
connected to the Com Port / Ethernet Port or FTU/PSU (Remote Encoder) of the Central Recording System and is generally used
to troubleshoot communication problems. Each message contains the following:
• Message number
• Time of message
• Port the message used
• Number of bytes in the message
• Message type indicator
• Message data in Hex, ASCII, or text (Details) formats
• To display the PortMon tab as a separate window, select View ► Port Monitor from the drop menu or double-click to
PortMon tab.
• Errors are indicated by color (yellow or red). A brief explanation is provided at the end of the message line.
• The running Count of messages displays in the top right corner of the Port Monitor window.
Port Monitor Actions
• Click to print the Port Monitor log.
• Click to save the Port Monitor log in text format.
• When (Toggle Scroll button) is active, the Port Monitor screen continues to scroll down after each acquisition. When
is inactive, the Port Monitor window displays the last open screen position.
• Click (Flush button) to clear message data from the Port Monitor log.
• Click (Font) button to change the font settings.
• Repeatedly press the to view the Port Monitor log as Hex (0101), ASCII (ABC), or text details.
• Click (Toggle System Message) to log the system messages.
• Click (Toggle Ethernet Message) to log the messages from VibPro / VPHD Encoders.
• Click (Monitor Com2) to log the messages from ComPort 2.

• Click (Toggle Remote Encoder Messages) to log the messages from Remote Encoder.
• Click (PPS QC Message Filter) to filter the PPS QC messages. There are three options available:
• All - to log all PPS QC Messages ($GPGGA)
• Error only - to log only errors
• per Second - to log the PPS QC Messages with pre-set time interval

User Manual
Ready Messages T
The Ready tab monitors the Ready messages that are sent to the CRS from decoders and includes the following information:
• Message number
• Message time stamp
• Port the message used
• Message type
• Fleet / Box number
• Near Shot Point
• Warnings
Note
The Ready messages display as a tab ONLY when Select Command Line, Select and Load Command
Line and Select, Load and Fire (Vibe only) are enabled under Parameters > Source Table... > Source
Type # > Vib Configuration (Ready Message Action).
To display Ready tab as a separate window, select View > Ready Messages from the drop menu or double-click to Ready tab.
Ready Messages Actions
• Click to print the Ready message log
• Click to scroll through the Ready message log
• Click (Flush button) to clear all messages from the Ready message log
• Click to change the font settings used in the Ready message log
• To delete a message, click on it to select and press the Delete on the keyboard

QC Spectrum Tab
The QC Spectrum performs the quality control (QC) of auxiliary traces (TREF and/or PTB) for every acquired shot (energy) point.
The following parameter are evaluated:
• RMS Amplitude - System compares AX PTB amplitude value from database with PTB of the current shot (correlated/
uncorrelated, impulse records) (PTB)
• QC Spectrum (Amplitude, Gain, Phase) for correlated records only (TREF)
• Timing for correlated records (TREF). Normally TREF (Pilot) signal is delayed (software delay) by 1000ms. (Refer to
Figure 10). So the center position of the autocorrelation wavelet is exactly 1000ms. Any deviations from this point more
than 10µs creates a warning message.
Figure 10 QC Spectrum Analyses
• For the QC Spectrum tab to display, define the correlation to either Pre-Stack or Post-Stack under Parameters ►
Source Table... ► Record. When Pre-Stack or Post-Stack is enabled, the QC Spectrum window automatically displays
after an acquisition.
• When QC Spectrum is opened as a separate window, a Minimize option displays. Enable Minimize checkbox to
display only the Tz (time zero), RMS and Max amplitude information.

User Manual
• Click Limits to display the Trace Limits pop-up. The trace limits are used to define the scaling, which is used to plot the
results of the raw data, amplitude spectrum, and phase spectrum.
• Select the processing window. The period of time should be centered around the
Time
correlation wavelet.
• Select the minimum and maximum frequencies.
Freq.
• The end Freq. field defaults to Fn (Nyquist) if left at 9999.
Power • Edit the scale if required.
Phase • Select the tolerance for phase variance.
• Select the sweep start and stop values to exclude the taper from calculations.
Phase Correction
Freq. Define the sweep stop and start values slightly inside the actual sweep start and
end frequencies.
Font • Use the drop menu to change the font size.
TREF • Use the drop menu to choose the auxiliary channel. TREF is a default channel.
6. Click OK to apply the trace limits and return to the QC Spectrum window.
QC Errors
If a QC error is detected, the QC Spectrum window automatically displays, and the bottom pane of the window is outlined in red.
The QC Spectrum tab also displays in red and shows the Tz (time zero) timing error.
• PTB (Time Break) timing errors are first reported in the warning window of the current sub-command line.
Note
If Pilot Sweep Source selected as Aux Trace there is no timing issue reported in QC Spectrum window
because the TREF signal is correlated with itself and timing shift is eliminated by autocorrelation
function.
• If PTB signal is missing or degraded from the reference AX PTB, the system issues QC Spectrum warning.

• If TREF (Pilot) signal is not software delayed in the Source Type# ►Recording Parameters ►Aux the system issues
the QC Spectrum warning as following.
• If Pilot Sweep Source selected as a Sweep File and there is a timing issue exist, the system reports it in the warning
window of the current sub-command line and in the QC Spectrum window.

User Manual
Plot Files Tab
Plot Files
File Select Trace Type
Plot Deck File Plot Time
Plot Deck Settings
The Plot Deck File contains plotting parameters, trace waveform type, number and length of traces to plot. The data files also
can be sorted by components or stations. Various filters, scalings, correlation and design options can be applied to data files. The
different combination of options are saved in the individual plot deck files and can be applied to selected *.sgy file for visualization
purpose.
To display the Plot Files as a separate window, select View ► Plots Files from the drop menu or double-click to Plot Files tab.
Create a New Plot Deck
1. Click New in the Plot File section. The following pop-up displays.
2. Enter the name and click OK.

Preview Data Records
1. Click on the Plot Files tab.
2. Select a data record (*.SGY file) from the list or click Browse to navigate to another folder.
3. Select a plot deck from the Plot File drop menu.
4. Enable the plot deck checkbox.
5. Click Apply. The selected data file is sent to the plotter.
For additional information on Plot Decks, refer to “Data Scaling” on page 147.
SEG-Y Viewer
All data files (production or test) that is acquired by the INOVA iX1 system is first stored on the hard drive. Data is recorded in
SEG-Y Rev 0 disk format with a *.sgy extension. The File Select section lists every file that is located in the default data directory
previously selected in Critical Parameters. The list displays the following for each file:
• Name of the data file
• Time the file was created/modified
• File size in kilobytes
• Attributes of the file (read only file (R) or archived file (A)).
View Data Files
1. From the File Select section, select a data record (*.SGY file) from the list or click Browse to view *.sgy files from
different data folders.
2. Click at the bottom of this section.
3. Click the 3200, 400, Trace Header, Trace, or Extend tab.
• 3200 tab - Displays project header information. Refer to the INOVA Disk, Tape and Tape Image Formats for
additional information.

User Manual
• 400 tab - Displays binary header information.
• Trace Header tab - Displays the individual trace header information. Use Trace scroll buttons to select the required
trace number.
• Data tab - Displays data sample information in (V / mV / µV / nV) in text format and as a plot. Plotting algorithm can
be selected from Plot drop menu, meanwhile the voltage scaling can be selected from Text drop menu for chosen
trace number.

• Extend tab - Displays the information that is prepared by the system to output into extended header of SEG-D files.
• Select 1:PSS from drop menu to display the PSS information from the source controller. The information can
be viewed in the HEX, ASCII or TEXT (Details) formats.
• Select 2:SEG-D Header to view the SEG-D header information in HEX format..
• To copy the data, select (highlight) the required amount in the Extend tab (only) and click or select Edit
► Copy from the drop menu.
• To print the highlighted data, click or select File ► Print from the drop menu (Extend tab only).
Delete Data Files
1. To delete *.SGY files from the hard disk, select a file to delete from the File Select list and click at the
bottom of the window. The Delete file pop-up displays.
2. Click Yes to delete the file. If the selected file has not been saved to media (attribute AR), a second confirm delete
window displays.
3. Click No to delete the selected file or click Yes to return to the Plot Files tab.

User Manual
Maximum Files to List
1. Click to select the amount of data files in the File Select list. The following pop-up displays.
2. Use Maximum files to list scroll buttons to select the amount of the records in the list.
• Select All Files to list all files
• Select any number to list the latest acquired number of files
• Enable option List files with selected swath ID and select Source swath ID from drop menu to list the files for
selected swath ID in conjunction with Maximum files to list.
3. Click OK to close the window. The changes to .

Data Scaling
Different forms of scaling algorithms can be applied to adjust data amplitudes. The tab name depends on the Data Scaling
selected. For additional information on Data Scaling tabs, refer to “iX1 Video Plot” on page 519
AGC* scales the amplitude of a seismic signal (with decreasing strength over time), enabling a
visual examination of both strong and weak data samples. AGC automatically varies the gain
applied to a trace sample as a function of the mean amplitude of an AGC window about that
sample. For every sample, the scale factor is calculated as the inverse of the mean amplitude of the
AGC sliding window. Thus, the larger the amplitude of the samples within the AGC window, the
smaller the scale factor applied to the center sample of this window.
The Throw option is only available for AGC and AGC Threshold when Aux Gain is enabled.
AGC Threshold* scaling compensates the amplitude of a seismic signal with decreasing strength
over time, which enables a visual examination of data at any point along a trace and causes AGC to
trip at the threshold specified.
*All traces are scaled and balanced independently based on their own signal strength and
system desired amplitude, which is why a simple comparison of signal strength between
traces is not possible.
Exponential scaling applies a time-variant gain (exponential) function to traces to compensate for
a loss of amplitude over time. Unlike AGC Scaling, Exponential Scaling applies the same scale
values to all traces after the defined Limit time, which allows for a simple comparison of traces.
Fixed scaling is used to show a true representation of relative signal strength by applying a
specified gain value to each data sample. The amplitude is first scaled by the value defined in the
Fixed gain window and then rescaled according to the value populated in the Throw window.
Linear scaling is used when it is assumed that the signal strength is decreasing linearly with time.
The first sample is scaled by the Initial Gain, and then the gain is increased linearly by the slope
(dB/Sec). As in the earlier scaling methods, the traces then are rescaled according to the value in
the Throw window.

User Manual
Data Analysis
The options under the Data Analysis tab can be used on any trace of the selected record.
To analyze a correlation wavelet, the analysis window must be centered on the peak of the wavelet. The more samples available
on each side of the peak, the more accurate the analysis. Defining a delay for the TREF (Pilot) trace under Parameters ►
Source Table... ►Recording Parameters► Aux allows to display and analyze both sides of the wavelet.
Example: A delay of 100 mS moves the center of correlation wavelet to 100 mS, permitting to set an analyses window from 0 to
200 mS. Normally, the pilot trace delay is set to 1000 mS, and the analysis window from 0 to 2000 mS.
• Preview - Opens the selected file in the spectrum analyses window
• Preview Last - Opens the previously selected file in the spectrum analyses window
• Save - Saves the Data Analyses tab settings.
• Plot - Outputs the spectrum analyses data for the selected record to plotter
Note
Refer to “Spectrum Analysis Views” on page 113 for additional information.

Correlation Wavelet Analyses
1. Select (highlight) a record (*.SGY) in File Select section.
2. Specify traces and time window in the Input section.
3. Select required plots (Plot section) and enter a plot parameters (Plot Parameters section).
4. Click . Depending on the recorded data a similar Data Analysis screen displays.The name of data
record displays at the bottom of the window.
5. Click the Raw, Amp, Phase, or All tab.
6. Click Save Image. The following window popup.
7. Click Save to create a *.bmp file for the current record. The file is saved in the doc/Images folder of the project.
8. Enable/disable the Horiz checkbox to change the view orientation.
9. Click Close to return to Data Analyses window.

User Manual
Trace Shift Analyses
1. Enable any 2 traces in the Input section.
2. Click Cumulate to output the traces to the same Raw screen.
3. Evaluate the traces. See example below.
Ambient Noise Analyses
Ambient noise analyses can be done after acquisition of the noise (dummy) record.
1. Select the number of traces to evaluate in the From / To fields (Input section) as shown below.
2. Select the time window (ms).
3. Enable Cumulate option.
4. Click Preview. See example below.

Line Alerts Tab
The system reports the following type of line errors in the Line Alert tab.
• Low Battery Voltage (G3i / Hawk)
• Critical Battery Voltage (G3i / Hawk)
• Transmission Pairs Errors
The Low and Critical Battery Voltage thresholds are set in the Critical Parameters separately for G3i and Hawk field units.
When the battery voltage for a device reaches or falls below the Low Battery Voltage Warning tolerance, the Line Alerts tab in
iX1 Vib turns yellow and the serial number of the affected PSU or FTU appears beside the message.The locations of the affected
device will also be indicated with a yellow flag on the Digital display tab.
Once the battery voltage reaches or falls below the Critical Battery Voltage Warning, the Line Alerts tab in iX1 Vib turns red
and the serial number of the affected PSU or FTU appears beside the message.The locations of the affected device will also be
indicated with a red flag on the Digital display tab.
Note
A critical battery warning does not prevent data acquisition.

User Manual
Every time during the line cuts or due to electromagnetic interference the system automatically disables the transmission pairs in
the cable network and reports it in the Line Alert tab.
To view the Line Alerts tab as a separate window, select View ► Line Alerts from the drop menu or double-click on the Line
Alerts tab.
Remote Encoder Tab
The Remote Encoder operation enables crews to perform downline shooting in areas where radio communication cannot be
achieved from the recording truck directly. The CRS works in conjunction with remotely located encoders to establish exact and
continuous radio communications with the decoders.
The encoders connect to any FTU/PSU via the battery/communications port and can be positioned anywhere within the spread.
Note
The remote encoder option is only compatible with ShotPro II / BB3 encoders and decoders.
Once connected and powered on, the CRS detects a Remote Encoder and establishes communication with it. The detected
location displays on the Remote Encoder tab in iX1 Vib.
Hawk Schedule Tab
The Hawk Schedule tab shows the current GPS time (UTC) and scheduled Initial Wakeup Time, Daily Wakeup Time and
Daily BITs Time specified in the “Hawk Config” on page 68.

Chapter 4
Project Parameters
Project Parameters
Project Files
iX1 software is primarily used to manage the data (including seismic records) that is collected during acquisition of a seismic
survey. This is referred to as a “project”. A unique database (using SQL) is automatically created for each project. All executables
gather/deposit/use information from/into the database.
In addition, several of the parameter windows provide the information that is used for the following:
• SEG-Y and SEG-D headers
• SPS headers
• Observer Report headers
During acquisition, a file number is automatically produced to identify a seismic or test records. Once recorded, a file number
cannot be re-used inside the same project.
When a new project is first created, a sequence of parameter windows automatically display. In each parameter window, different
options should be enabled/disabled and/or parameters should be entered to define the interface Encoder-to-Recorder, recording
parameters and so on.
Note
When a project is first created, it is possible to move forward and backward through the sequence of
windows, but the sequence cannot be exited until all the parameter windows display. After the project is
created, some parameters can be filled/modified.
Create a New Project
1. From iX1 Acquisition, select File > New (Ctrl+N) from the drop menu or click on the toolbar. The Project Name
pop-up displays.
2. Enter a new project name (16 character maximum, no spaces or special characters) and click OK.
3. Click or to navigate among the displayed parameter windows.

User Manual
4. When all of the parameter windows/pop-ups are completed, the Source Type window (last window) displays. Click
. The iX1 Map automatically opens and the following pop-up displays.
5. Enter a new sub-project name using 16 characters (maximum) without spaces or special characters.
6. Click OK to complete the creation of a new project.
Defining Project Parameter
Note
The windows used to create a project are the same windows used to edit parameters. During the creation
of a project, parameter windows automatically display and the Previous/Next buttons are used to move
between windows.
When editing an existing project, click Parameters and select the option from the list in iX1 Vib.
Parameters are defined for a project to perform acquisition functions such as shooting, testing, reporting, and other tasks specific
to the current job. Some parameters have default settings and some remain in fields without automatic clearing. It is imperative
that each window is edited/reviewed to ensure parameters are correct.
Additionally, data that is entered/selected in parameter fields is also used for other applications such as Map, ObNotes, Media,
and Video Plot.
There are four project parameter windows located under the Parameters drop menu in the iX1 Vib:
• Project Header - Defines the GPS survey data as well as general project information used in post-production reports.
• Critical Parameters - Defines how project data is acquired and stored.
• Encoder and Communications - Enables and identifies encoders, decoders, communication devices, and vehicle
tracking devices.
• Source Table - Defines the source type parameters (Vibrator, Explosive, Gun, or Other).

Chapter 4 Project Parameters
Project Header
Project header parameters consist of six sections that define general and survey information for a project. The information
entered is used in post-production SPS files, as well as other reports and functions within the iX1 software. Entering detailed and
complete information ensures easy identification of the project.
• To edit project headers, select Parameters > Project Header... from the iX1 Vib drop menu. The Project Header
window displays.
Project Information
• Enter the project-specific information in this section as supplied by the client.
Crew Information
• Enter information pertaining to the crew in this section.
Miscellaneous
• Project ID is unique project identification number. Hybrid and Nodal systems use a unique Project ID to provide an
extra layer of protection when operating and working with seismic data. The TX1 software download data that only
contain a matching Project ID.
Note
The Project ID field is grayed out (unaccessible) after creation of the project.

User Manual
• Serial Number refers to the serial number of the SPM.
• Click the ▼ beside the drop-down menu of Media Type to select the recording media for the project.
Acquisition Geometry
1. In the Project Style drop list, select the type of project. Depending upon the project style selected, one of the following
windows display.
Note
3D and Swath style descriptions have the same fields.
2. Select the Grid Units from the list (Meters / Feet / Feet US). These are used in the survey to correctly display the
proper units of measure in iX1 Map.
Note
The Grid Units field is grayed out (unaccessible) after creation of the project.
Note
Patch and geometry information entered here does not affect how the actual coordinates and patches
are built.

GPS
If using the source enabled GPS receivers or vehicle tracking, the Survey Coordinate System of the imported coordinates must
be known and correctly selected.
1. To select a survey coordinate system, click beside Survey Coordinate System. The following window
displays. Enter a name or EPSG code (if known) and click Search.
2. Select a coordinate system from the list.
3. Click View Details. The follow windowing pop-up.
4. Click Close to exit to the previous window.

User Manual
5. Once the appropriate coordinate system has been selected, click Next. The following window displays.
6. Define Geographic Transformation
• A geographic transformation is required to convert from WGS 84 GPS coordinates (Latitude/Longitude) to local
coordinates (Easting/Northing).
Important!
Important!
Unless a unique datum shift method is specified by the surveyors, the Transformation window should
maintain the default settings. Consult with a survey contractor before selecting a different data shift
method.
• The default transformation should be used for all datum grid shift transformations, such as NAD27 and NAD83.
7. Click Next. The Test Point window displays.
8. Enter a geographic coordinates of any receiver or shot point into Input section. Use one of the following formats:
• 020°00’00.000”N
• 020d00’00.000”N
• 020 00 00.000 N
• 20.000 N
9. Enter a local coordinates for the same point into Expected section.
10. Click Transform Coordinates. The system calculates the coordinates using the transformation settings in the
previous window and compares it with local coordinates set in the Expected section. Click Save to exit.

Calculated COG to Tape
The GPS Source Location to File Headers (Calculated COG if Fleet) option is available once Survey Coordinate System is
selected. When this option is enabled, source array positional information is used to calculate a source array center of gravity
(COG), which is recorded to SEG-Y and SEG-D disk and tape file headers as well as the project database.
The iX1 software calculates datum conversions using the EPSG Geodetic Parameter Dataset. The system assumes it receives
coordinate information from encoders and decoders in WGS 84 format. The data of the surveyed coordinates are often different
from the datum used for the coordinates that the SPM receives from the decoders through Recording truck Interface (RTI). For
the software to correctly display the locations of sources and other vehicles being tracked, the GPS message strings are
converted into the same survey datum of the imported project coordinates.
When the GPS Source Location to File Headers (Calculated COG if Fleet) option is selected, positional data received from
the source control system over the RS232 or Ethernet interface is used to calculate an estimated COG and elevation of the
source array.
Source positional information is normally received in a $GPGGA message string with the position in Geodetic (Lat / Long) format
with GPS status information (number of satellites, GPS quality, and HDOP value) included in the message.
• Enable the GPS Source Location to File Headers (Calculated COG if Fleet) checkbox. Click Accept and then click
Close to activate the option.
• Define source array groups (fleets) and the vibe units within the fleets which have GPS enabled. Only actual received
GPS position messages are used to calculate COG, no theoretical source positions can be defined or used.
• Define GPS quality tolerances (Min. Quality, Min. Satellites, and Max. HDOP). These QC tolerances are stored in
the project database with the raw data. The user specifies a Must Pass tolerance for the number of composites of a
Vibration Point (VP), which must have acceptable GPS quality for each unit (minimum 1).
• Define maximum offset threshold from source point (imported coordinates) to individual vibrator and for
CCOG . The system uses position tolerances to control the individual vibrator offset and COG position (as
established in the Source Type ► Vib Configuration). The software gives the warning to observer about position
tolerance violation after every composite until it meets Must Pass criteria. If observer accepts the message, the vibrator
or COG position is considered valid.
• Must Pass parameter depends on the vibroseis array configuration. The array may be used in standing pattern
or can be moved up (dragged) over a predetermined distance about the source point.
• If source array is “standing array” it is enough to receive at least 1 acceptable GPGGA message from every unit to
properly calculate the Fleet COG. For “dragged array” all position messages must pass the GPS quality tolerances.

User Manual
The iX1 software uses the selected geodetic conversion to calculate an X,Y, Z position for each unit for each composite recorded.
Each raw GPS message as well as the converted position is recorded to the database along with the GPS quality values and QC
tolerances.
At the end of the VP an average X,Y,Z position is calculated for each unit using the individual messages that meet the specified
QC tolerances. The average unit position and elevation is recorded to the database.
A COG position and elevation is then calculated from the units average X,Y,Z positions. This Calculated COG (CCOG) and
elevation is recorded to the database and to the SEG-Y and SEG-D tape headers.
In the event that no valid or acceptable position messages are received from one or more units, a COG still calculated and
recorded. However, an error condition is set and recorded to the database and displays under system comments in the ObNotes
program.
Note
In this situation (no valid or acceptable message) the software gives multiple warnings to the
operator prior to the end of the shot.
For internal SEG-Y files and SEG-Y Rev.0 tape and tape image files, the calculated COG is recorded in the following bytes of the
240 byte trace headers:
• 45-48 (average COG Elevation)
• 73-76 (X coordinate)
• 77-80 (Y coordinate)
For SEG-D Rev.2 tape and tape image files the calculated COG and average position for each unit is recorded in the extended
header as an ASCII string. The calculated COG will also be recorded in the SEG-D external file header in the following bytes:
• 22-25 (average COG Elevation)
• 14-17 (X coordinate)
• 18-21 (Y coordinate)
If SPS files are exported from the system, the source point position in the *.S01 file is updated with the calculated COG and
elevation. The average unit positions and calculated COG may also be exported to an Excel document from the ObNotes
program.
Survey
• In the Min GPS Quality field, select the minimum acceptable quality of the GPS signal. Select one of the following:
Quality Description
0: Invalid No GPS quality is expected
1: GPS Fix GPS quality is expected (default)
2: DGPS Fix (Differential GPS) quality is expected
4: RTK Fix RTK (Real Time Kinematic) quality is expected
5: Float RTK Float (or Flying) RTK quality is expected
9: WAAS Fix WAAS (Wide Area Augmentation System) quality is expected

• In the Min GPS Satellites field, select the minimum number of satellites tolerance. Default value is 5.
• In the Max GPS HDOP (Horizontal Dilution of Precision) field, select a valid number. Default value is 2.
The signal from GPS satellites has a fixed precision. When visible GPS satellites are close together in the sky, the geometry is
said to be weak and the DOP value is high; when far apart, the geometry is strong and the DOP value is low. Thus a low DOP
value represents a better GPS positional precision due to the wider angular separation between the satellites used to calculate a
GPS unit's position.
Critical Parameters
Important!
Important!
It is imperative to acquisition that the critical parameters be correct and complete.
1. From the iX1 Vib window, select Parameters > Critical Parameters... from the drop menu. The Critical Parameters
window displays.
Recording Options
High Cut Filter
Select a High Cut Filter (Sample Rate) from the drop menu according to the production parameters list from the client.

User Manual
Output Media Format
The Output Media Format option defines what format is used to output data to the selected media. The iX1 software records the
seismic/test data in SEG-Y Rev. 0 disk format to the primary hard drive first. Then iX1 Media converts the SEG-Y Rev.0 disk
format data files from the hard disk and outputs to the selected in either SEG-Y Rev.0 or SEG-D tape format.
Refer to the INOVA Disk, Tape and Tape Image Formats User Manual for detailed information.
Next Data File Number
The iX1 software assigns a file number to each data record and automatically increments the file number by one with each
successive seismic data record. The number that displays in the Next Data File Number field is the number assigned to the first
data record for the project. The default value for the first data record in a project is 1.
Note
The iX1 software reserves file numbers 1 through 1,000,000 for seismic data records. File numbers
cannot be reused in the same project.
Next Test File Number
To differentiate test files from data files, a unique file counter can be assigned to test files. As files 1 through 1,000,000 are
reserved, enter any number from 1,000,001 and 9,999,999 as the test start file number for the project.
• To assign the next sequential data record number to a test file, enter any number between 1,000,0001 and 9,999,999 in
the Next Test File Number field.
Output Data Path / Sub Path
Output Data Path displays the storage location of all data files. All of the possible Output Data Paths are provided in the drop
menu. The data path is typically F:\G3DATA\projectname directory. If a sub directory is required, enable the Sub Path box and
enter the name. Data is written to the Output Data Path folder in SEG-Y Rev 0 (MS-DOS) disk format.
Reverse Data Polarity
If Reverse Data Polarity is enabled, the system applies mathematical functions to the acquired data to change it to SEG or
normal polarity prior to creating a seismic record.
Important!
Important!
Only use this option if all geophone groups or cables were made with reverse polarity. The reverse data
polarity function does not apply to auxiliary channels.
Note
The Reverse Data Polarity field is grayed out (unaccessible) after creation of the project.

Low Battery Voltage Warnings
This value sets the system warning level to indicate one or more batteries that have reached a low level and should be in the
process of being replaced.
When the battery voltage for a device reaches or falls below the Low Battery Voltage Warning tolerance, the Line Alerts tab in
iX1 Vib turns yellow and the serial number of the affected PSU or FTU appears beside the message.
The locations of the affected device including FSU will also be indicated with a yellow flag on the Digital display tab and reported
in the iX1 Map.
Critical Battery Voltage Warnings
This value sets the system warning level as critical to upcoming acquisition and battery should be replaced immediately.
Once the battery voltage reaches or falls below the Critical Battery Voltage Warning, the Line Alerts tab in Acquisition turns red
and the serial number of the affected PSU or FTU appears beside the message.
The locations of the affected device including FSU will also be indicated with a red flag on the Digital display tab and reported in
the iX1 Map.
Note
A critical battery warning will not prevent data acquisition.
Editor
Notepad is the default text editing program for iX1 software. For additional information, refer to “Notepad” page 72.
Test Results to Trace Headers
Enable Test Results to Trace Header option to output the last test results acquired in iX1 Map such as sensor resistance, pulse
variance, and leakage to 240 byte header (SEG-Y) and trace header extension block 3 (SEG-D).
Refer to INOVA Disk, Tape and Tape Image Formats document on installation CD.
Command Line Options
The Command Line Options are used to enable functions in the Command Line to effectively manage the current acquisition.
Command Line Groups
iX1 software can display up to ten groups (tabs) in the command line.
• Each command line group can have a different source type.
• All sub-command lines in a group are assigned to the same source type.

User Manual
Display Label
Enabled Display Label option allows the user to create a label for the command line group tab.
Source Line “By” Field
Enabled Source Line “By” Field option adds “Line By” column to the command lines. This function automatically loads next
source line number by increment specified in this column after finishing the current line.
Use Shot Point Table
Enabled Use Shot Point Table option allows the user to create in iX1 Map a list of shot points which are loaded to command line
in the order they were created.
Shot Point Spin Button Actions
• Spin to Next SP - Rolls the next shot point to the next sequential shot point that is available on the current source line.
• Spin to Next Not Shot - Rolls the next shot point to the next sequential shot point that is available, which was not
previously acquired on the current source line. This functionality is used primarily in TZ or marine operations.
Plotting Options
Lock Print Every
The Lock Print Every option defines the default increment in which records are plotted during acquisition. For example, when
Lock Print Every is enabled and 2 is selected, every second record is plotted across all sub-command lines.
1. To define and enable the Lock Print Every option, enable the Lock Print Every checkbox.
2. Select an increment value to plot shot records.
3. Ensure (Plot Data button) in the abbreviated Command Line is green (enabled).
4. To disable the Lock Print Every option, click (Plot Data button) in the abbreviated Command Line. From the
Command Line tab, disable (clear) the Plot checkbox to disable both the Plot Interval and Lock Print Every option.
Note
When Lock Print Every option is enabled under Parameters > Critical Parameters..., the Plot Interval
cannot be defined from the Command Line.
Print Headers
The Print Headers option prints a banner (textual shot information) for each shot record using a new patch definition. When
multiple shots are acquired using the same patch definition, the banner prints a patch definition only for the first acquired shot.
• To enable the Redundant Banners and/or Patch Definitions options, enable the Print Headers checkbox.

• Enable the Redundant Banners checkbox to print a banner for each shot record, regardless of the patch
definition.
• Enable the Patch Definitions checkbox to print a textual patch definition.

User Manual
Encoder and Communications
The iX1 software supports:
• Different brands of shooting systems
• Multiple communication ports (serial, Ethernet) depending upon the SPM version and installed accessories
• Different Recording Truck Interface (RTI) protocols
• Additional communication devices
• Different vehicle tracking protocols
Figure 1. VPHD Encoder and Communications Setup
Encoders
1. To define an Encoder, select Parameters > Encoders and Communications... from the iX1 Vib drop menu. The
Encoder and Communications window displays.
2. Select the Manufacturer from the drop list.
3. Choose the Model from the drop list.

4. Select Harness Rev. according to the label attached to the interface cable (harness) which interconnects Encoder
1 and SPM.
5. The following fields automatically populate:
• Closure Type / Remote I/P / Time Break I/P
6. Physically identify which Fiber Port (FB#) is connected to Aux. FTU1 and set it in the Aux 1 Port field (Auxiliary
section).
7. If more than 4 auxiliary channels must be recorded, activate Enable Additional Aux option. Use CBL13002 to
interconnect additional Aux.FTU with Aux.FTU1.
RTI Protocol (Recording Truck Interface)
Important!
Important!
The RTI protocol settings depends on the manufacturer and model. Specially designed by INOVA
interface harness should be used. Please contact INOVA Customer Support Team to clarify the settings.
• Select Decoder model from the list. More than one decoder can be selected.
• RTI Communication port should be selected according to the wiring diagram. Set Baud Rate specified in the
manufacturer’s specifications.
• Activate Enable GPS/PPS Trim option for HPVS, Microseismic and for Hybrid and Nodal Systems. In this case the
system clock is synchronized by GPS/PPS pulses.
• Enable the Pulse Per Second Quality Control (PPS QC) checkbox to initiate the control of GPGGA messages during
acquisition.
• Enable 8ms Boundary Verify option to monitor if Time Break (zero time of the record) coincides with seismic data
samples.
Communication Devices
Additional communication devices can be used in parallel with RTI communication.
Vehicle Tracking
Should a contractor wish to enable the Vehicle Tracking option, 3rd party hardware is readily available. Every vehicle or member
of the crew to be monitored requires a GPS receiver and means to transmit the position to the recorder over radio. A radio at the
CRS need to be set-up independent of the radio to be used for source control.
The CRS vehicle tracking radio receives the GPS messages and outputs this data string to SPM serial comport. After that the
GPS string is received by the system and converted to the imported datum. The vehicle position can be viewed in iX1 Map and a
history file for each Unit ID is logged into GPS database.

User Manual
Remote Encoder
The Remote Encoder operation enables crews to perform downline shooting in areas where radio communication cannot be
achieved from the recording truck directly. The CRS works in conjunction with remotely located encoders to establish exact and
continuous radio communications with the decoders.
The encoders can be connect to any FTU/PSU via the battery/communications port and can be positioned anywhere within the
spread.
Note
Currently Remote Encoder option is compatible with ShotPro II / BB3 encoders and decoders.
Once connected and powered on, the CRS detects the Remote Encoder and establishes communication with it. The detected
location displays on the Remote Encoder tab in iX1 Vib.
The Remote Encoder must be in the Fire menu. If communication between G3i HD CRS and the Remote Encoder is established,
the High Voltage LEDs flash green (if not, they flash red).
Note
If communication is interrupted for approximately 12 seconds, the LEDs will flash red again.
A normal Encoder-Decoder operation can begin.
• The Remote Encoder receives a Ready message from decoder through the radio or wireline link and transfers it to the
Recording Truck via the G3i HD ground electronics network.

Right click the Command Line and then left click the Flush Ready Message popup
to reset Decoder-Command Line association.
• When a shot is ready to be performed, the G3i HD system sends a Start Code message to the Remote Encoder,
associated with this shot point. The linked FTU/PSU then issues a hardware switch closure, which triggers the Remote
Encoder.
• After receiving a PFS message, the Remote Encoder sends all information back to the Recording Truck.
There are two setup modes:
• “Test Mode Acquisition” page 179
• “Acquisition Mode Setup” page 182

User Manual
Shot Pro II Remote Encoder Parameters
Profile Field Value
UNIT# 1
CREW# 1*
Dec / Enc ENC
Job Profile Enc Type RemEnc
Mstr / Slv OFF
Rcdr SEQ OFF
PASSWORD OFF
START CODE 1***
START Dly 560µs**
ENCODER Dly 1000ms**
Rad Ref Dly 800µs**

Radio
READY TONE MSG
PFS DATA ON
MICPolarity NORM
SPKRPolarity NORM
AutoArm ON
UHdispTime 2S
REMOTE FIRE ON
Hardware
DefaultPar OFF
Setup
CONTROL MODE Blstr
GPS Ref Stat Int
GPS Cor Tx ExtMdm
• * CREW# must be set to 1.
• ** Default Parameters. Must be the same for all units (encoders).
• *** START CODE must be the same for all units (encoders and decoders).

Shot Pro II Truck Encoder Parameters
Profile Field Value
UNIT# 1
CREW# 1*
Dec / Enc ENC
Job Profile Enc Type SHPRO
Mstr / Slv OFF
RTI Type ARAM
PASSWORD OFF
START CODE 1***
START Dly 560µs**
ENCODER Dly 1000ms**
Rad Ref Dly 800µs**

Radio
READY TONE MSG
PFS DATA ON
MICPolarity NORM
SPKRPolarity NORM
AutoArm ON
UHdispTime 2S
REMOTE FIRE ON
Hardware
DefaultPar OFF
Setup
CONTROL MODE Blstr
GPS Ref Stat Int
GPS Cor Tx ExtMdm
• ** Default Parameters. Must be the same for all units (encoders).
• *** START CODE must be the same for all units (encoders and decoders).

User Manual
Shot Pro II Decoder Parameters
Profile Field Value
FLAG# 01010140****
UNIT# 2***
CREW# 1*
Job Profile Dec/Enc DEC
CommMode SHOTPRO
ARM MODE RemEnc
PASSWORD OFF
START CODE 1**
DECODER Dly 0µs
BAUD RATE HIGH
Radio READY TONE HIGH
PFS DATA ON
MICPolarity NORM
SPKRPolarity NORM
AutoOff OFF
UHdispTime 5sec
REMOTE FIRE OFF

Hardware
DefaultPar OFF
Setup
CONTROL MODE Blstr
GPS MODE IntGPS
GPS Corr RX IntMdm
• ** START CODE must be the same for all units (encoders and decoders).
• *** UNIT# must be different for all decoders.
• **** FLAG# must be entered according to the shot point position (manually enter the Line and Shot Point
values). The iX1 system uses this data (comes with a Decoder Ready message) to pre-load command line and
sets a shot point number for the upcoming shot.

iX1 Software Setup
1. From the iX1 Vib drop menu, select Parameters > Encoder and Communications.
2. Click the Encoder1 tab.
3. From the drop menus, select the following:
• Manufacturer field - select INOVA
• Model field - select ShotPro II
• Harness field - select 1.00
4. In the Decoder field, enable ShotPro II.
5. Select the Remote Shot Pro II Encoder tab.
6. Click to enable the following check boxes:
• Enable Remote Encoder
• Enable Hardware Fire - Time Zero Validation Only (triggers the Truck Encoder)*
*Enable this function to setup test mode acquisition only. Disable it when recording production shots.

User Manual
Test Mode Acquisition Setup (Time Zero Validation)
G3i Remote Encoder Cable

SFL30061
B A
AUX FTU 100-10205(RE)
Remote
Encoder
Remote Encoder
Line Adapter
SFL30062
100-10205(D)
Decoder
Remote Encoder
Line Adapter
SFL30062
B A
FTU RAM RAM
Inside the recorder:
• Connect the G3i Remote Encoder Cable (SFL30061) to the AUX FTU battery/communication port.
• Connect the Shot Pro II Decoder Cable (100-10205(RE)) to the G3i Remote Encoder Cable (SFL300061) and the
Remote Encoder.
• Connect the Remote Encoder Line Adapter (SFL30062) to the B-port of AUX FTU.
• Connect the BNC connector on cable 100-10205(RE) to the Remote Encoder Line Adapter (SFL300062) (PTB RE).
• Power off the radio used with the Truck Encoder.
On the line:
• Connect the Remote Encoder Line Adapter (SFL30062) to the RAM (away side).
• Connect the BNC connector on cable 100-10205(D) to the Remote Encoder Line Adapter (SFL300062) (PTB D).

1. From the iX1 drop menu, select Parameters > Source Table or click in the command line.
2. Select the Source Type 1 tab.
3. In the Type field, select Explosive.
4. In the Encoders field, select Remote Encoder (ShotProII).
5. Select the Recording Parameters tab.
6. Select the Aux tab.
Note
The Enable Hardware Fire - Time Zero Validation check box must be enabled on the Encoder and
Communications window, otherwise the Aux check boxes are grayed out.
7. Enable two check boxes (PTB and TMNG) in the Aux column.
8. Select the Src Ctrl tab and click to display the AX window.

User Manual
9. The Analog Statistics section currently displays zero values and will be updated after data is acquired.
10. Click to start the measurements. A progress bar displays.
11. Measured values display in the Analog Statistics section and in the Time Break at field in the Acquire section
12. Connect each Remote Encoder as Truck Encoder and perform AX time acquisition (click Acquire). Collect Time
Break at values for all encoders and calculate an average AX time delay.
13. Click to close the AX window.

14. Enter the calculated average AX time value into Internal Start + field.
15. Select the Record tab.
16. Enter the values for the Record Length and the Preamp Gain to be used.
17. Select the Source Configuration > Box Configuration tab.
18. In the RTI Configuration section, define the following:
• In the Number of Boxes field, select the number of decoders being used.

User Manual
• Enable the No Status, No Fire, No Uphole, and Wrong ID checkboxes.
• Enable the All Same checkbox.
Depending upon the location association, perform one of the following options:
• If decoders are sending GPS positions, enable the GPS checkbox.
• If decoders are sending line and flag locations, disable the GPS checkbox.
19. In iX1 Vib, select the Remote Encoder tab. Verify the Remote Encoder is attached to AUX FTU.

Test Mode Acquisition
1. In iX1 MAP build a simple test project.
2. Create one channel patch for the decoder’s channel that is connected to the RAM via the Remote Encoder Line
Adapter (SFL30062).
3. Arm both Truck and Remote Encoders (press twice).
4. On the decoder:
• Enter the flag number in the JOB PROFILE menu.
• Depress and hold the CHARGE button.
• When charged, also press and hold the FIRE button.

User Manual
5. The decoder sends a ready message to G3i HD CRS (via Remote Encoder) that contains Box ID and flag number,
according to this information system pre-loads appropriate sub-command line and shot point.
The information also displays in the Ready Msg window.
6. Verify a proper patch is assigned or lock this shot point to the patch that was previously created for the test purpose.
7. In iX1 Vib, click to acquire the shot. The following popup displays.
Important!
Important!
If Enable Hardware Fire - Time Zero Validation Only is not disabled prior to normal acquisition, the
above popup displays before every shot.
8. Click to fire a test shot.

9. From iX1 Vib side toolbar, click to open the iX1 Video Plot window.
10. Display the last file acquired and click in the top toolbar to display the following view.
PTB Truck PTB RE PTB D
Zero Time
11. Ensure Trace1 (PTB Truck), Trace2 (PTB RE) and Trace5 (PTB D) start at the same time (Zero Time).
Note
In this example all traces are delayed relatively to the start time.
12. If there is no delay, the section of the rising edge of PTB pulses are not displayed, where upon a comparison of the
peaks can be done instead..
Zero Time
PTB Truck PTB RE PTB D

PTB System DECO System
13. Evaluate start time accuracy of all remote encoders and decoders against the Truck Encoder.

User Manual
Acquisition Mode Setup
After completing the Zero-time validation procedure, layout the equipment for acquisition mode. Refer to the following illustration.
1. Position each Remote Encoder next to an FTU/PSU anywhere within the spread.
2. Connect a Shot Pro II Decoder Cable (100-10205) to Remote Encoder and G3i Remote Encoder Cable
(SFL30061).
3. Connect a G3i Remote Encoder Cable (SFL30061) to the neighboring FTU/PSU.
4. Power off the Truck Encoder or setup the Remote Encoder inside the truck.
5. In iX1 software, complete the following:
• Disable option Enable Hardware Fire-Time Zero Validation in the Encoders and Communication menu.
• Configure the system for production acquisition:
• Critical Parameters (High Cut Filter (Sample Rate))
• Recording Parameters > Record (Record Length, Preamp Gain)
Warning!
Never change the average AX time delay in the Internal Start + field after Zero Time Validation is
complete.
6. Perform normal acquisition operations. In the multiple decoder operation, it is very important to enter a proper
FLAG# in the JOB PROFILE menu or properly acquire GPS position for upcoming shot point before arming the

decoder. According to this information, the iX1 system automatically configures a command line to shoot and the
observer is unable to change the shot point number after that.
Auxiliary Channels
In the Remote Encoder mode, the iX1 system creates two auxiliary traces, PTB and DECO.
• PTB auxiliary trace contains four pulses at time zero, at 1000ms,1500ms and 2000ms.
• DECO auxiliary trace contains three pulses (if uphole time is received from decoder) at 1000ms,1500ms and
2000ms+uphole time.
UPH=20ms

User Manual
Sensor Types
The Sensor Table is used to specify the types of sensors used in acquisition. iX1 Map uses the manufacturer’s specification data
(that is entered in the Sensor Table) to test the receiver point sensors. Tolerances defined within the receiver parameters are
applied to the tests to easily identify equipment that is out of specification. It is important to correctly document the type of sensors
that is used during acquisition. Once defined, the sensor specifications are carried forward from project to project.
Note
Environmental conditions affect sensors. For this reason the median values are used to evaluate the
sensors.
Note
For editing, the Sensor Table is only accessible from iX1 Map by selecting Edit > Sensor Types...
(Ctrl+T) or by pressing the Table button on the Rxy tab.
A maximum of nine receiver types can be defined for each type of sensor (Geophone, Hydrophone, or Other). All receivers are
identified by entering the model, manufacturer, and comments in the Sensor Table window.
Note
Selected marsh phones and 3-Component phones are identified by an M and a 3 in the model tabs.
Example: T1(M) for marsh phones; T1(3) for 3-Component phones.
Depending upon the tab selected, different data fields display for different sensors.

File and Goto Drop Menus
When selecting the Sensor Table in iX1 Map, two drop menus are available: File and Goto.

Save Save the current receiver type
Save As... Save the current receiver type to a different receiver type number
Import Type... Import the default receiver type from the system selection table
File Export Type Export the current receiver type to the selection table
Print F2 Print the receiver table
Cancel Esc Do not save changes to the receiver table
Save and Exit Save changes and return to iX1 Map
Next Move to the next numbered receiver type tab
Goto Previous Return to the most previously displayed receiver type tab
Goto... Automatically access/display the receiver type tab that is entered in the pop-up
Import Sensor Model
Predefined receiver specification tables are available for import. The default receiver tables are located in a system directory text
file and cannot be edited.
1. From the Sensor Types window, click on a tab to select the receiver type (e.g., Geophone G) and a model ID tab (e.g.,
T1) to import the specifications into.
2. Click beneath the receiver tabs. Depending upon the receiver type tab selected, a window listing
either the available geophone or hydrophone specifications displays.
3. Select a receiver model.
4. Click OK to insert the model specifications into the Sensor Table.

User Manual
5. Define the Array Configuration of the geophone strings. The total number of geophones used per station
automatically displays. Refer to the Figure 2. Example of Geophone Group Setup.
Series Select the number of geophones that are connected in the series in the string.
Parallel Select the number of strings that are connected in parallel.
Series Strings/Stn. Select the number of serial strings to be used per station.
Parallel Strings/Stn. Select the number of parallel strings to be used per station
Figure 2. Example of Geophone Group Setup
6. In the Dimensions section , define the total geophone array, units of measurement and the geophone-
geophone spacing.
Length (below Inline) Select the inline length of the geophone group.
Length (below Xline) Select the xline length of the geophone group.
Units Select the unit of measure: Meters or Feet.
Spacing (below Inline) Select the inline spacing between geophones.
Spacing (below Xline) Select the xline spacing between geophones.
7. In the Polarity section , select SEG or non-SEG. The default setting is SEG.
SEG Polarity A compression records as a negative number on tape and displays as a downward deflection
on monitor records.
non-SEG Polarity A compression records as a positive number on tape and displays as a upward deflection on
monitor records.

8. In the Type section , select the type of phone (applicable to the Geophone and Other tabs only).
• Geophones (G) tab - normal land geophone cases or marsh phones
• Other (R) tab
• If the Hydrophone tab is selected, enter the hydrophone sensitivity to O/C Sensitivity field according to the
manufacturer specification. The Disclaimer window displays upon exiting the window. Click Accept to proceed with
defined settings.
9. In the Moving Mass section , enter the weight and select the units of measure for the geophone element
(applicable to the Geophone and Other tabs only).
10. In the Preamp Gain (*) section , select the applicable gain.
Low Gain Only Runs tests at the default 0dB gain. The asterisk (*) beside each test in Test Specification section
denotes where the selection applies.
Current The current (production) preamp gain is used which is set in the Recording Parameters >
Record tab.
Note
Items in the Test Specification section marked with * (asterick) are affected by the Preamp Gain
selection.
Test Specification
Use the sensor manufacturer’s specification data sheets to complete the receiver specification sections.
Important!
Important!
It is imperative that the Array Resistance and Array Impedance be determined and entered manually.
Refer to Figure 3. Geophone Group Specification Setup
Note
The Notch selection applies a notch filter to the sensor THD test only. Doesn't affect the seismic data
acquisition.

User Manual
Below is an example of the manufacturer’s specifications for the SM-24 Geophone and their associated fields in the Sensor
Table.
This value appears in the

Sensitivity Report section
only when the Damped
options is selected.
The Array value

is dependent on the
Array Configuration.
Tolerances are based

on client specifications
and may require
adjustments due to
environmental conditions.
The Geophone Noise

tolerance is the ambient
noise level and is set
according to the client’s
specifications for the
particular survey.
Figure 3. Geophone Group Specification Setup

Cable Types
• From the iX1 Map drop menu select Edit > Cable Types... The Cable Table window displays.
• In the Cables field, select the number of cable modifications used in the survey (spread).
• Select Cable Type from the drop menu. There are two types available:
• Standard - mostly for land operation
• TZ (2c) - for transition zone (marine) operations (2c stands for 2-component (Geophone + Hydrophone))
• Select Geophone Type from the drop menu.
Note
Geophone Type must be defined before Cable Type.
• Enter the length of cable between takeouts in the Takeout Distance field.
• In the Resistance field enter the cable resistance value.
Note
The resistance value can be measured by shorting out the second takeout from the head and measuring
the resistance with an Ohms meter on pins L and F.
• Click Sensor Table to access the Sensor Table menu for editing.

User Manual
Source Table
There are several different seismic sources available such as Explosives, Vibroseis, Air Guns, Water Guns, and Others (weight-
drop or EWG sources).
The iX1 Acquisition can store up to 28 different source types for each project. Since much of the information contained in the
source table is necessary to accurately process seismic data, it is important to enter as much information as possible.
Field operations using multiple source types requires more than one source type to be configured. Only one source type can be
defined inside the source group (tab). Different parameters for each source type can be saved that allow for quick and easy
source type changes during acquisition.
Unique labels can be defined for each source type (source group) to differentiate them. In the Command Line, the selected
source type displays by the label name.
Important!
Important!
Encoder and Communication menu must be set before editing the Source Type menus.
Each source type requires to configure the following menus:
• Source Configuration (Vibroseis)
• Fleet Configuration - Vibrator fleet parameters (only relevant to vibroseis) (page 193)
• Vib Source Header - Vibrator Specifications (model, weight, force/drive and so on) (page 195)
• Vib Configuration - Acquisition and QC Parameters (page 196)
• Source Configuration (Explosive, Gun, Other)
• Source Header
• Explosive - Describes type of explosives, weight of charge, depth of charge (page 219)
• Gun - Describes type of gun (water or air), number of guns, volume, depth
• Other - Describes the model, number of units (weight-drop source)
• Box Configuration - Acquisition, RTI Configuration and QC Parameters (page 220)
• Aux - Auxiliary channel parameters (page 199)
• Src Ctrl - Source control parameters (page 200)
• Record - Recording parameters (page 204)
• Spectrum - Spectral analysis parameters (page 210)
• Plots - Plot visualization and playback parameters (page 212)

The following table summarizes the fields available based on the selected source type.
Table 4: Source Header Parameters
Source
Explosive
Field Description
Vibrator
Other
Gun
Fleet X Number identifying a fleet of vibrators
Manufacturer X X X X The name of the manufacturer for the source type
Model X X X X The source type model number
Comments X X X X Comments relating to the source type
Weight X Weight of the energy source
Weight Units X Kg, lb., Tonne, or Ton
- SEG Polarity - Default. A compression records as a negative number on

tape and displays as a downward deflection on monitor records
Polarity X X X X
- non-SEG Polarity - A compression records as a positive number on tape
and displays as a upward deflection on monitor records.
Force/Drive <Percentage> X The percentage of maximum force/drive required for acquisition
Control Type X Type of control device (e.g., decoder) used in the vibrator unit
GPS Antenna Height X X Height of the GPS antenna from the ground to where it is mounted on the vibe
GPS Antenna Height Units X X Meters or Feet
Array Length X Value to define the array length
Array Width X Value to define the array width
Unit Spacing Inline X Value to define the unit spacing in the inline direction
Unit Spacing Crossline X Value to define the unit spacing in the crossline direction
Array Spacing Units X Meters or Feet
Type X X X Number identifying the source header for this type
Number of Units X X X The number of units to be used
Charge X Weight of charge
Charge Units X Kg, lb., Tonne, or Ton
Depth X X The target depth to drill the hole for the explosive charge
The depth of the gun array below air-water surface.
Depth Units X X Meters or Feet
Length X Length of the explosive charge
Length Units X Meters or Feet
Drill Pattern X The shot hole pattern

User Manual
Source
Explosive
Field Description
Vibrator
Other
Gun
Drill Method X Method that is used to drill the shot holes
Soil Type X Type of soil present at the target depth
Wx.Depth X The nominal target depth to the base of the weathering layer
Wx.Depth Units X Meters or Feet
Array Spacing X X Spacing between arrays in the X axis
Array Spacing Y X Spacing between arrays in the Y axis
Unit Spacing X X X X Value to define the unit spacing in the X axis
Unit Spacing Y X X X Value to define the unit spacing in the Y axis
Spacing Units X X X Meters or Feet
Gun Type X Air Gun or Water Gun
Volume X Volume
Volume Units X cu.cm., Liter, or cu.In.
Pressure X The total air pressure of the gun array
Pressure Units X kPa or PSI
Peak-Peak <bar m> X The peak-to-peak far field output of the array
Bubble Ratio X The primary-to-bubble ratio for the gun array
Sub Arrays X The number of source sub arrays (if required)
Size X The size relevant to the energy source
File Drop Menu
Note
The File drop menu is not available during the project creation sequence of windows.

Increase Source Type
Decrease Source Type
Save Save the current source type
File
Print F2 Print the source table
Cancel Esc Do not save changes to the receiver table
Save and Exit Save changes and return to G3iMap

Source Type 1 (Vibroseis, VIB PRO HD Encoder and Decoders)
Refer to Figure 1. VPHD Encoder and Communications Setup
1. In the Type field, select one of the four source types from the drop menu. (Vibrator for Vibroseis source type)
2. Select the Encoders, Decoders, Mode, and Sub-Project from the appropriate drop down lists.
3. Enter a name for the source type in the Label field. The label displays in the Command Line .
Source Configuration
Fleet Configuration
The Fleet Configuration sub tab is used to create the vibrator fleets and define the parameters for each fleet. Individual vibrator
fleets are defined by selecting unique vibrator ID’s (Vibs). A maximum of 32 fleets can be defined using 32 Vibs. The control of
PSS blocks (GPS, PSS, Corr) can be activated for every individual Vib separately.
1. To create a fleet, select Source Configuration > Fleet Configuration. The Fleet Configuration tab opens.
2. Select the number of fleets to be used by clicking on the arrows beside the Fleets field.
Up to 8 fleets will display on a tab at once. If required, enter a name for the fleet in the text box.
3. Click and drag a from the Vibs column to assign it to the fleet.
Important!
Important!
The Vib number must match the actual Vibrator Controller ID.
4. Repeat step 3 for each Vib# that is required in a fleet.

User Manual
To remove a Vib# from a group, click and drag the desired Vib# out of the fleet and put it back into the Vibs
column.
5. To receive and monitor (QC) the PSS message arrival to the recorder, click in the On field. An X appears when
enabled.
6. *If Vib Controller is equipped with GPS receiver, to receive and monitor the GPS data block arrival to the recorder,
click in the gps field. An X appears when enabled.
7. *Enable pss field, to receive and monitor the PSS data block arrival to the recorder. An X appears when enabled.
8. *Enable corr field, to receive and monitor the Correlation data block arrival to the recorder. An X appears when
enabled.
9. Set the number of PSS messages in the Must Receive at Least field. The system counts the number of valid PSS
messages per VP per Vib and compares it with the set value. The warning message is issued by the system if the
threshold criteria has not met.
10. Set a time delay in the Extended Wait for Status field. This delay extends waiting time allowing to receive the PSS
messages from all vibrators in the fleet. Refer to Chapter 13 RTI Time Delay Charts for additional information.
*Depends on the PSS type set in the Vibrator Controllers.

Vib Source Header
The Vib Source Header sub tab is used to create a profile for the vibrator fleets used in the project. These fields should be
completed as they also populate in the project headers and will be involved in elevation calculations (GPS Antenna Height). The
Vib Source Header information will also be recorded to the 400 byte SEG-Y header.
• To define the Source Header parameters, navigate to the Source Configuration > Vib Source Header tab.
Note
Fleet Configuration must be set first as each fleet may have a different source header.
• For correct vibrator weights refer to the vibrator manual or placard information on the vibrator itself (usually found on the
inside door of the cabin).
• Refer to Table 4, “Source Header Parameters,” on page 191 to set properly the Vib Source Headers.
• To transfer source header information from Fleet 1 to other fleets, complete the following:
• Click the top of Fleet 1 column to highlight all rows and then CTRL+C to copy the settings.
• Click the top of Fleet N column to highlight all rows and then CTRL+V to paste the copied settings.
• Click Save As to create a Master Fleet Configuration File (*.VIB), which is saved in the INOVA_ iX1/control/source
control folder.
• Click Load Master File to upload the fleet configuration parameters from the previously saved Master Fleet
Configuration File (*.VIB).

User Manual
Vib Configuration
Vib fleet parameters can be edited in the Vib Configuration sub tab.
• Navigate to Source Configuration > Vib Configuration to open the vibrator fleet parameter window.
GPS Quality and Offset Tolerance
Note
The Quality, Satellites, and HDOP fields are not active if the Lock to Project Parameters checkbox is
enabled.
• In the Quality field, select the minimum quality of position required by each fleet
Quality Description
0: Invalid No GPS quality is expected
1: GPS Fix GPS quality is expected (default)
2: DGPS Fix Differential GPS quality is expected
4: RTK Fix RTK (Real Time Kinematic) quality is expected
5: Float RTK Float (or Flying) RTK quality is expected
9: Waas Fix WAAS (Wide Area Augmentation System) quality is expected
• In the Satellites field, enter the minimum number of satellites required to pass the QC thresholds.
• In the HDOP field, enter a value (.1 to 25.5) to define the maximum allowable horizontal dilution of precision to pass QC.
• Must Pass field. Refer to “Calculated COG to Tape” page 159
• Unit offset(M) field. Refer to “Calculated COG to Tape” page 159
• COG Offset (M) field. Refer to “Calculated COG to Tape” page 159
• Enable Lock to Project Parameters checkbox, to use tolerances set in the Project Header window (Survey section).
• Enable All Same option to assign the same GPS quality and offset parameters for all fleets entered in Fleet 1 row.
• From the drop list choose how to Log COG Errors (None, First Composite, All).

Pelton Crew ID
• Set Crew ID (part of the privacy start code) number per fleet or enable All Same option to assign the same Crew ID
number to all fleets.
Note
The Crew ID number must match in encoder and decoders.
Ready Message Action
The Ready Message Action section allows observer to simplify the multi fleet operation. Information contained within the Ready
Message (that has been sent from the decoders) is used by the system to perform user selectable functions.
Ready Message Description

0: No Action The system does not respond when a Ready message is received
The sub-command line is selected (highlighted) according to Vib ID (Fleet ID) number received
1: Select Command Line
with the Ready Message.
The Sline and SP fields in this sub-command line are loaded according to GPS position
2: Select and Load Command Line
received with the Ready message.
The source controller must be GPS enabled and have a valid GPS position in the Ready
Message.
The Sline and SP fields in this sub-command line are loaded according to GPS position
3: Select, Load and Fire
Once the sub-command line is updated, and Vib (Fleet) position inside the set Ready Message
Source Driven Operation
Offset tolerance the acquisition sequence begins. Arm button must be pressed in the
Command Line.
The source controller must be GPS enabled and have a valid GPS position in the Ready
Message.
The acquisition begins when the Ready Message is received using the current Sline and SP in
4: Fire Current Shot Only the sub-command line.
The Source Controller does not need to be GPS enabled.
• When Select, Load and Fire or Fire Current Shot is selected, the Arm button displays in the Command Line.
• If is enabled, the acquisition sequence starts (continue) after receiving the Ready Message.
• If is disabled, the system issue the warning message after receiving the Ready message:
“Group Ready Message Received. System not Armed. Arm and Acquire?”.
Click OK to start the acquisition sequence.
• In the Ready Message Offset (Maximum) field select a value to define the maximum offset distance from the source
point (imported coordinates) to the vibrator position received with the Ready Message. If the vibrator position falls
outside of the tolerance, a warning message displays.

User Manual
Acquisition Properties
The Moveup Delay option defines the user selectable rules between composites required during production or test operations.
Refer to Chapter 13 RTI Time Delay Charts for additional information.
• Time Delay (ms) - Defines a time delay between composites. The system starts next composite after the set time delay
expires.
• Pause (P) - The systems stops (pause) beginning of the next composite. The observer have to push Start button
manually to continue the acquisition sequence.
• Ready (R) - The system requires the Ready Message from the Vib (Fleet) for the next composite in the acquisition
sequence.
1. Click to open the Moveup Delay pop-up.
2. Enter required delay parameters. Click OK to save the settings and exit.
3. Click All Same to apply the same rules to all fleets.

Recording Parameters
Aux (Auxiliary)
The auxiliary harness is the cable that is used to connect the encoder to the SPM. The cable connects to the back of the SPM -
Source/Aux connector.
Note
Wiring for each harness is specific to the type of Encoder.
1. To edit the Auxiliary channel settings, navigate to Source Type > Recording Parameters > Aux. The following
windows displays for the vibroseis source type.
Note
A yellow highlighted field 2P indicates that the TREF trace is defined as a signal to correlate with.
2. Enable the required number of Aux channels.
• PTB (Predicted Time Break) - The rising edge of TB pulse (if low-going-high) is the zero-time of SEG-Y file.
• Encoder outputs the TB pulse when sweep starts.
• G3i HD CRS starts to acquire the seismic data at the same time.
• TREF (True Reference) (Pilot) - The seismic data is correlated against this signal. Normally has software delay
1000ms.

User Manual
• Encoder outputs True Reference (Pilot) sweep analog signal. Identical signal is used by Decoders to originate
the sweep.
• G3i HD CRS acquires attenuated signal on the Aux-2 channel (TREF), which has the same phase and
amplitude response as the seismic data channel.
• WREF (Wireline Reference) - Filtered TREF signal. The Wireline Analyses Tool compares acquired wireline data
against this signal. Refer to Wireline Analysis for additional information.
• RVIB (Radio Vib Out) - The Radio Reference Signal can be requested from any vibrator and is recorded on the
Aux-4 channel. Refer to Radio Similarity Analysis for additional information.
3. If required, enable Corr (correlation) and/or Stack checkboxes.
4. Click OK to apply the auxiliary channel settings.
Src Ctrl (Source Control)
The Src Ctl tab is used to configure the shooting interface parameters for the source type.
• To define the source control parameters, navigate to Source Type > Recording Parameters > Src Ctl. The following
windows displays.
Time Zero
The Time Zero section is used to define the acquisition sequence start time (zero-time of SEG-Y record).
• Fixed Time Delay (selected by default). Normally the time between Internal Start (closure to encoder) and Time Break
(sweep start from encoder) is predictable (around 1,000,000µs for VIB PRO HD). The exact time (AX time) must be
measured and set before the first production shot. The system starts the creation of SEG-Y record after AX-time expires.
Refer to “Acquire Start” page 203 for additional information.
• Enable Time Break Check @ option and enter +/- 10µs (source controller accuracy tolerance) to control and
monitor the TB arrival time against zero-time. The system issue the warning message if time is out of the set limit.

• Time Break option is used to start the seismic data record instantly after Time Break arrival if Pre Tzero Record is set
to 0.
• In the Pre Tzero Record field, enter the duration of time to be pre-recorded before Time Break.
• In the Window field, enter the TB waiting window. The TB waiting window starts count with Internal Start (closure to
encoder). If system doesn’t receive TB during this time, it stops the acquisition sequence and issues the warning
message.
Important!
Important!
When the Time Break option is selected, the system does not allow the user to acquire sweep files.
Important!
Important!
Pre Tzero Record function is not applicable for Vibroseis source operations if correlation is selected.
If the Pre Tzero Record value is set, the following popup displays.

User Manual
Fire Command
Figure 5. Master-Slave Operation
In Master-Slave type of operation,
• the leading recorder is configured as a Master and its VPHD must be set to Encoder mode.
• the following recorder is configured as a Slave and its VPHD must be set to Monitor mode.
Master G3i HD CRS initiates the acquisition sequence triggering Encoder, which in response, sends the Vibrator Start Code over
the radio to start the VPHD (Monitor) and Decoders.
After reception of the Vibrator Start Code,
• the VPHD (Monitor) starts and outputs the Time Break (PTB) toward the G3i HD CRS (Slave).
• the dedicated for this particular vibration point Decoder starts the sweep and begins to control the performance of the
servo-hydraulic vibrator.
Synchronization (or simultaneous start) between Encoder, VPHD (Monitor) and Decoders are accomplished via a set of radio
telemetry messages. Instantly at the beginning of the sweep Encoder, VPHD (Monitor) and Decoders (if properly adjusted)
produce the Time Break signal which is used by G3i HD CRSs (Master and Slave) as zero time mark of the seismic record.
1. Configure the leading SPM as a Master.
• Select Time Zero - Fixed Time Delay (preferred option)

2. Configure the following SPM as a Slave.
Acquire Start
1. From Acquire Start section click . The AX window displays.
2. In the TB Channel field, select PTB with the spin buttons.
3. Select the Record Length (default value is 3000ms)
4. Click to calculate the AX time. A progress bar displays. The SPM initiates and triggers the Encoder
(Internal Start).
Measured values display in the Analog Statistics section and in the Time Break at field in the Acquire section.
Wait for a moment and repeat this step. The result in the Time Break at field should be very close, if not the
same, as the result from the first run. If required, this result can be plotted or printed.
5. Click to close the AX window and return to the Src Ctrl tab. A Time Break at time is automatically
entered in the window beside the Internal Start +.

User Manual
Record
• To define the recording parameters, navigate to Source Type > Recording Parameters > Record. The following
windows displays.
Record Options
• In the Composites field, enter/select the number of composites (sweeps) to be recorded at each vibration point (VP).
• In the Auto Redo field, select the number of sweeps (free sweeps) to be performed before the acquisition sequence at
each vibration point.
• In the Record Length field,
• If correlation is selected, enter a numeric value to define the length of the record (listening time only) in
milliseconds.
• If no correlation is selected, enter a numeric value to define the length of the record (sweep time + listening time)
in milliseconds.
• In the Preamp Gain field, select 0dB, 12dB, 24dB or By Offset. Refer to the G3i HD RAM specification on “RAM
(Remote Acquisition Module)” page 17.
Preamp gains are channel-based and may vary from channel to channel, even within the same G3i HD RAM.
The By Offset option ensures that if any channel falls within the specified offset from the source point, that
channel will have the preamp gain associated with that offset.
In the Preamp Gain field, select By Offset from the drop menu. The following options display.
• In the 0 dB field, select the offset distance for a preamp gain of 0 dB. When any channels fall ≤ to the defined
distance from the source point, the channel uses this preamp gain.
• In the 12 dB field, select the offset distance for a preamp gain of 12 dB. When any channels fall between 0 dB-offset
and 12 dB-offset from the source point, the channel uses this preamp gain.
• The 24 dB is automatically applied to any channels falling outside the offset distance set in the 12 dB field. If 24 dB
is not required, define the offset distance in the 12 dB field to a value great enough to include all the far offsets. The
maximum value for the field is 32767.

Pilot Sweep Source
The pilot sweep source may be either an auxiliary trace, acquired from a vibrator control unit (encoder) and recorded with the
auxiliary FTU, or a pre-recorded sweep file from the true reference (TREF) auxiliary trace and stored on the systems hard disk
drive.
Aux Trace (Pilot) Sweep
1. Select Aux Trace (Pilot). The Sweep Select window

displays as follows.
2. Describe the sweep to be used in the Parameters

section. The value entered in Sweep Length is critical
and must match the actual sweep length.
3. Click OK.
Sweep Files
1. Select Sweep Files.
2. Select New File…

User Manual
The Sweep Acquire window displays as follows:
Important!
Important!
The values entered in the Acquire section are critical to record the correct sweep file.
Section Field Comment
Parameters Complete these fields based upon the sweep description.
Enter a name for the sweep file (8 character max). Every correlation sweep file is saved on
Sweep File Name
the hard disk in the sweep file sub-folder of the project with a *.SWP extension.
Enter the sweep length (in milliseconds). This figure must match the sweep length set in the
Sweep Length
encoder.
Select a high-cut filter from the drop menu. The filter frequency selected here must match the
Sweep High Cut Filter filter frequency used to acquire data. The system applies a sample rate dependent upon the
Acquire high-cut filter selected.
Preamp Gain Always 0 dB (by default).
This field displays the name of the auxiliary channel from which the sweep is
TREF
acquired
Select the RTI sequence number from the drop menu. This field is available when RTI is
Sequence #
enabled.
The statistics section displays results from the sweep acquired from the encoder through the
Aux FTU. All values in this section refer to the true reference (TREF) signal.
Statistics
Note: The values for Max and Min Amplitudes should be around 200mV. The Max and
Min Frequencies should be close to the frequencies for the sweep but not exact.

3. Click Acquire to begin recording a new sweep file. A 30 second line power countdown precedes acquisition. When
acquisition is complete the Sweep Statistics section displays the results.
4. Click Plot to send the acquired sweep to the plotter.
5. Click Close to exit the Sweep Acquire window and return to the Sweep Select window.
6. Select a previously recorded sweep file from the available list to correlate with. If selected, the sweep file is
highlighted and the parameters display on the right-hand side.
7. Click Add to place the file within the Selected section.
8. Click Close to exit the Sweep Acquire window and return to the Record tab.
Correlation
• Post Stack - This is the normal mode for correlation and requires that all the composites are acquired with the
absolutely same sweep parameters (frequency, phase, length of sweep, etc.). This method stacks all the uncorrelated
composites together and then correlates intermediate uncorrelated sum to produce the final correlated stack.
• Output Composite option is used to record each individual uncorrelated composite to the media.
• Uncorrelated Stack option is used to output intermediate uncorrelated stack to the media.
• Pre Stack - This method is used if at least one of the composites is acquired with the different sweep parameters.
Sometimes it is necessary to use a different starting phase of the sweep or if vari-sweep is used, where each sweep is
using a different frequencies than the one before. This requires each sweep to be correlated before being stacked.
• Output Composite option is used to record each individual correlated composite to the media.

User Manual
If different sweeps are used for each composite, the sub-command line has to be set accordingly in the Sweep # column.
Stacking and Noise Suppression Module
This module is a complete system for automatic noise-trace editing and consists of:
• Stacking - Most effective for random noise that lasts for most or all of the records in a stack.
• Noise Burst Editing (NBE) - Used to eliminate short duration high-amplitude noise.
• Diversity Stacking (DVS) - Used to suppress longer duration wind or vehicular noise often experienced at many sites.
Composite Stacking
The stacking process is identical to stacking on other systems. Stacking can be done either with or without burst editing. The
stacking process can also be combined with correlation in either a correlation before stacking or a correlation after stacking.
When stacking individual composites within a shot record to improve the signal to noise ratio of a low energy repeatable source,
INOVA acquisition systems use the following method:
1. Data recorded from the sensors is stored in a stack buffer in shot gather format, at this point the data sample values are
in volts. The effect of the preamp gain has been removed and the voltage levels are as received by the system at the
takeout.
2. Subsequent composites are added to the stack buffer as they are recorded.
3. At the completion of the required number of composites, after the last composite has been summed the data sample
amplitudes are divided by the number of composites in the stack to normalize amplitudes back to the levels received
at the takeout.
4. The stacked data is then recorded to a SEG-Y internal format file.

Noise Burst Edit
The Noise Burst Edit sub-program calculates the average data amplitude of each seismic trace within a specified sample
window. The data sample at the center of the window is compared to the average amplitude of the window multiplied by the ratio
value.
If the center sample exceeds the threshold, it is considered a noise burst and corrected.
In this example, a 128 sample Window Width is being used. The software analyzes the seismic trace one sample at a time,
ignoring the sample being edited as well as the two adjacent samples on either side.
The program tests consecutive sample windows using a moving average. Single-sample spikes are corrected using an
interpolation algorithm, while multiple-sample noise bursts are suppressed by muting and tapering the affected samples (NBE is
not recommended without stacking).
A 32 sample Kaiser Taper is applied to either side after the mute has been applied. If more than 10% of the trace samples have
bursts, then it is left unedited.
• Ratio - The Ratio number determines at what level above the average amplitude a sample is considered to be a noise
burst. A ratio value greater than 6.0 must be entered.
• Window Width (Samples) - Window Width is the number of samples used to calculate the average amplitude.
Available selections are anywhere between 64 and 256. A smaller sample window is more effective when seismic data
amplitudes are changing quickly.
• Mute Samples - This option allows the user to determine the amount of samples to be muted on either side of the
sample being edited. For example, if eight is entered, then four samples on either side of the sample being edited are
muted (along with the sample being edited).
When Noise Burst Edit (NBE) is enabled, it displays in the current error bar. If noise is detected, the channel and the percent of
samples edited also display and the background appears yellow.
Important!
Important!
If more than 10% of the samples are detected with a burst noise, the NBE displays red.

User Manual
Diversity Stacking
The diversity stacking algorithm divides each trace into windows and performs an inverse power scaling on these trace windows
prior to the stacking. The final stacked data is then renormalized to the inverse sum of each window value.
Note
Diversity stacking can be used either with or without burst editing and can be used in either the stack
only or correlate after stack mode.
• To calculate the scale values for diversity stacking, each channel is first divided into segments (each is one half the
originally specified window length).
• As each record is processed, the RMS value for each data point in a given window is determined and smoothed to form
an aggregate RMS level for that window, omitting any points that have been burst edited. A linear interpolation is then
calculated from the middle point of one segment to the middle point of the next segment. The first half of the first time
segment and the last half of the last segment are set as constant.
• The Inverse power scaling coefficient is calculated assuming that the segment with lower RMS value is a noise free
segment.
• Each data point is scaled using the inverse power of the interpolated point for that data point. For the final sum, an
average power level for each window is determined across all records. The inverse result of this is then used to
normalize the data in that window in the final sum.
Refer to “Diversity Stack” page 597 for additional information.
Spectrum
The QC Spectrum settings are used to define what and how a data record is plotted to paper (zero time).
• In the Source Type window, navigate to Recording Parameters > Spectrum to display the QC Spectrum Parameters.
The following window displays for all source types:
Note
If By Sample is enabled, the Input field changes to Samp (number of samples), rather than the default
time period.

• In the Input section , select a start and end time for the window to display.
• Enable the By Sample checkbox to perform an analysis by specific sample numbers, instead of time values.
• Enable the Trace checkbox to include the trace in the plot and then enter a label name for the trace, if required.
• If required, enter a range of traces at the bottom.
• Enable the Cumulate checkbox to overlay all selected traces on the same graph for comparative analysis.
• Enable the Reverse Polarity checkbox to reverse the polarity of the selected traces.
• Enable the Blackman-Harris Window checkbox to remove edge effects from the correlation wavelet before the Fourier
Transform.
• Plots section :
• Enable the Raw Data checkbox to plot raw data that is specified in the start time/end time Input parameters.
• Enable the Amp Spectrum checkbox to display frequency vs. amplitude analyses of the data.
• Enable the Phase Plot checkbox to display the phase analysis of a correlation wavelet.
• Plot Parameters section :
• In the Freq. field, select the minimum and maximum frequency (Amp Spectrum or Phase Plot must be enabled).
The maximum default is 9999 (Nyquist).
• In the Power field, select the minimum and maximum power (-160 to 0 is recommended). The Amp Spectrum
checkbox must be enabled.
• In the Phase field, select the minimum and maximum phase (recommend maximum is ±5). The Amp Spectrum or
Phase Plot checkboxes must be enabled.
• In the Freq. field of the Phase Correction section , select the sweep start and stop frequencies (recommend 10 Hz
inside the start and end frequencies to exclude the sweep tapers). The Phase Plot must be enabled.
• Click to return to the default settings.

User Manual
Plots
The Plot Deck File contains plotting parameters, trace waveform type, number and length of traces to plot. The seismic traces
also can be sorted by components or stations. Various filters, scalings, correlation and design options can be applied to data files.
The different combination of options are saved in the individual plot deck files and can be applied to *.SGY file for visualization
purpose.
• To edit plots parameters, navigate to Recording Parameters > Plots. The following window displays for all source
types:
Plot File
• Click New in the Plot File section. The following pop-up displays.
• Enter a name (no spaces) in the New Plot File pop-up and click OK. The new plot deck displays in the Plot File drop
menu.
• Click the Enabled checkbox to enable a plot deck.
• To delete a plot file, select it from the drop down list and click Del.
• To display multiple plot decks, click on an empty plot deck tab.
• Select the plot file from the drop down list and click the Enable checkbox. The plot deck tab displays the plot file name.

Traces
• Enable the Plot Traces checkbox to display the Trace Viewer. Set the number of traces and increment in Start, End,
and Inc fields.
• Enable the Max Traces checkbox to plot the maximum amount of traces per screen with the system set resolution.
• Enable the Aux Only checkbox to plot only auxiliary traces.
• In the Components field, select one of the following components to plot:
Component Description
All
G Geophone
H Hydrophone
RV Receiver Vertical
RI Receiver Inline
RC Receiver Crossline
R Receiver
• Enable the Wiggle checkbox to plot both the positive and negative amplitudes of a trace with a line or wiggle.
• Enable the VA checkbox to plot the trace data in variable area mode (positive amplitudes are shown in a solid color and
negative amplitudes are omitted).
• Enable Wiggle and VA to plot the trace data with the both modes..
• Enable the Dead / Dummies checkbox to plot dead / dummy traces.
• Enable the Aux checkbox to display the auxiliary traces in addition to the seismic traces.
• Enable Sort Traces by Component to separate the record by components.
• Enable Sort Traces by Station to arrange the traces by flag numbers.
• Enable Sort Line by Component to re-arrange traces by line number and by component.
• In the Start field, enter the trace number of the record (first trace number to plot).
• In the End field, enter the trace number of the record (last trace number to plot). To plot all traces set the maximum
value of 65535.
• In the Inc field, enter a trace increment in this Start-End trace range.

User Manual
Plot Time
• Enable the All Time checkbox to display the entire record.
• Disable the All Time checkbox to select the time range:
• In the Start field, enter the time to start the plot (ms).
• In the End field, enter the time to end the plot (ms).
Rotate Decks
When multiple plot decks are set, the Rotate Decks option allows the user to plot every next record with different plot desks. The
rotation of the plot decks depends on number of enabled plot decks.
• Enable the Rotate Decks checkbox and choose the plot deck to start with.
Plot Tabs
The Plot Deck tabs are used to define filters, scaling, and design options to plot data files.
1:Pre Tab
The Pre Tab is used to define settings that correlate data before viewing.
• Click the Enable Correlation checkbox to ensure data is correlated before other processes.
• In the Pilot Trace (Aux) field enter the trace number to correlate the uncorrelated data record and/or auxiliary trace
(i.e., True Reference).
• Enable the Correlate Aux Traces checkbox to correlate any remaining aux traces.

2: Design
• Open acquired record in iX1 Video Plot. Refer to “iX1 Video Plot” page 519.
• Set all design parameters using the video plot then click Copy to place this settings on a clipboard.
• Return to Recording Parameters > Plot > Design and click Paste to copy all iX1 AVP design settings to existing plot
deck.
• Disable the FK Filter Velocity and Design Window.
Note
The First Break (geometry check) line displays with the seismic traces and allows the user to verify the
shot geometry.
3:Filter Tab
The Filter tab is used to filter the seismic data and is used for playback purposes only.
• Enable the Notch checkbox and select 50 or 60 Hz.
• Enable the B/P (Band Pass) checkbox and enter the range of frequencies (only when L/C and H/C are disabled).
• Enable the L/C (Low Cut) checkbox and enter a level at which low frequencies are blocked (B/P must be disabled).
• Enable the H/C (High Cut) checkbox and enter a level at which high frequencies are blocked (B/P must be disabled).
• Enable the FK checkbox. The filter velocity, as entered under Design > FK Filter Velocity, removes the source
generated low frequency noise based upon velocity (removes surface waves).

User Manual
4:Data Scaling
Different forms of scaling algorithms can be applied to adjust seismic data amplitudes. The tab name depends on the Data
Scaling selected. For additional information on Data Scaling tabs, refer to “iX1 Video Plot” page 519.
AGC* scales the amplitude of a seismic signal (with decreasing strength over time), enabling a
visual examination of both strong and weak data samples. AGC automatically varies the gain
applied to a trace sample as a function of the mean amplitude of an AGC window about that
sample. For every sample, the scale factor is calculated as the inverse of the mean amplitude of the
AGC sliding window. Thus, the larger the amplitude of the samples within the AGC window, the
smaller the scale factor applied to the center sample of this window.
The Throw option is only available for AGC and AGC Threshold when Aux Gain is enabled.
AGC Threshold* scaling compensates the amplitude of a seismic signal with decreasing strength
over time, which enables a visual examination of data at any point along a trace and causes AGC to
trip at the threshold specified.
*All traces are scaled and balanced independently based on their own signal strength and
system desired amplitude, which is why a simple comparison of signal strength between
traces is not possible.
Exponential scaling applies a time-variant gain (exponential) function to traces to compensate for
a loss of amplitude over time. Unlike AGC Scaling, Exponential Scaling applies the same scale
values to all traces after the defined Limit time, which allows for a simple comparison of traces.
Fixed scaling is used to show a true representation of relative signal strength by applying a
specified gain value to each data sample. The amplitude is first scaled by the value defined in the
Fixed gain window and then rescaled according to the value populated in the Throw window.
Linear scaling is used when it is assumed that the signal strength is decreasing linearly with time.
The first sample is scaled by the Initial Gain, and then the gain is increased linearly by the slope
(dB/Sec). As in the earlier scaling methods, the traces then are rescaled according to the value in
the Throw window.

4:Trace Scaling
Trace Scaling defines the horizontal and vertical parameters that are required to plot and display data.
• From the Vert field drop menu, select the following:
• Fit - the system automatically adjust vertical scaling to the best resolution to plot a data time block as defined in
Plot Time (Start, End, All Time)
• 2.5, 5, 7.5, 10 - select the number of inches per second
• From the Horiz field drop menu, select the number of traces to be plotted Trc/In (select Fit to automatically size to the
paper size).
• Enable the Plot by Time checkbox to change the orientation of the plot.
• Enable the Plot R to L checkbox to display traces numbers from right to left (default left to right).
• Enable the Clip checkbox to clip amplitude of the traces. Generally, trace throw may overlap adjacent traces (Fixed
gain) and can be limited by clipping the amplitude of a signal between the number of traces set in the Clip window.
5:Extra
The Extra tab allows the user to define the additional trace bar graphs to the plot. Generally, RMS Trace and RMS Noise are
used most often. Enable required bar graphs and enter the maximum value (vertical scale) in the fields provided.

User Manual
Source Type 2 (Explosives, VIB PRO HD Encoder / Shot Pro II Decoders)
Refer to Figure 1. VPHD Encoder and Communications Setup
1. Navigate to Parameters > Encoder and Communications in the iX1 Vib.
2. Activate second decoder type (Shot Pro II) in the Decoders section
3. Click OK to save and exit.
4. Navigate to Parameters > Critical Parameters. In the Command Line Options increase the number of
Command Lines Groups to 2 . Click OK to exit to iX1 Vib.The system adds second
tab to the Command Line.
5. From the Command Line right-click to new tab. The Command Line Label: 2 pop-up displays.
6. Name it as Exp (explosives) for example and click OK to save and exit to iX1 Vib.
7. Navigate to Parameters > Source Table. The following window displays.
8. Click File > Increase Source Type. The system creates the Source Type 2 tab.
9. In the Type field, select Explosives from the drop menu.
10. Select the Encoders, Decoders, Mode, and Sub-Project from the appropriate drop down lists.
11. Enter a name for the source type in the Label field. The label displays in the Command Line .

12. From the Command Line click Exp tab and use scroll buttons on the right side of source type button to select
Type: 2 SPII.
13. Click Type: 2 SPII button to open the Source Type 2 window.
Source Configuration
Source Header
The Source Header sub tab is used to describe the type of explosives, amount of charge, depth of charge, etc.
• To define the Source Header parameters, navigate to the Source Configuration > Source Header tab.
• More than one type of source headers can be created. Use scroll buttons to increase the Number of Types.
Refer to“Source Header Parameters” page 191 to set properly the Source Headers.

User Manual
Box Configuration
The shooter (decoder) parameters can be edited in the Box Configuration sub tab.
• Navigate to Source Configuration > Box Configuration to open the shooter (decoder) parameters window.
RTI Configuration
The RTI Configuration fields allow the observer to select the required PFS message conditions. The system completes the
seismic data acquisition, but holds it in a buffer if the selected conditions are not met. According to the status information
contained in the Post Fire System (PFS) message, the system issues the warning message.
• If the warning message is accepted by user (click Continue in the sub-command line) the system creates a SEG-Y file
and outputs it to the G3Data directory.
• If observer clicks Halt (Command Line) and then Continue (sub-command line), the acquisition sequence is halted and
observer has a three options:
• Redo Comp - Fire the same shot point again.
• Abort Shot - Stop the acquisition sequence without creating a SEG-Y file.
• Resume - Continue the acquisition sequence as normal. The system creates a SEG-Y file.
• Enable GPS, if decoder is GPS enabled and GPS message is expected with Ready and PFS messages.
• Enable PFS, if PFS message is expected from decoders.
• If No Status is enabled, the system issues warning message when PFS is missing (radio interference, etc).
• If No Fire is enabled, the system issues the warning message when PFS is received, but shot is not fired for some
reason (short-circuit in the fire line, bad cap, etc).
• If No Uphole is enabled, the system issues the warning message when PFS is received, but no Uphole Time in the
message.
• If Wrong ID is enabled, the system issues warning message when PFS is received and contains wrong decoder
Box ID#.

Ready Message Action
The Ready Message Action section allows observer to simplify the multi shooter operation. Information contained within the
Ready Message (that has been sent from the decoders) is used by the system to perform user selectable functions.
Ready Message Description

0: No Action The system does not respond when a Ready message is received
The sub-command line is selected (highlighted) according to Box ID number received with the
1: Select Command Line
Ready Message.
The sub-command line is selected (highlighted) according to Box ID number received with the
Ready Message.
2: Select and Load Command Line The Sline and SP fields in this sub-command line are loaded according to GPS position
The decoder must be GPS enabled and have a valid GPS position in the Ready Message.
• In the Ready Message Offset (Maximum) field select a value to define the maximum offset distance from the source
point (imported coordinates) to the decoder position received with the Ready Message. If the decoder position falls
outside of the set tolerance, a warning message displays.
Normally, the shot point GPS position is acquired by the shooter on the top of charge hole before the Ready
message is sent to CRS. So the Ready and PFS messages have absolutely the same GPS position for the
current shot point, that is why the Ready Message Offset (M) is always equal to Offset (M) in the GPS
Quality and Offset Tolerance section.
GPS Quality and Offset Tolerance
Refer to “GPS Quality and Offset Tolerance” page 196 to set properly the GPS Quality, HDOP and number of satellites
parameters.
Additional Parameters
• Enable Record BCD Uphole to File to record a Binary Code Decimal additional auxiliary trace to SEG-Y file that
represents the value of the uphole time.
• Click Save As to create a Master Box Configuration File (*.DYN), which is saved in the INOVA_ iX1/control/
sourcecontrol folder.
• Click Load Master File to upload the box configuration parameters from the previously saved Master Box Configuration
File (*.DYN).
• Sweep Number field. Open the SourceConfig application from the iX1 Vib. In the Sweep Table menu set the Sweep
Type for the Sweep 1 (this example) as ShotPro.

User Manual
Table 6: Auxiliary Channels Assignment
Shot Pro
Encoder Vib Pro Shot Pro Universal Encoder BoomBox SGD-SP SSV2
II
Shot Pro II
Shot Pro II
Shot Pro II
Shot Pro II
BoomBox
BoomBox
Shot Pro/
Shot Pro/
Shot Pro/
Shot Pro/
SGD-SP
Vib Pro
SSV2
Decoder
PTB
Chan 1 Chan 1 Chan 1 Chan 1 Chan 1 Chan 1 Chan 1 Chan 1 Chan 1
(Predicted Time Break)
TREF
Chan 2
(True reference)
UPH
Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Chan 3 Chan 3 Chan 3
(Uphole)
UnDefined
Chan 2,3 Chan 2,3 Chan 2,3
Aux Title
WREF
Chan 3
(Wireline reference)
TMNG
Chan 4 Chan 2 Chan 4 Chan 2
(Timing reference)
RVIB
Chan 4
(Radio vibrator)
FTB
Chan 2 Chan 2
(Field Time Break)

Chapter 5
iX1 Map
iX1 Map
iX1 Map is used to create/import shot point/receiver station coordinates, define, edit, test actual G3i HD equipment and show
Hawk status information. All parameters for a survey are defined in the iX1 Vib and iX1 Hardware. The iX1 Map creates a sub-
project using parameters and settings that are saved in the project database.
Each sub-project requires the following to be defined in iX1 Map:
• Receiver station and source point coordinates
• Patch definitions
• Equipment layout and network
Note
One project can have several sub-projects. For example, when a project consists of several 2D lines, a
sub-project can be created for each line (each line requires the same job parameters that were defined
for the project).
• To open iX1 Map from the iX1 Vib window, select Tools > Map... from the drop menu or click in the toolbar.
Displays the software version, project name, and the sub-project name
iX1 Map Drop Menu (page 225)
iX1 Map Tool Bar (page 287)

User Manual
iX1 Map Screen displays the sub-project, which includes the coordinates, line names, equipment, network elements, etc.
Message window displays various messages regarding the sub-project (page 248)
RAM Info window displays information about the RAM, FTU, PSU, FSU and NetLink units (page 248)
Channel Info window displays information about the channels as the cursor is placed over an icon in IX1 Map Screen
(page 248)
iX1 Map Tabs are used to create, edit the sub-project and test the field equipment (page 289)
Status View (Status Bar) shows the current recording parameters, current shot point, current patch and computer time
(page 288)
Tabs Help View (Status Bar) displays the description of tab functionality including the mouse right button (RB) functions
(page 288)

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Drop Menu
At the top of the iX1 Map window are ten drop menus used to access a variety of tools and perform different functions.

New Sub-Project Create new sub-project (page 229)
Open Sub-Project Open an existing sub-project (page 230)
Update the sub-project receiver/sources coordinates, patches and
Update Sub-Project...
culture data (page 230)
Save Sub-Project Save the sub-project (page 236)
Save the sub-project receiver/sources coordinates, patches and culture
Copy To
data to file (page 237)
Backup Save the sub-project to the backup sub-directory (page 238)
Restore Restore the sub-project from the back up file (page 238)
File
User Settings... Save iX1 Map window configuration (page 238)
Import Jumpers Restore the layout jumpers from file (page 239)
Export Jumpers Save the existing layout jumpers to file (page 239)
Print the sub-project receiver/sources coordinates, patches and culture
Print Sub-Project... Ctrl+F2
data (page 240)
Print Map... Print the displayed Map Screen (page 242)
Print Map Direct F2 Prints the map based on the print settings (page 242)
Print Setup... Select a plotter and settings (page 243)
Exit F10 Close iX1 Map
Sensor Types... Ctrl+T Display the Sensor Table in a separate pop-up window (page 244)
Cable Types... Alt+Ctrl+T Display the Cable Table in a separate pop-up window (page 244)
Display the Hawk Cable Table in a separate pop-up window
Hawk Cable Types
(page 244)
Display the Colour Table for shot points in a separate pop-up window
Colour Table...
(page 245)
Edit Shot Comments Select a shot point and add a warning and comments (page 245)
Select Current Shot S Highlight the current shot point in the map (page 246)
Undo Undo up to three of the last edit commands (page 246)
Redo Redo the last undo (page 246)
Find S/N Ctrl+F Find a RAM by S/N (page 247)
Set a maximum of 3 undo edits (Test, Net, Layout, and Culture tabs)
Properties
(page 247)
Message Show/hide the message view window (default view) (page 248)
RAM Info Show/hide the RAM Info window (default view) (page 248)
Channel Info Show/hide the Channel Info view window (default view) (page 248)
View Tracking View Show/hide the Vib Tracking window (page 249)
Default View Return to the Map default windows setup (page 250)
Tool Bar Show/hide the Map Tool Bar (default view) (page 287)
Status Bar Show/hide the Map Status Bar (default view) (page 288)

User Manual

Network ▼
Network On/Off Show/hide the network layout icons in the Map Screen (page 250)
Truck On/Off Show/hide the recording truck icon in the Map Screen (page 250)
Patch ▼
Patch On/Off P Show/hide the patch in the Map Screen (page 251)
Outline Outline perimeter of the patch (page 251)
Next Patch Ctrl+P Display the next patch in sequence (page 252)
Previous Patch Shift+P Display the previous patch in the sequence (page 252)
Goto Patch... Select and go to a patch by number (page 252)
Lock Patch Lock patch in the current position (page 252)
Offset Circle... Display offset circle around a shot point (page 252)
CMP Plot Display common midpoints between a shot and all stations (page 253)
RAM/FTU ▼
Cycle Annotation A Cycle through all RAM/FTU/FSU display options (page 254)
0) No RAM Annotation Show no RAM/FTU/FSU annotation (page 254)
1) Port/Side Number Show Port/Side number (page 254)
2) Serial Number Show devices serial number (page 254)
3) Flag Number Show flag number (page 255)
Configure
4) Battery Volts Show battery voltage (page 255)
5) Low Batteries Show low batteries (page 255)
Shot ▼
Cycle Annotation Ctrl+S Cycle through all shot display options (page 256)
Locks the iX1 Map to the current shot set in the active sub-command
Lock to Acquisition
line in the iX1 Vib (page 256)
0) No Shots Show no shots icons (page 257)
1) All + Taken Show all shots (page 257)
2) Shots Not Taken Show not taken shots only (page 257)
3) Taken Only Show taken shots only (page 257)
4) Taken Today Show shots taken today (page 257)
5) Current Shot Show current shot (page 258)
6) Taken + Current Show current and taken shots (page 258)
7) Actual COG Location Show all shots taken with calculated COG (page 258)
8) Swaths Show all shots by Swath ID (page 258)
Annotation ▼
Receiver Line Show/hide receiver line numbers on the Map Screen (page 259)
Source Line Show/hide source line numbers on the Map Screen (page 259)

Chapter 5 iX1 Map

Receiver Flag Show/hide receiver point numbers on the Map Screen (page 259)
Source Flag Show/hide source point numbers on the Map Screen (page 260)
Culture Show/hide the culture objects in the Map Screen (page 260)
Overlay Show/hide the overlay images in the Map Screen(page 260)
Cable Breaks Show/hide the cable break icons in the Map Screen(page 261)
Coordinates ▼
Source Show/hide the source point icons in the Map Screen (page 261)
Configure
Receiver Show/hide the receiver point icons in the Map Screen (page 261)
Arcs ▼
Skipped Channels Show the layout jumper as arcs or straight lines (page 261)
Baselines Show baselines as curved or straight lines (page 262)
Show the direction of data flow between baselines and recording truck
Data Arrows (in)
(page 262)
Show the direction of power flow between baselines and recording
Power Arrows (out)
truck (page 262)
Display the entire current active network in the Map Screen
Network (%) Z
(page 263)
Project (%) Ctrl+Z Display the entire sub-project in the Map Screen (page 263)
Patch (%) Shift+Z Display the current patch in the Map Screen (page 263)
Zoom Box Ctrl+Shift+Z Select an area using the zoom tool to display in the Map (page 263)
Zoom Un Zoom U Return to the view displayed before zooming (page 263)
Icon Scale (#)... Increase or decrease size of icons in the Map Screen (page 264)
Font Point Size (#)... Increase or decrease the size of text in the Map (page 264)
Rotate... Rotate the sub-project in the Map Screen(page 265)
To Scale Display the sub-project in real scaling (page 264)
Refresh F Update the Map Screen (page 264)
Define the minimum battery voltage threshold for all PSUs, FTUs and
Battery Tolerance...
FSUs (page 266)
Test Parameters Define channel and telemetry test parameters (page 267)
Hawk Parameters Define the Hawk QC thresholds (page 267)
Test Check the status of the existing network at specified intervals
Auto Update... Ctrl+A
(page 268)
Run a set of network channel and geophone tests for all equipment
Query All Ctrl+Q
attached to the recorder or defined in the network (page 268)
Load Firmware... Update (load) new firmware into RAMs/FTUs/PSUs (page 268)

User Manual

Print Test Print a report of the most recent test (page 270)
View Test View all test results received from the most recent test (page 271)
Test to File Save the most recent test report to a text file (page 271)
Print Error Print a list of errors received from the most recent test (page 271)
View Error View a report of errors only from the most recent test (page 272)
View Failures View a report of failures only from the most recent test (page 272)
View S/N Battery View a report of every visible device in the network (page 273)
View a list of all devices with low battery voltage in the network
View S/N Low Battery Only
(page 273)
Reports
View Flag Battery View a list of devices with connected batteries (page 274)
View a list of devices with connected batteries with low voltage only
View Flag Low Battery Only
(page 274)
View a report of geophone type properties for all channels in the
View Visible Channels
network (page 274)
View Project Statistics View a survey summary (page 275)
View XY Skid/Offset Only View a report of the skid and offset details (page 276)
View Layout Skips Only View a report of all layout skips (page 277)
Append S/N Battery File Update the Serial Number Battery Report temp file (page 277)
RAM/FTU Find... Provides the most recent device location (page 278)
File Viewer View the text files written to the doc directory (page 281)
Tools Find Truck Display the truck icon in the center of the Map Screen (page 281)
Use to measure the distance between points in the Map Screen
Distance...
(page 282)
Patch Retrieve the patch information for already taken shot (page 283)
Database Retrieve sub-project coordinates from the database to display in the
Read Coordinates...
Map Screen (page 283)
Line Test Open the Test Tab (page 381)
RXY Edit Open the Rxy Tab (page 290)
SXY Edit Open the Sxy Tab (page 311)
Patch Edit Open the Patch Tab (page 329)
Layout Edit Open the Layout Tab (page 348)
Mode Network Edit Open the Net Tab (page 365)
Culture Edit Open the Culture Tab (page 387)
Overlay Edit Open the Overlay Tab (page 404)
Fold View Open the Fold Tab (page 416)
GDC View Open the GDC Tab (page 289)
Auto Size Automatically resize the Map Tabs window (page 284)
Hot Keys... Displays the list of hot keys for iX1 Map (page 285)
Help Legend... Displays the legend of icons used in iX1 Map (page 286)
About iX1 Map... Display the iX1 Map software version number (page 286)

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
File Drop Menu
The File drop menu is used to create, open, update, save, copy, backup, restore the sub-projects, and print the sub-project
information as well as define the IX1 Map windows configuration.
New Sub-Project
Note
The project must be built prior to creating a sub-project (refer to “Create a New Project” on page 153).
1. To create a new sub-project, select File > New Sub-Project from the drop menu or click in the toolbar. The New
Sub-Project Name window displays.
2. Enter a name for the sub-project (maximum of 16 characters, no spaces or special characters).
3. Click OK to create the sub-project. If a sub-project for the selected project already exists, the following pop-up
displays.

User Manual
Open Sub-Project
1. To open an existing sub-project, select File > Open Sub-Project from the drop menu or click on the toolbar. The
Open window displays the current project folder with available sub-project binary files *.spf.
2. Select a *.spf sub-project file and click Open.
Update Sub-Project
The Update Sub-Project option is used to update the sub-project that is currently open. New receiver coordinates, source
coordinates, patches, and/or culture information from a SegP1, SPS, PRJ, Text or Binary files (*.spf) can be imported to update
the sub-project. For information about file types, refer to “File Types Available for Import” on page 232.
Note
The files to be imported should first be copied into the doc directory of the project.
1. To update a sub-project with new information, open the sub-project in iX1 Map.
2. Select File > Update Sub-Project from the drop menu. The Update From File window displays and automatically
defaults to the current project doc directory.
• If file is not in the Update From File window, click Browse to navigate to the required file.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
• Enable Validate Source and Receiver Flags to verify if new source and receiver point to be loaded for the existing
subproject was already involved in the seismic data acquisition. If such source and receiver points exist the system
notifies the user and will increment the SPS point index even coordinates are original. The user has to accept the
notification message for the sub-project to be updated.
• Click Close to cancel the update and exit th the previous window.
3. Double-click on the required file to update the sub-project. Based on the selected file type, the Update From Fields
options become available.
4. In the Update From Fields, enable the checkbox(es) of the required information to import.
5. Click OK to update the sub-project with the new information.

User Manual
File Types Available for Import
File Type Receivers Sources Patches Culture
*.SPF All inclusive format

Exclusive to INOVA: a single binary file with a *.SPF extension. X, Y & Z + Patches + Culture
*.PRJ All inclusive format

Exclusive to INOVA: a single text file with a *.PRJ extension. X, Y & Z + Patches + Culture
SEGP1
Name.REC Name.SRC
Usually two files: one for receivers (*.REC extension) and one for NA NA
X, Y & Z X, Y & Z
sources (*.SRC extension).
SPS
Name.R** Name.S** Name.X**
Shell Processing Support always contains three files with the same NA
X, Y & Z X, Y & Z Cross file
name and *.R**, *.S**, and *.X** extensions
Note
The files to be imported should first be copied into the doc directory of the project. When renaming a file,
maintain the correct file extension.
Binary File (*.spf)
The binary file type uses the *.spf extension and is a single all inclusive file that can include receivers, sources, patches, and
culture.
1. Double-click on the binary file (*.spf) to open. The Update From Fields options become active (options that are grayed
out are NOT available inside the file).

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Text File (*.prj)
The text file type uses the *.prj extension and is a single all inclusive file that can include receivers, sources, patches, and culture
(exclusive to INOVA).
1. Double-click on the required test file (*.prj extension) to open. The Update From Fields options become active (options
that are grayed out are NOT available inside the file).
SPS Files
The Shell Processing Support (SPS) file type uses three different files and extensions. They are as follows:
• .r** - Receiver coordinates
• .s** - Source coordinates
• .x** - Relation file (patch information)
** The file extension must begin with either r, s, or x. The rest of the extension may be any number/name.
1. Double-click on the relation file (*.x**) to open. The Update From Fields options become active (options that are grayed
out are NOT available inside the file or NOT applicable for this type of file).

User Manual
SegP1 Files
The SegP1 (text) file type includes one file with receiver coordinates (*.rec) and another file with source coordinates (*.src).
Before importing the SegP1 files, INOVA recommends to open these files with the Notepad text editor and verify the header
information. Below is an example of the proper header information supplied by iX1 software.
INOVA Generated SegP1 File

CLIENT: INOVA OIL
AREA: TEXAS
PROJECT: BB3
CONTRACTOR: INOVA GEO
CREW: SP1
Survey Date: 14.03.2017,14.03.2017
Spheroid: WGS_1984,WGS 84
Projection: UTM Zone 15, Northern Hemisphere
Zone: Transverse_Mercator
Geodetic: WGS 84
LINE: COL 2-10 FLAG: COL 18-26 UNITS: 100ths
LATITUDE: COL 27-35 LONGITUDE: COL 36-45
EASTING: COL 46-53 NORTHING: COL 54-61 UNITS: Decimeters
ELEVATIONS: COL 62-66 UNITS: Decimeters
Important!
Important!
If the header information is missing, contact the surveyors to get the information about line and flag
numbers, Easting/Northing, elevations, and units.
1. Select the *.rec or *.src file and click Open. The SegP1 Files window displays.
The SegP1 header information may display above the coordinate columns .

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
2. Select one of the Source file options to import the following coordinates:
• Both (Receiver and Source)
• Receiver Only
• Source Only
Note
If the importing columns have different width and position in the receiver and source files, each file must
be imported individually.
3. Select one of the following options in the Column Defn. :
• If required, click Last Format to apply the last columns definition.
• Click Default to apply default column positions and sizes.
4. Select the file in the List View to view it in the coordinate columns section .
• Click to view the next line (row) of coordinates at the bottom of screen.
• Select a line (highlight) and click to define the selected line as the start position to begin importing
the data (generally used when there is no headers in the file).
5. Adjust the columns position and width using the up/down arrows according to the header information. The columns
are highlighted with one of the following colors
Red [Line] Receiver/Source line numbers

Green [Flag] Flag numbers
Blue [East] Easting coordinates
Cyan [North] Northing coordinates
Magenta [Z] Elevations
6. In the Scale Input field , select one of the following options:
• Units in centimetres or in hundredths - 1%
• Units in decimeters or in tenths - 10%
• Units meters or feet - 100%
7. The Distance to Next Station field displays the numerical value of the
distance between two lines (rows) of coordinates.
Note
Verify if the distance between two adjacent shot or receiver points is matching the project parameters.
8. In the Flags field , select one of the following flag unit formats:

User Manual
• Units - (10100)
• 10ths - an entire station number with 1 decimal value (1010.0)
• 100ths - an entire station number with 2 decimal values (101.00)
9. Enable the Omit Elevation checkbox to exclude the invalid elevations from importing. Select the number to
omit from the elevation list.
10. Click OK to apply selections. The Update From File window displays.
Save Sub-Project File
A sub-project must be saved when initially created and whenever edits are made. If it is not saved, the iX1 Vib software will not
recognize the new or edited information. In addition, a new sub-project or edited information is not added to the database until it is
saved. If a sub-project is not saved, File Not Saved displays beside the project name at the top of the iX1 Map window.
1. To save a sub-project, select File > Save Sub-Project from the drop menu or click in the toolbar.
2. If other sub-projects have been created for the project, the following pop-up displays.
3. Click Yes to save the sub-project to the database or click No to cancel.
Note
The sub-project is written to a binary file on hard disk with a *.spf extension in the current project
directory. The source and receiver coordinates are also saved to the coordinate tables in the project
database.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Copy To
The Copy To option is used to export the sub-project coordinates in the following formats:
• Binary file (*.spf) - receiver/source coordinates, patches and cultures
• Text file (*.prj) - receiver/source coordinates, patches and cultures
• SegP1 files - receiver coordinates (*.rec file) and source coordinates (“.src file)
• SPS files - receiver coordinates (*.r01 file), source coordinates (*.s01 file), and relation file (*.x01)
1. Select File > Copy To from the drop menu. The Save As window displays.
2. The file name defaults to the same sub-project name and is saved to the doc sub-directory of the current project. If
required, enter a new name in the File Name field.
3. In the Save as Type field, use the drop menu to select the file type to save the sub-project as.
4. Click Save to export the sub-project coordinates.

User Manual
Backup
When a project is built in the iX1 Vib, a backup sub-directory is automatically created in the project directory. The sub-project can
be stored there as a binary project file (*.spf) using the same sub-project name.
This file contains the following information:
• Receiver/Source coordinates
• Patches
• Cultures
• Layout
• Network
1. Select File > Backup from the drop menu. Backup file is now saved in the backup sub-directory of the current project.
Restore
The Restore option is used to reset the currently open sub-project to the selected backup copy of the sub-project. If the open sub-
project has not been backed up, the Restore option is not available.
1. Select File > Restore from the drop menu. The sub-project is restored from the backup file that is located in the backup
sub-directory of the current project.
2. To save a restored sub-project as current, select File > Save Sub-Project from the drop menu or click in the
toolbar.
User Settings
The User Settings option is used to create and store multiple preference and display settings.
• To save the user defined settings, select File > User Settings... from the drop menu. The User Settings pop-up
displays.
In the Name field, enter a name for the preference/display settings and complete one of the following options:
• Click OK to save the preferences.
• Click Default to load the Map default settings.
• Click Cancel to exit.
• To use a previously defined and saved user settings, select File > User Settings... from the drop menu and complete
one of the following options:
• From the drop menu, select Name and click OK to load the user defined preferences.
• Click Default to load the Map default settings.
• Click Cancel to exit.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Export Jumpers
The jumpers created in the IX1 Map (Layout tab) can be saved (backed up) for the current sub-project.
1. To export (save) the jumpers, click File > Export Jumpers from the drop menu. The Export Jumpers window displays.
2. Enter a name in the File Name field.
3. Click Save. The file is saved with *.jmp extension in the doc sub-directory of the current project (default location).
Import Jumpers
The jumpers previously saved (backed up) for a sub-project, can be re-used (restored) in the current sub-project or newly
created subproject.
1. To import (restore) the jumpers, click File > Import Jumpers from the drop menu. The Open window displays.
2. Select a file from the list to import.
3. Click Open to start importing jumpers.
Important!
Important!
The Layout and Network elements must be deleted from the iX1 Map before importing jumpers.

User Manual
4. If affected (by jumpers import) receiver lines already have a layout in the iX1 Map, the system issues a warning
message in the Import Jumper Error window.
5. Click to verify jumper definitions, if required. The window similar to the following displays.
6. Click OK from the Import Jumper Error window to return to the iX1 Map.
7. Delete layout from the affected receiver lines and import jumpers again.
Print Sub-Project
1. To print details about current sub-project, select File > Print Sub-Project from the drop menu. The Print Project File
pop-up displays.
2. Enable the required checkbox(es) for the data to be printed.
• Culture - prints culture information, including culture and color of the culture
• Patches - prints a report of all patches and source points assigned to each patch
• Coordinates - prints coordinate details for all source and receiver lines
• Sx/Rx Allocations - prints the source and receiver type allocation tables

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
3. Click OK to print. The user selected information displays in a text window similar to the following:
4. To print report to the default printing device, select File > Print (F2) from the drop menu. The Select Plotter pop-up
displays.
5. From the drop list, select a plotter or select Other to output to a printer.
6. Click OK to print.
7. To save report as a text document, select File > Save As from the drop menu. The Save As pop-up displays.

User Manual
8. Enter a name in the File Name field with *.txt extension.
9. Click Save. By default, the file is saved in the doc sub-directory of current project.
Print Map...
1. To print the iX1 Map Screen that currently displays, select File > Print Map from the drop menu. The Select Plotter pop-
up displays.
2. Select a plotter from the drop list or select Other to use a printer.
3. In the Scale section, select one of the following options:
• To Fit - Prints the Map Screen to fit the width of a single plotter page, where the X and Y coordinates are equal in
proportion. The scale is set automatically by the system.
• As Is - Prints the Map Screen exactly as it displays on the video monitor. The X and Y scales may not be in
proportion with the actual sub-project.
• To Scale - Prints the Map Screen to the user specified scale. If the Map Screen is too wide to fit a single strip of
plotter paper, a message displays indicating how many strips are required.
Example: If using 12 in. plotter paper and three strips are required, the finished map is approximately 36 in.
wide.
4. Click OK to print or plot the map.
Print Map Direct
• To print Map Screens based upon settings that are defined in “Print Setup” on page 243, select File > Print Map Direct
from the drop menu or press F2.
Note
If selected plotter is off-line, a warning pop-up displays.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Print Setup
1. To set up a printer or plotter for the current sub-project, select File > Print Setup from the drop menu.
2. Select a plotter from the drop menu, or select Other to use a printer.
3. In the Scale section, select one of the following options:
• To Fit - Prints the Map Screen to fit the width of a single plotter pace, where the X and Y coordinates are equal in
proportion. The scale is set automatically by the system.
• As Is - Prints the Map Screen exactly as it displays on the video monitor. The X and Y scales may not be in
proportion with the actual project.
• To Scale - Prints the Map Screen to the specified scale. If the Map Screen is too wide to fit on a single strip of
plotter paper at the selected scale, a message displays to indicate how many strips are required to plot the file.
Example: If using 12 in. plotter paper and three strips are required, the finished map is approximately 36 in. wide.
4. Click OK to save the settings and exit.

User Manual
Edit Drop Menu
The Edit drop menu contains options to configure ground equipment (geophones, Hawk and G3i HD receiver line cables), create
shot comments, and search for a particular module (serial number) in the existing spread.
Sensor Types
The Sensor Table is used to specify the type of sensors used in the seismic data acquisition. iX1 Map uses the manufacturer’s
specification data (that is entered in the Sensor Table) to test the receiver point sensors. Tolerances defined within the receiver
parameters are applied to the tests to easily identify equipment that is out of specification. It is important to correctly document the
type of sensors that is used during acquisition. Once defined, the sensor specifications are carried forward from project to project.
Note
Procedures for defining sensor type parameters are located in “Sensor Types” on page 184.
Cable Types
The Cable Table is used to define the G3i HD receiver line cable types used on a project. The values entered in the Cable Table
window are used in several areas of iX1 Map when testing and analyzing the spread.
Refer to the “Cable Types” on page 189 to properly define the G3i HD Receiver Line Cables.
Hawk Cable Types
The Hawk Cable Table is used to define the Hawk cable types used on a project.
Note
The option becomes available for Hybrid and Nodal modes of operation.
1. From the iX1 Map drop menu select Edit > Hawk Cable Types... The Hawk Cable Type window displays.
• Select Cable Type from the drop menu.
• Standard - only one type is available.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
• Select Geophone Type from the drop menu.
Note
Geophone Type must be defined before Cable Type.
• Enter the length of cable between takeouts in the Takeout Distance field.
• In the Resistance field enter the cable resistance value.
• Click Sensor Table to access the Sensor Table window for editing.
Colour Table
1. Select Edit > Colour Table... to view and edit the colours assigned to different shot point definitions in iX1 Map.
2. To change the colour for a particular shot point definition, click on the right side of the line to be edited.
3. To revert back to the default colour scheme, click .
4. Click to accept the changes and close the pop-up.
Shot Comments
The Shot Comments option is used to enter and attach a comment to the selected shot point. The Shot Comments field is
directly linked to the Shot Table in the database.
1. Select Edit > Shot Comments from the iX1 Map drop menu or click in the toolbar. The cursor changes to the shot
icon .
2. Place the shot icon over the shot point and click. The Shot Comments pop-up displays.
3. Enable the Warn checkbox to activate the shot warning message option. The warning message is issued in the
sub-command line before shot is fired. The observer has to acknowledge the warning to continue the acquisition
sequence.
4. Enter comments for the selected shot in the Comments field.

User Manual
5. Click OK to add the comments to the database.
The shot comment displays in other iX1 applications as follows:
• iX1 ObNotes in the Shot /Not Shot Table (x also displays in the Warn field).
• iX1 Vib in the Drill Log tab.
Select Current Shot
1. To view patch for the selected source point, select Edit > Select Current Shot from the drop menu or click in the
toolbar.
2. The cursor changes to the shot icon .
3. Place over the desired shot point and click.
4. The selected shot point is highlighted in different colours. The corresponding shot points (in the same patch) also
display as a single dot (color varies depending upon the shot point status).
Refer to the Table 1, “Shot Icons on iX1 Map Screen,” on page 256
Undo and Redo
The Undo option undoes the last edit commands (maximum three steps) in the iX1 Map. The Redo option reverses the Undo
command.
• Select Edit > Undo from the drop menu or click in the toolbar. The Map Screen returns to the previous
configuration.
• Select Edit > Redo from the drop menu or click in the toolbar to reverse the Undo command.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Find S/N
1. To find a serial number of a RAM, FTU, PSU, Netlink or FSU that is in the current visible spread, select Edit > Find S/N
(Ctrl+F) from the drop menu to display the Find Serial Number pop-up.
2. Select the device type from the drop list then enter the serial number in the S/N field.
3. Click OK to locate (highlight with a cyan marker) the selected device on the iX1 Map Screen.
Properties
1. To define the maximum number of consecutive edit steps that can be undone, select Edit > Properties from the drop
menu to display the Undo Depth pop-up.
2. In the Depth field, select the number of consecutive edit steps to undo (maximum 3).
3. Click OK to apply the selection.

User Manual
View Drop Menu
The View drop menu options are used to display the different type of information in the iX1 Map.
For additional information, refer to the following pages:
• Tool Bar - (page 287)
• Status Bar - (page 288)
Message, RAM Info, and Channel Info Views
The Message, RAM Info, and Channel Info views are used to display information windows in the right side of the iX1 Map.
• Message View - Displays the type of annotation used in iX1 Map Screen.
• RAM Info (PSU Info, and Analog FTU Info) View - Displays the RAM, PSU, FSU, FTU and Patch information,
depending upon the iX1 Map Tab selected and where the cursor is placed on the iX1 Map Screen.
• Channel Info View - Displays the Channel, Station, Network and Shot Info information, depending upon the iX1
Map Tab selected and where the cursor is placed on the iX1 Map Screen..
• To display the Message view, RAM Info view and/or Channel Info view, select the View drop menu and click on the
appropriate view (checkmark displays beside the option). To hide the window, click the selected option again
(checkmark no longer displays).
• Click, hold, and drag the Message, RAM Info, and/or Channel Info windows anywhere on the screen.
Default View
• Select View > Default View from the drop menu to display the Message, RAM Info, and Channel Info views, as well
as the iX1 Map Tabs window with the best resolution.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Tracking View
The Tracking View option allows the user to review the vehicle movements saved in the project database on the iX1 Map Screen
and to export way points to a *.gpx file.
1. Select View > Tracking View from the drop menu.
• Enable the Show checkbox to display the way points for the moving objects (vehicles) on the Map Screen.
• Enable the checkboxes to display the required vehicles shown by ID number in the Show column.
• Use the slide bar to select a date and time.
Note
The vehicle position way points are shown in the Map Screen starting from 0.00 AM of the selected day.
• To change the color of a vehicle tracking tail with way points, click on individual color bar.
2. Click to update the Map Screen when a new date and/or color is defined. The way points for the selected
vehicle display on the Map Screen as colored points. The last recorded position of the vehicle is shown as a
colored circle that surrounds the point.
3. Click to export the way points for the tracked vehicles into a *.gpx file, if required.

User Manual
Configure Drop Menu
The Configure options show or hide a various types of information on the iX1 Map Screen.
Network
Network On/Off
The Network On/Off option displays/hides the active network information on the iX1 Map Screen. When is set to off, only the
receiver and source points (lines) display.
Note
The option is grayed out (not available) for Test, Network, and Layout Tabs.The Network On/Off option
does NOT power on/off the Network.
1. Select Configure > Network > Network On/Off from the drop menu, or click in the toolbar. A checkmark beside
Network On/Off in the drop menu indicates the network elements display on the Map Screen.
Truck On/Off
The Truck On/Off option is used to display/hide the recording unit (truck or boat) icon on the Map Screen, as well as the baseline
and repeaters that display between the recording unit icon and the network (first FTU).
Note
The option is grayed out (not available) for Network Tab.
1. Select Configure > Network > Truck On/Off from the drop menu or click in the toolbar. A checkmark beside
Truck On/Off in the drop menu indicates the recording truck icon display on the iX1 Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Patch
On/Off
The Patch On/Off option is used to display/hide the active patch on the iX1 Map Screen.
Note
The option is grayed out (not available) for Network Tab.
1. Select Configure > Patch > Patch On/Off (P) from the drop menu or click on the toolbar. A checkmark beside
Patch On/Off in the drop menu indicates the patch display on the Map Screen.
Outline
The Outline option is used in 3D projects only to highlight the active patch by outlining the perimeter of the patch in white.
Note
The Patch On/Off option must be On to use the Outline Patch option (refer to “On/Off” on page 251).
• To outline the patch, select Configure > Patch > Outline from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Outline in the drop
menu indicates the white outline display around the patch on the iX1 Map Screen.

User Manual
Next Patch
• Select Configure > Patch > Next Patch (Ctrl+P) from the drop menu to advance from the current patch display to the
next patch display.
Previous Patch
• Select Configure > Patch > Previous Patch (Shift+P) from the drop menu to move from the current patch display back
to the preceding patch display.
Goto Patch
1. To select a patch by the patch number, select Configure > Patch > Goto Patch from the drop menu. The Select Patch
pop-up displays.
2. In the Patch field, enter the patch number to display.
3. Click OK to display the selected patch number.
Lock Patch
• To lock the patch in the current position (for display purposes only), select Configure > Patch > Lock Patch from the
drop menu. A checkmark beside Lock Patch in the drop menu indicates the patch is locked on the iX1 Map Screen.
Offset Circle
1. To display the offset circle around the shot point at a specified offset, select Configure > Patch > Offset Circle from the
drop menu. The following pop-up displays.
2. Enable the Offset checkbox and enter the desired offset.
3. Click OK.
4. Complete one of the following options:
• Select Edit > Select Current Shot from the drop menu.
• Click Current Shot icon in the toolbar.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
5. The cursor changes to the shot icon . Place over the shot point and click. A white offset circles display
around the shot point, which is based upon the defined offset.
CMP Plot
• To display the common midpoints (CMP) between the selected shot and all receiver stations within the active patch,
select Configure > Patch > CMP Plot from the drop menu. A checkmark beside CMP Plot in the drop menu indicates
the common midpoints currently display on the iX1 Map Screen. A line of white dots illustrates the CMP plot on the iX1
Map Screen.

User Manual
RAM/FTU/FSU
Note
The Status/Telemetry test must be run first to display Port/Side, Serial Number, Battery Volts, and Low
Battery information.
Cycle Annotation
• The Cycle Annotation option is used to cycle through all RAM/FTU/FSU display options without opening the Configure
drop menu.To use the Cycle Annotation option, select Configure > RAM/FTU/FSU > Cycle Annotation, or press the
hot key (A). The current annotation in the cycle displays in the Message window.
No RAM Annotation
• Select Configure > RAM/FTU/FSU > No Annotation from the drop menu to prevent annotations from displaying for
RAMs, PSUs, FSUs, FTUs and Netlinks on the iX1 Map Screen. A checkmark beside No Annotation in the drop menu
indicates that annotations will NOT display on the Map Screen.
Port/Side
• To display the Port/Side numbers that each RAM is linked to (A or B side of a FTU), select Configure > RAM/FTU/FSU
> Port/Side option from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Port/Side in the drop menu indicates the port and side
numbers display on the iX1 Map Screen.
Serial Number
• To display the RAM, PSU, FSU, Netlinks, and FTUs serial numbers, select Configure > RAM/FTU/FSU > Serial
Number from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Serial Numbers in the drop menu indicates the RAM, PSU, FSU,
Netlink and FTU serial numbers display on the iX1 Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Flag Number
• To display the receiver station flag numbers (low side of the unit location) on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure >
RAM/FTU/FSU > Flag Number from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Flag Number indicates the receiver station
flag numbers display on the Map Screen.
Battery Volts
The Battery Volts option is used to display the voltage of battery that is connected to each PSU, NetLink, FTU and FSU. If the
battery voltage falls below the defined tolerance level, a red flag displays at the location of the device and the voltage reading
displays in red.
Note
The battery tolerance level is defined under Test > Battery Tolerance from the drop menu.
• To display the battery voltages on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > RAM/FTU/FSU> Battery Volts from the
drop menu. A checkmark beside Battery Volts indicates the battery voltages display on the Map Screen.
Low Batteries
The Low Batteries option is used to display a red flag, and the receiver station number on the low side of PSUs, FTUs, Netlinks,
and FSUs with low battery levels.
• To display units with low battery level on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > RAM/FTU/FSU> Low Batteries from
the drop menu. A checkmark beside Low Batteries indicates that only the batteries outside (low) of the defined
tolerance level display on the Map Screen.

User Manual
Shots
SP Not Shot, Not Current SP Taken More Than Once
SP Taken More Than Once

SP for Current Patch
Currently Selected
SP for Current Patch

SP Taken, but Omitted
Currently Selected
SP Taken, but Omitted

SP Taken
Currently Selected
SP Taken SP Taken
Currently Selected COG within Offset Tolerance
SP Taken
COG outside Offset Tolerance
Table 1: Shot Icons on iX1 Map Screen
Cycle Annotation
The Cycle Annotation option is used to cycle through all Shots display options without opening the Configure drop menu.
• To use the Cycle Annotation option, select Configure > Shots > Cycle Annotation, or press the hot key (Ctrl+S). The
current annotation in the cycle displays in the Message window.
Lock to Acquisition
The Lock to Acquisition option is used to display the active spread (patch) for the current shot that is set in the highlighted
(current) sub-command line.
Note
The option is available for Test Tab only. INOVA recommends to use this option to pre-test the patch (run
the phone test) before shot (current shot in the sub-command line) is fired.
1. To lock the iX1 Map Screen to the Command Line settings, select Configure > Shots >Lock to Acquisition or click
in the toolbar.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
No Shots
• To hide the shot icons on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Shots > No Shots from the drop menu. A
checkmark beside No Shots indicates that shot icons will not display on the Map Screen.
All + Taken
• To display all shots on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Shots > All + Taken from the drop menu. A checkmark
beside All + Taken indicates that the following shots display on the Map Screen:
• SP Taken
• SP Not Shot, Not Current
• SP for Current Patch
Refer to “Shot Icons on iX1 Map Screen” on page 256
Shots Not Taken
• To display the shots not taken yet, select Configure > Shots > Shots Not Taken from the drop menu. A checkmark
beside Shots Not Taken indicates that the following shots display on the Map Screen:
• SP Not Shot, Not Current
• SP for Current Patch
Taken Only
• To display only shots already taken on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Shots > Taken Only from the drop
menu. A checkmark beside Taken Only indicates that the following shots display on the Map Screen:
• SP Taken
• SP Taken More Than Once
• SP Taken, but Omitted
Taken Today
• To display only shots taken today on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Shots > Taken Today from the drop
menu. A checkmark beside Taken Today indicates that the following shots display on the Map Screen:
• SP Taken (today only)
• SP Taken More Than Once (today only)
• SP Taken, but Omitted (today only)

User Manual
Current Shot
• To display only shots for the current patch on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Shots > Current Shot from the
drop menu. A checkmark beside Current Shot indicates that the following shots display on the Map Screen:
• SP for Current Shot
• SP for Current Patch, Currently Selected
• SP Taken (for the current patch)
• SP Taken, but Omitted (for the current patch)
• SP Taken More Than Once (for the current patch)
Taken + Current
• To display all shots taken outside of the current patch and shots for the current patch on the iX1 Map Screen, select
Configure > Shots > Taken + Current from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Current + Taken indicates that all
shots taken and the current shot (except SP Not Shot (Not Current)) display on the Map Screen.
Actual COG Location
• To display all shots taken with calculated COG on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Shots > Taken Today from
the drop menu. A checkmark beside Taken Today indicates that the following shots display on the Map Screen:
• SP Taken, COG within Offset Tolerance
• SP Taken, COG outside Offset Tolerance
Swaths
Note
The Swath Management option must be activated in the Critical Parameters during the project building
process in the iX1 Vib.
• To display all shot points (shots) separated by Swath ID # on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Shots > Swaths
from the drop menu. The Select Swaths pop-up display.
• Select the Swath ID to display on the iX1 Map Screen.
Refer to “Swath ID (Sxy)” on page 324 for additional information.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Annotation
Receiver Line
• To display/hide the receiver line numbers on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Annotation > Receiver Line
from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Receiver Line indicates the receiver line numbering displays on the Map
Screen.
Receiver Flag
• To display/hide the receiver flag numbers on the iX1 Map, select Configure > Annotation > Receiver Flag from the
drop menu. A checkmark beside Receiver Flag indicates the receiver flag numbering displays on the Map Screen.
Source Line
• To display/hide the source line numbers on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Annotation > Source Line (Cfrom
the drop menu. A checkmark beside Source Line indicates the source line numbering displays on the Map Screen.

User Manual
Source Flag
• To display/hide the source flag numbers on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Annotation > Source Flag from
the drop menu. A checkmark beside Source Flag indicates the source flag numbering displays on the Map Screen.
Culture
• To display/hide the culture objects on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Annotation > Culture from the drop
menu. A checkmark beside the Culture option indicates the culture objects display on the Map Screen.
Note
If the Fold, GDC, or Culture Tab is selected on the iX1 Map, the Culture option is grayed out.
Overlay
• To display/hide the overlay images on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Annotation > Overlay from the drop
menu. A checkmark beside Overlay indicates that the overlay images display on the Map Screen.
Cable Breaks
• To display/hide the cable break icons on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Annotation > Cable Breaks from the
drop menu. A checkmark beside the Cable Breaks option indicates that the cable break icons display on the Map
Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Coordinates
• To see only receiver and source coordinates on the iX1 Map Screen, select RXY or SXY Tab and depress the
Net On/Off and Display Patch icons from the iX1 Map Tool Bar.
Source
• To display/hide source points on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Coordinates > Source from the drop menu.
A checkmark beside the Source option indicates the source points currently display on the Map Screen.
Receiver
• To display/hide receiver coordinates (RXY) on the iX1 Map Screen, select Configure > Coordinates > Receiver from
the drop menu. A checkmark beside the Receiver option indicates the receiver coordinates display on the Map Screen.
Arcs
Skipped Channels
The Skipped Channels option is used to display the layout jumpers as arcs (makes skipped channels easier to see on the Map
Screen).
• Select Configure > Arcs > Skipped Channels from the drop menu. A checkmark beside the Skipped Channels
option indicates the skipped channels display as arcs on the iX1 Map Screen.

User Manual
Baselines
The Baselines option is used to display baselines as curved or straight lines.
• Select Configure > Arcs > Baselines from the drop menu. A checkmark beside the Baselines option indicates the
baselines display as curved lines on the iX1 Map Screen. Otherwise, the baselines display as a straight line.
Data Arrows (In)
The Data Arrows (In) option is used to display arrows that illustrate the direction of data flow from devices to the recorder on the
baselines.
• Select Configure > Arcs > Data Arrows (In) from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Data Arrows (In) indicates that
the direction of data flow display on the iX1 Map Screen.
Power Arrows (Out)
The Power Arrows (Out) option is used to display arrows that illustrate the direction of power up process on the baselines when
starting the iX1 software.
• Select Configure > Arcs > Power Arrows (Out) from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Power Arrows (Out)
indicates that the direction of the power up process display on the iX1 Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Zoom Drop Menu
The Zoom options are used to magnify, shrink, and rotate the sub-project on the iX1 Map Screen, as well as adjust the size of
icons and screen fonts. In the Zoom drop menu, the Network, Project, and Patch options display a percentage that indicates the
level of zoom currently applied to sub-project.
Network Zoom
• Select Zoom > Network (Z) from the drop menu to zoom in and display only the current active network on the iX1 Map
Screen.
Project
• Select Zoom > Project (Ctrl+Z) from the drop menu to displays the entire active sub-project on the iX1 Map Screen.
Patch
• Select Zoom > Patch (Shift+Z) from the drop menu to display the current patch on the iX1 Map Screen.
Zoom Box
1. Select Zoom > Zoom Box (Ctrl+Shift+Z) from the drop menu or click icon from the toolbar to select an area to
magnify and display on the iX1 Map Screen. The cursor changes to .
2. Place the cursor over the area to magnify. Click, hold, and drag diagonally to outline the desired area.
3. When the area is selected, release the mouse and click again. The selected area is magnified and displays on the
iX1 Map Screen.
Un Zoom
• Select Zoom > Un Zoom (U) from the drop menu to undo the last zoom operation and returns to the previous view.
• The mouse wheel can also be used to zoom/ unzoom the sub-project around the mouse pointer in the iX1 Map Screen.
• Magnify - Roll the wheel forward to zoom into an area on the Map Screen.
• De-magnify - Roll the wheel backward to zoom out from the magnified area on the Map Screen.
• Move the sub-project - Click, hold, and drag the object (receiver or source line) with the all details to the desired
location.

User Manual
Icon Scale
1. To adjust the size of all icons that display on the iX1 Map Screen, including network/layout elements, recording truck,
culture icons, etc., select Zoom > Icon Scale from the drop menu.
2. In the Scale field, select a percentage value (increments of 10) to increase/decrease the size of the icons.
3. Click OK to apply the new value.
Font Point Size
1. To change the font size of all annotation information on the iX1 Map Screen, Massage, RAM Info, and Channel Info
viewers, select Zoom > Font Point Size from the drop menu.
2. In the Point Size field, enter the desired font size in points (5-20 pt).
3. Click OK to apply the new point size.
To Scale
1. To apply the same scale to both the X- and Y-axis, select Zoom > To Scale from the drop menu.
Refresh
• To update the iX1 Map Screen with all recent edits, select Zoom > Refresh (F) from the drop menu.
Note
Press F5 to update the iX1 Map Screen to correspond with the iX1 Vib software. The iX1 Map must be
Locked to Acquisition.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Rotate
1. To rotate subproject that displays on the iX1 Map Screen (e.g., receiver lines that display diagonally can be rotated to
display horizontally), select Zoom > Rotate from the drop menu. The Bearing pop-up displays.
• Click Bearing and enter a degree value to rotate all subproject elements. Refer to “Bearing Angles” on page 265
• Click No Rotation to return subproject to the original view.
• Click To Near Axis to rotate subproject clockwise (maximum 90° to the closest axis: horizontal or vertical).
Example: A receiver line aligned at -45°rotates to the horizontal axis (0°).
3. Click OK to apply the selection.
Figure 2 Bearing Angles

User Manual
Test Drop Menu
The Test drop menu options are used to set the test parameters, battery voltage warning threshold, and remotely update the
Firmware on already deployed RAMs/PSUs/FTUs/Netlinks (visible from the CRS).
Important!
Important!
The Test Tab must be selected, to view the Test drop menu in the iX1 Map.
Battery Tolerance
The Battery Tolerance option is used to define the minimum battery voltage for all devices that are used on a subproject. When
a battery that is connected to a PSU, FTU or FSU falls below the specified voltage, a red flag displays beside the corresponding
device icon.
1. To define the battery tolerance, select Test > Battery Tolerance from the drop menu. The Battery Tolerance pop-up
displays.
• In the Tolerance field, enter the required voltage tolerance value (from 10.1 to 16.0).
• Enable the Report Errors checkbox to include battery faults in the map’s report error description.
2. Click OK to apply the battery tolerance value.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Test Parameters
The Test Parameters option is used to define internal Low Distortion Oscillator (LDO) frequencies for various G3i HD channel
tests.
1. To define the channel test parameters select Test > Test Parameters from the drop menu. The Test Parameters
window displays.
• In the THD, XFD, and CMR Frequency fields, select the required frequencies.
• In the Telemetry Test Duration field, select a time value (in milliseconds) to define the length of telemetry test in
the Test Tab.
• In the Test Repeat Delay field, select a value (in seconds) to define a time delay between the batch of tests in the
repetitive test mode.
2. Click OK to set the test parameters.
Hawk Parameters
The Hawk Parameters option is used to define the QC threshold values to report FSUs that fall outside of the specified values in
the iX1 Map Screen and Hawk Info window.
• To define the Hawk QC parameters select Test > Hawk Parameters from the drop menu. The Hawk Parameters
window displays.
• In the Last Status Time field, enter the maximum time tolerance from the last FSU status update.
• In the Max Memory Capacity Used, select the maximum percentage of FSU memory used tolerance.

User Manual
Auto Update
The Auto Update option automatically runs the Status Test at defined intervals on the existing network. This option also can be
used together with Lock to Acquisition functionality. Refer to “Lock to Acquisition” on page 256.
1. Select Test > Auto Update (Ctrl+A) from the drop menu. The Auto Update pop-up displays.
2. In the Time (Sec) field, complete one of the following options:
• Enter the auto update interval (in seconds).
• Enter OFF to disable the Auto Update option.
3. Click OK to apply new auto update interval.
Query All
The Query All option performs network channel and sensor tests for all equipment that is connected to the CRS, or that is defined
in the network. The results of the first test is saved within the current project folder in the doc sub-directory as a QuerryAll.001.
New files are automatically created every time when QuerryAll selected with an extension (i.e.,*.001, *.002, *.003, etc).
• Select Test > Query All (Ctrl+Q) from the drop menu to perform the network channel and geophone tests. Test reports
are saved in the doc sub-directory.
Load Firmware
Note
Normally RAMs/FTUs/PSUs need the firmware upgrade after new iX1 software installation.
The Load Firmware option is used to update (load) new firmware into RAMs/FTUs/PSUs that are currently deployed and visible
from the CRS.
The iX1 system automatically detects RAM/FTU/PSU units that need firmware upgrade and shows it in:
• iX1 Vib (Digital Tab)
• iX1 Map Screen and Message View

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
1. To update (load) new firmware into devices that are currently deployed in the field, select Test > Load Firmware from
the drop menu. The Load Firmware window displays.
2. Ensure the corresponding checkboxes are enabled in the Load column and click Load to start the process. Wait
until system finishes the upgrade.
Green Update is not required

Yellow Update is required
Magenta Update is in progress
Red Error has occurred
3. Click Abort to stop the process.
4. Click Close to exit.
5. Click Power Cycle to reset the devices.
6. Click Refresh to update the information in the top window.

User Manual
7. Click View Log File to view RAMs/FTUs/PSUs firmware versions before and after loading the firmware.
8. Click Clear Log to delete the information inside the message (bottom) window.
Reports Drop Menu
The Reports options are used to view and print different report types.
Note
Print Test, View Test, Test to File, Print Error, View Error, and View Failures options are available for
Test Tab only.
Print Test Report
1. To print a test report of the most recent test, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > Print Test from the drop menu.
3. Select plotter from Select Plotter pop-up.
4. Click OK.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
View Test Report
The View Test Report option provides all test results acquired from the most recent phone, channel, or status/telemetry test.
Note
Test reports can be printed or saved to disk. This report is updated after every test.
1. To view a test report of the most recent test, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View Test from the drop menu. The View Test Report window displays (information varies
depending upon the type of the last performed test).
Test to File Report
1. From the iX1 Map, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > Test to File from the drop menu. The Save As window displays. The path to doc sub-directory of
the current project displays by default. If required, navigate to a different location.
3. Enter a file name and select the file type (test report default extension is *.txt).
4. Click Save.
Print Error Report
1. To print the most recent error report (includes faulty channels only), click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from
the drop menu.
2. Select Report > Print Error from the drop menu.
3. Select plotter from Select Plotter pop-up.
4. Click OK.

User Manual
View Error Report
The View Error option is used to show a list of errors acquired from the most recent status/telemetry, channel or phone test. This
report is updated after every test.
1. To view an error report, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View Error from the drop menu. The View Error Report window displays.
View Failures Report
The View Failures option is used to view all failures acquired from the most recent channel or phone test. This report is updated
after every test.
1. To view a failure report, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View Failures from the drop menu. The Failures Report window displays.
3. Channels that failed the phone or channel tests are also reported in the iX1 Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Figure 3 Battery Status Reports
View S/N Battery Report
The View S/N Battery report provides the location of every device in the network and includes information about the following:
• Receiver line and station of RAM/FTU/PSU/FSU/NetLink locations
• Serial numbers
• Battery voltage for all connected batteries
This report is updated after every test.
1. To view the S/N Battery report, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View S/N Battery from the drop menu. The Battery Report window displays.
Refer to Figure 3 for additional information.
View S/N Low Battery Only Report
The View S/N Low Battery Only report provides a list of all devices (in the network) that are connected to batteries that fell
below the tolerance level (defined under Test > Battery Tolerance).
1. To view a S/N Low Battery report, click the Test Tab or select Mode >Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View S/N Low Battery Only from the drop menu. The Battery Report window displays.

User Manual
View Flag Battery Report
The View S/N Battery report provides a location of all devices in the network that are connected to batteries and includes
information about the following:
• Receiver line and station (flag) of FTU/PSU/FSU locations
• Serial numbers
• Battery voltage for all connected batteries
1. To view the Flag Battery report, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View Flag Battery from the drop menu. The Battery Report window displays.
View Flag Low Battery Only Report
The View S/N Low Battery Only report provides a location of all devices (on the network) that are connected to batteries that fell
below the tolerance level (defined under Test > Battery Tolerance).
1. To view a Flag Low Battery report, click the Test Tab or select Mode >Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View Flag Low Battery Only from the drop menu. The Battery Report window displays.
View Visible Channels Report
The View Visible Channels option provides a summary report about the geophone type properties for all channels on the
network. This report is updated after every test.
1. To view the Channel Summary report, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View Visible Channels from the drop menu. The Channel Summary window displays.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
View Project Statistics Report
The Project Statistics report provides a summary about the survey (project) that includes the following information:
• Number of receiver lines and receiver coordinates
• Total receiver line distance
• Number of source lines and coordinates
• Total source line distance
• Number of shots taken
• Total project area size
This report is updated after every shot.
1. To view the Project Statistics report, click the Test tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View Project Statistics from the drop menu. The following pop-up displays.
3. In the Maximum Skips field, enter the required number of skips. If the number of skips that occur is higher than the
value entered in the Maximum Skips field, skips are not included in the total distance for a line count.
4. Click OK. The Project Statistics window displays.

User Manual
View XY Skid/Offset Only Report
The View XY Skid/Offset Only Report option is only available when skid/offset information is set on the Sxy and Rxy Tabs in the
iX1 Map. The XY Skid/Offset Only report provides the skid and offset details for either receiver or source lines. The following
information is included in the report:
• Line Number/Flag Number
• Easting/Northing
• Skid/Offset
Important!
Important!
Skid and offset options cannot be used to move the receiver or source points that were imported into the
iX1 Map.
1. To view the Skid/Offset report, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View XY Skid/Offset Only from the drop menu. The Skid/Offset Report window displays:
Note
Skid and offset information that have been imported to the database from Drill Logs do NOT display in
this report.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
View Layout Skips Only Report
The View Layout Skips report provides information about the first RAM in a layout for all receiver lines and detailed skips report.
1. To view the latest Layout Skip report, click the Test Tab or select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu.
2. Select Report > View Layout Skips Only from the drop menu. The Layout Report window displays.
Append S/N Battery File
When selected, the Append S/N Battery File option automatically updates (appends) the battery status information (voltage)
from the last test to the S/N Battery Report (BatRpt.txt) that is stored in the project temp folder.

User Manual
Tools Drop Menu
The Tools options are used to locate devices and measure the distance between objects on the iX1 Map Screen.
RAM/FTU Find
The RAM/FTU Find tool provides information about the RAMs/FTUs/PSUs/FSUs and Netlinks the last seen by system location.
The system updates the database from project to project overwriting it with every new device location in the network.
The following information is included in the RAM/FTU Find report:
• Date/time
• Project name
• Serial Number
• Receiver line
• Flag number
• Latitude/Longitude
The history database can be sorted, exported to file, printed, and searched.
• To use RAM/FTU Find option, select Tools > RAM/FTU Find from the drop menu. The Locate RAM/FTU window
displays.
• Click on one of the following buttons to display::
List of located RAMs List of located PSUs
List of located FTUs List of located FSUs
List of located Netlinks
• Click on a column header to re-sort the information by:
• Date • Receiver Line

• Project • Flag number
• Serial Number • Latitude
• Longitude

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Locate Devices by Serial Number
1. To locate a device using the serial number, select Tools > RAM/FTU Find from the drop menu.
2. Click . The Locate Serial Number pop-up displays.
3. In the Device field, select the device type from the drop list.
4. In the S/N field, enter the serial number to locate.
5. Select Analog or Digital system.
6. Click OK to find the required information and display it in the Located S/N # window.
Locate Devices by Age
The Locate Devices by Age option is used to locate and display devices within a selected time frame.
1. To locate a device by age, select Tools > RAM/FTU Find from the drop menu.
2. Click . The Locate S/N Older Than pop-up displays.
3. To display different history data by a selected time frame, select one of the following options:
• All Time - Enable to display the entire list of used devices
• Date field - Enable and select a date from the calendar to search from (since)
• Older than - Select a value to define how far back (number of days) to start the search from (since)

User Manual
4. Click OK. Depending upon the options selected, the located devices display in the window and the selection
parameters display at the top of the window. In this example, the FTU (T000096) have not seen in the network
within the past 160 days
Export Way Points
The device locations in Lat/Long can be exported into a *.sp1 or *.gpx file and stored in the doc sub-directory by default.
1. Select Tools > RAM/FTU Find from the drop menu to open the Locate RAM/FTU window.
2. Sort the located devices database by type, serial number or age.
3. Select the required amount of rows to export.
4. Select File > Export Way Points from the drop menu.
5. In the Save As pop-up displays, enter a file name for the exported way point file and choose the type (*.sp1 or
*.gpx).
6. Click Save to save the file to doc sub-directory of the current project.
Export to Culture
The Export to Culture option is used to identify the selected devices on the iX1 Map Screen with ? .
1. Select Tools > RAM/FTU Find from the drop menu to open the Locate RAM/FTU window.
3. Select the required amount of devices (rows) to locate.
4. Select File > Export to Culture from the drop menu or click ? .
5. The selected devices are identified on the iX1 Map Screen with ? .
6. To delete individual icons ? from the Map Screen, click on the Culture tab. The cursor changes to an
arrow/edit icon.
7. Place the cursor over ? . When a white box displays over the icon, click to delete the icon.
Note
Use the RAM Find button to delete all ? icons on the iX1 Map Screen. Refer to “Delete RAM Find
(Culture)” on page 402.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Print to File
1. Select Tools > RAM/FTU Find from the drop menu.
3. Select File > Print to File from the drop menu or click on the toolbar.
4. Click Browse to navigate to the required folder (default is doc sub-directory of the current project).
5. In the Save As window, enter a file name (default is *.rth extension).
6. Click Save to save the information that contains in the current window to file.
File Viewer
1. To use File Viewer option to display text files (reports) that are saved in the doc sub-directory of current project, select
Tools > File Viewer from the iX1 Map drop menu. The File Viewer window displays the last text file written to the doc
sub-directory.
2. To open a different test report, select File > Open from the drop menu or click .
Find Truck
1. To use Find Truck option to display the truck icon in the middle of the iX1 Map Screen (default location), ensure the
display truck icon is enabled. If required, click icon on the toolbar.
2. Select Tools > Find Truck from the drop menu. The truck icon displays in the center of the iX1 Map Screen.

User Manual
Distance
The Distance option is used to calculate:
• Distance between two defined points
• Distance around the edge of a defined shape (polygon)
(X,Y,Z)→(X,Y,Z)
The (X,Y,Z)→(X,Y,Z) button is used to determine the distance between any two points (receiver or source points) on the iX1 Map
Screen.
1. To define two points and determine the distance between them, select Tools > Distance... from the drop menu. The
Distance window displays.
2. Click . The cursor changes to an arrow/edit icon .
3. On the iX1 Map Screen, click on the point to begin the measurement and drag the mouse to the second point, and
then click again. The distance displays in meters/feet, depending upon how the grid units are defined under
Parameters > Project Header > Acquisition Geometry (Grid Units) in the iX1 Vib.
Polygon
1. To define a polygon and calculate the cumulative distance of a line(s), select Tools > Distance... from the drop menu.
The Distance window displays
2. Click . The cursor changes to an arrow/edit icon .
3. Click on the point to start the polygon and drag to the next point, and then click again. Continue to drag and click
until the desired geometrical shape is complete.
4. Right-click when the shape is complete. The distance displays in meters/feet, depending upon how the grid units
are defined under Parameters > Project Header > Acquisition Geometry (Grid Units) in iX1 Vib.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Database Drop Menu
The Database options are used to retrieve the information that was originally saved to the project database such as receiver/
source point coordinates, and patch information pertaining to a recorded shot point.
Patch
1. To recover patch information for a selected shot that already taken, click (Current Shot button) from the iX1 Map
Tool Bar. The cursor changes to .
2. Place the cursor over the desired shot point (to acquire archived patch information for) and click.
3. Select Database > Patch from the drop menu. The patch information for the selected shot point displays in the
view windows. If the recovered database patch exists, the overwrite patch pop-up displays.
4. Click Yes to overwrite the Patch database or click No to cancel.
Read Coordinates
The Read Coordinates option retrieves coordinates from the database and is also used to simplify managing of large projects.
Some coordinates can be removed from the iX1 Map Screen so that only a small section of the sub-project displays. When more
coordinates are required to continue or complete the project, the originally saved coordinates are then retrieved from the
database.
1. To retrieve coordinates from the database, select Database > Read Coordinates... from the drop menu. The following
pop-up displays.
2. Select a required sub-project to retrieve coordinates from and click OK.
3. On the iX1 Map, select File > Save Sub-Project from the drop menu or click in the toolbar after that.

User Manual
Mode Drop Menu
The Mode options provide access to the iX1 Map Tabs that are used to create, edit the sub-project and test field equipment.
Refer to “iX1 Map Tabs” on page 289 for additional information on the Tabs functionalities..
Auto Size
• Select (enable) Mode > Auto Size (checkmark displays beside the option) from the drop menu.
• Manually adjust the size of iX1 Map Tabs window for any selected Tab (Mode). The system remembers the size of
individual Tab (Mode) windows and then opens them accordingly.
• Disable Auto Size option (checkmark no longer displays) to return to the same size window option for all Tabs (Modes).

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Help Drop Menu
Hot Keys
• Select Help > Hot Keys... to display a list of available hot keys.

User Manual
Legend
• Select Help > Legend... to display the legend of icons used in the iX1 Map Screen.
About iX1 Map
• Select Help > About iX1 Map... to display the iX1 Map software version number.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Tool Bar
Toolbar Toolbar Button

Button Icon Name
New Create new sub-project (page 229)
Open Open an existing sub-project file (*.spf) (page 230)
Save Save the active sub-project (page 236)
Print Print current iX1 Map Screen (page 242)
Select Current Shot Select the current shot on the iX1 Map Screen (page 246)
Edit Shot Comments Add shot comments to a selected shot point on the iX1 Map Screen (page 245)
Erase Test Values Erase all test values obtained (page 381)
Undo Undo the last edit command (page 246)
Redo Redo the last undo command (page 246)
Net On/Off Show/hide the network on the iX1 Map Screen (page 250)
Truck On/Off Show/hide the recording truck icon on the iX1 Map Screen (page 250)
Display Patch Show/hide the patch on the iX1 Map Screen (page 251)
Click and drag over the iX1 Map Screen area and click again to zoom into the area
Zoom
selected (page 263)
Lock to Acquisition Lock the iX1 Map to the current Command Line settings (page 256)
File Viewer Open reports in a simple text editor (Notepad) (page 281)
Tracking Enable/disable the display of vehicle tracking on the iX1 Map Screen (page 397)
Low Power Mode Off Restore FTU/PSU to normal power mode of operation (page 288)
Display/Hide Toolbar
• To display/hide the toolbar, select View > Tool Bar from the drop menu. A checkmark beside the Tool Bar indicates it is
displaying.
• Click Tool Bar again to remove the checkmark and remove the toolbar from the iX1 Map.
• If the toolbar is undocked from the main window, click X to hide the toolbar.

User Manual
Undock/Move
• To undock the toolbar, click, hold, and drag it to the desired location and release the mouse button. When the toolbar is
dragged below the program title bar, to the far left, right, or bottom edge of the window, the toolbar snaps into place on
the edge of the window and becomes a docked toolbar.
Low Power Mode Off
The FTU/PSU goes into the Low Power Mode when the battery voltage drops below 9.5V. The unit automatically turns off the
power output on the away from truck side that results in powering down the rest of the line.
1. To restore FTU/PSU to normal power mode of operation, click on the icon the cursor changes to .
2. Place cursor over FTU/PSU icon on the iX1 Map Screen and click.
3. Run the Status/Telemetry test.
Status Bar
The Status Bar (located at the bottom of the iX1 Map window) displays a variety of information.
Status View
• Low-Cut/High-Cut filters
• Sample Rate, Preamp Gain
• Current Shot Point
• Source Line, Source Point
• Patch Number
• Current Computer Time
Tabs Help View
Shows the description of tab functionality including the mouse right button functions (right-click functions are highlighted in cyan).

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
iX1 Map Tabs
The ten tabs provided in iX1 Map are used to create, edit the sub-project parameters and test the field equipment.
All sub-projects require parameters to be defined on the following tabs:
• Rxy Tab (Receiver coordinates) (page 290)
• Sxy Tab (Source coordinates) (page 311)
• Patch Tab (Patch definition) (page 329)
• Or by using the imported receiver/source coordinates and patch information (page 230)
• Layout Tab (Layout definition) (page 348)
• Net Tab (Network definition) (page 365)
Note
The Fold, Culture, and GDC Tabs are used only as required. The Test Tab is used to test the field
equipment.
GDC Tab
The Geophysical Data Characterization (GDC) Tab options are used to analyze the quality of seismic data during acquisition.
Raw seismic data is passed through the GDC analysis in the iX1 Video Plot and results are plotted on the iX1 Map Screen
relative to specified criteria. Refer to “View GDC in iX1 Map” on page 576.

User Manual
Rxy Tab
The Rxy Tab is used to create 2D and 3D receiver station coordinates, delete, add, and/or extend receiver stations (lines), and
define (edit) stations by instrument and receiver types.
• To display the Rxy Tab options, select Mode > Rxy Edit from the drop menu or click the Rxy Tab.
Button Description
Build 2D Create a source/receiver coordinates, patches and layout for 2D line in a pop-up (page 293)
Build 3D Create receiver lines and flags for 3D sub-project in a pop-up (page 298)
Append Add a matching receiver line to a sub-project (page 301)
Stations
Extend Add receiver points at the end of line (page 301)
Fill Fill gaps in an existing receiver line (page 302)
Add Add a new receiver line, line segment, or a single receiver station (page 302)
Click to move non-imported receiver point along the X- or Y-axis
Move
Right-click to display a skid report (page 303)
Modify Rename Rename all or a portion of a receiver line (page 304)
Click to smooth/straighten the receiver line points in 2D projection on the iX1 Map Screen
Smooth
Right-click to smooth/straighten the receiver lines in a selected area (page 305)
Click to define the receiver type for a receiver line segment or the entire receiver line
Sensor
Right-click to define the receiver type for a selected area (page 306)
Type Table Click to display the receiver type table (page 307)
Click to define the instrument type for a receiver line segment or the entire receiver line
Instrument
Right-click to define the instrument type for a selected area (page 307)
Check Validate receiver point coordinates (page 307)
Click to delete a receiver line, receiver line segment, or receiver station from the iX1 Map Screen
Stn
Right-click to delete a receivers from a selected area (page 308)
Delete In Cult Delete receiver stations inside a defined culture object (polygon) (page 308)
Keep Delete receiver stations outside of the defined culture object (polygon) (page 308)
Dialog Delete whole lines or a range of receiver stations using the dialog window (page 309)
All Delete all receiver stations from the iX1 Map Screen (page 310)

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Station Info Window (Rxy)
When Rxy Tab is selected and Configure > Net On/Off is set to Off, the Channel Info view displays the information about
receiver station (cursor is placed over the receiver point icon).
Pop-up Menu (Rxy)
• When Rxy Tab is selected, place the cursor over any receiver point icon on the iX1 Map Screen and right-click to
display a pop-up menu.
View Info (Rxy)
• Select View Info from the pop-up menu to display a pop-up that contains information about the selected RAM, FTU,
PSU (Configure > Net On/Off must be set to On).

User Manual
Properties (Rxy)
1. Select Properties... from the pop-up menu. The RAM Properties pop-up displays.
• In the RAM Icon Scale field, select a value to increase/decrease the size of the device icons in the iX1 Map Screen.
• In the Cable Break Icon Scale field, select a value to increase/decrease the size of the cable break icon in the iX1
Map Screen.
2. Click OK to apply the selections.
Delete (Rxy)
1. To delete a selected receiver station on the iX1 Map Screen, place the cursor over a receiver station and right-click.
2. Select Delete from the pop-up menu or press Delete on the keyboard.
Add New Stns (Rxy)
1. To add a station by defining the line number, flag number, cable type, and sensor types, place the cursor over the any
receiver station and right-click.
2. Select Add New Stns from the pop-up menu or press Ctrl+Shift+1. The Add Stations pop-up displays.
• In the Line Number field, select a receiver line to add the station.
• In the Flag field, select a flag number to add the station.
• In the Cable Type field, select the cable type being used. The Sensor Types field is automatically populated with
the sensor type and is based upon the cable type selected.
3. Click OK to add the receiver station to the current sub-project.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Build 2D (Rxy)
The Build 2D button is used to create and edit the receiver stations and source points (coordinates), define patches, and assign
cables and geophone types for a 2D sub-project.
• Click on the Rxy Tab to display the 2D Project Builder window.
Line Description
The fields in the Line Description section define the 2D line description, which includes the name, station identification, flag
interval, and shot point positions in accordance with receiver flags.
Important!
Important!
If receiver and source coordinates are imported from SegP1 files the Build 2D Project Builder should
be used to build patches only. Do NOT enable Build Coordinates option in this case.
• Enable the Build Coordinates checkbox to create new receiver and source coordinates for a 2D line.
• In the Line Number field, select/define the a 2D line number (maximum 9 numbers).
• In the First Station (BOL) field, select the flag number of the first receiver/source station, Beginning of Line (BOL).
• In the Last Station (EOL) field, select the flag number of the last station, End of Line (EOL).
• In the Receiver Flag Spacing field, select a value to define the distance between stations (meters or feet).
Note
Both SP On Flag and SP Between Flag can be enabled.

User Manual
• In the Shot Point (SP) On Flag field, enable the checkbox to create shot points on the receiver flags.
• In the Shot Point (SP) Between Flag field, enable the checkbox to create shot points between the receiver flags.
• In the Receiver Flag Increment field, select a value to define the receiver flag increment.
• If the receiver flag increment is 1, flag numbers increase by one (i.e., 101, 102, 103, etc.). If the receiver flag
increment is 2, flag numbers increase by two (i.e., 101, 103, 105, etc.). Normally, the increment is 1.
• In the Shot Point Flag Increment field, select a value to define the shot point flag increment.
• If the SP flag increment is 1, flag numbers increase by one (i.e., 101, 102, 103, etc.). If the source flag increment is
2, flag numbers increase by two (i.e., 101, 103, 105, etc.).
• Enable the 2D Wrap checkbox to utilize the entire iX1 Map Screen to display a 2D line. This splits the line into 72 station
segments displaying all of them in the iX1 Map Screen simultaneously.
Components
The Components section displays the Cable Type and Sensor Type that is used for the sub-project. If more than one cable type
is used, a drop menu lists the other cable types. The type of sensor used with the selected cable type also display (refer to “Cable
Types” on page 244).
Note
If fields are grayed out, then only one cable type has been defined.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Normal Active Patch Description
The Normal Active Patch Description section is used to define the patch parameters.
• The Number of Live Traces (Low Flag) field is used to define the number of live traces required on the low side of the
shot point.
• The Gap field is used to define the number of stations required for the gap around the shot point. Refer to Figure 4 and
Figure 5 for additional information.
• The Number of Live Traces field is used to define the number of live traces required on the high side of the shot point.
• The Offsets fields is read only and provides the offset values (distance of near and far offsets) based on the
number of live traces in the patch description.
Figure 4 SP between Flags
Figure 5 SP on Flags

User Manual
LOW -► HIGH
The Low->High options are used to specify the minimum number of live traces allowed at the beginning or end of the line.
• In the Roll In field, select a value to define the number of live traces to start shooting with at the beginning of the line.
• In the Roll Out field, select a value to define the number of live traces at the end of the line.
Figure 6. Roll In / Roll Out (High Flag(10)-Gap(1)-Low Flag(10))

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Patch Options
The Patch Options define how traces are handled in the patch.
• The Entire Line Live field is used to override the number of live traces (Low Flag/High Flag) with the Gap (that is
specified in the Normal Active Patch Description section). All traces on the line are recorded and the specified Gap is
maintained.
• The Offline Dummies to File field enables the recording to media of all traces beyond the first and last flag stations
(i.e., traces without valid flag numbers).
Example: If a spread calls for SP-60 to SP+60, the system records dummy traces for invalid flag numbers (41
to 100) when SP101 is recorded.
• The Replace Inline Dummy field enables all dummy traces from the record to be dropped and replaced with an equal
number of traces on either end of the shot record.
• The Reverse Trace Order field is used to reverse the trace order inside the patch. Normally, the trace order inside the
patch starts from the low flag number. Refer to the Figure 7 below.
Figure 7. Reverse Trace Order

User Manual
Build 3D (Rxy)
The Build 3D button is used to create and edit the receiver lines/stations (coordinates) and assign cables and geophone types for
a 3D sub-project.
Note
Source coordinates must be entered separately on the Sxy Tab for a 3D sub-project.
• Click on the Rxy Tab. The Receiver Coordinates window displays.
Figure 8. Build 3D (Rxy)

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Lines Description
The Lines Description section is used to define the receiver lines for the sub-project.
• The First Line Number and Second Line Numbers fields are used to define the line numbering pattern.
• If 1 is entered in the First Line Number field and 2 is entered in the Second Line Number field, all remaining lines
are numbered consecutively.
• If 1 is entered in First Line Number field and 3 is entered in the Second Line Number field, all remaining lines follow
that numbering pattern (i.e., 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.) until all lines are numbered.
• The First Flag Number fields are used to establish the flag numbering pattern used for the sub-project.
• If the First Flag Number on both lines is number 101, the remaining lines in the sub-project start with flag 101.
• If the First Flag Number on both fields starts with a number representing its line number, then the first flag number
for the remaining lines begins with the line number.
• The Number of Lines field is used to define the total number of receiver lines for the sub-project.
• The Number of Flags per Line field is used to define the number of receiver flags on each line for the sub-project.
• The Line Spacing field is used to define the distance between receiver lines.
• The Flag Spacing field is used to define the distance between receiver flags.
• The Flag Increment field is used to define the flag numbering pattern on the lines.
• If the line begins with flag 101 and the increment is 1, the second flag is 102, the third 103, etc. If the increment is
2, and the line starts with flag 101, the second flag is 103, the third 105, etc.
• The Cable Type field is used to define the type of cable used for the sub-project. If more than one cable type is used, a
drop menu lists the other cable types. The type of sensor used with the selected cable type displays in the field to the
right.
Note

User Manual
Line Ordinate/Orientation
The Line Ordinate/Orientation options are used to define the point-of-reference (ordinate) and receiver line orientation.
• The Ordinate field is used to define the point-of-reference from which the system starts the flag and line numbering.
• The Orientation field is used to define the receiver coordinate grid axis (vertical or horizontal plane).
• If receiver lines are positioned from West to East, choose horizontal from the drop menu.
• If receiver lines are positioned from North to South, choose vertical from the drop menu.
• The Block Offset North field is used to shift all receiver lines (block) a specified distance either North or South.
• Enter a positive value (meters or feet) to shift all receiver flags North.
• Enter a negative value (meters or feet) to shift all receiver flags South.
Note
The Block Offset options require both receiver and source coordinates to be defined in the iX1 Map
Screen. If only one set of coordinates is available, neither of the Block Offset options are applicable.
• The Block Offset East field is used to shift all receiver lines (block) a specified distance either East or West.
• Enter a positive value (meters or feet) to shift all receiver flags East.
• Enter a negative value (meters or feet) to shift all receiver flags West.
• When all 3D receiver line parameters are defined, click to apply the settings.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Append (Rxy)
1. To add a receiver line adjacent to the existing receiver line on the high side, click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor
changes to an edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over a receiver line and click. The Append New Line pop-up displays.
3. In the Line Number field, enter a receiver line number to be added to the sub-project.
4. Click OK to add the new receiver line. A new receiver line (identical to the line selected) is added adjacent to the
existing receiver line on the high side in the middle between two receiver lines.
• If distance between receiver lines is 100 (meters or feet), the distance between existing and appended line is 50
(meters or feet).
5. Right-click on the Map Screen to stop editing.
Extend (Rxy)
1. To add more flags at the beginning or at the end of the receiver line, click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor
2. Place over the last station (at either end of the existing line) to begin the receiver line extension, and click. The
Extend window displays.
3. In the Flags field, enter the number of receiver stations to add to the selected receiver line.
4. Click OK to add the receiver stations. The receiver line extends the number of flags entered by using the same
spacing as the selected line.

User Manual
Fill (Rxy)
1. To fill gaps in an existing receiver line by adding missed receiver stations, click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor
2. Place over the last receiver station before the gap and left-click.
3. Place over the first receiver at the end of the gap and click. New stations are added to the receiver line (filling
the gap) maintaining the station numbering pattern, and flag spacing.
Note
If receiver station coordinates imported from SegP1/SPS files, the system doesn’t interpolate elevations.
Add (Rxy)
1. To add a new receiver line, line segment, or a single receiver station, click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor
changes to an edit icon when over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the location to begin adding a receiver line, line segment, or receiver station and click.
3. Place over the location to end adding a receiver line or line segment and click. To add a single receiver station,
click at the same beginning point. The Add Station Segment window displays.
Line Number Enter the number for the new line, line segment, or station.
From Flag Enter the flag number at the beginning of line.
To Flag Enter the flag number at the end of line.
By Enter the increment for the flags.
Cable Type Select the cable type.
Sensor Types Displays the receiver type associated with the cable type selected.
4. Click OK to add the receiver line (segment).
Note
If an entered Line/Flag number is already in use, the warning pop-up displays.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Move (Rxy)
The Move option is used to move (shift) a selected number of receiver stations along the X-axis or Y-axis (left-click) and display
the Skid/Offset report (right-click).
• Skid equals Inline shift
• Offset equals Crossline shift
Important!
Important!
Receiver stations cannot be moved if the sub-project was built using imported survey coordinates
(SegP1, SPS or PRJ formats).
Move Receiver Stations
1. To shift a receiver station(s), click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over
the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the first receiver station to move and click.
3. Place over the last receiver station to move and click. The Move Stations window displays.
4. In the Offset (crossline) field, select the distance to move the station(s). The North field changes to reflect the
distance entered in the Offset field.
• Enter a positive value (meters or feet) to shift selected receiver flag(s) North.
• Enter a negative value (meters or feet) to shift selected receiver flag(s) South.
5. In the Skid (inline) field, select the distance to move the station(s). The East field changes to reflect the distance
entered in the Skid field.
• Enter a positive value (meters or feet) to shift selected receiver flag(s) East.
• Enter a negative value (meters or feet) to shift selected receiver flag(s) West.
6. Click Next or Prev to move to the next or previous flag number and edit.
7. Click OK to apply.

User Manual
Display the Skid/Offset Report
The Skid/Offset Report is a list of receiver stations that were shifted in the iX1 Map Screen along with the skid and offset values.
• To display the Skid/Offset report, right-click on the Rxy Tab. If a report exists, the Skid/Offset report window
displays.
• The Skid/Offset report can be saved , copied , and printed .
• To open previously saved report files, select File > Open from the drop menu or click .
Rename (Rxy)
Important!
Important!
Receiver lines cannot be renamed if the sub-project was built using imported survey coordinates (SegP1,
SPS, or PRJ formats).
1. To rename a receiver line or portion of the receiver line, click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor changes to an edit
icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the beginning point of the receiver line (or portion) to rename and click.
3. Place over end point of the receiver line (or portion) to rename and click. The Rename Coordinates pop-up
displays.
• In the Line Number field, enter the new name of the receiver line.
• In the Flag From field, enter the starting point flag number.
4. Click OK to rename the receiver line. If entered line number is already in use, the warning pop-up displays.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Smooth (Rxy)
The Smooth option is used to display straighter receiver lines on the iX1 Map Screen to make viewing easier.
Note
Smoothing does not alter actual imported coordinates.
1. To smooth (straighten) receiver line on the iX1 Map Screen, click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor changes to an
edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the beginning point of the receiver line to smooth and click.
3. Place over the end point of the receiver line to smooth and click. The Smooth window displays.
4. Enable one of the following checkboxes:
• Undo - Unsmooth the selected receiver line and 2D wrap
• Smooth - Smooth the selected receiver line (keeps any 2D wrap)
• 2D Wrap - Wrap the selected 2D line (removes smooth unless it set in the window)
5. Enable Entire Line to smooth the selected receiver line.
6. Enable Both Rxy & Sxy checkbox to smooth both the receiver and source lines.
Select and Smooth a Selected Area
1. To smooth receiver lines in a selected area, right-click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon
when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the point at which to begin defining the shape and click.
3. Move to the next position for the shape and click again.
4. Continue to move and click until the shape is defined.

User Manual
5. Right-click to end the edit. The Smooth pop-up displays.
• Undo - Unsmooth the selected receiver line and 2D wrap inside the selected area
• Smooth - Smooth receiver lines in the selected area (keeps any 2D wrap)
7. Enable Both Rxy & Sxy checkbox to smooth both the receiver and source lines inside the selected area.
Sensor (Rxy)
1. To define the sensor type for a receiver line segment (right-click by area), click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor
2. Place over the beginning point of the receiver line to define and click.
3. Place over the end point of the receiver line to define and click. The Sensor Types window displays.
4. In the Sensors field, select the receiver type from the list.
5. In the By field, select the increment.
6. Click OK to define the sensor type for selected receiver points.The receiver points display as different colors,
depending upon the receiver type assigned on the iX1 Map Screen.
7. Right-click on the Map Screen to exit and apply editing.
Refer to the “Select and Smooth a Selected Area” on page 305 to define the area.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Table (Rxy)
• From the Rxy Tab, click to display the Sensor Table window. Refer to “Sensor Types” on page 244 for
procedures to define sensor parameters.
Instrument (Rxy)
Note
The Instrument option is only available in the Hybrid Mode (G3i + Hawk).
1. To define the instrument type for a receiver line segment (right-click by area), click on the Rxy Tab. The
cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the beginning point of the receiver line to define and click.
3. Place over the end point of the receiver line to define and click. The Select Instrument Type window displays.
4. Select the field equipment G3i or Hawk to define.
5. Enable Add Polygon to Culture, if required. This option is available when defining by area only.
6. Click OK to define the instrument type for selected receiver points.The receiver points display as different colors,
depending upon the instrument type assigned on the iX1 Map Screen.
7. Right-click on the Map Screen to exit and apply editing.
Refer to the “Select and Smooth a Selected Area” on page 305 to define the area.
Check (Rxy)
• To validate the Rxy coordinates, click on the Rxy Tab. Depending upon the outcome of the system check, the
following pop-up displays.

User Manual
Delete Stn (Rxy)
1. To delete a receiver line segment (right-click by area) from the iX1 Map Screen, click on the Rxy Tab. The
2. Place over the first point of the line to delete and click.
3. Place over the last point of the line to delete and click.
4. Right-click to end the edit.
Delete In Cult (Rxy)
1. Define the culture object (polygon) under the Culture Tab. Refer to “Culture Tab” on page 387.
2. To delete receiver stations within a defined culture, click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor changes to an edit
3. Place over the perimeter of the culture until the culture changes color.
4. Click to delete the stations contained within the culture.
5. Right-click to end the edit. All receiver stations within the defined culture are deleted from the iX1 Map Screen.
Keep (Rxy)
1. To keep receiver and/or source points inside the defined area only, click on the Rxy Tab. The cursor changes
to an edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the point to begin defining the area to keep.
3. Move to the next position on the Map Screen and click again.
4. Continue to move the cursor and click to define the area to keep.
5. Right-click to end the edit. The following pop-up displays.
6. Perform one of the following options:
• Click Yes to delete both the receiver and shot points outside the defined area.
• Click No to delete only the receiver points outside the defined area.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
• Click Cancel to exit and return to the iX1 Map.
Note
If receiver/source point coordinates were previously saved to the database, the points that are deleted
from the iX1 Map Screen can be retrieved from the database. Refer to “Read Coordinates” on
page 283.
Dialog (Rxy)
• To delete a receiver line or a range of stations, click on the Rxy Tab. The Delete Coordinates window
displays.
Delete Receiver Line
• Select (highlight) a receiver line (or multiple lines) to delete in the Retained Coordinates pool and click to
move the lines into the Deleted Coordinates pool.
• Double-click a single line in the Retained Coordinates pool to move it to the Deleted Coordinates pool.
• To return lines from the Deleted Coordinates pool to the Retained Coordinates pool, select the line(s) in the Deleted
Coordinate pool and click
• Click OK to delete the lines from the Deleted Coordinates pool and iX1 Map Screen.

User Manual
Delete Range of Station
• To delete a range of stations, complete the following:
• In the Line field, select a specific line number or select (highlight) the line in the Retained Coordinates pool.
• In the From field, select the first station number to delete in the range.
• In the To field, select the last station number to delete in the range.
• In the By field, select the increment.
• Click to move the selected range of stations to the Deleted Coordinates pool.
Delete All (Rxy)
1. To delete all receiver and shot points from iX1 Map Screen, click on the Rxy Tab. The following pop-up
displays.
• Click Yes to delete both receiver stations and source points.
• Click No to delete only receiver stations.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Sxy Tab
The Sxy Tab is used to perform the following:
• Create 2D and 3D source coordinates
• Delete, add, or extend shot lines
• Create the Shot Point Table
• Select Mode > Sxy Edit from the drop menu or click the Sxy Tab.
Button Description
Build 2D Define a 2D sub-project in a pop-up (page 314)
Build 3D Define source coordinates for a sub-project in a pop-up (page 315)
Append Add source point(s) to a sub-project (page 387)
Shots
Extend Make a source line longer (page 317)
Fill Fill gaps in an existing source line or culture (page 318)
Add Add a new source line or shot pint (page 318)
Left-click - move source coordinates along the X- or Y-axis
Move
Right-click - produce a skid report (page 319)
Rename Rename all or a portion of a source line (page 320)
Modify Left-click - smooth/straighten how selected shot points display
Smooth
Right-click - smooth/straighten how shot points in the selected area display (page 321)
SP Table Create the acquisition shot point sequence table (page 322)
Swath ID Assign shot points to Swath ID number (page 324)
Check Validate SXY coordinates (page 325)
Left-click - delete shot points from a source line
Shots
Right-click - delete shot points in a selected area (page 325)
Delete In Cult Delete shot points inside a defined area (page 325)
Keep Delete receiver stations and/or source coordinates outside a defined area (page 326)
Dialog Delete whole source lines or a range of shot points (page 327)
All Delete all receiver stations and shots (page 328)

User Manual
Message and Info Windows (Sxy)
When Sxy Tab is selected, the Message, Patch, and Shot Info views display patch and shot information for the selected shot point
(cursor is placed over the shot point icon).
Note
The Message, RAM Info, and Channel Info views must be selected from View drop menu.
Pop-up Menu (Sxy)
• When the Sxy Tab is selected, place the cursor over the source point and right-click to display a pop-up menu.
View Info (Sxy)
• Select View Info to display a pop-up of patch information assigned for the selected shot point.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Properties (Sxy)
1. Place the cursor over a shot point on the iX1 Map Screen and right-click.
2. Select Properties... from the pop-up menu. The Shot Parameters pop-up displays.
• In the Icon Scale field, select a value to increase/decrease the size of the shot point icon.
3. Click OK to apply the settings.
Delete (Sxy)
1. To delete a selected shot point on the iX1 Map Screen, place the cursor over a shot point icon and right-click.
2. Select Delete from the pop-up menu.
Add New Shots (Sxy)
1. To add a shot point on the iX1 Map Screen by defining the line and flag numbers, right-click on any shot point icon.
2. Select Add New Shots (Ctrl+Shift+1) from the pop-up menu. The Add Shot pop-up displays.
• In the Line Number field, select the line number.
• In the Flag field, select the flag number to add the shot.
3. Click OK to add the shot point to the iX1 Map Screen.
Set As Current (Sxy)
1. To define a selected shot point as the current shot, right-click on a shot point on the iX1 Map Screen. Refer to the
“Current Shot” on page 258 for additional information.
2. Select Set as Current (Ctrl+Shift+2) from the pop-up menu.

User Manual
Edit Shot Comments (Sxy)
1. To create comments and attach warning messages to a selected shot point on the iX1 Map Screen, place the cursor
over a shot point and right-click. Refer to the “Shot Comments” on page 245 for additional information.
2. Select Edit Shot Comments (Ctrl+Shift+3) from the pop-up menu. The following pop-up displays.
• Enable the Warn checkbox to activate the shot warning message option.
• In the Comments field, enter a comment(s) for the selected shot point.
3. Click OK to add the comments to the database.
Build 2D (Sxy)
The Build 2D option (located on the Sxy Tab) functions exactly the same as the Build 2D option on the Rxy Tab. Refer to “Build
2D (Rxy)” on page 293 for procedures.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Build 3D (Sxy)
The Build 3D button is used to create and edit the source lines/points (coordinates) for a 3D sub-project.
• Click on the Sxy Tab. The Source Coordinates window displays.

User Manual
Lines Description
The Lines Description section is used to define the source lines for the sub-project.
• The First Line Number and Second Line Numbers fields are used to define the line numbering pattern.
• If 1 is entered in the First Line Number field and 2 is entered in the Second Line Number field, all remaining lines are
numbered consecutively.
• If 2 is entered in First Line Number field and 4 is entered in the Second Line Number field, all remaining lines follow
that numbering pattern (i.e., 2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) until all lines are numbered.
• The First Flag Number fields are used to establish the flag numbering pattern used for the sub-project.
• If the First Flag Number on both lines is number 101, the remaining lines in the sub-project start with flag 101.
• If the First Flag Number on both fields starts with a number representing its line number, then the first flag number
for the remaining lines begins with the line number.
• The Number of Lines field is used to define the total number of source lines for the sub-project.
• The Number of Flags per Line field is used to define the number of source flags on each line of the sub-project.
• The Line Spacing field is used to define the distance between source lines.
• The Flag Spacing field is used to define the distance between source flags.
• The Flag Increment field is used to define the flag numbering pattern on the lines.
• If the line begins with flag 101 and the increment is 1, the second flag is 102, the third 103, etc. If the increment is 2,
and the line starts with flag 101, the second flag is 103, the third 105, etc.
Line Ordinate/Orientation
The Line Ordinate/Orientation options are used to define the point-of-reference (ordinate) and source line orientation.
• The Ordinate field is used to define the point-of-reference from which the system starts the flag and line numbering.
• The Orientation field is used to define the source coordinate grid axis (vertical or horizontal plane).
• If source lines are positioned from West to East, choose horizontal from the drop menu.
• If source lines are positioned from North to South, choose vertical from the drop menu.
• The Block Offset North field is used to shift all source lines (block) a specified distance either North or South.
• Enter a positive value (meters or feet) to shift all source flags North.
• Enter a negative value (meters or feet) to shift all source flags South.
Note
The Block Offset options require both receiver and source coordinates to be defined in the iX1 Map
Screen. If only one set of coordinates is available, neither of the Block Offset options are applicable.
• The Block Offset East field is used to shift all source lines (block) a specified distance either East or West.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
• Enter a positive value (meters or feet) to shift all source flags East.
• Enter a negative value (meters or feet) to shift all source flags West.
• When all 3D receiver line parameters are defined, click to apply the settings.
Append (Sxy)
1. To add a source line to the sub-project adjacent to the existing source line on the high side, click on the Sxy
Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over an existing receiver line and click. The Append New Line pop-up displays.
3. In the Line Number field, enter a source line number to be added to the sub-project.
4. Click OK to add the new source line. A new source line (identical to the line selected) is added adjacent to the
existing receiver line on the high side in the middle between two source lines.
• If distance between receiver lines is 100 (meters or feet), the distance between existing and appended line is 50
(meters or feet).
Extend (Sxy)
1. To add more flags at the beginning or at the end of the source line, click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor changes
2. Place over the last station (at either end of the existing line) to begin the source line extension, and click. The
Extend window displays.
3. In the Flags field, enter the number of source points to add to the selected source line.
4. Click OK to add the source points. The source line extends the number of flags entered by using the same spacing
as the selected line.

User Manual
Fill (Sxy)
1. To fill gaps in the existing source line by adding missed source points, click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor
2. Place over the last source point before the gap and left-click.
3. Place over the first source point at the end of the gap and click. New points are added to the source line (filling
the gap) maintaining the station numbering pattern, and flag spacing.
Note
If source point coordinates imported from SegP1/SPS files, the system doesn’t interpolate elevations.
Add (Sxy)
1. To add a new source line, line segment, or a single source point, click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor changes to
an edit icon when over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the location to begin adding a source line, line segment, or source point and click.
3. Place over the location to end adding a source line or line segment and click. To add a single source point,
click at the same beginning point. The Add Shot Segment window displays.
Line Number Enter the number for the new line, line segment, or station.
From Flag Enter the flag number at the beginning of line.
To Flag Enter the flag number at the end of line.
By Enter the increment for the flags.
4. Click OK to add the source line (segment).
Note
If an entered Line/Flag number is already in use, the warning pop-up displays.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Move (Sxy)
The Move option is used to move (shift) a selected number of source points along the X-axis or Y-axis (left-click) and display the
Skid/Offset report (right-click).
• Skid equals Inline shift
• Offset equals Crossline shift
Important!
Important!
Receiver stations cannot be moved if the sub-project was built using imported survey coordinates
(SegP1, SPS or PRJ formats).
Move Shot Points
1. To shift a shot point(s), click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the
iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over the first source point to move and click.
3. Place over the last source point to move and click. The Move Shots window displays.
4. In the Offset (crossline) field, select the distance to move the point(s). The North field changes to reflect the
distance entered in the Offset field.
• Enter a positive value (meters or feet) to shift selected source point(s) North.
• Enter a negative value (meters or feet) to shift selected source point(s) South.
5. In the Skid (inline) field, select the distance to move the point(s). The East field changes to reflect the distance
entered in the Skid field.
• Enter a positive value (meters or feet) to shift selected source point(s) East.
• Enter a negative value (meters or feet) to shift selected source point(s) West.
6. Click Next or Prev to move to the next or previous flag number and edit.

User Manual
Display the Skid/Offset Report
The Skid/Offset Report is a list of source points that were shifted in the iX1 Map Screen along with the skid and offset values.
• To display the Skid/Offset report, right-click on the Sxy Tab. If a report exists, the Skid/Offset report window
displays.
• The Skid/Offset report can be saved , copied , and printed .
• To open previously saved report files, select File > Open from the drop menu or click .
Rename (Sxy)
Note
Source lines cannot be renamed if the sub-project was built using imported survey coordinates (SegP1,
SPS, or PRJ formats).
1. To rename a source line or portion of the source line, click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon
2. Place over the beginning point of the source line (or portion) to rename and click.
3. Place over end point of the source line (or portion) to rename and click. The Rename Coordinates pop-up
displays.
4. In the Line Number field, enter the new name of the source line.
5. In the Flag From field, enter the starting point flag number.
6. Click OK to rename the source line. If entered line number is already in use, the warning pop-up displays.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Smooth (Sxy)
The Smooth option is used to display straighter receiver lines on the iX1 Map Screen to make viewing easier.
Note
Smoothing does not alter actual imported coordinates.
1. To smooth (straighten) source line on the iX1 Map Screen, click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor changes to an
edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place over the beginning point of the source line to smooth and click.
3. Place over the end point of the source line to smooth and click. The Smooth window displays.
• Undo - Unsmooth the selected line and 2D wrap
• Smooth - Smooth the selected line (keeps any 2D wrap)
• 2D Wrap - Wrap the selected 2D line (removes smooth unless it set in the window)
5. Enable Entire Line to smooth the selected line.
6. Enable Both Rxy & Sxy checkbox to smooth both the receiver and source lines.
Select and Smooth a Selected Area
1. To smooth source lines in a selected area, right-click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon
2. Place over the point at which to begin defining the shape and click.

User Manual
5. Right-click to end the edit. The Smooth pop-up displays.
• Undo - Unsmooth the selected source line and 2D wrap inside the selected area
• Smooth - Smooth the lines in the selected area (keeps any 2D wrap)
7. Enable Both Rxy & Sxy checkbox to smooth both the receiver and source lines inside the selected area.
SP Table (Sxy)
The SP Table function is used to select and produce shot point sequence table(s). It allows the user to create a specific shot order
for the shooter to be used in the sub-command lines during acquisition. Table(s) are created as text files (cmd_line_x_0x.txt)
and saved in the doc directory of the current project. To activate the use of SP Table function, select iX1Vib > Critical
Parameters >Command Line Options (Use Shot Point Table).
1. To create SP Table, click on the Sxy Tab. The Create Shot Point Table pop-up display.
2. Select Command Line and Sub-Command Line for a particular shooter or fleet and click OK. The cursor changes
3. Place over the shot point at which to begin defining the SP Table and click.
4. Move to the last shot point on the first source line and click again.
5. Move to the first shot point on the second source line and click.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
6. Move to the last shot point on the second source line and click again.
7. Continue defining the SP Table as described above.
8. Right-click on the Map Screen to stop editing. The system creates cmd_line_1_01.txt file at this point.
9. To edit existing or create new SP Table, click on the Sxy Tab. The Edit Shot Point Table pop-up
display.
• Click Overwrite to replace the existing SP Table.
• Click Append to add new shot points to the existing SP Table.
• Select another Command Line or Sub-Command Line to start creation of new SP Table.
• Click Close to exit to the iX1 Map.

User Manual
Swath ID (Sxy)
The seismic survey can be separated to swaths by the defined amount of shots.
Note
The Swath Management option (iX1 Vib > Critical Parameters) must be activated during the project
building process.
1. Navigate iX1Vib > Critical Parameters and click Swath File Number. The Swath File Number pop-up display.
2. Click Add to select the required number of Swath IDs.
4. To assign the shot point to Swath ID number, right-click on the Sxy Tab (left-click by line). The cursor
5. Place over the point at which to begin defining the polygon and click.
8. Right-click to end the edit. The Assign Swath ID pop-up displays.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
9. Select the Swath ID number from the drop list and click Assign. The system use different colours to identify the
assigned swaths.
Check (Sxy)
• To validate the Sxy coordinates, click on the Sxy Tab. Depending upon the outcome of the system check, the
following pop-up displays.
Delete Shots (Sxy)
1. To delete a source line segment (right-click by area) from the iX1 Map Screen, click on the Sxy Tab. The
2. Place over the first point of the line to delete and click.
3. Place over the last point of the line to delete and click.
Delete In Cult (Sxy)
1. Define the culture object (polygon) under the Culture Tab. Refer to “Culture Tab” on page 387.
2. To delete source points within a defined culture, click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon
3. Place over the perimeter of the culture until the culture changes color.

User Manual
4. Click to delete the stations contained within the culture.
5. Right-click to end the edit. All source points within the defined culture are deleted from the sub-project file.
Keep (Sxy)
1. To keep receiver stations and source points inside the defined area only, click on the Sxy Tab. The cursor
2. Place over the point to begin defining the area to keep.
4. Continue to move the cursor and click to define the area to keep.
5. Right-click to end the edit. The following pop-up displays.
• Click Yes to delete both the receiver stations and shot points outside the defined area.
• Click No to delete only the source points outside the defined area.
Note
If receiver/source point coordinates were previously saved to the database, the points that are deleted
from the iX1 Map Screen can be retrieved from the database. Refer to “Read Coordinates” on
page 283.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Dialog (Sxy)
• To delete a source line or a range of points, click on the Sxy Tab. The Delete Coordinates window displays.
Delete Source Line
• Select (highlight) a source line (or multiple lines) to delete from the Retained Coordinates pool and click to
move the lines into the Deleted Coordinates pool.
• Double-click a single line in the Retained Coordinates pool to move it to the Deleted Coordinates pool.
• To return lines from the Deleted Coordinates pool to the Retained Coordinates pool, select the line(s) in the Deleted
Coordinate pool and click
Delete Range of Station
• To delete a range of source points, complete the following:
• In the Line field, select a specific line number or select (highlight) the line in the Retained Coordinates pool.
• In the From field, select the first station number to delete in the range.
• In the To field, select the last station number to delete in the range.
• In the By field, select the increment.
• Click to move the selected range of stations to the Deleted Coordinates pool.

User Manual
Delete All (Sxy)
1. To delete all source points and receiver stations from iX1 Map Screen, click on the Sxy Tab. The following
pop-up displays.
• Click Yes to delete both receiver stations and source points.
• Click No to delete source points only.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Patch Tab
The Patch Tab is used to create and edit patches on the iX1 Map Screen. A patch consists of one or more receiver line segments
that are to be recorded for one-shot point. When a patch is selected, all receiver stations that comprise the patch and all shot
points using the patch display on the Map Screen.
• Select Mode > Patch Edit from the drop menu or click the Patch tab.
Button Description
Build Build optimized patches for a shot or a sub-project (page 331)
Left-click to add receiver stations (by line) to selected patch (page 339)
Station
Right-click to add receiver station (by area) to selected patch
Add
Left- click to add shot points (by line) to selected patch (page 339)
Shot
Right-click to add shot points (by area) to selected patch
Copy To Copy and save current patch to a new Patch ID (page 339)
Sort Organize patches as inline or cross-lines directions (page 340)
Toggle Add/remove stations to/from the patch (page 341)
Minimize Find and combine identical patches (page 341)
Edit
Text Edit the patch file using a text editing tool (page 341)
Left-click to display the amount of receivers for defined amount of shots (by line) (page 342)
Shot to Stn
Right-click to display the amount of receivers for defined amount of shots (by area)
Left-click to scroll (display) all consecutive patches in up direction until disabled (page 343)
Up
Right-click to quickly scroll (display) all consecutive patches in up direction until disabled
Left-click to scroll (display) all consecutive patches in down direction until disabled (page 343)
Down
Right-click to quickly scroll (display) all consecutive patches in down direction until disabled
View
Select Display patch definition for selected shot point (page 343)
Goto Locate a specific patch (page 344)
Left-click to display the number of shots for defined amount of receivers (by line) (page 345)
Stn to Shot
Right-click to display the number of shots for defined amount of receivers (by area)
Check Verify if every source point is associated with a patch (page 345)
Left-click to delete a shot or range of shots from the patch (by line) (page 346)
Station
Right-click to delete a shot or range of shots from the patch (by area)
Delete Left-click to delete a shot or range of shots from the patch (by line) (page 347)
Shot
Right-click to delete a shot or range of shots from the patch (by area)
Patch Delete the current patch (page 347)
All Delete all patches from the sub-project (page 347)

User Manual
Message and Info Windows (Patch)
When Patch Tab is selected, the Message, Patch, and Shot Info views display patch and shot information for the selected shot
point (cursor is placed over the shot point icon).
Note
The Message, RAM Info, and Channel Info views must be selected from the View drop menu.
Pop-up Menu (Patch)
• When the Patch Tab is selected, place the cursor over the source point and right-click to display a pop-up menu.
View Info (Patch)
• Select View Info to display a pop-up that provides the patch definition information for the selected shot point.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Build (Patch)
Warning!
INOVA is not responsible for patches that are constructed using the Build button. It is the user’s
responsibility to verify each patch as required.
1. To create patches for selected number of shots or full sub-project, click on the Patch Tab. The Optimize
Patches window displays (defaults to the Rect tab).
2. Click the Rectangular, Swath, Swath2, Offset, or Super-Patch tab to select the type of patch to build.
Selected Shots
The Selected Shots section at the bottom of the Optimize Patches windows is the same for Rectangular, Swath, Swath2, and
Offset patches.
All Shots
• Click button to build patches to all shot points in the current sub-project.
By Area...
1. To build patches for shot points in a defined area, click . The iX1 Map Screen displays and the cursor
changes to the edit icon .
2. Place over the point to begin defining the area of shot points.
4. Continue to move the cursor and click to define the area.

User Manual
5. Right-click to end the edit. The selected shots display as red points on the Map Screen, and the Optimize Patches
window displays again.
6. Click OK to build patches for the selected shot points.
By From/To...
1. To build patches for shot points selected by line (segment), click . The iX1 Map Screen displays and the
cursor changes to the edit icon .
2. Place over the shot point to begin defining the line (segment) of shot points.
3. Move to the last shot point to define on the source line and click again. The selected shots display as red
points on the Map Screen, and the Optimize Patches window displays again.
4. Click OK to build patches for the selected shot points.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Rect Tab (Rectangular Patches)
The rectangular patch is the most common format used to create and optimize patches for 3D projects. When values are entered
accurately in the appropriate fields and the correct shots are selected, a rectangular patch can be applied to almost any
configuration of multiple receiver line recordings. In an orthogonal design, the active receiver lines form a rectangular patch
surrounding each source point location and overlapping each other. The patch usually has a longer axis in the inline direction.
• To create a rectangular patch, click on the Patch Tab and select the Rectangular tab.
Select the distance to the furthest receiver station from the center line to be included in the patch.
Inline Offset
Only receiver stations that lie within the specified distance are included in the patch.
Select the cross-line distance to the furthest receiver line from the shot point to be included in the
Cross Line Offset
patch. Only receiver lines that lie within the specified distance are included in the patch.
Select the maximum number of receivers to be included in the patch. Any stations that lie further
Stations per Line
Maximums than the maximum inline offset distance are eliminated from the patch.
Select the maximum number of receiver lines to be included in the patch. Any lines that lie further
Lines per Patch
than the maximum cross-line offset distance from the shot point are eliminated from the patch.
Lines to Shot Side Select the number of receiver lines that may be active on any side of the shot point in the patch.
The system automatically calculates and displays the stations per patch value by multiplying the
Stations per Patch
maximum stations per line by the maximum lines per patch.
Override option enables additional receiver line segments to be added to a patch.The patch size is
Override
restricted only by the stations per line and cross-line offset criteria.
Max Lines
Restrict Limits the size of patches to the value defined in the Lines per Patch field.
Enable the checkbox to adjust the edges of lines (square off) to maintain the rectangular shape of
Options Smooth by Flag
the patch.

User Manual
Swath Tab
In swath geometry, source and receiver lines are parallel and usually coincident. While source points are taken on one line, active
receivers are located on the source and parallel receiver lines.
• To create the swath patches, click on the Patch Tab and select the Swath tab.
Select the near offset distance (gap) from the center line. All receiver stations inside the gap are
Near
excluded from the patch.
Select the distance of the far offset or the farthest distance from the center line to the receivers on
Far (Low Flag) the low flag side. Only receiver stations that lie within the specified distance are included in the
patch.
Offsets
Select the distance of the far offset or the farthest distance from the center line to the receivers on
Far (High Flag) the high flag side. Only receiver stations that lie within the specified distance are included in the
patch.
Flip at Sline Select the source line at which to flip the defined offsets (if required).
The Restrict option limits the number of receiver lines in the patch to the values defined in the 1st
and Last fields. The 1st field must be a number lower than the number in the Last field, regardless
Restrict
of the direction of shooting. Enable the checkbox to designate specific receiver lines, otherwise the
patch applies to the entire 3D project.
Receiver Lines
1st Select the receiver line number to restrict the patch to.
Last Select the last receiver line number to restrict the patch to.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Swath2 Tab
The Swath2 tab is used to manually define each receiver line (or parts of a receiver line) in a patch.
Option 1
• To define a Swath2 patch, click on the Patch Tab and select the Swath2 tab.
Field Description
Click in the Rline field. Up/down arrows display. Select the receiver line number to be defined in the
Rline
patch.
Click in the From field. Up/down arrows display. Select the first station on the Rline to be included in the
From
patch.
Click in the To field. Up/down arrows display. Select the last station on the Rline to be included in the
To
patch.
Click in the By field. Up/down arrows display. Select the increment of the receivers:
By • Enter 1 to include all receivers defined between From and To fields.
• Enter 2 to include every other receiver.
Trace Show the trace number assignment inside the patch for the receiver station defined in the From field.
To Show the trace number assignment inside the patch for the receiver station defined in the To field.
Note
When it is important for trace numbers to correspond with specific receiver numbers, manipulate the
trace numbers by defining the receivers that have the low number first.

User Manual
Option 2
• To define a Swath2 patch, click on the Patch Tab and select the Swath2 tab.
Field Description
Click in the Rline field. Up/down arrows display. Select the receiver line number to be defined in the
Rline
patch.
Click in the From field. Enter the first station on the Rline to be included in the patch. The station
From number can be described as an offset from the shot point (SP). For example: SP-36 represent the
station 36 numbers less than the shot point number.
Click in the To field. Enter the last station on the Rline to be included in the patch. The station number
To can be described as an offset from the shot point (SP). For example: SP-1 represent the station 1
number less than the shot point number.
Click in the By field. Up/down arrows display. Select the increment of the receivers:
By • Enter 1 to include all receivers defined between From and To fields.
• Enter 2 to include every other receiver.
Trace Show the trace number assignment inside the patch for the receiver station defined in the From field.
To Show the trace number assignment inside the patch for the receiver station defined in the To field.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Offset Tab
The Offset tab is used to build patches when a 3D project contains very random receiver or source coordinates.
• To create a patch by offset, click on the Patch Tab and select the Offset tab.
Horizontal Enter the maximum offset value (distance) from the shot point in the horizontal plane.
Vertical field Enter the maximum offset value (distance) from the shot point in the vertical plane.
Max Offset Enable the Smooth by Flag checkbox to square up uneven layouts by dropping extra stations in
Smooth by Flag
a patch.
1/2 Line Spacing

Enable the 1/2 Line Spacing Tolerance checkbox.
Tolerance
Horizontal Select the minimum roll-in offset (distance) from the shot point in the horizontal plane.
Min Roll-In
Vertical Select the minimum roll-in offset (distance) from the shot point in the vertical plane.

User Manual
Super-Patch Tab
A Super-Patch is a patch which contains multiple patches allocated for the defined amount of shots.
1. To create a super-patch, click on the Patch Tab and select the Super-Patch tab.
2. To define the shot and receiver points for a super-patch, click Define Shots or Define Receivers. The cursor
3. Place over the point to begin defining the area.
5. Continue to move the cursor and click to define the area.
6. Right-click to end the edit. A super-patch display on the Map Screen
Refer to “Create a Super-Patch” on page 610 for additional information on how to create a super-patch.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Add Station (Patch)
1. To add one or more receiver stations to an existing patch (right-click by area), click on the Patch Tab. The
cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the first station to be added to the patch and click.
3. Place on the last station on that line to be added to the patch and click. The selected stations are now added
to the patch.
Note
A single station can be added using the hot keys Ctrl+Shift+1.
Add Shot (Patch)
1. To add one or more shot points to an existing patch (right-click by area), click on the Patch Tab. The cursor
changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the first shot point to be added to the patch and click.
3. Move to the last shot point on that line to be added to the patch and click. The selected shot points are added
to the patch.
Copy To (Patch)
1. To copy a patch definition and save it with a different patch number, click on the Patch Tab. The cursor
2. Place over the required shot point and click.The patch for selected shot point displays on the Map Screen.
3. Click . The Save Patch As pop-up displays.
• To ensure the correct patch is selected, refer to the patch number that displays at the top of the pop-up.
• In the Patch field, select the new patch number.

User Manual
4. Click OK to copy the patch. If the selected patch number already exists, the following pop-up displays.
5. Click Yes to overwrite the patch definition or click No to cancel.
Sort (Patch)
The Sort button is used to organize all patches along source lines (inline) or across (NE to SW) source lines for a sub-project
(beginning from the first flag on the first source line or from a specific patch).
1. To sort patches, click on the Patch Tab. The Sort Patches window displays.
2. In the Source section, select one of the following options to define how patches are sorted:
• Patch # (refers to the currently selected patch) - sort receivers for the current patch
• All Patches - sorts all patches in a sub-project
3. In the Order section, define the order in which to sort the patches in a sub-project (or a single patch):
• Enable the Sort By Station checkbox to sort current patch or all patches. The Sort by Station option places receiver
flags inside the patch in sequential order. When disabled, the internal patch definition remains unedited.
• Enable the Reverse Order checkbox to reverse the sequential order of receiver flags (lower trace number inside
the patch is on high flag side) (only available when Sort By Station is enabled).
• Select one of the following two options:
• The In Line option is used to sort patches along the same axis as source lines (only available when All
Patches is selected). The shot points (in consecutively numbered patches) are aligned along the first source
line until every shot point (along the line) is included in a patch. The sequence continues at the start of the next
source line until all patches are sorted.
• The NE to SW option is used to sort patches along the axis, perpendicular to the source lines direction. The
shot points (in consecutively numbered patches) are located on different source lines. The sequence begins at

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
the first source line, moves across all source lines in the sub-project, then returns to the first source line where
it continues directly below the first patch until all patches are sorted.
4. The options in the Remove Redundant section, are used to remove redundant patches or flags. Enable one of the
following two options:
• Flags - flags defined more than once in a patch are removed (only available when Sort by Station is enabled).
• Patches - patches not associated with shot points are removed (only available when All Patches is enabled).
5. Click OK to sort the patch(es).
Toggle (Patch)
1. To add/delete station in the current patch, click on the Patch Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon
2. Place over the receiver station to add/delete and click.
Minimize (Patch)
• To minimize the number of patch definitions in the sub-project by combining identical patches, click on the
Patch Tab.
Text (Patch)
1. To access the text editor tool used to edit a patch, click on the Patch Tab. The cursor changes to the edit
2. Place over the required shot point and click.The patch for selected shot point displays on the Map Screen.
3. From the Patch Tab, click . The Edit Patch window for the selected patch displays.
Note
The Status checkbox must be enabled to display the Patch Details window. The Patch Details window
is identical to the Patch tab in iX1 Vib.

User Manual
File Drop Menu
• The selected patch number displays in the top left corner of the Edit Patch window. To display another patch to edit,
select one of the following from the File drop menu:
• Next Pat
• Prev Pat
• Goto Pat
• In the bottom left of the window, enable the Status checkbox to display additional patch details.
• Click in the RLine column to display up/down arrows. Select the receiver line number to edit.
• Click in the From column to display up/down arrows. Edit the patch definition, if required.
• Click in the To column to display up/down arrows. Edit the patch definition, if required.
• Click in the By column to display up/down arrows. Change the receiver flag increment, if required.
Edit Drop Menu
1. In the Edit Patch window, click > to select a row or click on any row/column (multiple rows can be selected).
2. From the Edit drop menu, use any of the following edit options:
• Cut (Ctrl+X)
• Copy (Ctrl+C)
• Paste (Ctrl+V)
• Delete (Delete)
• Insert (Insert)
3. At the bottom of the window, click Copy Grid to copy the entire contents of the patch or highlighted sector.
4. Click Paste Grid to paste previously copied patch data into the windows.
5. Click OK to save the patch edits.
Shot to Stn (Patch)
The Shot-to-Station option is used to determine the amount of receivers for defined number of shots according to the patch
definition assigned to the selected shots.
1. Right-click on the Patch Tab (left-click by line). The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the
iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the point to begin defining the area of shots and click.
3. Move to the next point and click again.
4. Continue to move and click until the area is defined.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
5. Right-click to end the edit. The windows similar to following display.
On the Map Screen, the selected shots display in magenta and the stations required to shoot the shots display in green, and
the Stations Used by Shots report displays.
• The report can be saved , copied , or printed .
• To open the previously saved report files, select File > Open from the drop menu or click .
Up (Patch)
1. To display consecutively numbered patches (one after another) moving upward on the iX1 Map Screen, click
on the Patch Tab.
2. Click anywhere on the Map Screen to stop.
Down (Patch)
1. To display consecutively numbered patches (one after another) moving downward on the iX1 Map Screen, click
on the Patch Tab.
2. Click anywhere on the Map Screen to stop.
Select (Patch)
1. To display a patch for selected shot point, click on the Patch Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon
when placed over the map.
2. Place over any shot point. The patch displays on the Map Screen.
3. Move over the shot points to desired location, the patch definitions display accordingly on the Map Screen.
4. Left-click to display the patch on the Map Screen as current, or right-click to return to the previously selected patch.

User Manual
Goto (Patch)
The Goto button is used to locate either a specific patch definition or locate and display a source line and shot point for the patch.
By Patch Number
1. To select a patch using patch number on the iX1 Map Screen, click on the Patch Tab. The Select Patch pop-
up displays.
• In the Patch field, select the patch number to be highlighted as current on the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Click OK. If patch doesn’t exist the warning pop-up displays.
3. Click OK to create new patch number, click Cancel to return to the iX1 Map.
By Source Point
1. From the Patch Tab, click . The Select Patch pop-up displays.
• In the Sline field, select the source line.
• In the SP field, select the shot point.
2. Click the OK to highlight the shot point as current with a patch allocated to it.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Stn to Shot (Patch)
The Station-to-Shot button is used to determine the number of shots to shoot for defined amount of receivers.
1. Right-click on the Patch Tab (left-click by line). The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over
the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the point to begin defining the area of receivers and click.
3. Move to the next point and click again.
4. Continue to move and click until the area is defined.
5. Right-click to end the edit. The windows similar to following display.
On the Map Screen, the selected receivers display in green and shots that can be shoot with this amount of receivers display in
magenta, and the Shots Defined by Stations report displays.
• The report can be saved , copied , or printed .
• To open the previously saved report files, select File > Open from the drop menu or click
Check (Patch)
1. To verify that every source point has a patch, click on the Patch tab. Depending upon the outcome of the
check, one of the following pop-ups display.

User Manual
2. Click Yes to remove unused patches from the sub-project. The Check Patches list displays after that.
3. If some shot points don’t have patches the following warning pop-up.
4. Click OK to display and review the Check Patches list.
• The report can be saved , copied , and printed .
Delete Station (Patch)
1. To delete one or more receiver stations from an existing patch (right-click by area), click on the Patch Tab.
The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the first station to be deleted from the patch and click.
3. Place on the last station on that line to be deleted from the patch and click. The selected stations are now
deleted from the patch.
Note
A single station can be deleted using the key Del.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Delete Shot (Patch)
1. To delete one or more shot points from an existing patch (right-click by area), click on the Patch Tab. The
cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the first shot point to be deleted from the patch and click.
3. Move to the last shot point on that line to be deleted from the patch and click. The selected shot points are
deleted from the patch.
Delete Patch (Patch)
• To delete the current patch from the iX1 Map Screen, click on the Patch Tab. The patch is deleted from the
Map Screen.
Delete All (Patch)
1. To delete all patches from the current sub-project, click on the Patch Tab. The following pop-up displays.
2. Click Yes to delete all patches from the sub-project or click No to cancel.

User Manual
Layout Tab
The Layout Tab contains all necessary tools to determine, edit and efficiently manage the ground equipment deployment.
Note
Receiver and source points (coordinates) must exist in a sub-project before equipment layout can be
defined or edited in the iX1 Map Screen.
• Select Mode > Layout Edit from the drop menu or click Layout Tab.
Button Description
Default Add cables to all receiver lines using default options (page 350)
Cable Add or extend cable to single receiver line (page 352)
Complete Complete the layout of an R-line with none or only partial equipment layout defined (page 352)
Add Left-click to add an active loop to connect two receiver lines (page 354)
Loop
Right-click to add an inactive loop to connect two receiver lines (page 355)
At Flag Add cable about flag (page 353)
NetLink Add NetLink to the layout (page 356)
Shift Shift location of RAMs and cables (page 357)
Break Add a break to the layout (page 357)
Jumper Add a jumper to the layout (page 358)
Edit
Left-click to activate loop connecting two receiver lines (page 355)
Loop
Right-click to deactivate loop connecting two receiver lines (page 356)
Station Tie a receiver station to a skipped channel (page 360)
Check Verify geophone takeouts do not exceed maximum defined distance of the cable (page 361)
Left-click to delete a cable from the layout (page 362)
Cable
Right-click to delete cable from a defined area(page 362)
Delete Jumper Delete a jumper from the layout (page 363)

Loop Delete a loop connecting two receiver lines from the layout (page 362)
NetLink Delete a NetLink from the layout (page 364)
All Delete all layout items from the iX1 Map (page 362)

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Pop-up Menu (Layout)
When Layout Tab is selected, place the cursor over receiver station on the iX1 Map Screen and right-click to display a pop-up
menu.
Properties (Layout)
1. Place the cursor over a RAM (PSU), FTU or the truck icon on the iX1 Map Screen and right-click.
2. Select Properties... from the pop-up menu. The Properties pop-up for the selected RAM (PSU), FTU or truck
displays.
RAM Properties
1. In the RAM Icon Scale field, select a value (in percent) to define the size of the RAM (PSU) icon.
2. In the Cable Break Icon Scale field, select a value (in percent) to define the size of the cable break icon.
3. Click OK to apply the properties.
FTU Properties
1. In the Icon Scale field, select a value (in percent) to define the size of the FTU icon.
2. Activate the Enable Move checkbox to allow the FTU icon to be repositioned on the Map Screen.
Truck Properties
1. In the Icon Scale field, enter a value (in percent) to define the size of the truck icon.
2. Enable the Pull Repeaters checkbox to simultaneously move repeaters that are located between the truck and the
first FTU on the receiver line.
3. From the Icon list, select a truck or boat icon to represent the recording truck on the Map Screen.

User Manual
Default (Layout)
The Default button displays the options to define layout for the sub-project. The layout options include adding cable and RAMs to
the sub-project.
1. From the Layout Tab, click . The Default tab options display.
• The receiver stations that don’t have the assigned cable change colour to green.
2. Select one of the following RAM layout options:
• Optimize Layout - Instructs the system to use the least number of RAMs on a line.The Optimize Layout option
places the first RAM at the beginning of the receiver line, regardless of the flag number. Remaining RAMs are laid
out at four-flag intervals for the rest of the line.
• RAMs between same flag numbers on all lines - Instructs the system to force a RAM position between flags
ending in 104 and 105, then 108 and 109, 112 and 113 etc., to the end of each line. The pattern changes only when
obstacles prevent crews from extending lines (i.e., across lakes or over roads). In these cases, the RAM closest to
the obstacle is assigned less than four channels to position rest of the RAMs in the same pattern on all lines.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
3. Select cable type in the Cable Type field (if applicable). The geophone types that are associated with the chosen
cable automatically display in the adjacent field.
• Click Cable Table... to display the Cable Table.
Note
4. Enable Delete Jumpers option to remove previously installed jumpers from the iX1 Map Screen.
5. In the Direction section choose one of two options:
• Low to High - to layout cables from the beginning of the line (low flag numbers)
• High to Low - to layout cables from the end of the line (high flag numbers)
6. Click OK to apply the layout settings. The layout of receiver line cables display on the iX1 Map Screen.

User Manual
Add Cable (Layout)
The Cable button is used to add cables (equipment) to the receiver stations (lines). This may occur when new stations are added
to the line, new lines added to the sub-project or cables were previously removed using Delete Cable or Delete All options.
Note
The Cable option places two station cable before a RAM at the point of beginning.
1. From the Layout Tab, click . The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the first undefined station (green) to begin adding the cables and click.
3. Move to the last undefined station and click. The Select Cable Type pop-up displays.
4. In the Cable Type field, select the type of cable to add. The Sensor Types field displays sensors for that cable.
5. Click OK to add cables (equipment) to the line or undefined segment.
Complete (Layout)
The Complete button defines cables (equipment) for a line that has no equipment layout defined. For a line that has partially
defined equipment, system continues layout cables using existing RAM pattern.
Note
The Complete option places a RAM at the beginning of the line.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
2. Place the cursor on a receiver line or undefined segment and click. The Select Cable Type pop-up displays.
4. Click OK. The Select Orientation pop-up displays.
Note
The Select Orientation pop-up displays only if undefined line is selected.
5. Click OK to complete the cable layout for selected line or undefined segment.
At Flag (Layout)
The At Flag button is used to place a RAM at selected flag location. Remaining RAMs are laid out at four-flag intervals for the
rest of the line on both sides of the insertion point.
1. From the Layout Tab, click . The Layout Tab changes and displays the At Flag options, and the cursor
2. Place over the receiver station where to place a RAM, or populate the At Flag fields as follows:
• In the RLine field, select the receiver line.
• In the Low Flag field, select the receiver station.
• In the Cable field, select a cable type to add (if required).
3. Click OK to add the cable.

User Manual
Add Loop (Layout)
The Add Loop button is used to define a interline jumper (loop) between two receiver lines. This option can be used:
• to “snake” the receiving lines (active loop)
• create a redundancy path (inactive loop)
Add Active Loop
1. From the Layout Tab, left-click to set the active loop. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed
over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the last (first) station of the first receiver line to begin adding the loop and click.
3. Place on the last (first) station of the next (second) receiver line and click. The Number of Repeaters pop-up
displays.
4. In the Number of Repeaters to Add field, select the number of repeater RAMs to add.
5. Click OK to add a loop between two receiver lines.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Add Inactive Loop
1. From the Layout Tab, right-click to set the inactive loop. The cursor changes to the edit icon when
placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the last (first) station of the first receiver line to begin adding the loop and click.
3. Place on the last (first) station of the next (second) receiver line and click. The Number of Repeaters pop-up
displays.
4. In the Number of Repeaters to Add field, select the number of repeater RAMs to add.
5. Click OK to add a loop between two receiver lines.
Edit Loop (Layout)
Activate Loop
1. From the Layout Tab (Edit), left-click to activate an inactive loop. The cursor changes to the edit icon
2. Place on the inactive loop and click to activate.

User Manual
Deactivate Loop
1. From the Layout Tab (Edit), right-click to deactivate an active loop. The cursor changes to the edit icon
2. Place on the active loop and click to deactivate.
Add Netlink (Layout)
The NetLink button is used to bridge gaps or breaks in the receiver lines using wireless radio telemetry.
Note
Always add Netlinks outward from the truck location when communication network is already
established.
2. Place on the first station before the break to begin adding a pair of NetLinks and click.
3. Place on the first station after the break and click. The Netlinks Pre/Post Skips pop-up displays.
4. In the Pre Skip and Post Skip fields, select the number of stations (takeouts) to skip (increment of 4).
5. Click OK to add a pair of Netlinks over the gap.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Shift (Layout)
The Shift button is used to change RAMs position in one-flag increments along one or more selected receiver lines.
1. From the Layout Tab, click . The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
The Layout Tab changes and the Shift options display.
2. Click once (tag along) on each line to be shifted (selected lines display in cyan on the Map Screen).
3. Choose one of the following options:
• Click <-Left/Down to move equipment (on the selected lines) by one flag to the left (horizontal line orientation), or
by one flag down (vertical line orientation).
• Click Right/Up-> to move equipment (on the selected lines) by one flag to the right (horizontal line orientation), or
by one flag up (vertical line orientation).
Note
The x2 option is used to skip (disable) every second takeout of the existing 4-takeout cable. The x1
option disables previously applied x2 option.
4. Click Close or Esc to return to the Layout Tab.
Break (Layout)
The Break button is used to define cable breaks that occur between any two consecutive receiver flags (takeouts) in the existing
layout.
1. To define a break, click on the Layout Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the
iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the receiver station on one side of the desired break location and click.
3. Move to the receiver station on other side of the break location and click to create a break.

User Manual
Jumper (Layout)
The Jumper button is used to add inline jumpers over the gaps or where cable breaks occur in the layout.
An inline jumper:
• Defines a skipped takeout between two consecutive receiver flags Figure 9
• Makes a detour around a series of inaccessible receiver flags Figure 10
• Fixes the break Figure 11
Note
Always add jumpers in the same direction as the cable was physically laid out.
1. To add an jumper, click on the Layout Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the
iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the last active (or live) receiver that precedes the jumper and click.
3. Move to the first active receiver following the jumper and click. The Jumper Skips pop-up displays.
4. In the Number of Station skips to add field, select the number of skipped channels (not assigned to the receiver
flags) used in the jumper. The correct number of skipped channels must be entered to maintain the correct receiver
flag/channel number relationship on the receiver line.
5. Click OK to add the jumper.
Skip Report
Refer to “View Layout Skips Only Report” on page 277 for information about the Skip Report.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Figure 9 Skipped Takeout
Figure 10 Detour Skips
Figure 11 Break Fix

User Manual
Edit Station (Layout)
1. To tie a receiver station to a skipped channel, click on the Layout Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon
2. Place over the receiver station to be returned to active state and click.
3. Move to the channel to be removed from the jumper and click. The Select Cable Type pop-up displays.
4. In the Cable Type field, select the cable type.
5. Click OK to add the station. The skipped channel is connected to the selected receiver station.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Check (Layout)
The Check button is used to verify that distance between receiver points do not exceed the maximum distance between takeouts
specified under cable types (refer to “Cable Types” on page 244).
1. Click on the Layout Tab.
• If the distance between receiver points are within tolerance, the following pop-up displays.
• If an errors occur, the location of the error(s) display in red on the Map Screen and the following error message
displays.
2. If no errors were found, click OK and return to the Map Screen. If errors were reported, click OK and review the
error list.
3. The report can be saved , copied , and printed .
4. Close the window to return to the iX1 Map Screen.

User Manual
Delete Cable (Layout)
1. To remove cable from a single receiver station or along a receiver line segment (right-click by area), left-click
on the Layout Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the first station to delete cable and click.
3. Place on the last station of the segment to delete cable and click.The equipment (RAMs and cables) is deleted
and only receiver stations display on the Map Screen.
Delete Loop (Layout)
1. To remove a loop between two receiver lines, click on the Layout Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon
2. Place on the loop to delete and click. The loop is deleted.
Delete All (Layout)
1. To delete all layout and network items from the iX1 Map Screen, click on the Layout Tab. The Delete All
Network Items pop-up displays.
2. Click Yes to delete all layout and network items or click No to cancel.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Delete Jumper (Layout)
The Delete Jumper button is used to remove jumpers from the existing layout. When an jumper is deleted, the receiver stations
that are bypassed by that jumper remain out of the layout.
1. To delete an jumper, click on the Layout Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over
the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the jumper to be deleted and click.The jumper is deleted.
3. To add cables to the receiver stations and restore the cable continuity, click from the Layout Tab. The
cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen. The receiver stations without an
assigned cable change color to green.
4. Place on the first station before the break and click.
5. Move to the first station after the break and click. The Select Cable Type pop-up displays.
7. Click OK to add cables (equipment).

User Manual
Delete NetLink (Layout)
The Delete NetLink button is used to remove Netlinks from the existing layout. When Netlinks are deleted, the receiver stations
that are bypassed by that link remain out of the layout.
1. To delete a NetLink, click on the Layout Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the
iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place on the NetLink to be deleted and click.The NetLink units are deleted from the layout.
1. To add cables to the receiver stations and restore the cable continuity, click from the Layout Tab. The cursor
changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen. The receiver stations without an assigned cable
change color to green.
2. Place on the first undefined station (green) and click.
3. Move to the last undefined station and click. The Select Cable Type pop-up displays.
4. In the Cable Type field, select the type of cable to add. The Sensor Types field displays the sensors for that cable.
5. Click OK to add cables (equipment).
6. Fix the breaks. Refer to “Jumper (Layout)” on page 358.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Net (Network) Tab
The Net Tab is used to connect the recorder (truck) to the receiver lines. The Net Tab provides a place to add, edit, and delete
FTUs, repeater FTUs and manage primary and secondary baselines.
• Select Mode > Network Edit from the drop menu or click Net Tab.
Button Description
Left-click to add one or more linked FTUs to the network (page 368)
FTU
Right-click to add a single FTU (without link) (page 371)
Left-click to add repeater FTU between recorder and first line FTU or between FTUs (page 371)
RptrFTU
Add Right-click to add non-network repeater FTU
Link Create a link between recorder and FTU or between FTUs on primary baseline (page 371)
Create a S-Link between primary and secondary baselines or between FTUs on the secondary
S-Link
baseline (page 376)
Port Change the FTU ports and sides (page 372)
Left-click to toggle the RAM power on or off (page 374)
On/Off
Right-click to toggle the RAMs power on or off by vector (page 375)
Edit Left-click to activate single S-link (page 377)
Activate
Right-click to activate multiple S-links
Left-click to deactivate S-link on the FTU’s away from truck side (page 378)
Deactivate
Right-click to deactivate link between truck and FTU
FTU Delete a selected FTU (page 379)
From Delete all network items from the selected FTU on it’s away from truck side (page 379)
Delete Link Delete the link between FTUs (page 379)
S-link Delete the secondary link between FTUs (page 379)
All Delete all network items from the iX1 Map Screen (page 380)

User Manual
Message and Info Windows (Net)
When Net Tab is selected, the FTU Info, Channel Info and RAM Info display in the RAM View and Channel View windows.
• Place the cursor over a receiver station, FTU or RAM icons to display RAM, FTU, Channel, or network information.
Pop-up Menu (Net)
When the Net tab is selected, right-click on the FTU icon to display a pop-up menu.
Properties (Layout)
1. Place the cursor over a RAM (PSU), FTU or the truck icon on the iX1 Map Screen and right-click.
2. Select Properties... from the pop-up menu. The Properties pop-up for the selected RAM (PSU), FTU or truck
displays.
RAM Properties
1. In the RAM Icon Scale field, select a value (in percent) to define the size of the RAM (PSU) icon.
2. In the Cable Break Icon Scale field, select a value (in percent) to define the size of the cable break icon.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
FTU Properties
1. In the Icon Scale field, select a value (in percent) to define the size of the FTU icon.
2. Activate the Enable Move checkbox to allow the FTU icon to be repositioned on the Map Screen.
Truck Properties
1. In the Icon Scale field, enter a value (in percent) to define the size of the truck icon.
2. Enable the Pull Repeaters checkbox to simultaneously move repeaters that are located between the truck and the
first FTU on the receiver line.
3. From the Icon list, select a truck or boat icon to represent the recording truck on the Map Screen.

User Manual
Add FTU (Net)
The FTU button is used to create (extend) a communication network between the recording truck (CRS) and receiver lines.
• The FTUs are laid out at intersections of the receiver lines and baselines.
• The FTUs interconnect with other FTUs and CRS using fiber optic telemetry cables (links).
Add FTU (New Primary Baseline)
1. To add new primary baseline, left-click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the FTU edit icon
2. Place over the truck icon to highlight it and click.
3. Move to the receiver line to be connected to network and place over a RAM icon and click. The Select FTU
Table pop-up displays.
4. Select Fiber Port Number to connect with.
5. Click OK to add FTU to the receiver line which is connected now to the truck.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Add FTU (Extend Primary Baseline)
1. To extend existing primary baseline, left-click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the FTU edit icon
2. Place over a FTU icon and click.
3. Move to the receiver line to be connected to the network and place it over a RAM icon and click.
4. The RAM icon is replaced with FTU icon and receiver line is connected to the existing primary baseline.
5. Move to the next receiver line to be connected to the network and place it over a RAM icon and click.
6. The RAM icon is replaced with FTU icon and next receiver line is connected to the existing primary baseline.
7. Continue placing and clicking to add FTUs or place at the last line to be connected and click. The FTU Every
N Lines pop-up displays.
8. In the Every field, enter 1 to insert FTU on every line between the first and last lines without FTUs, or enter 2 to
insert a FTU on every second line.
• Click Yes to add the FTUs to the lines.

User Manual
• Click No to add only one FTU on the last line.
• Click Cancel to exit without adding FTU(s).
Add FTU (non-linked)
1. To add FTU to the receiver line, right-click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the FTU edit icon
2. Place over a RAM and click. The RAM icon changes to FTU icon.
3. Move to the next receiver line and click on a RAM icon to assign this item as FTU and so on.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Add Repeater FTU
A repeater FTU is a regular FTU and used to re-transmit only digital data between the truck and FTU, between FTUs on primary
and secondary (alternate) baselines. The use of repeater FTUs allow users to extend the distance between receiver lines or
between primary and secondary (alternate) baselines without compromising the existing baseline capacity.
1. To add repeater FTU, left-click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the FTU edit icon when
placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over a FTU icon (FTU and link on the truck side is highlighted) and click. The Number of Repeater
FTUs pop-up displays.
3. Select the Number of Repeater FTUs to Add.
4. Click OK to add repeater FTU(s) between the network devices.
Add Link (Net)
The Link button is used to establish communication link (primary baseline) between the recording truck and FTU on the receiver
line or between FTUs on different receiver lines.
1. To add a link between network devices on the primary baseline, click on the Net Tab. The cursor
2. Place over the truck or FTU that is already connected to the network and click.
3. Move to the desired FTU on other receiver line and click. The link connects two network devices.

User Manual
Edit Port (Net)
The Port button is used to assign a primary baseline to a different fiber port and change the receiver line cable port orientation on
a particular FTU.
Edit FTU Ports
1. To assign a different fiber port number to the primary baseline, left-click on the Net Tab. The cursor
2. Place over a FTU on the receiver line closest to the recording truck and click. The Edit FTU Ports and Sides
pop-up displays.
3. Select desired fiber port number in the LIUs From Truck field.
4. If there are repeater FTUs between the truck and receiver line FTU, place over the repeater FTU closest to the
recording truck and click. The Edit FTU Ports and Sides pop-up displays.
5. Select desired fiber port number in the LIUs From Truck field.
6. Click OK to apply changes.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Edit FTU Sides
1. To change the FTU receiver line cable sides, right-click to a desired FTU icon on the iX1 Map Screen. The following
pop-up displays.
2. Select Edit Ports. The Edit FTU Ports and Sides pop-up displays.
3. Change the FTU cable sides.
4. Click OK to apply changes.

User Manual
On/Off (Net)
Power Off
1. To power off a portion of the existing network from a selected RAM on away from the truck side, click on the
Net Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over a RAM icon and click to power off the portion of the receiver line starting from the selected RAM as
shown below (icons turn blue when powered off).
3. Place over a FTU and click to power off multiple receiver lines starting from the selected FTU as shown below
(icons turn blue when powered off).

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Power On/Off by Vector
1. To toggle on/off network devices by vector, right-click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon
2. Place at the first point to define a vector and click. Move to the next point and click again. Continue this
process until the desired shape is complete.
3. Right-click to end the edit. The Toggle Highlighted RAMs pop-up displays.
4. Click OK to:
• Power off the network devices on the away from truck side (devices that are powered off display in blue)
• Power on the network devices from the truck up to the vector (devices that are powered on display in light brown)
Power On
1. To power on a portion of the network up to selected RAM, click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the
edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over a RAM and click to power on the portion of receiver line starting from FTU on this line and up to
selected RAM (icons turn light brown when powered on).

User Manual
Add S-Link (Net)
Alternate data path routes are physically deployed and connected in the field. Primary and secondary (alternate) baselines can be
connected with fiber optic cables (S-links) to provide an alternate data path to the Central Recording System (CRS) in the event of
loss of the primary path. Acquisition software then controls data routing and configuration of active data paths.
In the event of loss of a current data path, the operator is warned of data loss and provided the option to continue acquisition,
complete current VP and halt, or abort immediately. If halt or abort is chosen, the operator then selects and activates an alternate
data path. The software then automatically re-synchronizes the ground equipment and data routing over the new path.
Figure 12 Alternate Baseline Example
Add Alternate (Secondary) Baseline
1. To add FTUs for the alternate baseline, right-click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the FTU edit
2. Place over a RAM on the receiver line and click. The RAM icon changes to FTU.
3. Move to the next receiver line and click on a RAM icon to assign it as FTU and so on.
5. To establish an alternate data path, left-click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon
6. Place over the last FTU on the primary baseline and click.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
7. Move to the first FTU on the alternate baseline and click. The Number of Repeater FTUs to Add pop-up
displays.
8. Select Number of Repeater FTUs to be added to S-link and click OK. The S-link connects primary and alternate
baseline.
9. Repeat steps from 5 to 7 to add S-links to the alternate baseline as shown on the Figure 12.
Activate S-Link (Net)
Figure 13 Original Network Configuration
In case of broken fiber optic cable (Figure 14) the observer from the recorder can activate S-link to restore the alternate data
path.
1. To activate S-link from the truck to FTU on the alternate baseline, right-click on the Net Tab. The cursor
Figure 14 Alternate Path Activation (1)
2. Place over the Aux. FTU (Figure 14) and click.
3. Move to the first FTU on the alternate baseline and click. The S-link is activated and changes color to green.
4. Run Status/Telemetry test to restore the communication.

User Manual
5. To activate S-link between FTUs in case of broken receiver line cable (Figure 15), left-click on the Net
Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
Figure 15 Alternate Path Activation (2)
6. Place over the FTU icon (FTU and link on the away from truck side is highlighted) and click. The S-link is
activated and changes colour to green.
Deactivate S-Link (Net)
1. To deactivate S-link after replacement of broken cables, left-click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to
the edit icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
Figure 16 Deactivate S-link
2. Place over the FTU icon (Figure 16) (FTU and link on the away from truck side is highlighted) and click. The S-
link is deactivated and changes color to white.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Delete FTU (Net)
1. To delete any type of FTU devices, click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the from map icon
2. Place over a FTU to highlight it and click. The selected FTU is removed from the Map Screen and the receiver
line, and FTU icon is replaced with RAM icon.
Delete From (Net)
1. To delete the network devices starting from the selected FTU in direction outward from the truck, click on
the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the all icon when placed over the iX1 Map Screen.
2. Place over a FTU to highlight it and click. The selected FTU and connected network devices (on away from
truck side) are deleted from the Map Screen. The FTU icons are replaced with RAM icons on the receiver lines.
Delete Link (Net)
The Delete Link button is used to delete a communication link between FTUs on the truck side of a selected device.
1. To delete a link, click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1
Map Screen.
2. Place over the FTU to highlight it and connected on the truck side link, and click. The selected link is removed
from the Map Screen with any connected repeater FTUs.
Delete S-Link (Net)
The Delete S-Link button is used to delete a secondary link between FTUs on the truck side of selected device.
1. To delete a link, click on the Net Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the iX1
Map Screen.
2. Place over the FTU on the alternate baseline to highlight it and click. The link on the truck side is removed with
any connected repeater FTUs.

User Manual
All (Net)
1. To delete all network items from the iX1 Map Screen, click on the Net Tab. The Delete all Network Items
pop-up displays.
2. Click Yes to delete all network items or click No to cancel.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Test Tab
The Test Tab is used to perform a variety of line tests. The test results can be displayed on the iX1 Map Screen (plotted or
copied to media). Refer to “iX1 Channel and Sensor Tests” on page 421
1. Select Mode > Line Test from the drop menu or click the Test Tab.
2. Select either the Net, Patch or Test Patch test option.
• Net - Test the entire visible network
• Patch - Test only sub-project related patch
• Test Patch - Test temporary defined test patch
3. Select the applicable test to perform.
• Status/Tx - Perform a status and telemetry tests
• Ch - Perform internal G3i HD channel hardware tests and show Hawk status info related to the internal tests
• Ph - Perform sensor tests connected to G3i HD channels and show Hawk status info related to the sensor tests
Test Tab Buttons
Tests can be performed immediately, repeatedly, daily, or monthly. In addition, specific test parameters can be defined. The
following buttons are common to all tests (phone, channel, and telemetry).
Button Description
GO Click to start the tests immediately.
Repeat Click to start the last set of tests continuously.
Halt Click to stop the tests. Only active during a test.
Daily Click to define daily test parameters
Monthly Click to define monthly test parameters
User Click to define specific test parameters
Erase Test Values Button
The Erase Test Values button is located in the toolbar and is used to erase the results of the line tests.

User Manual
Test Hot Keys
When the Test Tab is selected, the hot key combinations are available to perform line test functions. Refer to “Hot Keys” on
page 285 for a complete list.
G Start selected tests Ctrl+G Start tests in Repeat mode
Alt+G Run Status/Tx test Ctrl+H Halt test in progress
Ctrl+Q Query all tests F5 Update to Acquisition
Message and Info Windows (Test)
• Place the cursor over a receiver icon on the iX1 Map Screen to display G3i HD/Hawk channel or sensor test information.
• Green Passed
• Red Failed
• Yellow Warning
• NT Not Tested
• Double-click on any receiver icon to open Channel/RAM Test Report for all four channels belonging to that RAM/FTU/
PSU.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Phone Test
The Phone Test option is used to perform tests on all sensors within the active network or patch. The test area is dependent
upon whether Net, Patch or Test Patch is selected.
1. Click Ph (Phone).
2. Enable the applicable checkboxes to define the group of phone tests to run, or toggle to select All On or All Off.
Noise Measures the ambient RMS noise that is recorded from the sensor array
Pulse Measures the sensor response to a pulse (Tilt Test)
Sensitivity Measures the sensor sensitivity
Resistance Measures the resistance of the sensor array
Leakage Measures the sensor signal loss to the earth
THD Total Harmonic Distortion - Measures the total harmonic distortion of the sensor array
Impedance Measures the total sensor array impedance
Cross Feed - Measures the energy transferred between an internally driven sensor and an
XFD
adjacent non-driven sensor
3. Click or press the hot key G to begin the phone tests. As testing begins, a progress bar tracks testing
at the bottom of the Test Tab and a status bar displays the test name at the top of the Test Tab. When testing is
complete, results display in the Receiver Info view.
Note
From the Test Tab, click Halt or press Ctrl+H at any time to terminate a test.
4. To see the results of any specific test only, click All Off, enable the test checkbox and click . The
results for this test (last run) are published in the iX1 Map Screen and Receiver/Station Info window.

User Manual
Channel Test
The Channel Test option is used to perform tests on all channels within the active network or patch. The test area is dependent
upon whether Net, Patch or Test Patch is selected.
1. Click Ch (Channel).
2. Enable the applicable checkboxes to define the group of channel tests to run, or toggle to select All On or All Off.
Full Band Measure the RMS noise over the entire recorded bandwidth
Impulse Measure the three main characteristics of a channel impulse response and gain matching
THD Total Harmonic Distortion - measure the total harmonic distortion of the channel
CMR Common Mode Rejection Ratio - measure the common mode rejection ratio of the channel
Cross Feed - measure the energy transferred between an internally driven channel and an adjacent
XFD
non-driven channel
3. The frequencies selected for THD, CMR, and XFD display beside the fields when the checkboxes are enabled.To
change the test frequencies, select Test > Test Parameters from the drop menu.
4. Click or press the hot key G to begin the channel tests. As testing begins, a progress bar tracks
testing at the bottom of the Test Tab and a status bar displays the test name at the top of the Test Tab. When
testing is complete, results can be displayed in the Receiver/Station Info view.
Note
5. To see the results of any specific test only, click All Off, enable the test checkbox and click . The
results for this test (last run) are published in the iX1 Map Screen and Receiver/Station Info window.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Status/Tx Test
The Status/TX test is used to wake up the field units, send execution commands, request the unit status information, verify
communication between the units on every transmission pair.
1. Click Status/Tx.
2. Select Telemetry to test the line transmission.
3. Select Status to request the status information that includes the firmware revision and battery (downline power)
voltage.
4. Select Power Consumption to identify the possible problems in the line power distribution system.
5. In the Length field, select the length of time (in milliseconds) for the Status/Tx test.
Note
The test duration for transmission test (Telemetry) should be at least 15000ms.
6. Click or press the hot key G to begin the channel tests. As testing begins, a progress bar tracks
testing at the bottom of the Test Tab and a status bar displays the test name at the top of the Test Tab. When
testing is complete, results can be displayed in the Receiver/Station Info view.
Note

User Manual
Configure Test Patch
The Test Patch option is used to simplify and speed up the line troubleshooting process. It allows the user to create the
temporary patches with channels that didn’t pass first run of tests.
1. To create the test patch, enable the checkbox against Test Patch.
2. Select Patch Tab.
• There are only two options available Add Station and Delete Station for editing. The system also informs the user
that Patch Tab is in the Test Patch mode.
3. Select the receiver icons (in red) that didn’t pass the previous run of tests.
4. Return to the Test Tab and click or press the hot key G to begin the tests.
5. If some of the channels pass the tests, return to the Patch Tab and use Delete Station to remove these channels
from the test patch.
6. Repeat steps 4 to 5 until all channels are passed the test.
Custom Tests (Daily, Monthly, User)
Refer to the “Test Guide” on page 433.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Culture Tab
The Culture Tab is used to display, insert, append, move, and delete the culture items (e.i., well sites, houses) from the iX1 Map
Screen. Natural physical features (e.i., rivers, lakes, roads) can also be defined in the Map Screen.
• Select Mode > Culture Edit from the drop menu or click the Culture Tab.
Button Description
Polygon Draw a multi-sided shape or line(s) (page 388)
Icon Select an icon to display on the Map Screen (page 389)
Add
Lockin Link a moving object to an icon (page 390)
Text Insert text on the Map Screen (page 391)
Append Edit existing polygon lines and text (page 392)
Colour Change outline and fill colors (page 392)
Edit
Property Define culture properties (page 392)
Tracking Setup vehicle support tracking properties (page 396)
All Display all culture on the Map Screen(page 401)
Hide All Hide all cultures on the Map Screen (page 401)
Show
Last Exit Define a time range to see the last vehicle appearing in a selected culture (page 401)
Check Validate all active tracking icons on the Map Screen (page 402)
Left-click to delete a selected culture item from the Map Screen
Any
Right-click to delete the culture item from a selected area (page 402)
Delete RAM Find Delete all device find objects from the Map Screen (page 402)
Lockin Delete a selected moving object lock-in link (page 402)
All Delete all culture items from the Map Screen (page 403)
Message and Info Windows (Culture)
When the Culture Tab is selected and the cursor is placed over a RAM/PSU/FTU or channel, information displays in the
information windows. The Channel Info window displays receiver and source coordinates in Northing and Easting only.

User Manual
Pop-up Menu (Culture)
When the Culture Tab is selected, place the cursor over the Map Screen and right-click to display a pop-up menu.
Polygon (Culture)
The polygon function is a drawing tool used to draw lines and geometrical shapes to be displayed in the Map Screen.
Draw a Polygon
1. To draw lines and shapes on the Map Screen to represent roads, rivers, lakes, boundaries, etc., click on the
Culture Tab or select New Polygon (Ctrl+Shift+1) from the right-click pop-up menu. The cursor changes to the edit icon
2. Place at the point to begin defining the shape (line) and left-click.
4. Continue to move and click until the entire shape is defined.
5. Right-click to end the edit. A color palette pop-up displays.
6. Select the color to use for the outline of the shape (line) from the color palette.
7. Click OK to apply the selected color to the object and return to the Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Move a Polygon
1. To move already defined polygon, place the cursor over the outline of the polygon.
2. When the entire polygon changes color (highlighted), click, hold, and drag the polygon to new location on the Map
Screen.
Reshape a Polygon
1. To reshape a polygon, place the cursor over the segment (around the corner) of the polygon to reshape.
2. When the segment of the polygon changes color, click, hold, and drag the shape segment to desired location on
the Map Screen.
Icon (Culture)
The Icon button is used to add an icon to the Map Screen. The Add Icon pop-up provides a selection of icons to choose from that
include the following:
• Gas wells
• Oils wells
• Microwaves
• Power poles
• Houses
Aside from the provided icons, any standard *.bmp file can be imported to display on the Map Screen.
Add an Icon
1. To add an icon to the Map Screen, click on the Culture Tab. The Add Icon window displays.
2. Select an icon and click OK. The icon automatically displays at the center of the Map Screen.
3. Click, hold, and drag the icon to the desired location.

User Manual
Add Icon From a File
1. To add an icon to the Map Screen from a file, click on the Culture Tab or place the cursor on the Map Screen
and right-click. Select New Icon (Ctrl+Shift+2) from the right-click pop-up menu. The Add Icon window displays.
2. Click .
3. Navigate to the folder and select the icon to be added.
4. Click Open to insert the *.bmp file. The icon displays in the center of the Map Screen.
Note
The file must be a bitmap image and cannot exceed 50 x 50 pixels.
5. Click, hold, and drag the icon to the desired location on the Map Screen.
Lockin (Culture)
The Lockin button is used in conjunction with vehicle tracking to lock vehicles to a defined area (can also be used as an anchor/
drift alarm during the marine work).
1. Add an icon to the Map Screen (refer to “Icon (Culture)” on page 389).
2. To use the Lockin option, click on the Culture tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed
over the Map Screen.
3. Place on a stationary icon and click.
4. Move to a vehicle (moving) icon and click again. The Lockin Distance pop-up displays.
5. In the Distance field, enter a radius (metres/feet) around the icon to use as the lock-in buffer.
6. Click OK to apply the lock-in radius.
Refer to “Lock In” on page 400 for display messages.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Text (Culture)
The Text button is used to enter and display text on the Map Screen.
Add Text
1. To add text to the Map Screen, click on the Culture Tab or select New Text (Ctrl+Shift+3) from the right-click
pop-up menu. The Add/Edit Text window displays.
• Enter text in the main area of the Add/Edit Text window.
• If desired, click Font to change the font type, size and color in the Font pop-up.
• Enable the Hide checkbox to hide the text on the Map Screen.
2. Click OK to add the text to the Map Screen.
3. Click, hold, and drag the text to the desired location on the Map Screen.
Edit Text
1. From the Map Screen, click on the text (text changes color when selected).
2. Right-click on the selected text to open pop-up menu.
3. Select Append/Edit (Ctrl+Shift+4) to open the Add/Edit Text window.
4. Edit text as required.
5. Click OK to apply the text edits.

User Manual
Append (Culture)
The Append button is used to append (add/attach) the shape to the existing polygon or modify the text on the Map Screen.
Note
To move an existing icon, polygon, or text, the Append button does NOT need to be selected. Refer to
“Move a Polygon” on page 389 or “Reshape a Polygon” on page 389
Append a Polygon
1. To append a new polygon to the existing one, click on the Culture Tab. The cursor changes to the edit icon
when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place over the polygon requiring editing until a full shape changes color.
3. Click on the section that has changed color (at the point to begin defining the new shape).
5. Continue to move and click until the new polygon is defined.
6. Right-click to end the edit. The newly defined shape is appended to the existing polygon.
Colour (Culture)
1. To edit the outline color of a polygon or line segment on the Map Screen, click on the Culture Tab or select
Change Colour (Ctrl+Shiht+5) from right-click pop-up menu. The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over
the Map Screen.
2. Place around the edges of the polygon until it changes color and then click. The color palette window displays.
3. Click on a desired color.
4. Click OK to change the outline color of the polygon.
Property (Culture)
The Property button is used to define the fill and color properties of a polygon on the Map Screen, as well as define lock-out
areas to be used in conjunction with vehicle tracking.
Note
Click the Properties button and then click on the text on the Map Screen to edit.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Polygon Properties
1. To edit the fill and color properties, click on the Culture Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when
placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place around the edges of the polygon until it changes the color and then click. The Culture Properties
window displays.
3. Click Color to display the color pallet.
4. From the Culture Properties pop-up in the Fill Interior field, select one of the following options:
None
Solid
Hatch
Hatch Cross
Cross
5. Enable the Hide checkbox so the polygon does not display on the Map Screen.
6. Enable the Lock Out checkbox to define the area within a polygon as a “no entry area” (used in conjunction with
vehicle tracking).
Note
When Lock Out is enabled, the Fill Interior options are disabled. A cross hatch fill is automatically used
to indicate a vehicle (moving object) is in a lock-out area. Refer to “Lock Out” on page 399 for lock-out
warnings and messages.
7. Click OK to apply the culture properties.

User Manual
Fixed Icon Properties
The properties of icons added to the Map Screen using the Icon button (fixed icons) are used to define a lock-out or lock-in radius
around the fixed icon.
• Lock Out radius - A warning message displays when vehicle enters the defined area
• Lock In radius - A warning message displays when vehicle exits the define area
1. To define Lock Out or Lock In radius, click on the Culture Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon
when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place on the icon and click. The Culture Properties pop-up displays.
3. Enable the Lock Out checkbox or the Lock In checkbox.
4. Enable the Hide checkbox to NOT display the icon on the Map Screen.
Note
If Lock Out or Lock In is enabled, the Hide option is not accessible (grayed out).
5. In the Radius field, select a value to define the radius around the icon (meters or feet).
6. Click OK to set the lock-out or lock-in radius. The lock-out or lock-in area circle displays on the Map Screen.
Note
For lock-out and lock-in warnings and messages, refer to “Lock In” on page 400 and “Lock Out” on
page 399.
Vehicle Tracking Icon Properties
1. To change the GPS tracked icon (moving object) properties (used in vehicle tracking), click on the Culture
Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
2. Place on the icon and click. The Icon ID window displays.
3. In the Label field, enter a name to be associated with selected icon.
4. In the Icon field, select the type of icon to display. The icon displays to the left of the Icon field.
5. Enable the Show Label checkbox to display the vehicle label below the icon on the Map Screen.
6. Enable the Hide checkbox to NOT display the selected icon on the Map Screen.
7. Click OK to apply the new icon properties.

User Manual
Tracking (Culture)
The Tracking button is used to identify and setup vehicle tracking (with a radio communication link) on the iX1 Map. The icons
represent different types of energy sources and vehicles on the Map Screen such as vibrators, trucks, boats, quads, etc. As a
vehicle moves, its position on the Map Screen updates.
1. To activate the vehicle tracking functionality, select Parameters > Encoders and Communication... from the iX1 Vib
drop menu. The Encoder and Communication window displays.
2. Select Enable checkbox and enter the data associated with vehicle tracking communication protocol in the Vehicle
Tracking section.
Com Port Select the com port to be used.

Baud Rate Select the correct baud rate to be used.
Description Select the radio messaging format.
Manufacturer Enter the radio manufacturer
3. Enable Record Tracking Data to Database, if required.
4. Close the Encoder and Communication window. From now the Vehicle Tracking icon is active on the iX1 Map
Tool Bar and system is ready to accept vehicle tracking position messages.
5. To set up tracking thresholds and change vehicle icons, click on the Culture tab. The Vehicle Tracking
window displays.
Note
The unique ID must be programmed into each radio (the ID is used in the GPS position message).

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
6. Click in the Icon field. The Add Icon window displays.
7. Select the desired icon and click OK. The selected icon displays in the Icon field of the Vehicle Tracking window.
8. Set vehicle tracking parameters in accordance with the table below.
Label Enter a name for the vehicle.
Show (label) Enable the checkbox to display the vehicle label below the icon.
History Select a time frame window to track the vehicle. Based on the speed of the vehicle, a colored
tracking tail displays behind the vehicle for the specified time period.
Speed Limit Select a speed threshold for the vehicle. When vehicle exceeds the set limit, the system issues a
warning message.
Max Valid Select a value over which a detected speed will not display an out of tolerance warning message.
No Pos(ition) Select a duration of time to wait before the system issues the No Position warning message for the
vehicle. It indicates that system doesn’t receive the position messages due to broken radio or
vehicle is out of reach.
No Move(ment) Select a duration of time to wait before system issues the No Move warning message for the
vehicle. It indicates that system receives the GPS position messages, but vehicle is in static
position (not moving) over the specified period of time.
Move Tol(erance) Select the distance a vehicle can move and not be recognized as at new position.
9. Click OK to apply the vehicle tracking parameters and display vehicles on the Map Screen. Source and vehicle
icons position is updated with movement (based on tolerances defined in the Vehicle Tracking window).
Vehicle Speed Display
As a vehicle icon moves across the Map Screen, its speed is reflected by using a colored tail in accordance with a scale below.
Enable or Disable Tracking
• To enable vehicle tracking functionality, click on the iX1 Map Tool Bar. Click again to disable.

User Manual
Speed
• When the maximum speed tolerance (as defined in Vehicle Tracking pop-up) is exceeded by a vehicle, a warning
messages displays.
• Red color of the vehicle tracking tail indicates that speed is above the set limit. Also the vehicle icon is placed into red
circle in this case.
• Click on a vehicle icon to display the warning and speed in the GPS Location and Message windows.
Note
If History is set to None, a vehicle tracking tail does not display.
No Position
The following warn that a vehicle has not reported a position within the allotted time frame, as defined in the No Pos field.
• The warning pop-up displays when position messages aren’t received for the vehicle in the specified time frame.
• The vehicle icon is placed into red circle. Click on a vehicle icon to display the warning message in the GPS Location
and Message window.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
No Move(ment)
The following warn that a vehicle has not moved within the allotted time frame, as defined in the No Move field.
• The warning pop-up displays when position messages are received for the vehicle from the same position in the
specified time frame.
• The vehicle icon is placed into red circle. Click on a vehicle icon to display the warning message in the GPS Location
window.
Lock Out
When a vehicle enters a lock-out area, the lock-out area changes to a red crosshatch pattern and highlighted, a red circle
displays behind the vehicle icon, and a warning messages displays.

User Manual
Lock In
When a vehicle exits a defined area (lock-in area), the lock-in area changes to a crosshatch pattern and highlighted, a red circle
displays behind the vehicle icon, and a warning message displays.
• The Message window displays a warning message (including the vehicle unit number) outside the lock-in area, and the
GPS Location window displays a vehicle coordinates.
• Click on a vehicle icon to display the warning and current vehicle location outside the lock-in area.
Tracking Reports
• To display a report of the GPS position messages received for a vehicle, double-click on a tracked vehicle icon.
• The Tracking report can be saved , copied , and printed .
• To open additional report files, select File > Open from the drop menu or click .

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Show All (Culture)
• To display all culture items hidden on the Map Screen, click on the Culture Tab.
Hide All (Culture)
• To hide all culture items on the Map Screen, click on the Culture Tab.
Last Exit (Culture)
1. To define the time range to see the last vehicle exited a selected culture, click on the Culture Tab. The
cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place the cursor around the exit point on one side of the polygon until it changes color, and then click. The Time
Range window displays.
Note
The upper fields must be set to an earlier date and time than the bottom fields.
3. In the upper fields, click the arrow to display the calendar.
• Click on a start date to display in the date field then select a start time.
4. In the lower fields, click the arrow to display the calendar.
• Click on an end date to display in the date field then select an end time period.
5. Click OK apply the time range for the last vehicle to exit. The Tracking in Culture window displays.

User Manual
• The report can be saved , copied , and printed .
• To open additional report files, select File > Open from the drop menu or click .
Check (Culture)
• To validate tracked vehicle icons on the Map Screen, click on the Culture Tab.
Delete Any (Culture)
1. To delete a polygon, a section of a polygon, or a source/vehicle icon from the Map Screen, left-click on the
Culture Tab (right-click by area).
2. Depending upon the item to delete, complete one of the following options:
• Place the cursor on an icon and click to delete.
• Place the cursor on the polygon. When the entire polygon changes color, click to delete.
• Place the cursor on one side of the polygon. When it changes color, click to delete.
Delete RAM Find (Culture)
1. To remove the serial number RAM/FTU find icon that displays on the Map Screen as ? , click on the Culture
Tab. The Delete all RAM/FTU Find Objects pop-up displays.
2. Click Yes to delete all RAM/FTU icons from the Map Screen.
Delete Lockin (Culture)
1. To delete a lock-in area, click on the Culture Tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over
the Map Screen.
2. Place on one side of the polygon until it changes color and then click. The lock-in is removed from the selected
culture, but the culture remains on the Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Delete All (Culture)
1. To delete all culture items from the Map Screen, click on the Culture Tab. The Delete All Culture pop-up
displays.
2. Click Yes to delete all culture items from the Map Screen.

User Manual
Overlay Tab
The Overlay Tab consists of three additional sub-tabs:
• Aerial sub-tab - Used to display satellite aerial and topographical photographs (*.tif or *.geo-tif) (page 405)
• Culture File sub-tab - Used to display Shape files (*.shp) and DXF files (*.dxf) (page 407)
• Elevation sub-tab - Used to display the elevation map (page 413)
• Select Mode > Overlay Edit from the drop menu or click Overlay Tab.
Message and Info Windows (Overlay)
When Overlay Tab is selected and cursor is placed over a RAM, FTU, or Channel, the related information displays in the
Message, RAM Info and Channel Info windows.
The Overlay sub-tabs also provide the cursor coordinates in Northing and Easting. With exception to these two additional options,
the view information is similar to the Rxy Tab (refer to “View Info (Rxy)” on page 291).
Note
Message, RAM Info, and Channel Info windows must be selected from the View drop menu.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Aerial Sub-Tab (Overlay)
The Aerial sub-tab is used to import and display *.tif or *.geo-tiff satellite aerial photograph or topographic images in the iX1 Map
Screen.
A *.tif image file requires an additional *.tfw companion file. The *.tfw file contains the information used to position the image
correctly on the Map Screen, relative to the actual imported coordinates. The preferred *.geo-tif file contains the *.tfw relation
information that is embedded in the original *.tif file.
When importing *.tif images, use identical file prefixes (i.e., ProjectName.tif and ProjectName.tfw). The system software
searches for the companion *.tfw file and uses it’s information to automatically position the image on the currently zoomed Map
Screen (both files must be located in the same directory).
Note
INOVA recommends to store all image files in the doc directory of the current project.
1. Click the Aerial sub-tab on the Overlay Tab. The Aerial sub-tab options display.
2. From the Aerial sub-tab, click Edit. The Aerial Photo Properties pop-up displays.
3. Click File.... The Open pop-up displays (defaulted to the current doc directory).
4. Select a *.tif file in the doc directory or navigate to a folder and select a required *.tif file.
5. Click Open to return to the Aerial Photo Properties pop-up. In the Aerial Photo Properties pop-up, the bitmap
location for the selected *.tif file display.

User Manual
6. Click OK to import and display the selected aerial photograph over the Map Screen.
If the *.tfw file is not available, the image can still be imported. If required, complete the following:
• Locate and select the *.tif image (the Bitmap Location fields in the Aerial Photo Properties pop-up will not display
information in this case).
• Click Default to insert values (based upon the outer edges of the Map Screen coordinates) and pin the image on the
Map Screen. The location of the imported image (in relation to the actual imported coordinates) will not be correct.
The image must be manually manipulated by editing values in the Top/Left and Width/Height fields to correctly
place the *.tif on the Map Screen.
7. Enable the Visible checkbox on the Aerial sub-tab to display the imported aerial photograph on the Map Screen, or
disable to hide it.
8. Enable the Auto Load checkbox to automatically reload an aerial photograph image according to the current screen
resolution (zoom).
9. Click Reload to manually reload the aerial photograph image according to the current screen resolution.
10. The Scale Image section is used to improve the visibility of the aerial photograph on the Map Screen.
• Enable/disable the Invert checkbox to invert the image colors of the overlay image.
• Enable the Bright checkbox to adjust the image brightness. Click, hold, and drag the arrow on the slider to increase
or decrease the brightness of the overlay image.
• Enable the Satur(ation) checkbox to increase/decrease the depth of color. Click, hold, and drag the arrow on the
slider to increase/decrease the lightness/darkness of the overlay image.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Cult File Sub-Tab (Overlay)
The Culture File sub-tab is used to import files that contain specific culture items (prepared and provided by survey companies)
to display on the iX1 Map Screen. The supported culture files are *.dxf or *.shp (shape) formats and consist of several layers of
culture items such as:
• Power lines
• Rivers
• Lakes
• Roadways
• Railroads
• Defined shapes
All layers (or only a few) can be selected to display on the Map Screen.
• From the Overlay Tab, click the Cult File sub-tab to open the following window.
Button Description
Import Opens the File Overlay Properties window that is used to import the culture file (page 408)
Edit All Click to display all hidden objects (page 410)
Colours Define and renumber color selections for the overlay display (page 410)
Item Select and change the color of an item (page 410)
Colour Layer Select and change the color of a layer (page 410)
Polygon Change the color of the objects inside the defined polygon (page 411)
Item Select and hide a culture item (page 411)
Hide Layer Select and hide a layer (page 411)
Polygon Hide the objects inside the defined polygon (page 412)
Item Select and delete a culture item (page 412)
Delete Layer Select and delete a layer (page 412)
Polygon Delete the objects inside the defined polygon (page 412)
• To display all culture files/layers on the Map Screen, enable the Visible checkbox on the Cult File sub-tab.
• Enable the Show Text checkbox to display the text objects on the Map Screen, or disable to hide it.
• Enable the Zoom to Culture checkbox to display the culture file on the Map Screen if the culture extends outside the
network.
• Enable the Dim checkbox to increase/decrease the brightness of the culture layers on the Map Screen. Click, hold, and
drag the arrow on the slider to increase/decrease the brightness.

User Manual
Pop-up Menu (Cult File)
Place the cursor over a layer on the Map Screen (outline of the item changes color when selected) and right-click. A pop-up menu
displays.
Import (Cult File)
The Import button is used to select and setup the display parameters of culture files. Importing each file separately allows
individual layers to be viewed independently.
1. From the Cult File sub-tab, click to open the File Overlay Properties window.
Note
Each layer added is automatically named 1 in the Layer column. The layer number for each culture file
added must be changed before adding another layer. File names can be alpha, numeric, or a
combination.
2. Click . The Open window displays.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
3. Navigate to the required folder and select the culture file to be imported (the default location is the doc directory of
the current project).
4. Select a file and click Open. During import, a progress bar displays at the bottom of the File Overlay Properties
window and the Read File button changes to a Halt button before the selected file displays in the list of imported
files.
5. In the Layer cell, enter a layer number for the imported file.
• Enable the Visible checkbox to display the imported culture file on the Map Screen as a layer.
• Click to make visible all imported culture file. The Show All changes to Hide All button after that.
• Click to disable the Visible checkbox for all lines.
• Click to delete all imported culture files.
7. Enable the Lockout checkbox to make the culture object a lock-out layer. Layer cannot be changed or deleted
after that.
8. In the Color cell, select a color to display the layer on the Map Screen.
9. Click Close to include the imported culture files as layers and return to the Map Screen. The imported files that are
checked as visible display on the Map Screen.
Note
iX1 Map supports multiple layers. Each layer file must be imported separately.

User Manual
All (Cult File)
• Click to display all hidden culture items/layers on the Map Screen.
Colours (Cult File)
1. To modify the color definitions used in the File Overlay Properties window:
• Click on the Cult File sub-tab. The DXF Culture Properties pop-up displays.
2. Select the number of the color to change.
3. Click Color to display the color palette.
4. Select a color and click OK.
5. From the DXF Culture Properties pop-up, click OK to apply the edits.
Item Colour (Cult File)
1. To select and change the color of the any culture item, click in the Colour column of the Cult File sub-tab.
The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place over a culture item until it changes color and then click. The DXF Culture Properties pop-up displays.
3. Select a new color and click OK to apply.
Layer Colour (Cult File)
1. To select and change the color of the any culture layer, click in the Colour column of the Cult File sub-tab.
The cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
2. Place over a culture item until it changes color and then click. The DXF Culture Properties pop-up displays.
3. Select a new color and click OK to apply.
Polygon Colour (Cult File)
1. To select and change the color in a defined area, click in the Colour column of the Cult File sub-tab. The
cursor changes to the edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place at the point to start the shape and click. Move to the next point and click again. Continue to move to
points and click until the desired shape is complete.
3. Right-click to end the edit. The DXF Culture Properties pop-up displays.
4. Select a new color and click OK to apply. The items within the defined shape display in the selected color.
Hide Item (Cult File)
1. To select and hide any culture item, click in the Hide column of the Cult File sub-tab. The cursor changes to
an edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place over the culture item until it changes color and then click. The item no longer displays on the Map
Screen.
Hide Layer (Cult File)
1. To select and hide any culture layer, click in the Hide column of the Cult File sub-tab. The cursor changes to
2. Place over the culture layer until it changes color and then click. The layer no longer displays on the Map
Screen.

User Manual
Hide Polygon (Cult File)
1. To define an area and hide the cultures contained in the defined area, click in the Hide column of the Cult
File sub-tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place at the point to start the shape and click. Move to the next point and click again. Continue to move the
cursor and click until the desired shape is complete.
3. Right-click to end the edit. The culture items (within the defined area) no longer displays on the Map Screen.
Delete Item (Cult File)
1. To select and delete a culture item, click in the Delete column of the Cult File sub-tab. The cursor changes to
2. Place over the culture item until it changes color and then click. The item is deleted from the Map Screen.
Layer (Cult File)
1. To select and hide a culture layer, click in the Delete column of the Cult File sub-tab. The cursor changes to
2. Place over the culture layer until it changes color and then click. The layer is deleted from the Map Screen.
Polygon (Cult File)
1. To define an area and delete the cultures contained within the defined area, click in the Delete column on the
Cult File sub-tab. The cursor changes to an edit icon when placed over the Map Screen.
2. Place at the point to start the shape and click. Move to the next point and click again. Continue to move
and click until the desired shape is complete.
3. Right-click to end the edit. The culture objects within the defined area are deleted from the Map Screen.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Elev(ation) Sub-Tab (Overlay)
The Elev(ation) Sub-Tab options are used to create and display the elevation map including contour data on the Map Screen.
Elevations are contained in SegP1, SPS, and PRJ files and imported when updating a sub-project (refer to “File Types Available
for Import” on page 232). The system software calculates and builds the elevation map interpolating between elevations
imported with receiver stations and source points coordinates.
Colors are used to display the elevation levels on the Map Screens and lines are used to represent the contours.
• From the Overlay Tab, click the Elev sub-tab. The Elev sub-tab options display.
Edit Elevations (Elev)
1. To build the elevation map and generate contours, click on the Elev sub-tab. The Elevation Contours
pop-up displays.
2. In the Import Elevations section, enable the applicable checkbox of elevations to import:
• Rxy - build elevation map using receiver station elevations
• Sxy - build elevation map using source point elevations
• Rxy VS Sxy - build elevation map using receiver station and source point elevations
3. In the Grid field, select the density of the elevations to display.
Note
Initially, to build elevation map use the auto grid setting. If required, the grid size can be adjusted later to
smooth the colors that represent the elevations on the Map Screen.

User Manual
4. Enable the Generate Contours checkbox to generate contours.
• In the Min and Max fields, select the minimum and maximum contours to generate. Initially, select the default Auto
settings.
• In the Levels field, select the level of contours to display (3 to 16).
5. Click OK to build the elevation map and generate the contours to display on the Map Screen. A progress bar
displays at the bottom of the Elev sub-tab.
Paint Elevations (Elev)
1. Enable the Paint Elevation checkbox on the Elev sub-tab to display the elevations on the Map Screen using a gradient
range of colors.
• The color scale represents the elevation levels from lowest (blue) to highest (red).
• When the cursor is placed over an elevation map between source points or receiver stations the system shows the
cursor coordinates and elevation in the information windows.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Draw Contours
1. Enable the Draw Contours checkbox on the Elev sub-tab to display the elevation contours on the Map Screen.
• Double-click on an elevation area to display a numerical value of the contour.
• The color scale represents the elevation levels from lowest (blue) to highest (red).
• When the cursor is placed over an elevation map between source points or receiver stations the system shows the
cursor coordinates and elevation in the information windows.
Delete Elevations and/or Contours (Elev)
1. To delete both elevations and contours from the Map Screen, click beside the Paint Elevations or Draw
Contours fields on the Elev sub-tab. The Delete Elevations or Delete Contours pop-up displays.
2. Click OK to delete the elevation map and/or contours.
Dim (Elev)
• Enable the Dim checkbox to increase/decrease the brightness of the elevation map and contours. Use the slider arrow
to adjust the brightness.

User Manual
Fold Tab
The Fold Tab options are used to calculate and display the fold map for the current project on the iX1 Map Screen.
Fold is defined as the multiplicity of common midpoint data or the number of CMPs measured within each square (or bin) of an
imaginary grid drawn across the project surface, which uses different pairs of sources and receivers for each CMP measurement.
The common midpoint (CMP) is the halfway point between source and receiver at the surface. The set of traces recorded from
different source-receiver pairs that have the same common midpoint is called a CMP gather. The seismic data during processing
is sorted by common midpoint and then corrected for normal moveout (NMO).
After that traces with a common reflection point or from the same bin are stacked to form a single trace.
The primary reason for recording multi-fold data is to maximize the signal-to-noise ratio by stacking (or summing) traces that
contain seismic signals (in phase) and noise (out of phase).
Note
Moving and skipping shots affects the fold. Skidded or offset shots should be placed as close as possible
to the original shot location to minimize lost of the sub-surface coverage.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
1. Select Mode > Fold View from the drop menu or click the Fold Tab.
2. Click to calculates the bin size and offsets inside the sub-project. The system populates the calculated
values in the Size, and Offset fields.
3. Define the fold options and click Apply. The fold map now displays on the Map Screen and the fold icon (bin)
information can be seen in the Fold Icon view.
Note
A progress bar displays above the status bar to track the calculations. Whenever modifications are
made to the fold, click to ensure the changes display on the Map Screen.
Field Description
Define the bin size for CMP fold calculations. Normally, the bin size is half of the receiver interval by half of the source
Size interval, with the exception of unique 3D surveys. System calculates values according to that or values can be
manipulated by users, if required.
Define the near and far offset values. The system calculates and displays the near and far offset values based upon the
Offset
patch criteria of current project.
System analyzes and displays current fold information for shots that already taken during the seismic survey.
• In the Minimum fold field, select the minimum fold value.
• In the Desired fold field, select the desired fold value.
Taken Only The system uses three colors to represent the fold values.
• Red - less than defined minimum fold
• Blue - more than minimum/less than desired fold
• Green - even or more than desired fold
System analyzes and displays expected fold information for all shots in the sub-project.
• In the Minimum fold field, select the minimum fold value.
• In the Desired fold field, select the desired fold value.
All Shots The system uses three colors to represent the fold values.
• Red - less than defined minimum fold
• Blue - more than minimum/less than desired fold
• Green - even or more than desired fold

User Manual
Field Description
The Icon drop menu is used to specify the type of image to be displayed representing the bin (except Contour icon).
Dot
Offset
Azimuth
Icon Scatter
Text
• In Scale field, select the scale value (%) to define the size of the Dot, Offset, and Azimuth icons in relation to the
bin size.
Contours Icon
• In the Reset Contour field, select the number of colors to represent the fold contours.
• In the Increment field, select the fold increment between contours.
Grid Enable the Grid checkbox to display a grid of bins.
Max Fold The Max Fold field is system generated and displays the maximum fold value for the current sub-project.
Fold Icon View
The Fold Icon view (located on the right side of the iX1 Map), displays the dominant type of offsets in every bin by color. Azimuth
of the ray path also display when the cursor is placed over a bin on the Map Screen. Depending upon the selected bin, Fold Info
displays the bin location, fold count and number of near, middle, and far offsets and cursor coordinates.

Chapter 5 iX1 Map
Colors
Color Description
Red Near offsets
Green Middle offsets
Blue Far offsets
Cyan Combination of near and middle offsets
Yellow Combination of middle and near offsets
Magenta Combination of far and near offsets
White All three types of offsets in equal proportion
Light colors Bins in which all three offsets are present
Darker colors Bins where none (or comparatively few) of one or more types of offsets are present
Fold Map Views
Dot Icon
The fold information displays in dot format.

Differently sized red, blue, or green dots are used to illustrate the
fold within each bin on the CMP bin grid. The higher the fold count,
the larger the dot. The color of the dot is relative to the minimum and
desired defined criteria.
Fold information for the selected bin (place cursor over desired bin)
also displays in the Fold Icon view.
Contour Icon
The Contour icon displays color-coded lines that represent the fold
coverage for a project. Fold information for the selected bin also
displays (place cursor over desired bin) in the Fold Contour Info
view.
Double-click on a contour line on the Map Screen to display the fold

number related to the Fold Contour Icon color chart.
Offset Icon
The Offset icon displays near, middle, and far offset values for each
bin on the CMP grid in a bar graph format. The size of each bar
(within the graph in each bin) illustrates the type of offsets
predominant within that bin. The color of the bar graph that displays
is relative to the minimum and desired defined criteria.

User Manual
Azimuth Icon
The Azimuth icon displays the ray path direction for various source-
receiver pairs as rays pass through the CMP bin. The color of the
Azimuth icon that displays is relative to the minimum and desired
defined criteria.
displays in the Fold Icon view.
Scatter Icon
The Scatter icon displays the scatter of CMPs inside the each bin.
Each dot within a selected bin represents a common midpoint. To
define which common midpoints are associated with each bin, use
the grid when working with the scatter option.
Text Icon
The Text icon displays the fold of each bin in numerical format.

Chapter 6
Channel and Sensor Tests
iX1 Channel and Sensor Tests
G3i HD System
Testing Overview
The iX1 system has the ability to perform tests on RAMs (channel tests) and sensors (geophones and hydrophones) connected
to any visible channel (phone tests).
These tests can be performed at any or all sample rates, as well as any or all preamp gains. Coverage of the tests may be limited
to the current patch (the active spread for a selected shot) or all equipment visible to the Central Recording System.
All test files may be output to tape and/or plotter, and test evaluation reports may be printed and/or saved as text files. The output
test length is user defined.
INOVA offers the following channel and sensor tests designed to optimize data quality:
Channel Tests Sensor Tests
Channel Full Band Noise (page 425) Sensor Noise (page 429)
Channel Impulse Matching (page 426) Sensor Pulse and Sensitivity (page 430)
Channel Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) (page 427) Sensor Resistance (page 430)
Channel Common Mode Rejection Ration (CMR) (page 427) Sensor Leakage (page 430)
Channel Cross Feed Rejection (XFD) (page 428) Sensor Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) (page 431)
Sensor Impedance (page 431)
Sensor Cross Feed Rejection (XFD) (page 432)
Channel Test Evaluation
INOVA publishes both manufacturer’s specifications and tolerances. Manufacturer specifications are commonly called typical
specifications, similar to those published by all geophysical or electronics instrumentation manufacturers. Published
manufacturer’s tolerances (worst case values) are used in both the production facility and in software-based testing in the field.
An explanation of the inherent difference between the two published specifications follows.
Specifications
Manufacturer’s specifications are derived from the production database of test performance results of all INOVA channels
produced by INOVA’s manufacturing facility. Testing in the facility is performed under three temperature conditions: +70°C (hot),
+25°C (room temperature), and -40°C (cold).

User Manual
Test results for every channel are plotted over time (production) as illustrated below for a total harmonic distortion test with a 12
dB gain and a 2 ms sample rate (+25ºC).
A histogram of test results is generated to determine each manufacturer’s specification and tolerance. For example, the
distribution of test results for the following Full Band Noise test with a 0 dB gain and a 2 ms sample rate for 7,000 channels, is
shown below.
The graph shows the results of a Full Band Noise test at -40ºC, +25ºC, and +70ºC. The specification line indicates the typical Full
Band Noise value at a test temperature of +25C. The mean of the normal (Gaussian) distribution moves slightly in response to the
test temperature. If a tolerance was defined at the specification value approximately half of the channels would fail.

Chapter 6 Channel and Sensor Tests
Tolerances
Published manufacturer’s tolerances are set to pass manufactured channels through production and for general field operations.
A guard-band for production and field-based testing is illustrated in the previous graph (750 nV - 950 nV for 0 dB gain) and must
be used to account for the following conditions:
• Normal distribution of variance in properties of all electronic components
• Normal variations in manufacturing processes
• Wide temperature and humidity differences encountered during field operations
• Channel averaging testing methods are not employed during field operations
Reasonable pass/fail manufacturer’s tolerances for each channel must be set to account for the aforementioned normally
distributed variances in specifications.
If this value is not met in production or field testing, INOVA will deem this channel as failed and will endeavor to repair the
channel at no cost during the warranty period to the owner.
INOVA Manufacturer’s Specifications1
Full Band Dynamic Range

(1 Hz - Nyquist) (1 Hz - Nyquist)
0 dB 12 dB 24 dB 0 dB 12 dB 24 dB
4 ms 0.552 µV 0.155 µV 0.0614 µV 130 dB 129 dB 125 dB
2 ms 0.785 µV 0.220 µV 0.0979 µV 127 dB 126 dB 121 dB

Sample Rate
1 ms 1.112 µV 0.312 µV 0.1387 µV 124 dB 123 dB 118 dB
1/2 ms 1.573 µV 0.441 µV 0.1962 µV 121 dB 120 dB 115 dB
1/4 ms 2.224 µV 0.624 µV 0.2774 µV 118 dB 117 dB 112 dB
CMRR 110 dB
XFD 130 dB
Internal THD -120 dB (0.0001%)
Gain Matching 1%
Low-Cut (Hz) 1%
High-Cut (Hz) 1%
Stop-Band (Hz) 1%
1.Typical

User Manual
INOVA Manufacturer’s Tolerances1
Full Band Dynamic Range

(1 Hz - Nyquist) (1 Hz - Nyquist)
0 dB 12 dB 24 dB 0 dB 12 dB 24 dB
4 ms 0.88 µV 0.25 µV 0.10 µV 126 dB 125 dB 121 dB
2 ms 1.24 µV 0.35 µV 0.16 µV 123 dB 122 dB 117 dB

Sample Rate
1 ms 1.76 µV 0.49 µV 0.22 µV 120 dB 119 dB 114 dB
1/2 ms 2.49 µV 0.70 µV 0.31 µV 117 dB 116 dB 111 dB
1/4 ms 3.53 µV 0.99 µV 0.44 µV 114 dB 113 dB 108 dB
CMRR 95 dB
XFD 130 dB
Internal THD -108 dB (0.0004%)
Gain Matching 1%
Low-Cut (Hz) 1%
High-Cut (Hz) 1%
Stop-Band (Hz) 1%
1.Worst Case

Channel Tests
Channel tests are evaluated to the manufacturer’s tolerances.
Note
Manufacturer’s tolerances and specifications are subject to change. Specifications and tolerances are
available from the manufacturer.
Channel Full Band Noise Test
The Channel Full Band Noise Test measures the RMS Noise over the entire recorded bandwidth (1 Hz to Nyquist) and then
compares the measurement to the manufacturer’s specifications. The value of this accumulated noise increases as the
bandwidth increases.
This test includes the following steps:
1. The channel inputs are isolated from the sensor.
2. The channel inputs are internally connected to a termination resistor.
3. The data is recorded and written to tape using production filter settings.
4. The RMS value is calculated as follows:
7N
8
xi2
FullBand _ RMSNoise    N
3N
4
i
8
Where: N = number of samples acquired

xi = absolute value of samples (i = 0, 1, 2…, N-1)

User Manual
Channel Impulse Matching Test
The Channel Impulse Matching Test measures the three main characteristics of a channel impulse response. The following
channel characteristics are evaluated:
• Low-Cut frequency
• High-Cut frequency
• Stop-Band frequency
2. The channel inputs are connected to an internal pulse generator (G3i RAMs have an internal impulse which has a
pulse width of one-half the sample frequency used).
4. The Power Spectral Density Function (PSDF) is calculated.
5. The low-cut and high-cut frequencies (3 dB point) of each channel is determined.
6. A Kaiser Function (ß=25) is applied.
7. The Power Spectral Density Function (PSDF) is calculated.
8. The stop-band frequency (80 dB point) of each channel is determined.
9. Median values for each of the low-cut, high-cut, and stop-band frequencies are determined using the results from
the tested channels. The individual channel results are compared against the median value. If the low-cut, high-cut,
and stop-band frequencies deviate ±5% from the median value of the manufacturer’s tolerances, the channel is
marked as FAIL.
Channel Gain Matching Test (part of Channel Impulse Matching Test)
The Channel Gain Matching Test measures the variation in gain between channels. The RMS amplitude of impulse data (which
is contained in a small window around the theoretical location of the maximum impulse value) is calculated. To ensure the
channel matching specification is met, the resulting value is compared to the median value for all channels.
2. The channel inputs are connected to an internal pulse generator (G3i HD RAMs have an internal impulse which has
a pulse width of one-half the sample frequency used).
3. The data is recorded and written to tape using production filter settings. With G3i RAMs, the RMS value is
measured using ±5 samples from the location of the impulse. This measured value is compared to the median and
the percent variation is compared to the manufacturer’s tolerances.

Channel Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Test
The Channel THD Test measures the total harmonic distortion of the channel by using a signal generated by the internal Low
Distortion Oscillator (LDO). The response to this signal is analyzed to determine the amount of harmonic energy generated in
relation to the test signal and is shown as a percent.
2. The channel inputs are connected to the internal LDO.
4. A frequency domain analysis is performed to calculate the energy of the fundamental and the energy of all the
harmonics up to the tenth.
5. THD is defined as the ratio of the sum of the powers or RMS voltage amplitudes of all harmonic frequencies above
the fundamental frequency to the power of the fundamental.
THD 
 harmonic _ powers 
V22  V32  V42  ...  Vn2
fundamental _ frequency _ power V1
Where V1 = amplitude of the fundamental

V2 Vn = amplitude of the 2nd to the nth harmonics
Channel Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) Test
The Channel CMRR Test measures the common mode rejection ratio of the channel by using a signal generated by the internal
Low Distortion Oscillator (LDO). The response to this signal is analyzed to determine the CMRR. The common mode is then
compared to the measured differential signal and the ratio is noted in decibels.
2. The channel inputs are connected to the internal LDO in a common mode configuration.
4. A frequency domain analysis is performed to calculate the RMS voltage of the common mode signal.
V 
CMRR  20 log rms cm 
V 
 rms  diff 
Where: Vrms  cm = RMS common mode voltage

= 0.884 Vrms @ 0 dB Gain
Vrms  diff = RMS measured differential voltage

User Manual
Channel Cross Feed (XFD) Test
The Channel XFD Test measures the energy transferred between an internally driven channel and an adjacent non-driven
channel. The system calculates the strength of the user-specified fundamental frequency for all channels in each instance. For
each channel, the ratio of the even and odd numbered channels is calculated and compared to a system specified tolerance. This
ratio is noted in decibels.
• Even channel inputs are connected to the internal LDO. Odd channels are terminated by an internal resistor.
• Data is recorded and written to tape using production filter settings.
• Odd channel inputs are connected to the internal LDO. Even channels are terminated by an internal resistor.
• Data is recorded and written to tape using production filter settings.
2. A frequency domain analysis is performed to calculate the RMS voltage of the fundamental frequency.
• With G3i RAMs, the fundamental frequency is user specified.
 V 
XFD  20 log rms  driven 
 Vrms  not  driven 
Where: Vrms  driven = RMS voltage of the fundamental frequency in a driven channel
Vrms  not  driven = RMS voltage of the un-driven channel evaluated at the fundamental
frequency of the driven channel

Sensor Tests
Sensor tests are evaluated to meet the manufacturer’s sensor specifications and tolerances, or calculated median values.
Sensor test results are dependent upon the correct specifications and tolerances entered into tables in the system software.
Multiple sensor types may be tested and evaluated using the applicable sensor table.
Sensor Noise Test
The Sensor Noise Test measures the ambient noise recorded from the sensor array, which can be caused by external and
internal sources (such as wind, ground, and electrical).
1. The channel inputs are connected to the sensor terminals.
3. The RMS value is calculated using all the acquired data.
4. Test results are compared to the user specified tolerance for the sensor type. Sensors that fail to meet these
tolerances are flagged as errors.
Sensor Resistance Test
The Sensor Resistance Test measures the sensor array resistance. This test compares sensor array resistance to the median
calculated value for each sensor type.
2. The channels are driven by an internally generated DC voltage.
3. The data is recorded and written to tape using production high-cut filter settings.
4. The sensor resistance is calculated from the measured DC voltage.
5. The median resistance value is calculated from all sensors with a resistance value within 33% of the user specified
array resistance.
6. Test results are compared to a user specified tolerance from the calculated median array resistance value for the
sensor type. Sensors that fail to meet these tolerances are flagged as errors.
Note
The resistance test circuitry is designed to test sensors at 0 dB preamp gain. At other preamp gain
settings, the internally generated pulse signal can over range the channel leading to erroneous sensor
responses. For G3i RAMs, the resistance test is run at 12 dB preamp gain only if the maximum user
specified array resistance is < 5 kΩ, and run at 24 dB preamp gain only if the maximum user specified
array resistance is < 2.5 kΩ.

User Manual
Sensor Pulse and Sensitivity Tests
The Sensor Pulse and Sensitivity Tests measure the sensor response to a pulse. The following sensor characteristics are
evaluated:
• Array resistance
• Array pulse response matching
• Array open-circuit sensitivity normalized to a single sensor
• Array open-circuit damping coefficient normalized to a single sensor
• Array natural frequency normalized to a single sensor
1. The channel inputs are connected to the sensor terminals
2. The channels are driven by an internally generated step function
3. The data is recorded and written to tape using production high-cut filter settings
4. The sensor resistance is calculated using the measured voltage difference between when the array is driven and
not driven. This resistance is used to calculate a median resistance value for each sensor type.
5. An average model of the pulse response is built using all sensors that have passed the above resistance test. The
response of each sensor is evaluated as the percent deviation from this model. Sensors that fail to meet the user
specified tolerances are flagged as errors.
6. Open circuit sensitivity, damping and natural frequency are calculated using the System Identification Method
published by Bart P.M. Duijndam, Shell Internationale Petroleum Maatschappij. The results are compared to user
specified tolerances from the calculated median values for the sensor type. Sensors that fail to meet the user
specified tolerances are flagged as errors.
Note
The pulse and sensitivity test circuitry is designed to test sensors at 0 dB preamp gain. At other preamp
gain settings, the internally generated pulse signal can over range the channel leading to erroneous
sensor responses. For G3i RAMs, the pulse and sensitivity test is run at 12 dB preamp gain only if the
maximum user specified array resistance is < 5 kΩ, and run at 24 dB preamp gain only if the maximum
user specified array resistance is < 2.5 kΩ.
Sensor Leakage Test
The Sensor Leakage Test measures resistance between the sensor signal wires and the earth. Values are compared with the
tolerance levels for geophone/cable leakage, as defined in the Sensor Type Table (refer to “Sensor Types” on page 184).
2. The channels are driven by an internally generated signal.
3. The data is recorded and written to tape using production high-cut filter settings.
4. The signal loss to earth (using the RAM’s outer-shell) is evaluated.
5. Test results are compared to the user specified tolerances for the sensor type. Sensors that fail to meet these

Sensor Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Test
The Sensor THD Test measures the total harmonic distortion of the sensor array using a signal generated by the internal Low
Distortion Oscillator (LDO). The response to this signal is analyzed and compared with the fundamental frequency, as defined in
the Sensor Type Table (refer to “Sensor Types” on page 184). This determines the amount of harmonic energy generated in
relation to the test signal (displays as a percentage value).
2. The channels are driven by an internally generated LDO signal of a user specified frequency and amplitude.
4. A frequency domain analysis is performed to calculate the energy of the fundamental, and up to the third harmonic.
Harmonics near an optional user specified notch frequency are ignored.
Sensor Impedance Test
The Sensor Impedance Test measures the sensor array impedance using a signal generated by the internal Low Distortion
Oscillator (LDO). The signal used for this test is the same frequency as the Pulse test. Each string’s impedance is compared to
the median value with the pass/fail deviation value, as defined in the Sensor Type Table (refer to “Sensor Types” on page 184).
2. The channels are driven by an internally generated LDO signal of a user specified frequency.
4. The RMS voltage is measured and used to calculate the array impedance.
5. Test results are compared to a user specified tolerance from the calculated median array impedance value for the
sensor type. Sensors that fail to meet these tolerances are flagged as errors.

User Manual
Sensor Cross Feed (XFD) Test
The Sensor XFD Test measures the energy transferred between an internally driven sensor and an adjacent non-driven sensor.
The system calculates the strength of the user-specified fundamental frequency for all channels in each instance. For each
channel, the ratio of the even and odd numbered channels is calculated and compared to a system specified tolerance. This ratio
is noted in decibels.
2. The even channels are driven by an internally generated signal.
4. The odd channels are driven by an internally generated signal.
6. A frequency domain analysis is performed to calculate the RMS voltage of the fundamental signal.
7. The ratio of the driven and un-driven RMS voltages is evaluated for each channel.
Geophone Tests Results Evaluation
The ambient noise is the first factor that contributes to test failures. There is a definite increase in apparent failures as the
channel preamp gain is increased from 0 to 12 to 24dB.
The second factor involved in any sensor tests, which requires driving a geophone element and recording the response, is how
hard the test circuitry can drive the element, i.e. how much signal can be generated above the ambient noise floor for a given
preamp gain.
The low distortion oscillator’s (LDO) output is designed to prevent overdriving or clipping while running sensor tests as close to
maximum amplitude as possible, limiting the amplitude that may be recorded from a sensor/sensor array. This means the level at
which a sensor or sensor array can be driven is limited by the impedance of the sensor (the lower the impedance, the lower the
signal).
The greatest possible signal to noise ratio occurs at 0dB, which decreases as the preamp gain is increased. Relatively constant
amplitude of ambient noise can have a much more significant effect at the higher preamp gain settings.
Therefore, to take advantage of the signal to noise ratio available, geophone testing should be run at 0dB preamp gain. This
should have no effect on tests other than THD and cross feed and only improves the measurable response of the sensors.
Note
If high level ambient noise is occurring on the spread, the THD and cross feed test failures should
be considered as a suspect.
Pulse, Sensitivity, Resistance, Leakage and Impedance Tests are all valid and relatively independent of ambient noise. They
reliably indicate the defective sensors and any failures of these tests should be considered.

Test Guide
The iX1 software offers several channel and phone tests. These tests are designed to optimize production and locate potential
problems before they affect the seismic data integrity.
To validate the integrity of seismic data three test menus are available (Daily Tests, Monthly Tests and User Tests). While all
three menus perform essentially the same functions, each may be customized to run a particular set of tests when selected.
Once a menu is defined, it performs the same tests until the user changes them.
Each test menu is described below:
• The Daily Tests menu automatically selects the current Preamp Gain, Sample Rate and High-Cut Filter settings. While
the current project settings are initially selected, additional preamp gains and sample rates may be selected.
• The Monthly Tests menu is used to test the ground equipment more thoroughly by running a batch of tests using as
many recording parameters as desired (e.g., every High-Cut Filter (Sample Rate) and every Preamp Gain).
• The User Tests menu enables operators to perform a custom suite of tests (e.g., specific tests requested by a client, or
when data transmission problems are suspected) without having to alter the Daily Tests or Monthly Tests menus.
The iX1 system runs a batch of Channel Tests, which ensure that all Remote Acquisition Modules (RAMs) on a project are
functioning properly. The system checks:
• Full Band Noise • Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)

• Impulse Response • Common Mode Rejection (CMR)
• Cross Feed Rejection (XFD)
The Geophone Tests confirm that all geophones are correctly placed and in good working order, thus ensuring the integrity of all
recorded data.The system checks:
• Geophone Noise • Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)

• Geophone Resistance • Geophone Impedance
• Geophone Pulse (Tilt) • Cross Feed Rejection (XFD)
• Geophone/Cable Leakage • Geophone Sensitivity
• The system automatically saves all test menu settings.
• To conduct the same set of tests every day (or month), verify that the test parameters are set correctly and click OK.
• To add or delete a particular test, enable/disable the applicable checkbox. The system performs any test with an
enabled checkbox only.
Test result files are saved in the INOVA_iX1/ProjectName/doc directory based on the following naming convention:
Test Type Test Report Error Report
Daily DAY_TEST.xxx DAY_ERR.xxx
Monthly MON_TEST.xxx MON_ERR.xxx
User USE_TEST.xxx USE_ERR.xxx
The test files start with a *.001 extension until the file size reaches 1.4 MB then *.002 is created, etc.

User Manual
Test Menus
1. To access the test menus, select Mode > Line Test or click Test Tab from the iX1 Map.
2. From the Test Tab, click Daily or Monthly or User button. The selected option window displays.
Each menu is divided into several distinct sections where users can select the desired number of tests, set the recording
parameters and select type of media to output raw data and test reports.
The Daily Tests, Monthly Tests and User Tests menus have identical testing capabilities. To prevent accidental deletion of
important files, the Monthly Tests menu does not offer the Delete First option that is available for the Test Reports and Error
Reports sections of the other two options.
Note
Delete First removes any previous test or error reports from the hard disk saved in the ProjectName/
doc directory.

Channels / Receiver Tests
• Use the Channels and Receiver Tests boxes to program each menu to run the desired number of tests.
• The Plot Gain fields allow operators adjust plot gain values as required, while the Def (Default) button at the
bottom of each window restores all gain levels to factory default settings.
• Select All On or All Off to toggle all the tests within each window on or off.
High-Cut Hz / Preamp Gains
• The Preamp Gains and High-Cut Hz sections allow users to run the tests using the desired recording parameters. The
Daily Tests window automatically defines the Preamp Gain, Sample Rate and High-Cut filter according to the values set
for the current project. To add or delete a particular parameter, enable or disable the field.
• Menus may be configured to run tests using more than one High-Cut filter or Preamp Gain
Coverage
• Use these options to configure the system to test equipment within the active Patch or across the Network.
Files
1. Select one of the following options:
• No Files - Specifies no *.SGY test result files are saved in the system’s default data directory.
• To Disk - Instructs the system to save raw data from each test as a SEG-Y file in the data directory (files begin with
the letter P. Example: P1000001.SGY).
• Click in the Length field and enter a file test length (defaults to 3 seconds, value must be ≥ 3 s).
• To Media - Instructs the system to save test results in SEG-Y files in the data directory (files can be written to the
selected media using the iX1 Media).
• Click in the Length field and enter a file test length (defaults to 3 seconds, value must be ≥ 3 s).
• Enable the Preview to Media checkbox to output the test data to the plotter before writing to the media.
• The plotter automatically outputs a brief description about each test (including test name, SEG-Y file name,
date and test parameters).
• The information fields (bottom-left of the Files window), describe the total space required by the test files (File),
the amount of storage space available on the hard drive (Disk) and the names that will be assigned to the test
files on the hard drive (e.g. 01000001.SGY -> 01000015.SGY).
2. Enable Plot Files option to output the results of each test on the plotter. By changing the Length value in the Plot
Files window, users can plot entire test data files or only a portion if desired. The software default is 3000ms, but
can easily be changed as per client request to a maximum of 8 seconds and can’t be more then length of record.

User Manual
Test Reports/Error Reports
Whenever performing Daily Tests, the system creates:
• Test Reports (Figure 1) - Provide a list of all test results for chosen coverage area
• Error Reports (Figure 2) - Provides a list of all failed channels for chosen coverage area
Test and Error Report information is automatically saved in the DAY_TEST.001 and DAY_ERR.001 text files in the INOVA_iX1/
ProjectName/doc folder.
Once the DAY_TEST.001 and DAY_ERR.001 files contain more than 1.4 MB of data, the system creates new files with *.002
extensions and so on.
• Enable the Delete First option to delete any previously recorded test or error reports when writing the current report
information.
• Enable Print option to output Test or Error Reports on the plotter when the Daily Tests are completed. When selected,
the system prints the results of the current set of tests.
• Use the Print Now button to output the last Test Report or Error Report results saved in the DAY_ERR.00X and
DAY_TEST.00X files.
Figure 1 Example of a Test Report produced with the Daily Tests utility. The report shows tolerance and median levels
for each sensor type, as well as results for all channel tests.

Figure 2 Example of an Error Report produced with the Daily Tests utility. The report provides tolerance and median
levels for defined sensor types, as well as a complete list of all failed sensors (failures are indicated by an asterisk).

User Manual
Hawk System
Testing Overview
The Analog Sensor Digitizer Channel (ASDC) has built-in test capability that checks the performance of the ASDC and checks the
condition of attached sensor groups (for example, arrays of geophones). The test capability includes signal injection and
detection for common-mode conditions and the differential mode.
The Built-In Test (BIT) suite detects problems with the attached sensor group and provides assurance that the ASDC is
functioning properly. These tests are based on the higher likelihood of an environmentally-exposed sensor group problem
occurring rather than the failure rate of the electronic components inside the sturdy ASDC housing.
The test report messages are grouped into the following categories:
Channel Tests Phone Tests
Channel Full Band Noise Sensor Noise (page 440)
Channel Common Mode Rejection (CMR) Sensor Characterization (page 441)
Channel Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Sensor Resistance (page 440)
Sensor Leakage (page 441)
Sensor Distortion (Tilt) (page 441)
Sensor Cross Feed Rejection (XFD) (page 442)
Each time the ASDC is powered on, it autonomously runs a Power-On Self-Test (POST) series. These tests run while the Field
Station Unit (FSU) establishes the communication link to the ASDC and sets the timing. This avoids the POST execution steps
taking time from seismic recording or from the initial FSU deployment.
The POST sequence verifies that the power supplies, the voltage references and the A/D (analog-to-digital) converters cross-
check properly. It also performs a rudimentary leakage test and sensor-present test that alerts if the sensor array is not attached
at layout.

Test Procedure
Testing sequence is triggered by any of three events:
• Power-up Sequence - Run the POST (Power-On Self-Test) sequence and provides the results to the FSU.
• Deployment Sequence - Run a full set of BITs, with the results kept in volatile memory for retrieval by the Field QC
Tools.
• User-Defined BITs Schedule (defined in the iX1 Acquisition (Hawk Config) and transferred to iX1 Transcriber to
configure FSUs before deployment) includes running a full set of BITs, with the results kept in volatile memory for
retrieval by the Field QC Tools.
The ASDC acquires the POST parameters without direction from the FSU. The ASDC also responds to test setup commands
from the FSU and returns specific data fields, Utility A/D conversion results, or streams the Seismic A/D results for the FSU to
capture.
For tests that require multiple steps or multiple records, the ASDC responds to the command from the FSU with one step at a
time, since the ASDC is not programmed to execute a sequence of steps once a test is begun.
With the exception of the two noise tests, internally generated test signals are required. The Test Signal Generator (TSG)
provides the differential signal for testing the seismic channel and attached sensor array. A DC voltage source derived from the
calibration reference voltage provides the single-ended signal for common-mode measures.
Power-on Self Tests
Test Test Parameter Description
• Serial Number
• SW Load Version Transfer data stored in ASDC Flash to FSU for use and for relay to iX1 system.
History
• HW Board Version Check the Flash ROM for errors.
• Flash ROM Validity
Power • Power Supply Voltage Verify power supplies functionality
Check if sensor has a major leakage (error flag is set if the leakage resistance is
Leakage • DC Resistance (Sensor to Earth)
less than 2 kΩ).
Continuity • DC Resistance (Sensor) Check if sensor is connected to the FSU (error flag is set if channel is open).

User Manual
Channel Tests
Test Test Parameter Description
• Internal Component Noise Measure the RMS Noise on an internal shunt resistor over the entire recording
Full Band Noise bandwidth.
0dB and 30dB preamp gains
The A/D converter terminals connected together.

The TSG drives the preamp input with an internally generated common-mode
signal at 62.5Hz and measures the resulting differential signal on the preamp
CMR • Common Mode Rejection Ratio inputs.
The ratio of the input common mode signal (884mV RMS) to the measured
differential signal is reported as CMRR.
Results are reported in decibels.
The TSG is routed to the sensor terminals outputting a square wave

symmetrical signal at the geophone specified frequency (generally 12Hz)
• Total Harmonic Distortion
THD A frequency domain analysis is performed to calculate the energy of the
0dB and 30dB preamp gains fundamental and all even harmonics less than the Nyquist frequency.
Results are reported as percent of the total harmonic distortion.
Sensor Tests
Sensor Noise Test
The Sensor Noise Test measures the ambient noise recorded from the sensor array, which can be caused by external sources
(such as wind, ground, and electrical).
2. The seismic (noise) data is recorded.
3. The results are calculated as the RMS summation of the time domain voltage samples after DC average removal.
4. Test results (part of the FSU status data) are compared to the user specified tolerance for the sensor type in the iX1
Map. Sensors that fail to meet these tolerances are flagged as errors.
Sensor Resistance Test
1. A DC current from Test Signal Generator (TSG) is applied to the sensor terminals. Voltage response is measured and
recorded.
2. A DC current from TSG is applied to the internal reference resistor. Voltage response is measured and recorded.
3. Sensor resistance is calculated using the known reference resistance and the ratio of the sensor voltage response
to the reference resistor voltage response.
4. Test results (part of the FSU status data) are compared to a user specified tolerance from the calculated median
array resistance value for the sensor type in the iX1 Map. Sensors that fail to meet these tolerances are flagged as
errors.

Sensor Leakage Test
The Leakage Test is made at low voltage, so any leaks currents are very small making the test susceptible to noise. For that
reason, a large number of leakage measurements are made and results are averaged.
1. The 1.225V reference DC source in a common mode manner is connected to the sensor terminals through a pair of
sensing resistors.
2. The resulting voltage proportional to the leakage current is measured by Utility A/D converter.
3. The leakage resistance is calculated using the resistance of the sensing resistors and ratio of the driving voltage
(1.225V) to the difference voltage sensed by the Utility A/D converter.
4. Test results (part of the FSU status data) are compared to the user specified tolerances for the sensor type.
Sensors that fail to meet these tolerances are flagged as errors.
Geophone Distortion (Tilt) Test
The Sensor Distortion (Tilt) Test is designed according to the pattern meaning that the changes in geophone output distortion
versus axis tilt show up primarily in the second harmonic component. A pure square wave has a spectrum consisting of sine
waves at the fundamental and odd harmonics, with no second harmonic or higher even harmonics present. Therefore if vertically
oriented geophone is driven with a square wave signal, any second harmonic content (above noise) in the resulting voltage
waveform can be attributed to geophone distortion (tilt).
1. The TSG is routed to the sensor terminals outputting a square wave symmetrical signal at the geophone specified
frequency (generally 12Hz).
2. A frequency domain analysis is performed to calculate the energy of the fundamental and second harmonic.
3. Test results (part of the FSU status data) are compared to the user specified tolerances for the sensor type in the
iX1 Map. Sensors that fail to meet these tolerances are flagged as errors.
Geophone Characterization Test
The Geophone Characterization Test normally provides the Sensitivity, Natural Frequency and Damping Factor results for a
geophone array. In the Hawk methodology, a current pulse is applied repeatedly in a manner that allows the impulse response to
be extracted from the voltage response to the current drive pattern.
The advantage is that energy is delivered to the system throughout the duration of the record, improving the signal-to-noise ratio
dramatically in comparison with conventional methods. The methodology can be usefully compared to the Vibroseis method,
where the energy is applied to the “system under test” (the earth) over a period of time, with the impulse response extracted from
the resulting seismic record by de-convolving the vibrator sweep pattern from the record.
1. The TSG is routed to the internal reference resistor outputting a Maximum Length Sequence (MLS) pattern.The
reference record is acquired. It results from the convolution of the drive pattern with the impulse response of the
resistor.
2. The TSG is routed to the sensor terminals outputting a Maximum Length Sequence (MLS) pattern with the same
current drive level as in previous step. The test record is acquired. It results from the convolution of the drive
pattern with the impulse response of the geophone array.

User Manual
3. The DFT is performed on both reference (internal) and test (external) records near the geophone natural frequency
Fn.
4. The reference record response is used to process the data of the geophone test record to calculate a geophone
impulse response of a single geophone element.
5. The analysis of the geophone impulse response is performed. Open circuit sensitivity, damping and natural
frequency of a single geophone are calculated.
6. Test results (part of the FSU status data) are compared to user specified tolerances from the calculated median
values for the sensor type in the iX1 Map. Sensors that fail to meet the user specified tolerances are flagged as
errors.
Sensor Cross Feed Rejection Test
Multi-channel analog Hawk units can conduct cross-feed tests. In the case that one FSU serves multiple receiver stations, a cable
is necessary to bring the more distant geophone signals to the recording unit.
The Cross Feed Test can measure the channel-to-channel isolation quality of the cable assembly in place on the seismic spread.
If the cross-feed test is run on a single-station equipped with a 3C geophone, the result will be more a measure of the orthogonal
quality of the element alignment than of electrical isolation.
2. The 1st channel is driven by an internally generated signal.
3. The data is recorded from all 3 channels.
4. The 2nd channel is driven by an internally generated signal.
6. The 3rd channel is driven by an internally generated signal.
8. A frequency domain analysis is performed to calculate the RMS voltage of the fundamental signal.
9. The ratio of the driven and un-driven RMS voltages is evaluated for each channel.

Conclusions
The INOVA Hawk Built-In Tests for analog sensors focus on detecting flaws in the geophone strings and detecting out-of-
specification sensors. Tests of the internal circuits that are expensive holdovers from no-longer-applicable seismic instrument
history are replaced by tests with a much better benefit ratio that are appropriate to the high integration and reliability of the
modern electronic components.
Key elements include use of highly integrated major components, such as the seismic channel IC with integral preamp and DSP
plus the acquisition micro-controller with integrated peripherals. Additionally, the conventional high-linearity sine wave test
generator is replaced by a DC current source modulated with a binary switched polarity pattern.
The binary-switched square wave has shown to detect excessive geophone tilt just as reliably as the conventional sine wave.
More importantly, the binary-switched pseudo-random sequence provides accurate evaluation of geophone parameters with
markedly better repeatability than conventional methods.

User Manual

Chapter 7
iX1 ObNotes
iX1 ObNotes
The iX1 ObNotes is a project database linked program used to capture and organize observer reports during seismic data
acquisition. It allows users to view, locate, edit, and print acquisition related information in various views and reports.
Opening the ObNotes from iX1 Acquisition (iX1 Vib) links the program with the current project database and automatically
updates views from this database throughout acquisition.
The acquisition related information displays in the iX1 ObNotes for all sub-projects that have been created and saved in the iX1
Map.
The iX1 ObNotes features include the following:
• Custom views and reports
• Database search by filtering parameters
• Export a seismic survey database into SPS Files, Text Documents, and Excel Worksheets
• Import drilling log reports (Excel format)
• Print tape labels
• Database maintenance tools
Automatic Field Entries
The iX1 ObNotes uses information from the project database to auto-populate many of the fields. This information is added to the
database from the following sources:
• iX1 Acquisition - Entries made in the Project Header and Source Type tables are used on the cover page and in the
Shot tab fields. This includes project name, client name, crew number, target hole depth, charge size, number of
sweeps, sweep file, etc.
• Recording Truck Interface (RTI) - PSS/PFS messages including uphole time information are directly transferred to
ObNotes.
• iX1 Map - Provide source line and flag numbers, patch information, receiver type, sub-project names.
• iX1 Video Plot - Provide shot/receiver QC comments.
• iX1 Media - Provide reel number after seismic data are recorded to tape or tape image.
• System - Issue the recording-system-generated comments. This can include notification of a tape change, system
errors (EC-error code) or descriptions about the daily tests that were performed.

User Manual
• From iX1 Vib, click in the tool bar or select Tools > ObNotes from the drop menu. The iX1 ObNotes window
displays.
Drop Menu (page 446) Read-Only Sub-Tabs (page 485)
Tool Bar (page 480) Status Bar (page 488)
Display Tabs (page 480)
Drop Menu
At the top of the iX1 ObNotes window are nine drop menus used to access a variety of tools and perform different functions.

Connect to any project database file (*.MDF) in standalone mode
Open... Ctrl+O
(page 448)
Print... Ctrl+P Print the header page with the current view (tab) data (page 448)
Print Preview Preview a report before printing (page 450)
Print Setup... Select the print/plot device (page 451)
Print Tape Label Print a tape label (page 451)
Print Preview Tape Label Preview a tape label before printing
File
Print QC Comments Print the QC comments entered in the iX1 Video Plot(page 452)
Print Preview QC Comments Preview the list of QC comments (page 452)
Print Cover Page Print the cover page
Print Preview Cover Page Preview the cover page before printing
Print Window Print information from the current ObNotes window (page 453)
(Project Files) A list of the last four project files display
Exit

Chapter 7 iX1 ObNotes

Copy Row Ctrl+C Copy a shot, not shot, or comment (page 454)
Paste Row Ctrl+V Paste a shot, not shot, or comment (page 454)
Update F5 Update information of the view (page 454)
Edit Find... Ctrl+F Search database for specific data (page 454)
Find Next F3 Move through the database repeating the search (page 455)
Remove/edit non-referenced receiver or source coordinates from the
Line/Coordinate
database (page 456)
Tool Bar Show/hide the ObNotes tool bar (page 480)
Status Bar Show/hide the ObNotes Status Bar (page 488)
Display the patch, media log, error code, and VSR info at the bottom of the
Patches/EC Horiz
ObNotes window (Shot and Test tab only) (page 460)
View Display the patch, media log, error code and VSR info at the right side of
Patches/EC Vert
the ObNotes window (Shot and Test tab only) (page 460)
Title Page Display the header page Information window (page 461)
Maximize Open the ObNotes full size window (page 462)
Show Omitted Info Show the shot information for omitted entry (page 462)
View 1, 2, 3, and 4 Create a custom view for Shot and Not Shot tabs only (page 462)
Properties Use to edit the view appearance (page 463)
ShotView Limit data that displays in the view by selecting time period, line number,
Filters
source type or combination of them (page 466)
Pause Stop the automatic update (page 467)
Add Add a hot key command for a comment (page 468)
Add... Create up to ten comments with hot keys (page 468)
Comments
Del... Delete a comment/hot key from the list (page 469)
(User created shortcut comments) A list of up to ten comments/hot keys
Import Logs Import drill logs into project database (page 470)
Tools Source QC Connect to the SourceQC database in standalone mode
Export daily reports from the project database (SPS, Text, Excel format)
Reports
(page 473)
Export Export reports to be used to merge VSR data with INOVA SEG-Y files
VSR Process data
(Vibrator Signature Recording only) (page 477)
QC Report Export test reports from the QC database (page 478)
Hot Keys List of the hot keys available in ObNotes (page 479)
Help
About iX1 ObNotes... Display the software version number (page 479)

User Manual
File Drop Menu
The File drop menu is used to open project database and print reports, tape labels, cover pages.
Open
1. Select File > Open (Ctrl+O) from the drop menu. The Open window displays.
2. In the INOVA_iX1 directory, navigate to the desired project and double-click to open.
3. Select the project database (*.MDF) and double-click. The ObNotes program is now linked to the selected
database.
Note
The iX1 ObNotes program can also operate from a remote computer. To do this, ensure the remote
computer is networked to the main recording computer.
Print
1. To print the header page with the selected tab of data, select File > Print (Ctrl+P) from the iX1 ObNotes drop menu. The
Header Page Information window displays.
Note
Several fields in the Header Page Information window are automatically populated with data that was
entered when the project was created (Project Header data).

2. Edit the Header Page Information fields if required. For information about editing the Header Page Information
window, refer to “Title Page” on page 461.
3. Click OK. The Print Extended Header for Every Page popup displays.
• Enable the Print Extended Header checkbox to display a compressed version of the title page on every page of
the report.
• In the Lines per Page field, select the number of lines to print on each page.
• Click the Enable Grid Line checkbox to print grid lines between columns on the page.
4. Click OK. The Select Plotter window displays.
5. In the Select Plotter window, select a plotter from the drop menu (if printing, select Other).
6. Click OK to print/plot. (If printing, the Print window displays. Click OK again.)

User Manual
Importing Client Logos
The iX1 ObNotes provides an option that allows corporate logos to be imported and printed on the title page of the observer’s
notes and on the tape labels.
Important!
Important!
Logo files must be in bitmap format (*.bmp) and the logo file must be named as clientlogo.bmp.
1. Create a client logo file and save it as a bitmap image (*.bmp).
2. Rename the client logo file as clientlogo.bmp.
3. Save the clientlogo.bmp file in the INOVA_iX1 directory.
The iX1 software automatically recognizes the clientlogo.bmp file and replaces the iX1 logo file with the client logo file.
Print Preview
1. To preview a report before printing, select File > Print Preview from the ObNotes drop menu. The Header Page
Information window displays.
2. Edit the Header Page if required and click OK. For more information about the Header Page Information window,
refer to “Title Page” on page 461. The Print Extended Header for Every Page popup displays.
• Enable the Print Extended Header checkbox to display a compressed version of the title page on every page of the
report.
• In the Lines per Page field, select the number of lines to print on each page.
• Click the Enable Grid Line checkbox to print grid lines on the page.
3. Click OK. The Print Setup window displays.

4. Select the printer and click OK to preview the report. The Print Preview window displays.
• Next Page - Preview the next page.
• Two Page - Preview two pages on the same screen.
5. Click Print, if required.
Print Setup
1. To select a printer or plotter, select File > Print Setup... from the drop menu. The Select Plotter popup displays.
2. Select a plotter from the drop menu or select Other to use a printer.
3. Click OK to select the print/plotter device.
Print Tape Labels
The Print Tape Labels option is used to create the tape labels. When the Tape Label window is opened, the software
automatically populates most of the fields. In addition, a client’s logo can be added to the tape label. Refer to “Importing Client
Logos” on page 450 for detailed information.
1. To print tape labels, select File > Print Tape Label from the drop menu. The Tape Label window displays.

User Manual
• Select the Tape # from the drop menu.
• Select Label Type from the drop menu. Diskette Label selection requires an entry in the Label field.
• Use the up/down arrows to adjust the offsets.
2. Click Print. The Select Plotter window displays.
3. Click OK. The Print options window displays.
4. Select the print options required and click OK. A preview of the print version of the Tape Label displays.
5. Inspect the preview and click Print, if satisfied.
Print QC Comments
The Print QC Comments option is used to print a list of QC comments entered in the iX1 Video Plot, which can be sorted by date
or a range of file numbers.
1. To print comments, select File > Print QC Comments from the drop menu. The following popup displays.
2. Select a time frame for comments from the drop menu, or enter a range of file numbers in the From and To fields.
3. Click OK. The Print Setup displays.
4. Select the print options required and click OK. A preview of the print version of the Print QC Comments displays.
5. Inspect the preview and click Print if satisfied.
Print Preview QC Comments
The Print Preview QC Comments option is used to display the list of QC comments for a time period or for a range of file
numbers before printing.
1. To preview the QC comments, select File > Preview QC Comments from the drop menu. The QC Comments Filter
displays.
2. Select a time frame for comments from the drop menu, or enter a range of file numbers in the From and To fields.

3. Click OK. The Print Setup displays.
4. Select the print options required and click OK. A preview of the print version of the Print QC Comments displays.
5. Click Print, if required.
Print Window
1. To print the current iX1 ObNotes window, select File > Print Window from the drop menu.
2. Select a printer and define the print parameters.

User Manual
Edit Drop Menu
The Edit drop menu has options to copy, paste, update, and find information in an open project database.
Copy Row
1. To copy a row of information from one of the ObNotes tabs, click, hold, and drag on a row(s) to select. The selected
content displays as dark gray.
2. Select Edit > Copy Row (Ctrl+C) from the drop menu.
Paste Row
1. To insert copied information into one of the ObNotes tabs, place the cursor into the cell/row you want to add the
information.
2. Select Edit > Paste Row (Ctrl+V) from the drop menu.
Update
• To update the iX1 ObNotes views with the current state of the project database, select Edit > Update (F5) from the drop
menu.
Note
Click in the toolbar or select Shot View > Pause to pause the view auto-update at any time.
Find
1. To find information within the current project database, select Edit > Find... (Ctrl+F) from the drop menu, or click
in the tool bar. The Find popup displays.

2. In the Find what field, enter a word that defines what to search for in the project database.
Note
Entered search words are saved for future use and can be accessed from the Find what drop menu.
3. Select in which column to search from the In Field drop menu. The columns available for selection depend on the
tab selected.
4. Select one of the following options in the Search 2nd Field:
• NO - Search by using the first Find what criteria only.
• AND - Search by using both Find what criteria, but only display results if the defined search words (both) are found
in the same row.
• OR - Search by using both Find what criteria and display results if either of the defined search words is found.
5. In the second Find what field, enter a word to search for in the project database.
6. In the second In Field field, select the second column to search from the drop menu.
7. Enable the Match Case checkbox to find only data that matches the case criteria of the search word that is entered
in the Find what field(s).
8. Enable the Match Whole Word field to match the exact word entered in the Find what field(s).
9. Click Find Next to begin the search.
10. If the search is successful, the ObNotes displays and highlights the requested data in the selected tab window.
11. Select Edit > Find Next (F3) from the ObNotes drop menu to locate and display the next data that match the
search words.
12. If the search is unsuccessful, the following popup displays.
13. Click OK to return to iX1 ObNotes and enter different search word.
Note
The drop menu for search contains the list of words used during previous searches.
Find Next
• To perform a search using the last defined search parameters, select Edit > Find... (F3) from the drop menu.

User Manual
Line/Coordinate
The Line/Coordinate option is an editing tool used to remove or modify non-referenced receiver or source coordinates inside the
project database.
Note
The Referenced Coordinate means any source point that has been acquired and any receiver point that
has been used in a patch of an acquired source point.
Warning!
The deleted (removed) non-referenced receiver coordinates and source coordinates/points
can not be restored. Proceed with caution!
1. To remove or modify non-referenced receiver or source coordinates, select Edit > Line/Coordinate from the drop
menu. The Edit Line/Coordinate window displays.
Remove Receiver
1. To remove non-referenced receiver coordinates from the current project database, select Edit > Line/Coordinate from
drop menu.
2. Click the Remove Receiver tab.
3. In the Remove Coordinates section, select one of the following options:
• ALL - Remove all non-referenced receiver coordinates from the project database.
• By Sub-Project - Remove all non-referenced receiver coordinates from the project database for the selected sub-
project.
• By Line Name - Remove non-referenced receiver coordinates from the project database for the selected line
number.
• By Flag - Remove non-referenced receiver coordinates by range of flags defined in the From, To, and By fields for
the selected receiver line.
4. Click to delete the selected receiver coordinates/flags from the project database. When removed, the
comments regarding deleted receiver coordinates/flags display in the status window.

Remove Source
1. To remove non-referenced source coordinates from the current project database, select Edit > Line/Coordinate from
the drop menu.
2. Click the Remove Source tab.
3. In the Remove Coordinates section of the tab, select one of the following options:
• ALL - Remove all non-referenced source coordinates from the project database.
• By Sub-Project - Remove non-referenced source coordinates from the project database for the selected sub-
project.
• By Line Name - Remove non-referenced source coordinates from the project database for the selected line
number.
• By Flag - Remove non-referenced source coordinates by range of flags defined in the From, To, and By fields for
the selected source line.
4. In the Remove Shot Points section, select one of the following:
• None - Don’t remove shot points from the Not Shot tab.
• All Not Taken - Remove shot points from the Not Shot tab.
• Without Comments - Remove all shot points from the Not Shot tab except those with comments.
5. Click to delete the selected non-referenced source coordinates/points from the project database.
When removed, the comments regarding deleted source coordinates/points display in the status window.

User Manual
Modify Receiver Line
The Modify Receiver Line tab is used to modify non-referenced receiver line name within the project database.
1. To modify receiver line name, select Edit > Line/Coordinate from the drop menu.
2. Click the Modify Receiver Line tab.
3. Select a sub-project from the Sub-Project drop menu.
• Click Entire Line and select the receiver line to rename from the drop menu.
• Click Range Only to rename only a portion of the selected receiver line by defining the flag numbers in the From,
To, and By fields.
5. Enter a new name for the line in the New Line Name field.
6. Click to change the receiver line name. Comments about the changes display in the status window.

Modify Source Line
The Modify Source Line tab is used to modify non-referenced source line name within the project database.
1. To modify source line name, select Edit > Line/Coordinate from the drop menu.
2. Click the Modify Source Line tab.
3. Select a sub-project from the Sub-Project drop menu.
• Click Entire Line and select the source line to rename from the drop menu.
• Click Range Only to rename only a portion of the selected source line by defining the flag numbers in the From,
To, and By fields.
5. Enter a new name for the line in the New Line Name field.
6. Click to change the source line name. Comments about the changes display in the status window.

User Manual
View Drop Menu
The View drop menu consists of options used to define how data and tools displays in the iX1 ObNotes window.
• Tool Bar (page 480).
• Status Bar (page 488).
Patches/EC Horiz
The Patches/EC Horiz option (default) displays the read-only information for the selected entry (Shot and Test tabs only) in the
Patch, Media Log, Error Code, and VSR tabs at the bottom of the iX1 ObNotes window.
• Select View > Patches > EC Horiz from the drop menu.
• Pat # - Display the patch information for the selected entry.
• Media Log - Display information, if SEG-Y file for the selected entry was output to the tape/tape image media.
• EC: (error code) - Display the error code description, if occurs.
• VSR - Display the information related to the Vibroseis Signature Recording.
Patches/EC Vert
The Patches/EC Vert option displays the read-only information for the selected entry (Shot and Test tabs only) in the Patch,
Media Log, Error Code, and VSR tabs at the right side of the iX1 ObNotes window.

Title Page
The Title Page option is used to display detailed project information for media written reports and printed copies. Though a few
fields still require data input, most of the information entered in the Project Header (iX1 Vib), Source Table (iX1 Vib) and iX1 Map
displays on the iX1 ObNotes title page.
1. Select View > Title Page from the iX1 ObNotes drop menu. The Header Page Information window displays.
• The grayed out fields are automatically populated with data from the project database. Select SPS code from the
drop menu for Instrument (I#), Source (V#, E#), and Receiver (G#, H#) to populate the information.
• If required, enter/edit data in the available fields.
2. Choose from one of the following options:
• To save changes made to the current title page, click . The Save As pop-up displays.
• Click Save to save the title page as the *.cvs file in the current project directory.
• To display a previously saved title page, click . Select the previously saved *.cvs file.
• To display the last configuration of the title page, click . The system opens the LastSave.cvs file.
3. Click OK to apply the changes. The system automatically saves the title page to LastSave.cvs file which can be
located in the current project directory.

User Manual
Maximize
• To maximize or minimize the iX1 ObNotes window in the display area, select View > Maximize from the drop menu. A
checkmark beside Maximize indicates the view is maximized.
• Click Maximize again to minimize the view to previously selected size.
• Alternately, click in the tool bar to maximize/minimize the size of the iX1 ObNotes window.
Show Omitted Info
• To show information in the shot entry (Shot Table) that was previously omitted, click View > Show Omitted Info from
the drop menu to populate the shot information.
ShotView Drop Menu
The ShotView drop menu consists of options used to customize and organize the iX1 ObNotes views/tables information.
View 1, 2, 3, 4
The View options are used to define up to four customized views. For information about customizing ObNotes views, refer to
“Save Customized Views” on page 465.
• The View # with a checkmark beside, it is the current view that displays in the iX1 ObNotes.
• To change to a different custom view, select any View option that does NOT have a checkmark.
• When a custom view is created, a custom name can be assigned to the View.

Properties
The displayed data can be customized via the Properties option for each ObNotes tab.
• Click on one of the five tabs and select ShotView > Properties from the drop menu or click in the tool bar.
Field Description
Enable the checkboxes against corresponding columns to display in the Shot tab.
Label
Refer to “Labels” on page 464 for additional information.
Order This column indicates the order how the selected fields display from left to right in the Shot tab.
Title If required, edit the default title for the selected column.
Width If required, adjust the width of the seated column. Numbers are in typeface pts.
All On - Select all fields.

All Off / All On
All Off - Deselect all fields.
Default Select the basic set of fields.
Fixed Width Adjust the width of all columns by a percentage.
Alignment Define the words alignment in the cell by selecting Left, Centre, or Right.

User Manual
Labels
The following table describes each label item, indicates how the data column is populated (Source) in the tab window, and
indicates which tab the item is available on (Tab Item Available). The Source column displays the source of information.
S = System Defined U = User Edit UD = Default setting, but User Edit UI = User Edit or Import
Label (Item) Description Source Tab Item Available
EC Digital error codes S Shot/Test
FileTime Inputs the start time stamp S Shot/No File/Test/Comments
BinFile The sub-project file name S Shot/No File/Test
Sline The source line of the source point S Shot/Not Shot/No File/Test
Flag The flag number of the source point S Shot/Not Shot/No File
SP_Index The number of times the source point has been recorded S Shot
FileNumber The file number of the seismic/test data record S All
Reel The primary drive tape reel number the data file was recorded on S Shot/Test
DOS The depth of the charge/shot UDI Shot/Not Shot/No File
Chg The size of the explosive charge or weight of the vibrator UDI Shot/Not Shot/No File
UH The uphole time S,U Shot/No File
SpNum Decoder ID # S Shot/No File
Comps The number of composites per VP S Shot
The number of energy sources per shot point.

NumUnits UD Shot/Not Shot
Example: 3 can represent 3 Vibes or a 3-hole pattern.
SwpFile The sweep file name or auxiliary trace used for correlation S Shot
SweepID Sweep ID number S Shot
Salvo The Salvo or Iteration number S Shot
Vibrators Vibrator ID numbers S Shot
Skid Represents the skid of the shot point in feet or meters UI Shot/Not Shot/No File
Offset Represents the offset of the shot point in feet or metres UI Shot/Not Shot/No File
COG Group Centre-Of-Gravity S Shot
Omit Specifies a misfire or non-production record U Shot
Warn Displays a warning comment prior to start of acquisition U Shot/Not Shot/No File
SourceType Source Type (SPS code) S Shot
Instrument Recording Instrument Type (SPS) S Shot
FleetLable Identifies the fleet of vibrators
SourceLabel Identifies the command line group U Shot
Patch Displays the patch definition for the source point S Shot
Patdef Patch number in the database S Shot/Test
UserComment Spare – user defined U Shot/Not Shot

Label (Item) Description Source Tab Item Available
Comment Displays operator comments and/or imported drill logs comments UI Shot/Not Shot/Test/Comments
System Comment Displays system generated comments S Shot/Test
LocalTime Displays the local time S Shot/No File/Test/Comments
SwathID Displays the swath ID number S Shot/Test
SwathFileNumber Displays the swath file number S Shot
ShotID Displays the shot (SP/VP) ID number S Shot
LC Displays the low-cut filter UD Test
HC Displays the high-cut filter UD Test
SampleRate Displays the sample rate UD Test
Gain Displays the preamp gain UD Test
NumTested Displays the number of tested channels S Test
NumFailed Displays the number of failed channels S Test
Save Customized Views
1. To save a view, select File > Save As from the drop menu. The Save As pop-up displays.
2. Enter a file name (such as 2D dynamite, 3D vibes, Project Name, or Client Copy).
3. Click Save. The view is saved in the INOVA_iX1 > Control folder with the designated file name and a *.Obn
extension. This name also displays in the title bar and the ShotView menu beside the number that was edited.
4. Repeat the above steps for three additional views, if required.
Note
Numerous *.Obn files can be saved and opened in one of the views. The *.Obn files can also be copied
to other recording systems to ensure that all crews use the same view formats.

User Manual
Filters
The Filters option is used to limit the range of data that displays in the tab views for large projects or projects that extend over
multiple days.
1. To enable filters, select the tab that contains the information to be viewed/printed (Shot, Not Shot, No File, Test, or
Comments).
2. Click in the toolbar or select ShotView > Filters from the drop menu. The Filters window displays.
3. Enable the filters to be applied.
Swath ID Select the swath ID from the drop list to display
>= Display the file numbers greater than or equal to the number entered
File/Reel Number/Swath <= Display the file numbers less than or equal to the number entered
Both >= and <= Enable both checkboxes to display the entered range of records
Reel Select the reel number from the drop list to display the records by reel number

None Display all available records
Today Only Display records from the current day only

Time
Date Display records for the selected day
Within Display records within the specified number of days
Subproject Display records for the selected sub-project
Line Display records for the selected source line
Coordinate Flag >= Display records for flag numbers greater than or equal to the number entered
Flag <= Display records for flag numbers less than or equal to the number entered
Both Flag >= and <= Enable both checkboxes to display the entered range of source points
Type Display records for the selected source type using the drop menu
Source Fleet Display records for the selected fleet
Label Display records for the selected source type label
Instrument Type Display records for the selected instrument type
4. Click on one of the following buttons:
• - Applies the settings to display in the tab view. The Filters button on the tool bar is now depressed.
Click to disable the filters and display all data.
• - Print the Filters window (not the tab with the filtered data).
• - Exit without applying the filters.
Pause
• To halt the automatic updates, select Shot View > Pause from the drop menu or click in the tool bar to stop a view
update at any time.

User Manual
Comments Drop Menu
The Comments drop menu is used to create shortcuts and hot keys to simplify adding commonly used comments (such as skid,
offset, blow out, etc.) into the Comment field. Up to ten shortcuts can be created and displayed in the Comments drop menu.
Add
1. To create a comment shortcut and hot key from an existing comment, highlight a comment in any Comment field.
2. Select Comments > Add from the drop menu. The Add to Index popup displays.
3. In the Index field, enter a number from 0 to 9. The Ctrl automatically displays in front of the number assigned to the
hot key.
4. Click OK to create the shortcut. The new shortcut and hot key display in the Comments drop menu.
Add...
1. To create a new comment shortcut and hot key, select Comments > Add... from the drop menu. The Add Comment
popup displays.
• In the Index field, enter a number from 0 to 9. The Ctrl automatically displays in front of the number assigned as the
hot key.

• In the Comment field, enter the word required for the comment (maximum 40).
2. Click OK to create the shortcut. The new shortcut and hot key display in the Comments drop menu.
Del
1. To delete a shortcut comment and hot key, select Comments > Del from the drop menu. The Delete Comment popup
displays.
2. In the Index field, select the hot key number to delete (0-9). The comments associated with the index number
display in the Comment field below.
3. Click OK to delete the comment and hot key from the Comments drop menu.
Enter Comments
1. Click the Shot, Not Shot, or Comments tab.
2. Click in the required field in the Comments column to add the comment.
Note
The Comments under Properties popup must be enabled to display the Comments column. For
information about iX1 ObNotes Properties setup, refer to “Properties” on page 463.
3. Select Comments > Shortcut Name, or press the applicable hot key to insert the comment. The selected
comment displays in the Comments field.

User Manual
Import Drop Menu
The Import drop menu is used to update the project database with the drill logs information.
Note
The iX1 ObNotes program supports the drill logs files prepared in Excel format only.
Logs
1. To import a drill log in Excel format, select Import > Logs from the drop menu. The Open window displays the doc
directory of the current project (by default).
2. Select the required Excel file from the project doc folder (or navigate to other location) and click Open.
The Import Excel Drill Log window displays.
Excel Spread Sheet List View
View Organization Import Options

3. In the View Organization section , enable the corresponding checkbox(es) of information to import from the
Excel file. In the Column field, select the excel column letter that displays the information for the corresponding
Label. Refer to the following label descriptions below.
Label Description
SLine Include the source line number
Flag Include the shot point flag number
DOS Include the depth of the shot point
Chg Include the size of the charge used for the shot
NumUnits Include the number of units (holes) used for the shot
Skid Include the distance a shot has been skidded from its original location
Offset Include the distance a shot has been offset from its original position
Include the specific messages that are used as warning messages in the iX1 Vib
Warn
before the shot is fired
User Include the information the user has entered
Include the comments entered by the driller (warning message, if checked in the Warn
Comment
column)
4. In the List View section , complete the following:
• Select the worksheet to display from the WorkSheet Display drop menu.
• Choose one of the following options:
• Show All Data Columns - Display all columns of the drill log.
• Show Selected Columns - Display only the columns enabled in the View Organization section.
5. In the Import Options section , complete the following:
• In the From Row field, select the first row of data to import. In many cases, the data starts on Row 2 as Row 1 of
the spreadsheet contains the column titles, which do not need to be imported.

User Manual
• In the To Row field, select the last row number of data to complete the import.
• Select one of the following options:
• Select All WorkSheet to import the entire Excel workbook.
• Select Current WorkSheet to import only the current worksheet selected in the List View.
• If each individual worksheet is named after a source line, enable the Sline As WorkSheet Name checkbox.
• To import and update only the Not Shot table, enable the Not Shot Table Only checkbox.
6. To print the current window, click Print Window.
7. Click OK to import the drill logs into the project database.
Export Drop Menu
The Export drop menu contains options to export information from the project database into several different file types. Exported
files are saved to the current project doc directory.
The following table describes the type of files that can be produced by the iX1 ObNotes.
File Format File Type Extension Description
SPS *.R01, *.S01, *.X01 Shell Processing Support files

Text
Document ** *.001 Shot point related information
Observer *.xls Current view of OB logs
GPS *.xls Source point GPS information
Shot Pro *.xls Uphole Time
GPS Tracking *.xls Vehicle tracking GPS information
Excel PSS/PFS *.xls PSS/PFS messages
COG *.xls Fleet Center-of-Gravity (per VP)
Unit Average Vibe Position Average (per VP)
Vibrator Unit Vibe Position (per Composite)
QC Report *.xls Phone, Channel, Status test reports
** Creating a document file is performed in increments of 1.4 MB of data. The first file created has a *.001 extension. Should the first file
be larger than 1.4 MB, a second file is automatically created with a *.002 extension. The extension numbering continues to increment by
1 until the entire request is exported.

Reports
1. To define the type of information to be exported from the iX1 ObNotes, select Export > Reports from the drop menu.
The Report window displays.
Enable any of the following options, as required:
Enable to create a sub-directory in the project doc folder. Enter a name for the sub-
Create Directory
directory, if required.
Enter a name for the files (SPS, INOVA Document, Excel).

• If All is selected in the Filters section, the File Name field defaults to ALL.
• If Date is selected in the Filters section, the File Name field defaults to the Date
selected.
• If File is selected in the Filters section, the File Name field defaults to the From/To
File Name range selected.
NOTE: If an existing file name is used to export text files, the previous file
will be overwritten with the new file. For Excel files, if an existing file name
is used, a new table (worksheet) is created. A file identifier (A, B, C, etc.,) is
applied and follows the file name of each individual table (worksheet).

User Manual
All Export all data contained in the project database.
Specify a date to export the information related to this particular day. Date is not
Date
available when Not Shot or No File tabs are selected.
Filters Specify a range of file numbers (insert a first and last file number in the From/To
File fields). The system exports information related to the specified range of files. File is
not available when Not Shot or No File tabs are selected.
Enable to apply the previously defined filters for the selected tab. Refer to “Filters” on
Apply Filters
page 466 for additional information.
SPS Rev 2.1 Enable to export the shell processing support (SPS) file types in Rev 2.1.
Text file format
INOVA Document Enable to export the file as a text document with a *.txt extension.
This field defaults to the Date or the File name (as it is defined in the Filters section).
Worksheet Name
Enter a new name, if required.
Enable to create the Observer Report including comments entered by the Observer.
Observer The Export Title Page popup displays. Click Yes to display the title page for editing
before exporting, or click No.
GPS Enable to include the source point GPS data into the report.
Shot Pro Enable to include the uphole time data into the report.
GPS Sync Time Enable to include the Sync Time into the report.
QC Comments Enable to include the iX1 Video Plot QC comments into the report.
Gator Enable to include the Gator air gun data into the report.
Enable to include the GPS tracking data into the report.

Excel File Format
GPS Tracking • Enable the Errors Only checkbox to include only GPS tracking errors.
• Enable the ID checkbox and select individual vehicle IDs from the drop-down.
HAWK T3
PSS/PFS Enable to include PSS/PFS messages into the report.
COG Enable to include the calculated average center of gravity (COG) for a VP.
Enable to include the average COG position for the Vibe Units to COG report.
Unit Average Averages are based on the number of units defined as must pass that success-
fully meet the Minimum Quality, Minimum Satellites, and Maximum HDOP (as
defined in the Vibrator Parameters).
Vibrator Unit Enable to include all Vibe Unit GPS positions to COG report.
Combine into one File Enable to merge multiple Excel files as worksheets into one single Excel file.
2. Click OK to create an observer report. When the export is complete, the following confirmation pop-up displays.
3. Click OK to return to the iX1 ObNotes.

SPS File Format Rev 2.1
Enable SPS Rev 2.1 checkbox to export positioning and geophysical support data in revised (Jan, 2006) SPS format.
The following is an example of ObNotes (Shot tab view) transformation into the SPS and seismic survey text files for processing
centers.
Shot Tab View
R,S Files
H26 ------------------------- Receiver/Source Records -------------------------

H26 1 record identification: 1-1 A1
H26 2 line name: 2-11 F10.2
H26 3 point number: 12-21 F10.2
H26 0 unused: 22-23
H26 4 point index: 24-24 I1
H26 5 point code: 25-26 A2
H26 6 static correction: 27-30 I4
H26 7 point depth: 31-34 F4.1
H26 8 seismic datum: 35-38 I4
H26 9 uphole time: 39-40 I2
H26 10 water depth: 41-46 F6.1
H26 11 map grid easting: 47-55 F9.1
H26 12 map grid northing: 56-65 F10.1
H26 13 surface elevation: 66-71 F6.1
H26 14 day of year: 72-74 I3
H26 15 time 'hhmmss': 75-80 3I2
H26
H26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H26 5678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
H26
R 201.00 101.00 1G1 0.0 0 20050.0 0.0 42104305
R 201.00 102.00 1G1 0.0 0 20000.0 0.0 42104342
R 201.00 103.00 1G1 0.0 0 19950.0 0.0 42104151
R 201.00 104.00 1G1 0.0 0 19900.0 0.0 42104151
R 201.00 105.00 1G1 0.0 0 19850.0 0.0 42104151
H26
H26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H26 5678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
H26
S 201.00 501.50 1E1 20.0 023 25.0 0.0 42104133
S 201.00 101.50 1E1 20.0 022 20025.0 0.0 42104151
S 201.00 500.50 1E1 20.0 023 75.0 0.0 42104241
S 201.00 102.50 1E1 20.0 024 19975.0 0.0 42104305
S 201.00 103.50 1E1 20.0 025 19925.0 0.0 42104342
S 201.00 499.50 1E1 20.0 026 125.0 0.0 42104353
S 201.00 104.50 1E1 20.0 027 19875.0 0.0 42104407

User Manual
X File
H26 ------------------------ Cross Reference Records ---------------------------

H26 1 record identification: 1-1 A1
H26 2 field tape number: 2-7 3A2
H26 3 field record number: 8-15 I8
H26 4 field tape increment: 16-16 I1
H26 5 instrument code: 17-17 A1
H26 6 line name: 18-27 F10.2
H26 7 point number: 28-37 F10.2
H26 8 point index: 38-38 I1
H26 9 from channel: 39-43 I5
H26 10 to channel: 44-48 I5
H26 11 channel increment: 49-49 I1
H26 12 line name: 50-59 F10.2
H26 13 from receiver: 60-69 F10.2
H26 14 to receiver: 70-79 F10.2
H26 15 receiver index: 80-80 I1
H26
H26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H26 5678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
H26
X 1 111 201.00 501.501 1 1201 201.00 381.00 500.001
X 1 211 201.00 101.501 1 1201 201.00 103.00 222.001
X 1 311 201.00 500.501 1 1201 201.00 380.00 499.001
X 1 411 201.00 102.501 1 11 201.00 101.00 101.001
X 1 411 201.00 102.501 2 1211 201.00 104.00 223.001
X 1 511 201.00 103.501 1 21 201.00 101.00 102.001
X 1 511 201.00 103.501 3 1221 201.00 105.00 224.001
X 1 611 201.00 499.501 1 1201 201.00 379.00 498.001
X 1 611 201.00 499.501 121 1211 201.00 501.00 501.001
X 1 711 201.00 104.501 1 31 201.00 101.00 103.001
X 1 711 201.00 104.501 4 1231 201.00 106.00 225.001
INOVA Document
***** Date: 2014/02/11

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(RECEIVER STN'S) (TRACES)
EC TIME REEL FILE# SHOT-PT TRACE SRC-LINE PRJ-FILE SWP-FILE CPS NET PATKY RCV-LINE FROM TO BY FROM TO STATUS
0 10:41:33 1 1 501.5 123 201 KH201 1 1 1 PTB 1 1 1 -3 -3 Time Break
TMNG 2 2 1 -2 -2 Unknown
UPH 3 3 1 -1 -1 Uphole
201 103 222 1 1 120 Live
***** Date: 2014/02/11
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 10:41:51 1 2 101.5 123 201 KH201 1 1 2 PTB 1 1 1 -3 -3 Time Break
UPH 3 3 1 -1 1 Uphole
201 103 222 1 1 120 Live
***** Date: 2014/02/11
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 10:42:41 1 3 500.5 123 201 KH201 1 1 3 PTB 1 1 1 -3 -3 Time Break
UPH 3 3 1 -1 -1 Uphole
201 380 499 1 1 120 Live

VSR Process Data
The VSR Process Data reports are made during Vibrator Signature Recording (VSR) jobs. The VSR Process Data option is
used to create a separate VSR report (in Excel format) which is used by the INOVA Transcriber Utility to merge the source SEG-
Y files with the iX1 seismic data SEG-Y files.
1. To export VSR Process Data, select Export > VSR Process Data from the drop menu. The Vibrator Process Data
window displays.
• Select All to export all data without filtering.
• Select Date to export data for a particular date.
• Select File to specify a range of file numbers (insert a first and last file number in the From/To fields). The system
exports information related to the specified range of files.
3. A default file name automatically displays in the File Name field. To use the default file name, click OK.
4. Click Save As and enter a new name in the File Name field, if required.
5. Click OK to export the VSR file.

User Manual
QC Report
The QC Report are produced from the QC database.
1. To export QC reports, select Export > QC Report from the drop menu. The QC Export window displays.
2. Select type of reports to export in the Test section. The system prepares individual Excel files for every selected
report.
• Select All to export all data without filtering.
• Select Date to export data for a particular date.
• Select Serial Number to export data for particular unit.
• Select Line Number to export data related to the receiver line number.
4. Click Export to create a requested reports. When the export is complete, the following confirmation pop-up
displays.
5. Click OK to return to the iX1 ObNotes.

Help Drop Menu
The Help drop menu options provide the software version information of iX1 ObNotes and a list of hot keys.
Hot Keys
• To view the list of iX1 ObNotes hot keys, select Help > Hot Keys... from the drop menu.
About iX1 ObNotes
• Select Help > About iX1ObNotes... to display the software version number.

User Manual
Tool Bar
The tool bar buttons perform a variety of functions within the iX1 ObNotes program. The tool bar can be displayed, moved,
hidden, and docked.
Toolbar Button Toolbar Button

Icon Name
Properties Edit the tab view properties (page 463)
Filters Edit and apply the view filters (page 466)
Pause Pause automatic updates (page 467)
Maximize Expand the iX1 ObNotes window (page 462)
Find Find specified text in the selected ObNotes view (page 454)
Display/Hide/Move Tool Bar
• Select View > Toolbar from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Toolbar indicates it is displaying.
• Click Toolbar again to remove the checkmark from the drop menu. The toolbar no longer displays.
• If the toolbar is floating outside the window, click X in the upper right of the toolbar to hide. A docked toolbar does not
have an X and must be hidden using the drop menu.
• To move the tool bar, click, hold, and drag it to the desired location. Release the mouse button.
• When the toolbar is dragged below the program title bar, to the far left, right, or bottom edge of the window, the toolbar
snaps into place on the edge of the window and becomes a docked toolbar.
Display Tabs
The iX1 ObNotes tabs are used to organize and display all required information for a project. There are five main tabs.
Shot Displays information about the shots already taken for a project
Not Shot Displays information about the shots not yet taken for a project
No File Displays information about shots that will not be taken, but exist in the database
Test Displays information about all the test records acquired for a project
Comments Used to add additional information regarding a project

Shot Tab
The Shot tab displays information that pertains to the shots already taken for a project. The type of data columns can be
customized for the view.
1. To display information about the shots taken for a project, select the Shot tab.
2. To customize the columns, click in the tool bar or select ShotView > Properties from the drop menu. For
additional information refer to “Properties” on page 463.
Editing the Shot Tab
Several fields can be edited in the Shot tab after acquisition. Hole depths, charge sizes, skids, offsets, etc. can be added by
clicking on the cell and making an entry. This facilitates shooting without the benefit of imported drill logs and when RTI is
disabled.
During editing, the iX1 ObNotes pauses (disconnects from the project database). When the entry in the field is complete, press
Enter to restore the auto-update functionality.
Anything can be entered in the Comments field (maximum 255 characters). The iX1 ObNotes also provides a quick comment
tool for frequently used comments.
Note
Refer to the “Comments Drop Menu” on page 468 for additional information on adding comments.

User Manual
Not Shot Tab
The Not Shot tab displays information about the shots not yet taken for a project.
1. Click the Not Shot tab. The following illustrates the default column layout. All source points that was not involved in the
production shooting display. When a source point has been acquired, the iX1ObNotes program transfers the entry from
the Not Shot tab to the Shot tab.
2. To customize the columns, click in the tool bar or select ShotView > Properties from the drop menu. The
Items To Display window displays.For additional information refer to “Properties” on page 463.

No File Tab
The No File tab displays information about shots that will not be recorded, but still exist in the project database (i.e., no
recoveries due to lock-outs, dead caps, field conditions, etc.).
1. Click the No File tab.

Items To Display window displays. For additional information refer to “Properties” on page 463.
3. To move a shot from the Not Shot tab to the No File tab, select the source point that will not be recorded and enter
NF in the File column.
4. Confirm the change by clicking OK in the warning pop-up.
5. The source point is then moved from the Not Shot tab to the No File tab with a time stamp.

User Manual
Test Tab
The Test tab displays information about the test records acquired for a project.
1. Click the Test tab.The following illustrates the default column layout.

Comments Tab
The Comments tab is used to add additional information to the observer report regarding a matter that affects the whole project.
1. Click the Comments tab.
2. Enter the additional information in the Comment field and press Enter. The comment displays with a time stamp.
Read-Only Sub-Tabs
For the Shot tab and Test tab, additional read-only information displays on the following sub-tabs:
• Patch sub-tab (page 486)
• Media Log sub-tab (page 486)
• Error Code sub-tab (page 485)
• VSR sub-tab (page 488)
Note
The Patch, Media Log, Error Code, and VSR sub-tabs display by default at the bottom of the iX1
ObNotes window, but can be moved to display along the right side of the iX1 ObNotes window. Refer to
“Patches/EC Horiz” on page 460 and “Patches/EC Vert” on page 460 for procedures.

User Manual
Patch Sub-Tab
The Patch Definition (Patch) sub-tab is used to display the patch information that is associated with the data file that has been
selected in the Shot or Test tab.
• From the Shot or Test tab, click on the Pat: # tab to display the read-only data for the selected record. > displays to the
left of the Shot# to indicate the selected data record.
Media Log Sub-Tab
The Media Log sub-tab is used to display the media log information.
• From the Shot or Test tab, click on the Media Log sub-tab to display the read-only data for the selected record. The >
symbol displays to the left of the Shot# to indicate the selected data record.
Error Code Sub-Tab
The Error Code sub-tab is used to display a description of digital error codes that have occurred during acquisition for the
selected file.
• From the Shot or Test tab, click on the No Errors tab to display the read-only data for the selected record. > displays to
the left of the Shot# to indicate the selected data record.
• if errors exist, the error code displays on the tab. if no errors exists, the tab displays No Errors.

Error Codes
Digital errors that have occurred in the G3i HD system are documented in the iX1 ObNotes in the EC (Error Code) column. All
codes are recorded in hexadecimal format, (i.e. 0x00000800 + 0x00000400 = 0x00000C00).
The following types of digital errors are reported:
00000010 Checksum error(s)
00000020 Drop out error(s)
00000040 Insert error(s) - Drop out off A or B side of a FTU
The above error codes are for single errors of only one type.
If there is more than one type of error on a file, the codes are added together as in the examples below:
00000050 Checksum and Insert error(s)
00000060 Drop out and Insert error(s)
00000070 Checksum, Drop out, and Insert error(s)
When error recovery is enabled for G3i RAMs, the system automatically enters recovery mode to retrieve affected samples from
memory.
The following codes are reported:
00100000 Recovery from Checksum error(s)
00200000 Recovery from Dropout error(s)
00400000 Recovery from Insert error(s)
If required, error codes are summed (00100000, 00200000, 00400000).
There are two types of recovery the system can perform:
• Recovery for intermittent errors
• Recovery from a line cut error (16 or more sequential dropout or insert errors)
The following codes will be added to the above error type codes based upon the type of recovery required:
00020000 Recovery from Line Cuts)
00040000 Recovery from Intermittent error(s) (checksum, drop out, or insert)
The system remains in recovery mode until all marked errors are recovered, or the user can perform one of the following:
• Override the recovery and continue the acquisition with errors.
• Restart the composite.
If recovery is overridden the following code will be summed with the recovery type code:
00080000 Recovery ignored (overridden by user)
G3i RAMs also have internal status checks that are monitored by the Central Recording System (CRS) during acquisition.

User Manual
Errors are reported as follows:
00000200 Internal Reset Warning
00000100 Internal Reset Warning Ignored (overridden by user)
00000800 Internal Status Check
00000400 Internal Status Check Ignored (overridden by user)
Note
When a warning condition is defined, it will be logged regardless of composite redo or recovery
completion status.
The CRS has the option to record a source array (calculated COG) to disk/tape if positional data is received from a source
controller. The user is required to configure GPS quality tolerances (for each unit in the array) and define the minimum number of
composites per shot point, which must meet these tolerances.
The following error codes are recorded when these tolerances are not met:
COG Quality Warning: Tolerances not met for the required number of composites, but >1
01000000
composite(s) had a valid message, which is used to calculate the average position.
COG Calculation Error: Tolerances not met on any composites (average unit position is
02000000
calculated from all received messages.
VSR Tab
The VSR (Vibrator Signature Recording) tab is used to display the vibroseis signature recording related data.
• From the Shot or Test tab, click on the VSR tab to display the read-only data for the selected record. > displays to the
left of the Shot# to indicate the selected data record.
Note
To export the VSR Process Data, refer to “VSR Process Data” on page 477.
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the iX1 ObNotes window. The left side displays messages about current ObNotes
activity. The right side of the status bar lists the currently selected line from the view above.
• Display/Hide Status Bar - Select View > Status Bar from the drop menu. Click on Status Bar to enable/disable the
status bar.

Chapter 8
iX1 Media
iX1 Media
The iX1 Central Recording System (CRS) records data to an internal hard drive before it goes to any other locations, such as a
plotter, iX1 VideoPlot, or iX1 Media.
• The format of the files on the hard drive is a SEG-Y Disk format (MSDOS IEEE). This differs from SEG-Y Tape/Tape
Image format.
• A SEG-D Tape/Tape Image and Single File options are also available for recording data to media.
SEG-Y Internal Single File MSDOS IEEE SEG-Y Rev. 0

SEG-Y Files on Tape and Image File 32 bit IBM Floating Point SEG-Y Rev. 0
SEG-Y Single File 32 bit IBM Floating Point SEG-Y Rev. 0
32 bit IEEE Floating Point Demultiplexer 8058 SEG-D Rev. 2
SEG-D Files on Tape and Image File
SEG-D Single File
Seismic data files can be written to an image file (*.TpImage extension) that is identical to SEG-D or SEG-Y tape formats. The
image file consists of the selected internal data files that is normally written to the hard drive and can be exported to external
media.
All files recorded by the iX1 system to the internal hard drive are in MSDOS IEEE SEG-Y read only format.
The iX1 Media controls the file format that is written to the external media. The seismic/test data file on the hard drive (typically
located at F:\G3Data\ProjectName) is reformatted according to the user’s selection in the Critical Parameters (iX1 Vib >
Parameters > Critical Parameters (Recording Options)).
When files in SEG-D formats are recorded to the tape, the SEG-Y 3200 and 400 byte headers are recorded in the SEG-D
External Header and the SEG-Y 240 byte trace headers in the SEG-D Trace Headers. This allows the iX1 Media to read the
files previously recorded to tape in SEG-D format and convert (save) them to single MSDOS IEEE SEG-Y format files, if required.
Important!
Important!
The plotting and data analysis options available in the system are written for MSDOS IEEE SEG-Y files
only.
If Recording Truck Interface (RTI) is used, the following information is recorded to the SEG-D Extended Headers:
• PSS messages including the GPS information
• Calculated Source Array COG data (optional), which can be enabled in the Project Headers (iX1 Vib > Parameters >
Project Headers (GPS section))

User Manual
To save the sensor test data from the last test performed in the iX1 Map to the SEG-D Trace Header Extension Block 3, select
iX1 Vib > Parameters > Critical Parameters > Test Results to Trace Headers (Recording Options).
Note
For a detailed description of the INOVA data output formats, refer to the software installation suite in the
MediaFormats folder.
• To start the iX1 Media, open iX1 Vib and click in the toolbar or select Tools > Media... from the drop menu. The
iX1 Media window displays.
iX1 Media Title Bar Tab View
Drop Menu (page 491) Tab Data Display Area (page 510)
Toolbar (page 503) Status Bar (page 518)
Media Status Bar (page 509) Selected Media Status (page 518)

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
Drop Menu
Refer to the following table for drop menu options and descriptions.

Open... Ctrl+O Access one of the existing projects (page 493)
Print... Ctrl+P Print the log information (Log Viewer Tab only) (page 493)
Print Preview View a log file prior to printing (Log Viewer Tab only) (page 494)
File
Print Setup... Setup print parameters (page 494)
Print Window Print the iX1 Media window (page 494)
Exit Close the iX1 Media window
Toolbar Show or hide the Toolbar in the iX1 Media window (page 503)
Status Bar Show or hide the Status Bar at the bottom of iX1 Media window (page 518)
Media Status Bar Show or hide the Media Status Bar (page 509)
Display files horizontally as large icons (Media Control and Disk to Media
Large Icon
Tabs) (page 495)
Display files horizontally as small icons (Media Control and Disk to Media
View Small Icon
Tabs) (page 495)
Display files vertically in a list format (Media Control and Disk to Media Tabs)
List
(page 495)
Display file name, size, date modified, attributes (Media Control and Disk to
Details
Media Tabs) (page 495)
Display the 3200 bit, 400 bit, SEG-D, Trace, or Extended header data (Disk to
Data
Media Tab) (page 495)
Assign a specific data file as the first file written to tape (others with a later
First Pick
time stamp follow) (Media Control Tab) (page 496)
Write the next file with a higher file number and later time stamp to tape,
Last Pick
(Media Control Tab) (page 496)
Scan the hard drive for new data files and update the display (Media Control
List Rescan F5
Tab) (page 496)
Scan the hard drive for files that pertain to the current project and display
Reset
(Media Control Tab) (page 496)
Delete files from the hard disk after a successful write to tape (Media Control
Delete Disk File After Write
Tab) (page 496)
Media Media Select... Select a media type (page 505)

User Manual

Function becomes available after selecting a target tape drive and initiate it to
GO
perform the selected task (mode dependent) (page 504)
Stop Stop operation when current task is complete (page 505)
Load Tape... Position tape to EOD (End-Of-Data) (page 506)
Rewind to Beginning-Of-Tape (BOT), and unload cartridge from the tape
Unload Tape...
drive (page 507)
Rewind... Rewind tape to BOT (page 508)
Erase Disk Files... Delete SEG-Y files (MSDOS IEEE) from the data directory (page 497)
Tools
Plot Files... Plot files (Media Control only) (page 498)
Plot the last file written to the media (Media Control and Disk to Media Tabs)
Plot last file written to media
(page 498)
Write both correlated and uncorrelated data files to tape (Media Control Tab)
All File
(page 499)
Correlated File Only Write correlated data files to tape (Media Control Tab) (page 499)
Uncorrelated File Only Write uncorrelated data files to tape (Media Control Tab) (page 499)
Stand Alone Enable to stop automatic database updates (page 499)
Media Control Open Media Control window (page 510)
Disk To Media Open Disk to Media window (page 512)
Media Scan Open Scan window (page 514)
Mode Media Read Open Media Read window (page 516)
Log Viewer Open Log Viewer window (page 517)
Tape Copy Open Tape Copy window (page 517)
Tab View Open Tab View window (page 500)
Erase Tape... Erase tape cartridge (page 501)
Erase Tape
Quick Erase Tape... INOVA option for internal use only (page 501)
File Export tape logs in text format (Log Viewer Tab) (page 502)
Export
Excel Export tape logs in Excel format (Log Viewer Tab) (page 502)
Help About Media... iX1 Media version number (page 502)

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
File Drop Menu
The File drop menu is used to access the project database, setup printing properties, and print the media log files.
Open
1. To access available project databases, select File > Open (Ctrl+O) from the drop menu. The Open Project window
displays. The last accessed project is highlighted.
2. Select a project from the list or click Browse to navigate to the required project.
3. Click OK to open the project.
Print
1. To print the iX1 Media log, select Mode > Log Viewer from the drop menu or click the Log tab.
2. Select File > Print (Ctrl+P) from the drop menu.
3. The Print Setup window displays. Select a printer from the drop menu.
4. If required, modify the properties, orientation, paper size, and source.

User Manual
Print Preview
1. To review the iX1 Media Log prior to printing, select Mode > Log Viewer from the drop menu or click the Log tab.
2. Select an image type from the list on the left. The Log window displays.
3. Select File > Print Preview from the drop menu. The Preview window displays.
4. Use the buttons located at the top of the window to perform additional functions, and then click Print.
5. Click X or Close to exit and return to the Media Log window.
Print Setup
1. To identify the desktop printer that is used to print media logs, select File > Print Setup from the drop menu. The Print
Setup window displays.
2. Select a printer from the drop menu.
4. Click OK to apply the setup settings.
Print Window
1. To print the active (currently displayed) iX1 Media window, select File > Print Window from the drop menu. The Print
Setup window displays.
2. Select a printer from the drop menu.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
View Drop Menu
• Toolbar (page 503)
• Status Bar (page 518)
• Media Status Bar (page 509)
View Description Tab
Media Control
Large Icon To displays data files horizontally using large icons, select View > Large Icon from the drop menu.
Disk to Media
Media Control
Small Icon To displays data files horizontally as small icons, select View > Small Icon from the drop menu.
Disk to Media
Media Control
List To display data files vertically, select View > List from the drop menu.
Disk to Media
To display the file name, size, attributes, and date for each data file, select View > Details from Media Control
Details
the drop menu. Disk to Media
Data Display 3200, 400, 240 byte headers, trace data, PSS, and SEG-D header information. Disk to Media
Data
1. Select the Disk To Media tab, to make the SEG-Y Data tabs available for viewing.
2. Select View > Data from the drop menu and click on a data file from the list.
3. Click on the 3200, 400, Trace Header, Data, or Extend tab to display the read-only content. Refer to the “SEG-Y
Viewer” on page 143 for additional information.

User Manual
Icons
The data file icons display as follows:
Attribute A (Archived / Written to media)
Attribute RA (Read-only / Not yet written to media)
List Drop Menu
There are five options available under the List drop menu. The List options are used to override the automatic writing of data files
to the selected media.
Tab Where
Command Description
Available
• Assign a specific data file as the first written to media (the other data files follow
First Pick Media Control and have a later time stamp)
• A bullet (•) displays beside First Pick when enabled
• Assign a specific data file as the next file to be written to media (with a higher file
Last Pick Media Control number and later time stamp)
• A bullet (•) displays beside Last Pick when enabled.
Rescan Disk To Media • Scan the hard drive for any new data files that have been created by the system.
Reset Media Control • Scan the hard drive for (and display) the available data files.
• Delete data files from the hard disk after a successful write to media
Delete Disk File After
Media Control • A checkmark displays beside Delete Disk File After Write when enabled.
Write
• Refer to “Media Control Tab” on page 510 for details.
Media Drop Menu
Refer to “Select Media Button” on page 505 for information and procedures.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
Tools Drop Menu
• GO (page 504)
• Stop (page 505)
• Load Tape (page 506)
• Unload Tape (page 507).
• Rewind (page 508).
Erase Disk Files
The Erase Disk Files command is used to delete SEG-Y files (MSDOS IEEE) from the data directory and is only available on the
Disk To Media tab.
1. From the Disk To Media tab, select the data file(s) to delete (multiple files can be selected).
2. Select Tools > Erase Disk Files from the drop menu. The confirmation to erase pop-up displays.
3. Click Yes to erase the selected data files or click No to cancel. If a selected data file is a read-only file, a second
confirmation pop-up displays.
4. Click Yes to retain the read-only file, or click No to erase.

User Manual
Plot Files
1. From the Media Control tab, select Tools > Plot Files from the drop menu. The Plot Deck window displays.
2. Select an existing plot deck to apply (or create a new deck) and set scaling and filter options. Refer to “Create a
New Plot Deck” on page 142 for procedures to define scaling and filter options.
3. Click OK to plot the file. The Plot Last Record On Primary Media pop-up displays.
4. In the Every field, enter the number of records to skip (only the last record of the entered number is plotted).
Example: Enter 3 in the Every field. Three consecutive records are written to media, but only the third record is
plotted. The next three records are then written but only the sixth is plotted, etc.
5. If changes to the plot deck parameters are required before plotting, click Plot Deck.
6. Click Enable to activate the plotting sequence (checkmark displays beside Plot Deck when enabled) or click
Disable to cancel.
Plot Last File
Refer to “Plot Last File Written To Media Button” on page 508.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
All File
• All File option is available on the Media Control tab only.
• To write both correlated and uncorrelated seismic data files to the selected media, select Tools > All File from the drop
menu. A checkmark displays when enabled.
Correlated File Only
• Correlated File Only is available on the Media Control tab only.
• To write only correlated data files to the selected media, select Tools > Correlated File Only from the drop menu. A
checkmark displays when enabled.
Uncorrelated File Only
• Uncorrelated File Only is available on the Media Control tab only.
• To write only uncorrelated data files to the selected media, select Tools > Uncorrelated File Only from the drop menu.
A checkmark displays when enabled.
Stand Alone
• The iX1 Media automatically updates the tab views from the project database by default. To prevent automatic updates,
select Tools > Stand Alone from the drop menu. A checkmark displays beside Stand Alone when enabled.

User Manual
Mode Drop Menu
The six mode options under the Mode drop menu are the same as the Mode tabs that display in the iX1 Media window.
• Media Control (page 510)
• Disk To Media (page 512)
• Media Scan (page 514)
• Media Read (page 516)
• Log Viewer (page 517)
• Tape Copy (page 517)
Tab View
• Select Mode > Tab View from the drop menu. If a checkmark displays, the Mode tabs display on the iX1 Media window.
(Mode tabs display by default)
• Click Tab View again to remove the Mode tabs from the iX1 Media window.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
Erase Tape Drop Menu
Erase Tape
1. To erase the data recorded on the tape, insert tape cartridge into the tape drive.
2. Select Erase Tape > Erase Tape... from the drop menu. The Erase Tape Drive window displays.
3. Select a tape drive and click OK. A warning pop-up displays.
4. Click Yes to erase the data on the selected tape or click No to cancel. A confirmation pop-up displays.
5. Click No to erase the tape or click Yes to cancel. During the tape erase process, the status bar displays the activity
on the selected tape drive.
Quick Erase Tape
Note
The Quick Erase Tape option is intended for internal use of INOVA personal only.

User Manual
Export Drop Menu
The media logs can be exported as text or Excel files to supply with different type of media such as CD, DVD, tape cartridges,
removable drives. The exported logs are stored in the project doc directory by default.
File
1. To export the media logs as a text file (*.txt), select Mode > Log Viewer from the drop menu or click the Log tab.
2. Select Export > File from the drop menu. The Save As pop-up displays.
3. Enter a file name (if required) and click Save.
Excel
1. To export the logs as an Excel file (*.xls), select Mode > Log Viewer from the drop menu or click the Log tab.
2. Select Export > Excel from the drop menu. The Save As pop-up displays.
3. Enter a file name (if required) and click Save.
Help Drop Menu
The Help drop menu provides the software version information of the iX1 Media program.
About Media
• Select Help > About Media... to display the iX1 Media software version number.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
Toolbar
Refer to the following table for a description about the iX1 Media buttons.
Toolbar Button Toolbar Button Name Function and Description
Write Media Perform a selected task (page 504)
Stop Media Stop a selected task (page 505)
Select Media Select a media drive (page 505)
Load Tape Position tape cartridge at the End-Of-Data (EOD) (page 506)
Unload Tape Unload tape cartridge (page 507)
Rewind Media Rewind media to the Beginning-Of-Tape (BOT) (page 508)
Plot Last File Plot the last data file written to media (page 512)
• Display/Hide Toolbar
• Select View > Toolbar from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Toolbar indicates it is displaying in the iX1 Media
window.
• Click Toolbar again to remove the checkmark from the drop menu. The toolbar no longer displays in the iX1 Media
window.
• Move Toolbar
• Click, hold, and drag to the desired location. Release the mouse button. When the toolbar is dragged below the
program title bar, to the far left, right, or bottom edge of the window, the toolbar snaps into place on the edge of the
window and becomes a docked toolbar.
• If the toolbar is floating outside of the iX1 Media window, click X in the upper right of the toolbar to hide. A docked
toolbar does not have X and must be hidden using the drop menu.

User Manual
Write Media Button
The GO button is accessible only when a target media is selected from the Media Control or Disk to Media tabs. Depending upon
which tab is selected, the GO command is used to initiate the file recording to the selected media drive(s).
1. Select the Media Control or Disk To Media tab and then select the required file(s).
2. Click . The Media Selection window displays.
3. Select the type of media to write the data files to.
4. In the Primary Unit 1 field, use the drop menu to define the media. Select a secondary media if required (refer to
“Primary and Secondary Drives” on page 505).
5. Click OK to apply the selection and return to the Media Control or the Disk To Media tab.
If SINGLE IMAGE, IMAGE, BACKUP_1, or BACKUP_2 is selected, the Available Drive pop-up displays.
6. In the Drive field, select a network drive or removable hard disk from the drop menu.
• From the Media Control tab, click to change the Image Name by increasing (in sequence) the tape image
number.
• From the Disk to Media tab, click to define the location and file name.
Note
If multiple media are selected, the Image Name must be defined for each media selected.
8. Click OK to apply the selection and return to the Media Control or the Disk To Media tab.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
9. Click in the toolbar or select Tools > GO from the drop menu. The Last Trace Header Data window displays.
10. Click Continue to write the selected files to the media.
Stop Media Button
• To stop an operation following the current task, click in the toolbar or select Tools > Stop from the drop menu.
Select Media Button
The Select Media button is used to select the media type from the Media Control, Disk To Media, Scan Media, and Media Read
tabs. Multiple drives may be selected. Refer to “Write Media Button” on page 504 for additional information.
Media that can be selected includes:
• Tape Drive (listed by vendor name)
• Internal Hard Drive
• Network Drives
Primary and Secondary Drives
If a backup is required and the Media Control tab is selected, the data files can be recorded simultaneously to more than one
drive. If more than one drive is available on the system, a primary unit must be defined. The primary unit’s reel number is
recorded in the database and displayed in the iX1 ObNotes.
Note
Only non-primary drives can operate as a backup drive.
If a second primary unit is defined, the system maintains the reel numbering on either the first or the second primary unit,
depending which one is selected at the time (only one primary drive can be used at a time). This is useful when changing tapes;
while one tape drive is rewinding, the other is recording.

User Manual
Load Tape Button
1. To move the tape to the End-Of-Data (EOD) position, click in the toolbar or select Tools > Load Tape from the
drop menu. The Load Tape Drive window displays.
2. Double-click on the tape icon (icons are named according to the tape drive installed). If a tape is not detected in the
drive, the following pop-up displays.
3. Insert a tape cartridge into the tape drive. The message pop-up closes when the tape is detected.
4. The Last Trace Header Data window displays.
5. Click Continue to load the tape.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
Unload Tape Button
The Unload Tape command is used to perform the following functions:
• Rewind the tape cartridge to the beginning of the tape
• Unload/eject the cartridge from the tape drive
1. To unload the tape, click in the toolbar or select Tools > Unload from the drop menu. The Unload Tape Drive
window displays.
2. Double-click on the tape icon. The following confirmation pop-up displays.
3. Click Yes to unload the tape or click No to cancel. The Summary pop-up displays.
4. Click OK to unload/eject the tape and return to the iX1 Media window.

User Manual
Rewind Media Button
1. To rewind the media to the Beginning-Of-Tape (BOT) position, click in the toolbar or select Tools > Rewind from
the drop menu. The Rewind Media window displays.
2. Select the tape drive and click OK to rewind the tape.
Plot Last File Written To Media Button
The Plot Last File Written To Media button is used to select desired plotting options and plot the last file written to media. When
this button is selected, the system scans the last file written to media and writes it to the current data directory as a temporary
*.SGY file. The file name is preceded with the letters TS (e.g., TS00000001.sgy).
The selected data file is plotted on the default plotter and the TS file then is deleted from the hard drive. The file header
information on the output plot displays as TS (file number used from tape). The Plot Last File Written To Tape option is available
on both the Media Control and Disk To Media tabs.
1. From the Media Control tab or the Disk To Media tab, click in the toolbar or select Tools > Plot Last File Written
To Media from the drop menu. The Plot Deck window displays.
2. Select an existing plot deck to apply, or create a new deck and define new scaling and filter options. Refer to “Plot
Files” on page 498 for procedures how to define the scaling and filter options.
3. Click OK to plot.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
Media Status Bar
The Media Status window displays the status of the selected

media and includes the following:
• Image name and location
• Reel number
• First file on the media
• Last file on the media
• Drive location and file name
The media selected as Primary Unit 1 displays in blue.
The Media Status window can be opened, closed, resized, or
moved anywhere within or outside the iX1 Media window.
The media status is updated after every shot.
• Display/Hide Media Status Bar
• Select View > Media Status Bar from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Media Status Bar indicates it is
displaying in the iX1 Media window.
• Click Media Status Bar again to remove the checkmark from the drop menu. The Media Status Bar no longer
displays in the iX1 Media window.
• Move Media Status Bar
• Click, hold, and drag to the desired location. Release the mouse button. When the bar is dragged below the
program title bar, to the far left, right, or bottom edge of the window, the bar snaps into place on the edge of the
window and becomes a docked bar.
• If the bar is floating outside of the iX1 Media window, click X in the upper right of the bar to hide. A docked bar does
not have X and must be hidden using the drop menu.

User Manual
Mode Tabs
Tab Description
Write the data files directly to tape/tape image during acquisition (only current project data files
Media Control
display)
Provide access to the data directory on the hard disk (where data files can be selected) and allow
Disk to Media
to write the selected files to tape/tape image
Display the content of the recorded tape/tape image (by file) and provide the ability to scan and
Scan Media
restore/save files to the system hard drive in the internal SEG-Y (MSDOS IEEE) format
Media Read Allow to read files recorded to tape/tape image by data blocks or by trace
Log Display a list of files recorded to the media
Tape Copy Use to make copy files from one tape to another (two tape drives are required)
Media Control Tab
The Media Control mode is used to write data files directly to the selected media (external hard drive, and/or tape). Only data
files not recorded to tape yet (RA attribute), and have been created in the current project, display in Media Control tab. The Media
Control window clears the view when files are written to the selected media.
In the Media Control mode the system continuously scans the data folder selected in the Critical Parameters and updates the
Tab Display View. If GO command is initiated the newly acquired data files are copied from the data folder, converted to the
selected media format, and then recorded onto the selected type of media.
1. To setup and use Media Control, click the Media Control tab or select Mode > Media Control from the drop menu. The
Media Control window displays.
2. Click in the toolbar or select Media > Media Select in the drop menu. The Media Selection window displays
and lists the available drives on the system.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
3. Select the type of media to write the file(s) to. Multiple drives can be selected.
4. In the Primary Unit 1 field, select the primary media. If a secondary media is required, enable the Primary Unit 2
checkbox and select the media from the drop menu. Also refer to “Primary and Secondary Drives” on page 505.
5. Click OK to apply the selection(s). If IMAGE, SINGLE IMAGE, or BACK_UP is selected, the Available Drives
window displays.
6. In the Drive field, select a network drive or removable hard disk from the drop menu.
• From the Media Control tab, click to change the Image Name by increasing (in sequence) the tape image
number.
Note
If multiple media are selected, the Image Name/Folder Name must be defined for each media selected.
8. Click OK to apply the selection and return to the Media Control tab.
9. Click in the toolbar or select Tools > GO from the drop menu.The Last Trace Header Data window may
display.
10. Click Continue to write the data files to the media.
11. The writing icon displays beside each file as it is written to the media
12. To stop operation, click in the toolbar or select Tools > Stop from the drop menu.

User Manual
Disk To Media Tab
The Disk to Media mode provides access to all data files (RA / A attributes) in the data folder selected in the Critical Parameters
and shows these files in the tab display area, where required files can be selected and then written to the chosen media.
Note
The reel number is NOT recorded to database and doesn’t show up in the iX1 ObNotes in the Disk-To-
Media mode.
1. To select files to be written to the selected media, click the Disk To Media tab or select Mode > Disk To Media from the
drop menu. The Disk To Media tab window displays.
Note
Additional elements are only available when Data is selected from the View drop menu. Refer to “Data”
on page 495.
2. Click to navigate to a different data folder.
3. Select a file(s) from the Disk To Media tab display area. To select multiple files, press and hold the Ctrl key and click
the required files one by one, or select a block of files by holding down the Shift key.
4. If View > Details is chosen in the drop menu, a sequential numbers displays in the Tag field. The tag number
identifies the order in which the data files are written to the media.
5. Click in the toolbar or select Media > Media Select from the drop menu. The Media Selection window
displays and lists the available drives on the system.
6. Select the type of media from the list and click OK. The Available Drive pop-up displays.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
7. In the Drive field, select a network drive, internal drive or removable hard disk from the drop menu.
8. Click , browse to desired location, enter a tape image name, and click OK.
9. Select the image size, if required.
11. Click in the toolbar or select Tools > GO from the drop menu.
12. In the Disk to Media tab display area (when write to media begins), the selected files move to the top of the list.
• A blue bullet displays beside each data file that is selected to be written to media.
• As the data file is writing, a green arrow displays beside the data file.
• When the write to file is complete, a red checkmark replaces the green arrow.
13. The Media Status Bar displays the recording results.
14. To stop operation, click in the toolbar or select Tools > Stop from the drop menu.

User Manual
Scan Media Tab
1. To displays the contents of the selected media, insert the tape cartridge into the drive or connect the removable hard
drive.
2. Click the Scan Media tab or select Mode > Scan Media from the drop menu. The Scan Media window displays.
3. Click in the toolbar or select Media > Media Select from the drop menu. The Media Selection window displays
and lists the available drives on the system.
4. Select a drive to scan and click OK to proceed.
Rewind Button (Scan Media)
The tape should be positioned at BOT mark before the scan.
• To rewind the media, click Rewind. The current rewind activity displays on the status bar at the bottom of the Scan tab.
Forward Scan Button
1. To scan the media in a forward direction, enter or select the number of files to scan and then click Forward Scan.
2. The iX1 Media read the tape in forward direction and publish the results in the data display area. The current activity
displays on the status bar.
3. When scanning is complete, the scanned data displays in the data information table of the Scan Media window.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
Unload Button (Scan Media)
1. To unload the tape, click Unload. The current activity displays on the status bar.
The following confirmation pop-up displays.
2. Click Yes to unload the media or click No to cancel.
Clear List Button
• To clear all data from the data display area, click Clear List.
Stop Scan Logic Button
1. To stop scanning if the file number, trace number, and/or reel trace number are out of sequence, click Stop Scan
Logic. The Stop Scan Logic pop-up displays.
2. Enable the applicable checkbox(es) of the following options:
• File # - Stop the scan procedure if a file number is out of sequence
• Trace # - Stop the scan procedure if a trace number (within a file) is out of sequence
• Reel Trace# - Stop the scan procedure if a reel trace number (within media) is out of sequence
3. Click OK to apply the selection(s).

User Manual
Copy Files to Disk (Options)
• To copy files directly to the system hard disk as it scans in SEG-Y(MSDOS IEEE) format only, enable the Copy Files to
Disk checkbox and then click Forward Scan.
Note
Letter T is automatically added to the copied file name to indicate the file is scanned off the tape.
Plot File (Options)
1. To plot the scanned file after a forward scan, enable the Plot File checkbox. The Plot Deck window displays.
2. Select an existing plot deck to apply, or create a new deck and define new scaling and filter options. Refer to “Plot
Files” on page 498 for procedures to define scaling and filter options.
3. Click OK to proceed.
Media Read Tab
1. To move through the media reading the data by blocks or traces, click the Media Read tab or select Mode > Media
Read from the drop menu. The Media Read tab displays.
2. Click in the toolbar or select Media > Media Select from the drop menu. The Media Selection window
displays and lists the drives that are installed on the system.
3. Select a drive to read from and click OK.
4. The tape should be positioned at BOT mark before the scan. To rewind the selected media, click Rewind.
5. In the Blocks field enter the number of blocks to skip and click Forward. if 1 block is selected the iX1 Media reads
and publishes the information for every block of data or in per trace basis (240 byte header + trace data).
6. Click Reverse to read data in opposite to forward direction.

Chapter 8 iX1 Media
Log Tab
The Log tab is used to display the system created media logs, which can also be printed and exported.
View Media Logs
1. To view media logs, click the Log tab or select Mode > Log Viewer from the drop menu. The Log View displays.
2. Select a media type from the list to view. The information for the selected log displays in the table to the right.
Tape Copy Tab
Note
Two tape drives are required to copy data from one tape to another tape and both tapes must have the
same capacity.
1. Click the Tape Copy tab or select Mode > Tape Copy from the drop menu. The Tape Copy view displays.
2. Click and select a tape drive to copy from.The selected destination displays
3. Click and select a tape drive to copy to. The selected destination displays.
4. Click in the toolbar to begin copying.

User Manual
Status Bar/Selected Media Status
During the write process, the status bar displays the file number, the number of traces to write, and the number of traces written.
Below the status bar, the selected media type displays the selected drive(s), the reel used, and the percent of media used.
If multiple media are selected, the defined primary media displays with a different background color.
• Display/Hide Status Bar - Select View > Status Bar from the drop menu. Click on Status Bar to enable/disable the
status bar viewing.

Chapter 9
iX1 Video Plot
iX1 Video Plot
The iX1 Video Plot is used to visualize and analyze the quality of the acquired seismic data. The information provided by the iX1
Video Plot is used to determine if the acquisition results satisfy the desired acquisition parameters before moving to the next shot
point location. The acquisition geometry, quality of the sensors, and seismic source energy can be optimized on site to provide
the necessary quality for better data processing and geological interpretation.
• From iX1 Vib, select Tools > Video Plot from the drop menu, or click in the Toolbar. The iX1 VideoPlot window
displays.
Drop Menu (page 520) Trace Info Viewer (page 539)
Toolbar (page 560) Patch Viewer (page 540)
Receiver Bar Graphs (page 534) Shots History Viewer (page 543)
Trace Viewer (page 563) Status Bar (page 562)

User Manual
Viewing and Analyzing Data in Video Plot
The Video Plot uses several windows and views to display, review, and analyze the seismic data records.
Trace Viewer Graphically displays the trace and always remains in view (page 563).
Trace Info Viewer Displays the receiver point information when the cursor is placed over the receiver point in the Trace Viewer or
Patch Viewer screens (page 539).
Patch Viewer Uses the colored dots to graphically represent each trace status of a current data record within the active patch
(page 540).
Receiver Bar Graphs Display the following information using colored bar graphs:
• RMS (page 534)
• Receiver Noise (page 535)
• AMP (page 535)
• SNR (page 536)
Drop Menu
At the top of the iX1 Video Plot window are six drop menus used to access a variety of tools and perform different functions.

Open... Ctrl+O Access the list of available data files (page 522)
Automatically open and display each new data record during acquisition
Auto Open
(page 523)
Save As... Save the data file or file segment with a new file name (page 525)
Previous File Ctrl+Shift+P Display the previously opened data file (page 526)
Next File Ctrl+Shift+O Display the next available data file in the list (page 526)
Save Image... Save current Trace Viewer display as a bitmap image (page 526)
File Save Image As... Save a bitmap image with a new name (page 526)
Plot Plot current Trace Viewer display (page 527)
Print... Ctrl+P Print current Trace Viewer display (page 527)
Print Preview Preview image before printing (page 528)
Print Setup... Select printer and set Video Plot printing options (page 528)
Set Plot Deck parameters and apply filters/scaling options to data file for
Plot Deck...
plotting (page 566)
Exit Close Video Plot
Trace by Trace... Ctrl+T Open individual trace data display (page 529)
Ctrl+D Set Video Deck parameters and apply filters/scaling options to data file for
Video Deck...
viewing (page 566)
View View Images... Ctrl+I Access previously saved Trace Viewer images (page 530)
Default View Open default Video Plot screens
Toolbar Show/hide the Toolbar on the Video Plot window (page 560)
Status Bar Show/hide the Status Bar on the Video Plot windows (page 562)

Chapter 9 iX1 Video Plot

Zoom+ Select the area to zoom in (page 533)
Zoom Zoom- Restore previously applied zoom (one step back at a time) (page 533)
ZoomOut Return to original Video Plot window size (before zooming in) (page 533)
Edit GDC deck and apply filters/scaling options to data file for viewing
GDC Processes... Ctrl+G
(page 552)
Edit FRAM deck and apply filters/scaling options to data file for viewing
FRAM... Ctrl+F
(page 555)
Ctrl+R Edit Video deck, set the QC thresholds and enable the update of QC
Real Time QC... database, Patch View and Shot History bar graphs became available for
viewing.
Ctrl+Shift+R Display the trace RMS amplitude graph bars at the top of Video Plot
RMS...
window (page 534)
Display the trace noise bar graph at the top of Video Plot window
Receiver Noise... Ctrl+Shift+H
(page 535)
Display the trace maximum amplitude bar graph at the top of Video Plot
AMP... Ctrl+Shift+A
window (page 535)
Analysis
Display the trace SNR bar graph at the top of Video Plot window
SNR... Ctrl+Shift+G
(page 536)
Trace Info... Ctrl+Shift+I Turn on/off the Trace Info screen on the Video Plot window (page 539)
Turn on/off the Patch Viewer screen on the Video Plot window
Patch Viewer... Ctrl+Shift+V
(page 540)
Shots History... Ctrl+Shift+S Turn on/off the Shot History screen on the Video Plot window(page 543)
Frequency Spectrum... Ctrl+Shift+F Open the Frequency Spectrum Analysis window (page 544)
F-K Spectrum... Ctrl+Shift+K Open the F-K Spectrum Analysis window (page 547)
% Noise Fail... Open the % Noise Failures Analysis window (page 550)
Velocity Calculator... Open the Velocity Calculator window (page 554)
Static Correction Open the Static Correction window
Colour ▼ (page 593)
Graph Line... Select the trace line color used in the Trace Viewer
Graph Grid... Select the grid color (time mark lines) used in the Trace Viewer
Graph Background... Select the Trace Viewer background color
Reverse Highlight... Select the color of trace with reversed polarity
Default Colors Use the system default colors for trace, grid, and background
Preferences Line Styles ▼ (page 567)
Wiggle Display wiggle line style to represent the trace in Trace Viewer
Variable Display variable line style to represent the trace in Trace Viewer
Display both wiggle and variable line styles to represent the trace in trace
Both
viewer
Plot Title... Open the Plot Title pop-up for editing (page 563)
Annotations... Open the Annotations pop-up for editing (page 564)
Hot Keys List List the hot keys available in Video Plot (page 559)
Help
About iX1 Video Plot... Display the software version number (page 559)

User Manual
File Drop Menu
The File drop menu is used to open, display, save, edit, plot, and print data files.
Open
1. To open a data file (seismic or test file) to view and analyze it in the iX1 Video Plot, select File > Open from the drop
menu or click from the Toolbar. The File Open window displays.
• The system opens the data folder selected as Output Data Path in Critical Parameters (by default).
• Click Browse to navigate to other data folder, if required.
2. Double-click on a data file to be displayed in the Trace Viewer screen of Video Plot window.
3. Click ▼ on to display and select one of the last five previously opened data files.

Auto Open
The Auto Open option automatically opens and displays each new data record in the Trace Viewer during acquisition. When
Auto Open option is selected, a checkmark displays beside the option in the drop menu and icon is pressed in the
Toolbar.
• To define settings for Auto Open function, click ▼ on . The following menu of options displays.
Change Incr
When shooting quickly, it is often impractical to view each data record. It may be easier to bypass some files and view only a
defined sequence of data records.
1. To define the number of data records to bypass (not display) during acquisition, select Change Incr from the Auto Open
menu. The following pop-up displays.
2. In the Current field, enter the new increment value.
Example: If 2 is entered, only every second record displays. If 3 is entered, only every third record displays.
1st/Last
When the screen resolution doesn’t allow to view the full record the 1st/Last option can be used. It toggles the Trace Viewer
screen (during acquisition) between two sequential records to display the last group of traces and then the first group of traces.
• Select 1st/Last from the menu. A checkmark displays beside the option when enabled.
Note
The Max Traces field must be enabled in the Video Deck.

User Manual
Trace by Incr
Note
The Max Traces field must be enabled and an increment greater then 1 must be entered in the Inc field
of Traces section in the Video Deck.
• To decrease the amount of traces to display (per record), select Trace by Incr from the Auto Open menu. A checkmark
displays beside the option when enabled.
Example: if an increment of 2 is entered, the first trace displays, then the third, then the fifth and so on.
Change Delay
To increase the time to view and analyze the data record before next shot record is opened in the Video Plot, click Change Delay
from the Auto Open menu. The following pop-up displays.
1. Enter new delay time (ms) in the Current field.
3. Open the Auto Open menu and select Delay ####. A checkmark displays beside the option when enabled.

Save As
The Save As option is used to save the currently opened data file or the segment of this file under the different name (must start
with the prefix V (V*.SGY)).
1. Select File > Save As from the drop menu. The following window displays.
2. Save All Traces to file
• In the Traces section, enable All Traces to save all traces from a currently opened file.
• In the Range section, select the Time range of the record, if required.
• Enter new file name in the File Name field.
• Click Save to save the file.
3. Save traces by Line number
• In the Traces section, enable Lines and select the line number to save from the list.
• In the Range Section, select Include Aux channels, if required.

User Manual
4. Save traces by TrNo (trace number)
• In the Traces section, enable Lines.

• in the Range section, select TrNo range.
• In the Range section, select Include Aux channels or select an aux trace from the drop menu, if
required.
Previous File
• To display previously acquired file (by file number or time stamp), select File > Previous File (Ctrl+Shift+P) or click
in the Toolbar.
Next File
• To display the next file (by file number or time stamp), select File > Next File (Ctrl+Shift+O) or click in the Toolbar.
Save Image
The Save Image option is used to save the current Video Plot window image as a bitmap (*.bmp) file. Any open bar graphs (RMS,
Noise, Amp, and/or SNR) are included in the image file.
Save Image As
1. To save the current Video Plot window image as a *.bmp file, select File > Save Image As... from the drop menu. The
Save Image File As window displays with the current image to save. Any open bar graphs (RMS, Noise, Amp, and/or
SNR) are included in the image file.
2. Enter a new image file name in the File Name field.
3. Click Save to save the image.
Refer to “View Images” on page 530 for procedures about viewing a saved image file in the Video Plot.

Quick Save Image
The Quick Save Image option has a list of predefined names (AvpImage0 through AvpImage9) to select and name image files.
Note
The predefined image file names cannot be changed.
1. To save current Video Plot window as an image file using a predefined file name, click the arrow to display the
following drop menu.
2. From the list, select a name for the image. The image with selected file name is saved in the avp_images folder
(E:\Inova_iX1\control\avp_images)
3. Click to view the saved images (refer to “View Images” on page 530).
Plot
1. To select the plotter and plot the current Video Plot screen, select File > Plot from the drop menu or click in the
Toolbar. The Select Plotter window displays.
2. Select the plotter from drop menu and click OK.
Print
1. To print the traces that are currently displayed in Trace Viewer, select File > Print (Ctrl+P) from the drop menu, or click
in the Toolbar. The standard Print dialog box displays.
2. Select the printer and define the printer properties.

User Manual
Print Preview
1. To preview a file before printing, select File > Print Preview from the drop menu. The Print Preview window displays.
2. Click Print. The Print dialog box displays.
3. Select the printer and printer properties, and click OK.
Print Setup
The Print Setup option is used to select the printer and define printer properties.
Plot Deck
Refer to “Video Deck” on page 566.

View Drop Menu
Refer to the following sections for additional information:
• Toolbar (page 560)
• Status Bar (page 562)
Trace By Trace Viewer
The Trace by Trace option is used to display the information of individual traces (within a shot record). As the cursor is moved
over the trace in the Trace Viewer window, various trace details display including the time and amplitude.
The Trace Data window is also used to enable the highlighting of selected trace and to reverse trace to opposite polarity in the
Trace Viewer, if required.
1. To open Trace by Trace Viewer, select View > Trace by Trace from the View drop menu. The Trace Data window
displays.
2. In the Trace Viewer window, move the cursor over the data record. The information in the Trace Data window
changes as the cursor moves.
3. Enable Highlight Trace checkbox to display an individual trace by highlighting it in a desired color when cursor is
over the trace. To change the colour, click . Refer to “Change Colors” on page 593.
4. In the Reverse Trace section, enter the trace number, click to reverse the trace polarity and display it
in a different colour. To change the colour, click .
5. Click to return the previously reversed traces to the original polarity.
6. Click to close the Trace Data window.

User Manual
Video Deck
Refer to “Video Deck” on page 566.
View Images
The View Images option is used to display saved images in a timed slide show and/or display images in different orientations.
Images are saved using the Save Image option. For procedures to save image files in the Video Plot, refer to “Save Image As” on
page 526.
1. To view a saved image, select View > View Images (Ctrl+I) from the drop menu or click in the Toolbar. The View
Images window displays.
2. Select an image file from the list or click Browse to select an image file to display.
Note
To select multiple image files, hold Shift or Ctrl key and select the required number of image files.

3. From the View Style drop menu, select one of the following five options to define how the image displays.
Single - A single image displays

in the View Images window by
default.
Horizontal - Images display

(maximum four) across the View
Images window, stacked on top
of one another.
Vertical - Images display

(maximum four) across the View
Images window, beside one
another.
Tile - Images display (maximum

four) across and down the View
Images window.
Toggle - Displays selected

images one after another based
on the defined time interval in the
Toggle Timer drop menu.
4. Select File > Print from the View Image drop menu or click Print to print the current view, if required.

User Manual
Quick View Image
The Quick View Image option is used to view image files previously saved using the Quick Save option “Quick Save Image” on
page 527.
1. To view a saved image with a predefined file name, click ▼ on . The Quick View Image drop menu displays.
Note
Grayed out file names indicate that no image is saved with such names.
2. Select an image file from the list to display. The selected image file displays in the View Image pop-up “View
Images” on page 530.

Zoom Drop Menu
The Zoom drop menu is used to increase/decrease the size of the image that displays in the Trace Viewer.
Zoom+
1. To increase the size of a selected area in the Trace Viewer, select Zoom > Zoom+ from the drop menu or click in
the Toolbar. The cursor changes to .
2. Place the cursor on the area to magnify. Click and drag diagonally to outline the desired area (selected area
displays as solid yellow rectangular).
3. The selected area is now magnified and displays in the Trace Viewer.
Zoom-
• To return to the previous view after being magnified (unzoom one step back), select Zoom > Zoom- from the drop
menu or click in the Toolbar.
ZoomOut
• To return to the original view before being magnified, select Zoom > ZoomOut from the drop menu or click in the
Toolbar.

User Manual
Analysis Drop Menu
The Analysis drop menu options allow users to add to the Video Plot window the bar graphs, screens, run different types of
analyses on the acquired seismic data and display the results.
RMS Trace
Each vertical line (bar) on the RMS bar graph represents the RMS amplitude of a trace within the shot record.
1. To display the RMS Bar Graph, select Analysis > RMS... (Ctrl+Shift+R) from the drop menu or click in the
Toolbar. The RMS bar graph displays by default at the top of Video Plot window.
2. Right-click on the RMS graph to display the pop-up options. Refer to “RMS, Noise, AMP, and SNR Options” on
3. To adjust the vertical scale of the graph, open Video Deck > 5:QC (Spec section) and enter the value in the RMS
field.
4. To close, select Analysis > RMS... again from the drop menu or click a pressed in the Toolbar or click X in the
upper left side of the RMS bar graph.

Receiver Noise
Each vertical line (bar) on the Receiver Noise bar graph represents the RMS amplitude (ambient noise) of a trace within the shot
record.
1. To display the Receiver Noise bar graph, select Analysis > Receiver Noise... (Ctrl+Shift+H) from the drop menu or
click in the Toolbar. The Noise bar graph displays by default at the top of Video Plot window.
2. Right-click on the Noise bar graph to display the pop-up options. Refer to “RMS, Noise, AMP, and SNR Options” on
3. To adjust the vertical scale of the graph, set a threshold and calculation method, open Video Deck > 5:QC (Spec
<PatchView>Tolerance) and enter the value in the Noise field. The traces that have ambient noise over the set
value are marked in red.
4. To close, select Analysis > Receiver Noise again from the drop menu or click X in the upper left side of the Noise
bar graph or click a pressed in the Toolbar.
AMP
Each vertical line (bar) on the AMP bar graph represents the RMS amplitude of the trace relative to the maximum RMS amplitude
as a percent value. The maximum amplitude allowed (without clipping) is based on the selected Preamp gain at the time of
recording.
Maximum Input
Gain
(RMS)
0dB 1.768V
12dB 0.442V
24dB 0.110V
1. To display the AMP bar graph, select Analysis > AMP... (Ctrl+Shift+A) from the drop menu or click in the Toolbar.
The AMP bar graph displays by default at the top of Video Plot window.

User Manual
2. Right-click on the AMP graph to display the pop-up options. Refer to “RMS, Noise, AMP, and SNR Options” on
3. To adjust the vertical scale of the graph and set the threshold at the same time, open Video Deck > 5:QC (Spec
<PatchView> Tolerance section) and enter the value in the Max Amp field. The traces that have the RMS amplitude
over the set value are marked in red.
Note
If Max Amp value is set as 100% and the trace bar is marked in red meaning the signal clipping.
Observer have to consider to lower the Preamp gain to increase the maximum input level.
4. To close, select Analysis > AMP again from the drop menu or click X in the upper left side of the AMP bar graph or
click a pressed in the Toolbar.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)
During SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio) analysis, each trace falling within the design window is auto-correlated. Each trace is then
cross-correlated with the trace beside it. At the end of the receiver line, the software flips the process around to cross correlate the
last trace with the previous one.
To correct for move out, the software applies a static shift to one trace. The software takes the time difference from one trace to
the next trace according to the slope of the design window and applies a static shift equal to one-half of it.
Example:
If the time slope difference between trace A and B is 10ms, the software shifts trace B up by
-5ms to the nearest sample based on the sample rate. Samples are added to trace B so both trac-
es have the same length within the analysis window.
•Autocorrelation of trace A - Signal & Noise

•Cross correlation of traces A & B - Signal
Cross-correlation (A & B)
Signal to Noise Ratio (A) =
Auto-correlation (A)-Cross-correlation (A & B)
The Signal to Noise Ratio is converted to a logarithmic scale (dB format) for display in
Trace Info Viewer.
The results of this analysis from individual traces are combined to simulate the noise
reducing effects of stacking traces (GDC/Shot History) in the seismic processing center
using this formula:
Σ (20Log S:N)
√# of traces

1. To display the SNR bar graph for the current record, select Analysis > SNR (Ctrl+Shift+G) from the drop menu or click
in the Toolbar. The SNR bar graph displays by default at the top of Video Plot window.
Each vertical line (bar) on the graph represents the Signal-to-Noise ratio of a corresponding trace within the
shot record.
2. Right-click on the SNR graph to display the pop-up options. Refer to “RMS, Noise, AMP, and SNR Options” on
3. To adjust the vertical scale (range) of the SNR bar graph, select Set Range from the pop-up. The Set Range
window displays.
4. Select the range for the SNR graph and click OK.
5. To close, select Analysis > SNR again from the drop menu or click X in the upper left of the SNR bar graph or click
a pressed in the Toolbar.

User Manual
RMS, Noise, AMP, and SNR Options
• Right-click on the RMS, Noise, Amp, or SNR bar graph to display the following options. The pop-up options are the same
for each bar graph.
Menu Item Description
To set the placement of the bar graphs, right-click on the required bar graph and select one of the following
Undock Window options or double click on the bar graph window to toggle between docked and undocked options.
Doc Window • Undock Window - Display the selected graph as a separate window.
• Dock Window - Return the graph to its default location inside the Video Plot window.
Size Define the size of the bar graphs.
Change the colors used for the bars, grid, background, trace highlight, or select the default colors
Colour
Set Range Define the range of ratios for the SNR graph only
Plot Plot the displayed bar graph
Print Print the displayed bar graph

Trace Info Viewer
As the cursor is placed over a trace in the Trace or Patch Viewer, the Trace Info Viewer displays information (i.e. station and
status data) about the trace (receiver point) and QC information for the record. Failures display in red and passes display in
green. Marked comments also display in the Trace Info Viewer.
1. Select Analysis > Trace Info (Ctrl+Shift+I) from the drop menu or click in the Toolbar. The Station Information
bar displays.
2. Move the cursor over the Trace Viewer or Patch Viewer. The information in the Trace Info window changes.
3. Depending upon the status of the receiver point, the Noise, RMS, RMS%, and SNR fields change colors (red is out
of tolerance, green is within tolerance).
4. To close the Trace Info Viewer, select Analysis > Trace Info, click a pressed , or click X in the top left of the
Trace Info Viewer.

User Manual
Patch Viewer
The Patch Viewer is a graphical representation for each receiver point in the patch. The color of the dots represent acceptable
and unacceptable levels, which is based upon the parameters defined in Video Deck > 5:QC (PatchView Tolerance section). As
the cursor moves over a trace, the trace spot is outlined in dark yellow colour. The status bar also displays the trace data
according to the cursor position on the Trace Viewer screen.
• Select Analysis > Patch Viewer (Ctrl+Shift+V) from the drop menu or click in the Toolbar.
Yellow line is the current receiver line
Receiver point exceeds RMS (cyan) Cursor over receiver point (cyan circle surround)
Receiver point - in tolerance (green)
Indicates shot point Receiver point - out of tolerance (red)

for trace
Marked receiver (yellow
diamond around receiver point)

Patch Viewer Options
• Right-click on the Patch Viewer to display the options.
The By Line (3D) and the By Segment (2D) options complete the same function as the By Line button.
1. Right-click in the Trace Viewer and select By Line (3D), or click in the Toolbar.
By Line (3D)
By Segment (2D)
2. Click to display a different receiver line in the Trace Viewer.
3. The current line displays in the Patch Viewer with a yellow line above and below .
The Mark Receivers option is used to highlight and add a QC comment to a receiver point. The QC comments
are saved to the database for the current project. The marked receiver point is represented by yellow dot in the
Patch Viewer and the entered comment display in the Trace Info Viewer (refer to “Trace Info Viewer” on
page 539 for details).
1. To add a QC comment to a receiver point, place the cursor over a receiver point in the Patch Viewer
and right-click.
2. Select Mark Receivers from the menu. The Mark Receivers pop-up displays.
Mark Receivers
3. Enter a comment in the Comment field.
4. Enable the Marked (X) checkbox to display an icon for the receiver point in yellow colour in the
Patch viewer.

User Manual
The Marked Shots is a QC comment and can be viewed in iX1 ObNotes and display in the Trace Info Viewer
when the cursor is placed over a marked shot (yellow bar) in the Shot History.
1. To select and add a shot QC comment, place the cursor over the Patch Viewer and right-click.
2. Select Mark Shots from the menu. The Mark Shots pop-up displays.
Mark Shots
3. Enter a comment in the Comment field and click OK to return to apply.
Refresh Refresh the Patch Viewer data.
Ordinate/ Use the Ordinate/Orientation option to start the receiver and station numbers along the left/right and top/bottom
Orientation of the Patch Viewer window, and to display the receiver lines horizontally or vertically.
Spot Size Increase/decrease the size of the receiver points (dots) in the Patch Viewer.
1. To define the colors that display information in the Patch Viewer, right-click in the Patch Viewer and
select Color.
Color 2. Select the type (Normal, Abnormal, Marking, Highlight, Dead/Dummy) and assign colors to
any type, if required.
3. Select Default to use the system the dot color assignment in the Patch Viewer.

Shots History Viewer
1. To calculate and graphically display the RMS Amplitude, Ambient Noise and SNR values averaged for the shot records,
select Analysis > Shots History (Ctrl+Shift+S) from the drop menu or click to display the Shot History Viewer.
• Green bar indicates the file currently opened in the Video Plot.
• Orange bar indicates the marked shot.
• Yellow bar indicates the current cursor location.
2. Double-click a highlighted (yellow) bar to open desired data file.
Shot History Options
• Right-click on a bar in the RMS or Noise or SNR graphs to display options.
Open Select Open to display the file in the Video Plot.
Point the cursor to the green bar (current file) and select the Edit Comments. The Mark Shot pop-up display. Enter the
Edit Comments
QC comment, if required.
Displays the last 100 records. This value change according to the option selected in the Range drop down (100, 200, or
Last 100
500).
Displays the next 100 records. This value will change according to the option selected in the Range drop down (100,
Next 100
200, or 500).
Range The number of bars is equal to the number of files displayed at a time in the Shot History Viewer.
Orientation Big <---> Small option puts files (bars) with bigger numbers on the left side of the Shot History screen.
Small <---> Big option puts files (bars) with bigger numbers on the right side of the Shot History screen.

User Manual
Frequency Spectrum Analysis
The Frequency Spectrum analysis is used to examine the shot record (or part of the record) in the frequency domain. The
system performs a Fourier transform and then converts the data into Power Spectrum format showing how much energy is
present at each particular frequency.
The analyzed data are always normalized in a dB downscale, meaning the highest power is normalized to 1 which in a dB scaling
means 0. Everything else has a negative values.
1. Ensure the desired data record displays in the Trace Viewer.
2. Select Analysis > Frequency Spectrum (Ctrl+Shift+F) from the drop menu. The Frequency Spectrum window
displays.
3. Select one of the following options.
Option Description
Current View Display the frequency spectrum of the current shot record.
Current Analysis Design Window Display the frequency spectrum of the current Design window.
User Defined Window Display the frequency spectrum of the user define window.
4. In the Range section:
• Select Raw to analyze the original data record
• Select Scaled & Filtered to analyze data after applying the scaling and filters (set in the Video Deck)
• Enter the minimum and maximum power values (dB) for vertical scale in the Power fields.
• Enter the minimum and maximum frequencies (Hz) for horizontal scale in the Frequency fields.

Frequency Spectrum (User Defined Window)
1. To define the area for a frequency spectrum analysis, select User Defined Window.
2. Enable the Minimize On Selection checkbox.
3. Click to begin the selection process of the desired area for analysis.
4. Place the cursor over the Trace Viewer. The cursor changes to cross hairs +.
5. Place the cursor at one of the corners of the desired area and click.
6. Move the cursor to the next position of the area to select and click again.
7. Continue to move the cursor and click until the entire shape is defined.
8. Right-click to end the edit. The selected area displays in the Trace Viewer.
The Frequency Spectrum window also displays automatically.
9. To change the color of the user defined window, click . Refer to “Change Colors” on
page 593.

User Manual
Frequency Spectrum Options
1. Right-click on the Frequency Spectrum window to display the available options.
Change the colors used for the bars, grid, background, or select the default colors
Preferences
The analysis window for the frequency spectrum affects the smoothness of the spectrum by detecting different
sinusoidal components and determining the trade-off time versus frequency resolution.
1. Select the required analysis window from the following options:
Window • Kaiser
• Rect
• Blackman Harris (4)
• Blackman Harris (9)
Power dB Displays the power spectrum in a logarithmic scale (dB)
Power Linear Displays the power spectrum in a linear scale
Plot Plot the displayed data record
Print Print the displayed data record
1. To add a comment to the Frequency Spectrum plot title, select Plot Title. The Plot Title pop-up
displays.
Plot Title
2. Enable Comment checkbox and type in a comment in the bottom blank field.
3. Click OK.
Close Select Close to close the Frequency Spectrum window.

F-K Spectrum / F-K Filter
This tool is designed for geophysicist to adequate remove the ground roll within a specific part of the record without attenuating
the useful part of the seismic data.
The F-K Spectrum provides a color representation of the current data record that displays in the F-K Domain. The colors indicate
the energy of the data at a certain frequency and position. The dip is directly connected with the dips in the time domain
representation.
The colors indicate the following:
• Red - High amplitudes
• Green - Low amplitudes
• Blue - No amplitudes

User Manual
F-K Domain Tab
1. Ensure the desired data record is opened in the Trace Viewer.
2. Select Analysis > F-K Spectrum (Ctrl+Shift+K) from the iX1 Video Plot drop menu. The F-K Spectrum window
displays.
Note
The FK Domain tab can only display a single receiver line at a time.
3. Click the F-K Domain tab at the top of the F-K Spectrum window. Place the cursor anywhere in the F-K Spectrum
section. The location information displays at the top right and changes as the cursor moves across the record.
• In the Use Rx Line field, select a receiver line.
• In the Time fields, select the start and end time (ms).
• In the Freq fields, select the start and end frequency (Hz).
• In the Amp fields, select the start and end amplitude (dB) or click to apply the system calculated amplitude
settings.
4. Click Apply. The F-K spectrum displays according to the specified F-K analysis parameters.

Time Domain Tab
1. Ensure the desired data record displays in the Trace Viewer.
2. Open Video Deck > 3:Filter, enable FK filter checkbox and click Apply.
3. To display the raw data before and after the FK filter, click the Time Domain tab at the top of the F-K Spectrum
window.
4. Use the slider at the bottom of the window to increase/decrease deflection.
5. Enable Difference checkbox to see the amplitudes of removed ground roll signal under Amp. Difference.

User Manual
% Noise Failure
The % Noise Failure option is used to report the percentage of geophones and/or hydrophones in a record that fail a set of noise
tolerances. A graph can be produced to display the failures over a 24 hour period and the % Noise Failures can be saved to a file.
1. Select Analysis > % Noise Failure from the Video Plot drop menu. The % Noise Failure window displays.
• In the Geophone Tol field, enter a geophone noise tolerance (µV).
• In the Hydrophone Tol fields, enter a hydrophone tolerance (µB) and enter a hydrophone sensitivity (V/B) (if
required).
• In the % of File Tolerance field, enter amount of failed channels per record tolerance (0 - 100).
• Enable the Save to QC.mdf checkbox to save the % Noise Failure values to the database.
2. Click Apply to use new tolerances to evaluate the seismic data against it.
3. To generate and display a graph of the % Noisy Traces over time or file range, click Graph. The QC.MDF
NoiseGraph window displays.
• Enable the Geophones, Hydrophones, and/or Total checkboxes to display the devices in the graph.
• Click File and select the file numbers to display or click Time and select a time period from the drop menu.
• In the X and Y Axis Interval fields, select the graph axis intervals and limits.
4. Click Apply. A graph displays information based on the selections.
5. Complete one of the following options, if required:
• Select File > Print from the Noise Graph drop menu to print the graph.
• Select File > Open from the drop menu or click to open a QC database directly.

Change Line Type and Color
The line type, color, and thickness can be changed and points can be added to the Noise Graph window.
1. To change the line type, color, thickness, and point type on the Noise Graph, click the colored box beside Geophone,
Hydrophone, or Total. The Element window displays.
2. Click on the drop-down menus or colored boxes to change the default selection (refer to “Change Colors” on
page 593).
3. Click Apply.

User Manual
GDC Processes
Geophysical Data Characterization (GDC) is a quality control tool used to evaluate the quality of seismic data during acquisition.
All raw seismic data files passes through the GDC analysis and results relative to specified criteria are then plotted in the iX1
Map.
The GDC analysis criteria are set in the Video Plot by creating different GDC decks. Each data record is analyzed and system
calculates RMS Noise, RMS Amplitude, and Signal-to-Noise Ratio values for every trace and average per shot.
After analysis the system produces a GDC file which is saved on the system hard drive (E:\\Inova_iX1\ProjectName\GDC folder)
with the seismic data file number and a *.GDC extension (00000001.GDC).
The Signal-to-Noise Ratio, RMS Amplitude, and RMS Noise values are displayed in iX1 Map relative to the minimum and desired
criteria set. Refer to “View GDC in iX1 Map” on page 576.
The *.GDC files are either created through a batch process or continuously during acquisition (in background mode without
slowing production).
1. To open and create the GDC Deck, select Analysis >GDC Processes (Ctrl+G) from the Video Plot drop menu. The
GDC window displays.
• Select a *.SGY file from the list.
• In the GDC Deck File section, select an existing GDC deck from the drop menu, or click New to create a deck.
• In the Traces section, select settings that define how a trace displays in the Trace Viewer window.
• In the Plot Time section, select settings that define a block of data displays by time.
• Click on 2:Design tab to set:
• First Breaks Line - which is used to calculate the Receiver Noise values.
• Design Window - which is used to calculate the SNR values.
• Or return to the Video Deck and Copy design window setting and load it to GDC deck by clicking .
2. Click Apply to save the GDC analysis settings.
3. Click Close to return to Video Plot window.

GDC Analysis
The GDC analysis can be run on the selected files based upon the parameters specified in the GDC deck. There are three
options available.
The system performs a GDC analysis on the selected file, then on every file after that with a higher
First Pick
file number and later time stamp.
The system performs a GDC analysis on every file after the selected file with a higher file number
Last Pick
and later time stamp.
Batch The system performs a GDC analysis on the selected group of files only.
1. To run the GDC analysis, select a file or multiple files from the list (click and hold Ctrl to select multiple files).
2. Click , , or .
3. A progress bar tracks the GDC processes and Batch changes to Halt.
Note
After creation of *.GDC file the system changes the seismic data file attribute to G.
4. Click Halt to terminate the GDC processes.
5. To run GDC processes in the background during acquisition, enable the Minimize checkbox. The minimized GDC
Processes window displays and system continues to produce GDC files.
6. Click Close to return to Video Plot window.
Delete GDC
1. Select a *.SGY file from the list that has attribute G.
2. To delete *.GDC file, click . The following pop-up displays.
3. Click Yes to delete, No to discard, Cancel to exit.

User Manual
Velocity Calculator
1. To calculate velocity of direct wave (V0), refracted wave(V1) or surface waves, select Analysis > Velocity Calculator
from the Video Plot drop menu. A blank Velocity Calculator pop-up displays.
2. In the Trace View window, place the cursor over the starting point and click. Drag the cursor to the end point. The
red line extends showing the velocity.
3. The Velocity Calculator pop-up displays detailed information.
4. Click X to close the Velocity Calculator pop-up.

FRAM
Frequency Amplitude Analysis (FRAM) is a software package that enables the user to perform some processing functions on
field data for immediate analysis. FRAM analysis parameters are defined in the FRAM decks using different scaling, filters, and
processing options. The results of the data processing is shown in the Trace Viewer of the Video Plot window.
Managing FRAM Deck Files
1. Open the desired for processing file in iX1 Video Plot.
2. Select Analysis > FRAM (Ctrl+F) from the Video Plot drop menu. This window displays all of the existing files in
the default data directory along with FRAM Deck definition window.
3. The *.SGY file currently opened in Video Plot is highlighted. .
4. Select an existing FRAM deck file from the drop-down list or click New to create a new FRAM deck file . Refer
to “Plot File” on page 566.
5. In the Traces section, select settings that define how a trace displays in the Trace Viewer window . Refer to
“Traces” on page 567.
6. In the Plot Time section, select settings that define which block of data displays by time . Refer to “Plot Time”
on page 568.
7. Refer to “1:Pre Tab” on page 568, “2: Design” on page 569, “3:Filter Tab” on page 570, and “4:Data Scaling” on
page 571 to set different filters, scaling, correlation, and design options for data files .
8. Click Apply to apply the edits to currently displayed data file in the Trace Viewer and to save the FRAM deck
settings.

User Manual
FRAM Tabs
Decon Tab
The deconvolution process is designed to restore a wave shape to its form before undergoing a linear filtering action. The
deconvolution processes in Video Plot are used to nullify any objectionable effects of a previous filter action (earth filter) to
improve the resolution of reflected events.
When deconvolution is selected, FRAM analyzes the data within the Design Window (refer to “Design Tab” on page 575) to
determine the effects of the earth filter. An inverse filter operator (deconvolution) is designed to remove the effects of the earth
filter and return all frequencies to an equal value (whitening).
1. Enable the Decon checkbox.
2. In the Type field, select the type of deconvolution:
• Zero-Phase is typically used for vibrator sources
• Spiking is typically used for impulse sources
3. In the Operator Length field, enter the length of the impulse response.
4. In the Pre-whitening field, enter the percentage of white noise to add before
deconvolution.
Note
Click Default to apply Video Plot default settings to the Decon options.
FRAM Tab
The Frequency Amplitude Analysis (FRAM) tab options are used to define the processes that FRAM analysis performs for each
shot record that is opened in the Trace Viewer.
The processes are applied one after another in the following

order (all process checkboxes are enabled):
1. Raw data.
2. FK filter is applied to the raw data.
3. Decon is applied to the data after FK filter.
4. BP filters are applied to the data after FK + Decon.
• Enable the button in Preview column to display the data file in the Trace Viewer.
• Enable the Plot checkbox to plot the desired data file.

Processes
• The Raw Data displays and/or plots raw data that uses the preprocessing scaling and filtering options that are defined
on the Pre, Filter, Design, and the Data Scaling tabs.
• To display and/or plot a graphical representation of amplitude vs. frequencies, select a stacking ratio from the
Spectrum drop menu.
• 1 x 1 means that FRAM creates a spectrum for one trace at a time.
• 4 x 2 stacks the first four traces and creates a spectrum for it, then stacks the next two traces, and so on.
• The FK Filter is applied to data as specified under the “2: Design” on page 569.
• Enable the FK checkbox, if required. The field beside FK automatically displays the FK filter velocity that is entered
on the Design Tab.
• To display and/or plot a graphical representation of amplitude vs. frequencies after the FK filter is applied, select a
stacking ratio from the Spectrum drop menu.
• The Decon is used to apply the deconvolution process to the data files.
• Enable the Decon checkbox. The field beside Decon automatically displays the Decon type as it is defined on the
“Decon Tab” on page 573.
• To display and/or plot a graphical representation of amplitude vs. frequencies after deconvolution, select a stacking
ration from the Spectrum drop menu.
• The Band Pass (BP) filters are applied to data after all of the previous processes.
• Enable the BP Filters checkbox to enable (the BP Fixed Gain field and the Band Pass Filters section are now
enabled.)
• To display and/or plot a graphical representation of amplitude vs. frequencies after band pass filters, select a
stacking ratio from the Spectrum drop menu.
• In the Spec Range (Hz) enter range of frequencies for the frequency axis of Spectrum plot. The range entered is
applied to Raw, FK, Decon and BP Spectrum plots.
• In the BP Fixed Gain field, enter the fixed gain.
Band Pass Filters
1. In the Low and/or High fields, enter low and high values.
2. In the On column, enable the applicable checkbox(es) to apply BP filters, if required.
Note
To apply the Video Plot Band Pass default filter settings, click Default Filters.

User Manual
Preferences Drop Menu
Note
The Preferences drop menu applies ONLY to the Trace Viewer.
For additional information, refer to the following sections:
Color Refer to (page 593)

Line Style Defines the trace and how it displays (refer to “Traces” on page 567)
Plot Title Edits the title information that displays in the Trace Viewer (refer to “Plot Title” on page 563)
Annotations Edits the data recording information (refer to “Annotations” on page 564)

Help Drop Menu
Refer to the Help drop menu options for version control information and a list of hot keys.
Hot Keys List
• Select Help > Hot Keys... from the Video Plot drop menu. The Video Plot Hot Keys window displays.
About VIdeoPlot
• Select Help > About VIdeoPlot... to display the software version.

User Manual
Toolbar
Toolbar buttons perform a variety of functions in Video Plot. Refer to the following table.
Toolbar Button Icon Toolbar Button Name Toolbar Button Function and Description
Open File Open an existing data file (page 522)
Auto Open Automatically display data records in Trace Viewer during acquisition (page 523)
Previous File Display the previous data file in Trace Viewer (page 526)
Next File Display the next file in Trace Viewer (page 526)
Print Traces Select a printer and print traces (page 527)
Plot Traces Select a plotter and plot traces (page 527)
Video Deck Open the Video Display Parameters window (page 566)
Maximum Traces Display traces of the data record up to the maximum the monitor can support (page 567)
All Time Display full length of the data record (page 567)
Aux Only Display only the auxiliary traces of a data record (page 567)
Zoom Lock Display data at 100% despite changes
By Line Display data by line
Previous/Play/Pause/Next Move through data when By Line is enabled.
Save Image Save the current image with predefined file name (page 526)
View Image View a saved image (page 530)
Zoom In Magnify data in the selected zoom box (page 533)
Unzoom Unzoom the last zoom command (page 533)

Toolbar Button Icon Toolbar Button Name Toolbar Button Function and Description
Zoom Out Return a shot record to its original unzoomed size (page 533)
RMS Display the RMS Amplitude Bar Graph (page 534)
Noise Display the Noise Bar Graph (page 535)
Maximum Amplitude Display the Maximum Amplitude Bar Graph (page 535)
SNR Display the SNR Bar Graph (page 536)
Patch Viewer Display the Patch Viewer in Video Plot window (page 540)
Info Display Trace Info Viewer in Video Plot window (page 539)
Shot History Display Shot History Viewer in Video Plot window (page 543)
Trace Viewer Display the Trace Viewer in Video Plot window (page 563)
Display/Hide/Move Toolbar
• Select View > Toolbar from the drop menu. A checkmark beside Toolbar indicates it is displaying.
• Click Toolbar again to remove the checkmark from the drop menu. The toolbar no longer displays.
• If the toolbar is floating outside the window, click X in the upper right of the toolbar to hide. A docked toolbar does not
have X and must be hidden using the drop menu.
• Move Toolbar - Click, hold, and drag to the desired location. Release the mouse button. When the toolbar is dragged
below the program title bar, to the far left, right, or bottom edge of the window, the toolbar snaps into place on the edge
of the window and becomes a docked toolbar.

User Manual
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Video Plot window. The right side displays information about the current trace, and
the left side displays messages about activities being performed in the Video Plot.
Depending upon where the cursor is placed in the Video Plot windows, various information regarding the trace and receiver point
displays.
When the cursor is placed over a trace in the Trace Viewer, the status bar displays the Trace, Line and Station numbers, as well
as the offset, Time and Amplitude.
When the cursor is placed over a receiver point in the Patch Viewer, the status bar displays the following:
• Trace
• Line
• Station numbers
• Offset
• Noise (dependent upon the patch options selected)
• RMS (dependent upon the patch options selected)
• SNR values (dependent upon the patch options selected)
If a receiver point is out of tolerance, the value displays in red and the RMS value displays in cyan colour..
Note
Refer to “Viewing and Analyzing Data in Video Plot” on page 520 for more information.
Display/Hide Status Bar
• Select View > Status Bar from the drop menu.
• Click on Status Bar to enable/disable the status bar.

Trace Viewer
The Trace Viewer is used to display the traces contained in the selected data record. Placing the cursor over the image in the
Trace Viewer highlights the trace (displays in yellow).
The Trace Viewer displays in the Video Plot window by default. To open/close Trace Viewer, press/depress in the
Toolbar.
Plot Title (page 563)
Annotations (page 564)
Time Scale
Plot Title
1. To display the required information in the title of the Trace Viewer, select Preferences > Plot Title from the Video Plot
drop menu or right-click on the Trace Viewer window and select Plot Title from the pop-up.
2. Enable the desired checkboxes to select the type of information in the plot title. Enter comments into the bottom
blank section, if required.
3. Click OK to apply the selections.

User Manual
Annotations
The Annotations option is used to select and display different types of information in the Trace Viewer.
1. To select the annotation information, select Preferences > Annotation from the GVP drop menu or right-click on the
Trace Viewer window and select Annotation from the pop-up.
2. Enable the desired checkboxes to display in the Trace Viewer.
3. Click OK to apply the annotations.
Orientation
The Trace Viewer window is oriented by enabling/disabling the Plot by Time checkbox on the Trace Scaling section in the Video,
GDC, FRAM, and Plot Deck windows.
Trace Highlight
When the cursor is placed over a data record and moved, the trace is highlighted by default in yellow colour.
Note
A checkbox must be enabled beside Highlight Trace option under View > Trace by Trace in the Video
Plot drop menu. Refer to “Trace By Trace Viewer” on page 529.

Trace Viewer Options
1. Right-click on the Trace Viewer to display the options.
Mark () Enter a comment and mark a receiver (refer to “Mark Receivers” on page 541).
Variable
Wiggle Select how the trace displays (refer to “Traces” on page 567).
Both
Reverse Trace Select to reverse the trace to opposite polarity (refer to “Trace By Trace Viewer” on page 529).
Undo All Reversed Traces Select to reverse the trace to original polarity.
Print Select to print the image of Trace Viewer window.
Plot Title Select the information to display in the Plot Title (refer to “Plot Title” on page 563).
Annotations... Select the information to display in the Trace Viewer (refer to “Annotations” on page 564).

User Manual
Video Deck
Important!
Important!
Video Plot decks are specific to Video Plot window ONLY.
The Video Deck File contains plotting parameters, trace waveform type, number and length of traces to plot. The seismic traces
also can be sorted by components or stations. Various filters, scalings, amplitude normalization algorithms can be applied to
seismic data files including the vibroseis data correlation. The different combination of options are saved in the individual video
deck files and can be applied to *.SGY file for visualization purpose.
• To edit video display parameters, select View > Video Deck (Ctrl+D) from the Video Plot drop menu press in the
Toolbar. The Video Display Parameters window displays.
Plot File
• Click New in the Video Plot File section. The following pop-up displays.
• Enter a name (no spaces) in the New Plot File pop-up and click OK. The new plot deck displays in the Plot File drop
menu.
• To delete a video plot file, select it from the drop down list and click Del.

Traces
• Enable the Plot Traces checkbox to display the Trace Viewer. Set the number of traces and increment in Start, End,
and Inc fields.
• Enable the Max Traces checkbox to display the maximum amount of traces per screen with the system set resolution.
• Enable the Aux Only checkbox to display only auxiliary traces.
• Enable the By Line checkbox to display the selected line only.
• In the Components field, select one of the following components to plot:
Component Description
All
G Geophone
H Hydrophone
RV Receiver Vertical
RI Receiver Inline
RC Receiver Crossline
R Receiver
• Enable the Wiggle checkbox to display both the positive and negative amplitudes of a trace with a line or wiggle.
• Enable the VA checkbox to display the trace data in variable area mode (positive amplitudes are shown in a solid color
and negative amplitudes are omitted).
• Enable Wiggle and VA to display the trace data with the both modes.
• Enable the Dead / Dummies checkbox to display dead / dummy traces.
• Enable the Aux checkbox to display the auxiliary traces in addition to the seismic traces.
• Enable Sort Traces by Component to separate the record by components.
• Enable Sort Traces by Station to arrange the traces by flag numbers.
• Enable Sort Line by Component to re-arrange traces by line number and by component.
• In the Start field, enter the trace number of the record (first trace number to display).
• In the End field, enter the trace number of the record (last trace number to display). To display all traces set the
maximum value of 65535.
• In the Inc field, enter a trace increment in this Start-End trace range.

User Manual
Plot Time
• Enable the All Time checkbox to display the entire record.
• Disable the All Time checkbox to select the time range:
• In the Start field, enter the time to start the display (ms).
• In the End field, enter the time to end the display (ms).
Video Deck Tabs
1:Pre Tab
The Pre Tab is used to define settings that correlate data before viewing.
• Click the Enable Correlation checkbox to ensure data is correlated before other processes.
• In the Pilot Trace (Aux) field enter the trace number to correlate the uncorrelated data record and/or auxiliary trace
(normally- True Reference).
• Enable the Correlate Aux Traces checkbox to correlate any remaining aux traces.

2: Design
1. Select the V1* tab (refracted wave) and enable First Breaks. A red line
displays along the top of the screen close to the first breaks of the record.
• Move the cursor to the apex of the first breaks line until a S1 displays.
Click, hold, and drag the line to the first breaks of the near offsets. The
numeric value in the Static Shift field changes and displays the shift in
milliseconds.
• Move the cursor to either edge of the line until a V1 displays. Click,
hold, and drag the line to the first breaks of the far offsets. The numeric
value in the Velocity field changes and displays the velocity of the first
breaks.
Note
The V0 (direct wave) and V2 (reflected wave) are used to define additional
first break lines with different offsets and velocities.
2. Enable FK Filter Velocity. A blue line displays within the traces of the record.
• Move the cursor to the apex of the FK filter velocity line until an S displays. Click, hold, and drag the line to the point
in the record that the low frequency originates. The numeric value in the Static Shift field changes and displays the
shift in milliseconds.
• Move the cursor to either edge of the line until a V displays. Click, hold, and drag the line until it corresponds with
the velocity of the low frequency (ground roll) of this record. The numeric value in the Velocity field changes and
displays the velocity of the ground roll.
3. Enable Design Window. A box will appear over all of the traces of the displayed record. The default color is cyan.
• Move the cursor to the apex of the design window box until an S displays. Click, hold, and drag the top line of the
box to a point off of the first break high amplitudes. The numeric value in the Static Shift field changes and
displays the shift in milliseconds.
• Move the cursor to either top edge of the box until a V appears. Click, hold, and drag the line off the high amplitude
of the first breaks of this record. The numeric value in the Velocity field changes and displays the velocity.
• Move the cursor to either bottom edge of the box until an E appears. Click, hold, and drag the bottom line of the box
to a point just past the zone of interest and no deeper than the seismic basement. The numeric value in the End
Window field changes and displays the end of the design window in milliseconds.
4. Click Copy to place these settings on a clipboard for use later in similar tabs, if required.
Note
The First Break (geometry check) line displays with the seismic traces and allows the user to verify the
shot geometry.
Copy, Paste, and Default Buttons
• Copy button - Copy the Design Window settings to the clipboard.
• Paste button - Paste the Design Window settings from the clipboard into the design fields.
• Default button - Load default settings into the design fields.

User Manual
3:Filter Tab
The Filter tab is used to filter the seismic data and is used for playback purposes only.
• Enable the Notch checkbox and select 50 or 60 Hz.
• Enable the B/P (Band Pass) checkbox and enter the range of frequencies (only when L/C and H/C are disabled).
• Enable the L/C (Low Cut) checkbox and enter a level at which low frequencies are blocked (B/P must be disabled).
• Enable the H/C (High Cut) checkbox and enter a level at which high frequencies are blocked (B/P must be disabled).
• Enable the FK checkbox. The F-K filter removes the source generated low frequency noise based upon velocity
(removes surface waves). The system shows velocity which is entered under Design > FK Filter Velocity.

4:Data Scaling
Different forms of scaling algorithms can be applied to adjust seismic data amplitudes. The tab name depends on the Data
Scaling selected.
As displays require input data amplitudes to fall within a specific range, trace balancing (normalization) schemes are also
required. The following data scaling options (AGC, AGC Threshold, Exponential, Fixed, and Linear) provide various means to
adjust these seismic data amplitudes.
AGC Scaling
The AGC (Automatic Gain Control) scales the amplitude of a seismic signal (with decreasing strength over time), enabling a
visual examination of both strong and weak data samples. AGC automatically varies the gain applied to a trace sample as a
function of the mean amplitude of an AGC window about that sample. For every sample, the scale factor is calculated as the
inverse of the mean amplitude of the AGC sliding window. Thus, the larger the amplitude of the samples within the AGC window,
the smaller the scale factor applied to the center sample of this window.
Note
All traces are scaled and balanced independently based on their own signal strength and system
desired amplitude, which is why a simple comparison of signal strength between traces is not possible.
• Window (ms) - Set the time window length used to calculate a rolling average.
The larger the window size, the lower the AGC effect. Very small time gates
can cause a significant loss of signal character by boosting zones that contain
small amplitudes. Typical value is between 300 to 1000 ms.
• Threshold (%) - Start AGC at the first sample, which is a percent of the
maximum sample value over the entire trace, and stay on for the rest of the
samples in the trace.
A threshold level of 0% will cause the AGC to trip at T-Zero and boost noise
amplitude to full scale before the first breaks.
A value of 50% will trip the AGC when the trace amplitude reaches 50% of the
maximum amplitude achieved in the trace (usually at the first breaks time).
If a threshold is not selected, the AGC starts at the predicted first break time (red line). Typical value is
between 50 to 80%.
• Pre Gain (dB) - Scale the data with a fixed amount of gain from T-Zero to a user-defined predicted first breaks (red line)
and then start the AGC process. Pre Gain is only available when a Threshold option is disabled.
If Pre Gain is not employed, then the data before first breaks (assumed to be noise) is scaled as a function of
the strength of the first breaks. A weak amplitude of the first breaks results in the noise (pre-threshold
samples) being accentuated and a strong first breaks result in the noise being attenuated.
• Deflection (multiplier) - Scale all samples of the trace with the same single factor (multiplier) after AGC is applied.
• Aux Gain (dB) - Scale the auxiliary traces with a fixed gain, if checked. Otherwise, the same AGC function applies as
for data traces.
• Throw (inch) – If Aux. Gain is selected, the system throws the full scale input value by populated number of inches.

User Manual
AGC Threshold Scaling
The AGC Threshold scaling compensates the amplitude of a seismic signal with decreasing strength over time, which enables a
visual examination of data at any point along a trace and causes AGC to trip at the threshold specified.
• Window (ms) - Same as AGC
• Threshold (%) - Same as AGC
• Deflection (multiplier) - Same as AGC
• Aux Gain (dB) - Same as AGC
• Throw (inch) - Same as AGC
Exponential Scaling
The Exponential scaling applies a time-variant gain (exponential) function to traces to compensate for a loss of amplitude over
time. Unlike AGC scaling, exponential scaling applies the same scale values to all traces after the defined Limit time, which
allows for a simple comparison of traces.
• e^Bt (1/ms) - Constant rate of the exponential gain. Starts as unity at T-

Zero.
• Limit (ms) - The end of the exponential gain function window. After this
time, the gain is constant with the final scale factor calculated for this point.
• FBEQ (ms) - After exponentially scaling the trace, the samples between the
predicted first breaks line and the design window can be equalized by
applying AGC scaling with the sliding window as defined in the FBEQ field.
Typical values are between 128 to 512ms.
• Deflection (multiplier) - Scales all samples of the trace with the same single
factor (multiplier).
• Aux Gain (dB) - Scales the auxiliary traces with a fixed gain, if enabled.
Otherwise, the same exponential function applies as for data traces.

Fixed Scaling
The Fixed scaling is used to show a true representation of relative signal strength by applying a specified gain value to each data
sample. The amplitude is first scaled by the value defined in the Fixed gain window and then rescaled according to the value
populated in the Throw window.
Note
Fixed scaling must always be used to display the ambient noise test data files to evaluate the
noise level across the lines.
• Fixed (dB) - Fixed gain value.
• True Amp - If this option is disabled, the full scale is assumed to be 944 mV
per 1 inch or as given in the throw window.
With True Amp enabled the full scale is determined by the Preamp Gain as
follows:
• 0dB 1.786V : 1 inch (or as given in the throw window)
• 12dB 442mV : 1 inch (or as given in the throw window)
• 24dB 110mV : 1 inch (or as given in the throw window)
• Aux. Gain (dB) - Fixed gain value for auxiliary traces (negative number
attenuates the signal).
• Throw (inch) - Scale 944mV to the specified throw value in inches by default or according to the Preamp Gain if True
Amp is enabled.
Linear Scaling
The Linear scaling is used assuming that the signal strength is decreasing linearly with time. The first sample is scaled by the
Initial Gain, and then the gain is increasing linearly by the slope (dB/Sec). As in the earlier scaling methods, the traces then are
rescaled according to the value in the Throw window.
• Initial Gain (dB) - Gain value at T-Zero.
• Slope (dB/sec) - Linear rate of gain per second.
• True Amp - Same as Fixed Scaling
• Aux. Gain (dB) - Same as Fixed Scaling
• Throw (inch) – Same as Fixed Scaling

User Manual
Trace Scaling
The Trace Scaling defines parameters to display the traces in the horizontal and vertical directions.
• From the Vert field drop menu, select the following:
• Fit - the system automatically adjust vertical scaling to the best resolution to display a data time block as defined in
Plot Time (Start, End, All Time)
• 2.5, 5, 7.5, 10 - select the number of inches per second
• From the Horiz field drop menu, select the number of traces per inch to display (select Fit to automatically adjust size to
the available screen size).
• Enable the Plot by Time (time scale in horizontal direction) checkbox to change the orientation of the plot.
• Enable the Plot R to L checkbox to display trace numbers from right to left (default left to right).
• Enable the Clip checkbox to clip amplitude of the traces. Generally, trace throw may overlap adjacent traces (Fixed
gain) and can be limited by clipping the amplitude of a signal between the number of traces set in the Clip window.
5: QC
The QC options are used to define tolerances for the quality control of seismic data. Every time an acquired seismic record is
opened in Video Plot, the system calculates RMS Amplitude, RMS Noise, and SNR for the individual trace and average for the
shot. These data is saved in the QC Database (if enabled) and used in Patch Viewer and Shot History Viewer.
•Enter tolerances to evaluate individual traces in the Spec <PatchView>

Tolerance fields. These tolerances also apply to the receiver bar graphs (except
SNR).
•Select 0->100 to calculate the ambient noise from T-zero to 100ms time mark.
•Select 0->1st Break to calculate the ambient noise from T-Zero to Predicted
First Breaks line (Recommended).
•RMS (%) tolerance value is used to compare the energy of every two adjacent
traces, assuming that the energy of the trace closest to the shot point is 100%.
•Max. Amp threshold value is used to evaluate every sample of the trace against
the maximum input amplitude value based on Preamp Gain. The bar is red for
the trace if at least one sample is over the threshold value.
•Enter maximum vertical axis scale values in the <ShotsHistory> Spec fields for
RMS, Noise, and SNR bar graphs.
• If required, enable the GDC File checkbox to automatically create files for GDC analysis.

6:View
The View Tab allows the user to define the additional trace bar graphs to the plot. Generally, RMS and Noise are used most
often.
• Enable required bar graphs, if desired.
• Click Apply to save the edits and then Close to return to the Video Plot
window.
Minimize
• Enable Minimize checkbox to display only part of the Video Display Parameters.
• Disable Minimize checkbox to return to full view.

User Manual
View GDC in iX1 Map
Once GDC files are produced, the information (Noise values, RMS value, SNR values) can be viewed in iX1 Map.
• Select the GDC tab and click Calc to determine the bin sizes and offsets.
Sx/SNR
1. Select the Sx tab and enable the On checkbox.
2. Select the SNR tab and click Apply. A green icon displays for every source point with a GDC file.
3. The SNR range displays at the bottom of the tab. Click the button beside the values to transfer that range into the
Minimum and Desired fields.
4. Click Apply. Source points now display in one of three colors:
Red SNR value less than the Minimum limit

Blue SNR value that falls within the Minimum and Desired limits
Green SNR value that exceeds the Desired limit

Sx/RMS
2. Select the RMS tab.
3. Click Apply. A green icon displays for every source point with a GDC file.
4. The RMS range displays at the bottom of the tab. Using the keyboard, transfer that range into the Minimum and
Desired fields.
5. Click Apply. Source points now display in one of three colors:
Red RMS value less than the Minimum limit

Blue RMS value that falls within the Minimum and Desired limits
Green RMS value that exceeds the Desired limit

User Manual
Shot Info
• Move the cursor to one of the source points with an icon. The Shot Info window will display the following: Line, Shot, File,
Type, Time, Logged Depth, UH Time, GDC, or RMS, Average, and a graph.
• Logged Depth and UH Time may not exist depending on the source type used and whether or not drill logs were
imported.
• Average refers to the number of receivers contributing to that shot.
• The graph is only present when the SNR tab is active. The vertical axis of the graph is the SNR (dB). The horizontal
axis is offset distances. The bars in the graph represent the contributors (separated by offset) used to calculate the
average SNR for that source point.

Rx/SNR
1. Select the Rx tab and enable the On checkbox.
2. Select the SNR tab then Analyzed. This displays the SNR receiver information for all source points with a GDC file.
3. Click Apply. A green icon displays for every receiver point with a GDC file.
5. Click Apply. Receiver points now display in one of three colors:

6. Enable the Auto feature and click Apply. The receivers now display in a range of colors from red to green according to
their SNR values.

User Manual
7. Select Current.
8. Click on the Current Shot button in the toolbar. The cursor now displays as a white splat .
9. Move the cursor to a source point that has a GDC file and click on it. This displays the GDC receiver information for that
individual source point.
10. Click Apply. A magenta circle displays around the source point (if On is selected in the Sx tab). A green or red icon
displays for every receiver that contributed to the GDC files.
Red Indicates a negative value

Green Indicates a positive value


13. Enable Auto and click Apply. The receivers now display in a range of colors from red to green according to their SNR
values.

User Manual
Rx/RMS
2. Select the RMS tab then Analyzed. This will display RMS receiver information for all source points with a GDC file.
3. Click Apply. A green icon displays for every receiver that contributed to the GDC files.
4. The RMS range displays at the bottom of the tab. Using the keyboard, transfer that range into the Minimum and
Desired fields.
Red RMS value less than the Minimum limit

Blue RMS value that falls within the Minimum and Desired limits
Green RMS value that exceeds the Desired limit

6. Select Current.
7. Click on the Current Shot button in the toolbar. The cursor now displays as a white splat .
8. Move the cursor to a source point that has a GDC file and click on it. This displays the GDC receiver information for that
9. Click Apply. A magenta circle displays around the source point (if On is selected in the Sx tab). A green icon displays
for every receiver that contributed to the GDC files.
10. The SNR range displays at the bottom of the tab. Using the keyboard, transfer that range into the Minimum and
Desired fields.


User Manual
Rx/Noise
2. Select the SNR tab and then Analyzed.
3. Select the Noise tab.
4. Click Apply. This will display noise information for all source points with a GDC file. Receiver points now appear in one
of three colors:
Red Noise value greater than the Limit

Blue Noise value that falls within the Warning and Limit
Green Noise value that is less than the Warning
The Warning and Limit values are derived from the entry in the Geophone Noise Tolerance in the Sensor
Types table. By changing this entry the Warning and Limit values can be edited.

5. Select the SNR tab and then Current.
6. Select the Noise tab.
7. Click on the current shot button in the toolbar. The cursor now displays as a white splat .
8. Move the cursor to a source point that has a GDC file and click on it. This displays the noise receiver information for that
Red Noise value less than the Minimum limit

Blue Noise value that falls within the Minimum and Desired limits
Green Noise value that exceeds the Desired limit

User Manual
Important!
Important!
The following procedures apply to drilled shot points only.
Sx/UH
2. Select the UH tab.
3. From the drop menu, select one of the following:
• Logged VS Target Depth (page 587)
• Meas. Uphole Times (page 588)
• Meas. Velocity (Logged Depth / UH Time) (page 589)
• Calc. Velocity (Avg. Regional Velocity) (page 590)
• Calc. Depth (UH Time X Calc. Velocity) (page 591)
• Logged VS Calc. Depth (page 592)

Logged VS Target Depth
1. In the Target Depth field, enter the shot point depth found in the parameters for the project.
2. Enter a tolerance in the next field.
3. Click Apply. In the window at the bottom of the tab is a range of the logged depths found in the database.
All of the shot points in the project will have either a:
The depth that was imported with the drill logs falls within the tolerance
Green icon
stipulated (with respect to the target depth)
The depth that was imported with the drill logs falls outside of the tolerance
Red icon
stipulated (with respect to the target depth)
White icon The logged depth was not defined

User Manual
Meas. Uphole Times
1. Click Apply. In the window at the bottom of the tab is a range of the uphole times saved in the database.
At the bottom of iX1 Map is a color legend of the uphole times. Every shot point with an uphole time is now a solid
colored icon. Shot points that have no uphole time are a white outlined circle icon.
2. Move the cursor over a shot point and view the Shot Info window for specific information.

Meas. Velocity (Logged Depth/UH Time)
1. Enter a value in the Calc. Velocity Tolerance field.
2. Click Apply. In the window at the bottom of the tab is a range of the velocities.
At the bottom of iX1 Map is a color legend of the velocities. Every shot point with an uphole time is now a colored icon.
Solid icon Shot points that have a velocity that falls within the tolerance
Outlined icon Shot points that have a velocity that falls outside the tolerance
White outlined circle icon Shot points that have no uphole time

User Manual
Calc. Velocity (Avg. Regional Velocity)
2. Click Apply. In the window at the bottom of the tab is a range of the velocities.
At the bottom of iX1 Map is a color legend of the velocities. Every shot point taken now has an icon.
Notice that the shot point the cursor is over, and the other shot points around it are highlighted with a cyan colored box.
This indicates they are being used for the regional velocity average calculation. Ensure that the tolerance entered is not
too tight. Some shot points may not be used for this calculation if they fall outside of the tolerance. If there is not enough
points to make a calculation, or if the source point is not explosive, the icon will be a white outlined circle.
4. Adjust the Calc. Velocity Tolerance to produce results.

Calc. Depth (UH Time X Calc. Velocity)
2. Click Apply. In the window at the bottom of the tab is a range of the depths.
At the bottom of the iX1 Map is a color legend of the depths. Every shot point taken now displays as an icon.
Notice that the shot point the cursor is over and the other shot points around it are highlighted with a cyan colored box.
too tight. Some shot points may not be used for this calculation if they fall outside of the tolerance. If there are not
enough points to make a calculation, the icon displays as a white solid circle.
4. Adjust the Calc. Velocity Tolerance to produce results.

User Manual
Logged VS Calc. Depth
1. Enter a value in the Logged VS Calc. Dept and Calc. Velocity Tolerance fields.
2. Click Apply. In the window at the bottom of the tab is a range of the logged depths saved in the database.
3. Move the cursor over a shot point and view in the Shot Info window for specific information.
Notice that the shot point the cursor is over and the other shot points around it are highlighted with a cyan colored box.
too tight. Some shot points may not be used for this calculation if they fall outside of the tolerance. If there are not
enough points to make a calculation, the icon displays as a white solid circle.
4. Adjust the tolerance values to produce results. All of the shot points in the project will have either:
The depth that was imported with the drill logs falls within the tolerance
Green icon
stipulated (with respect to the calculated depth)
The depth that was imported with the drill logs falls outside of the tolerance
Red or blue icon
stipulated (with respect to the calculated depth)
From this information, conclusions can be made about the drilling contractor and/or uphole data quality and
consistency.

Change Colors
1. Click on a color in the Basic Colors field to use.
2. Click OK to apply the color.
Custom Colors
If the colors available in the basic color pallet are not suitable, custom colors can be created.
1. Click Define Custom Colors. The Custom colors pallet displays.
2. Click in the color field and move the color slide arrow up/down to lighten/darken the selected color in the Color
Solid box.
3. When the desired color displays in the Color Solid box, click Add to Custom Colors.
4. The new custom color displays in the Custom colors pallet.
5. Click OK to save the new custom color.

User Manual

Chapter 10
Correlation
Correlation Theory
Correlation in the time domain:

N
cn    pi si  n 
i 1
where:
p: pilot trace
s: seismic trace
N: number of samples
n: time sample index
is equivalent to multiplication in the frequency domain:
c n  IFFT  P* S 
where:
P complex conjugate of the Fourier transform of the pilot trace
S Fourier transform of the seismic trace
IFFT inverse Fourier transform
: frequency sample index
iX1 Software Correlation
INOVA iX1 software performs correlation in the frequency domain via “frequency sample by frequency sample” multiplication of
the seismic trace with the conjugate of the pilot trace as described above.
To normalize the data after correlation, each sample is divided by the square root of the zero-lag value of the autocorrelation of
the pilot trace.
N
A  P * P 
i 1
i i
Cn
Cn 
A
iX1Software Version 6.006.02 595

User Manual

Chapter 11
Diversity Stack
Diversity Stack
The INOVA iX1 Diversity Stack (DVS) filter is used to eliminate noise on selected composites to create a cleaner, overall picture
of data from a given area.
In the following example, 5 seconds of data input is being analyzed and the DVS parameter (window length) is specified as 1
second.
Sum Data & Power Buffers:
1. To calculate the DVS, the system creates two buffers:
• Sum of inverse power (Pt-1)
• Sum of scaled composites (yt)
Calculation of these buffers is explained in step 3.
2. Build a model of the power window (Pc) for each composite.
a) Divide the trace into ten ½ second segments (each is one-half of the originally specified window length).
b) Calculate the RMS value for each segment within the input composite (x2c).

User Manual
c) Smooth the RMS values using the filter (0.25, 0.5, 0.25). Due to this smoothing, the time segments are
selected as one-half the specified window length.
d) Linearly interpolate between smoothed RMS values (the software assumes that each RMS value represents
the middle of a segment). The first half of the first time segment and the last half of the last segment are set as
constants (represented by horizontal lines).
e) Stack the inverse of the power window (shown in step d) into the inverse power buffer. This is calculated
as follows:
NCOMP
1
1
Pt  
c 1 Pct
Where NCOMP is the number of composites, and Pct is the power of a given composite at a given time.
f) Stack the input trace. This is calculated as follows:
NCOMP
xct
yt  
c 1 Pct
x
Where ct is the input composite at a given time.
3. Calculate the DVS output.
The software scales the input trace buffer (y) with the inverse power buffer. This is calculated as follows:
xct
NCOMP
yt
c 1 Pct

Pt 1 NCOMP 1
c 1 Pct

Chapter 12
Slip Sweep & DSSS (HPVS)
Slip Sweep and DSSS (HPVS)
INOVA offers cutting-edge HPVS (High Productivity Vibroseis Seismic) technology that delivers greater productivity and
improved return on investment while reducing equipment-related downtime and minimizing the impact of harsh environmental
and operational conditions.
The G3i HD cabled recording systems, AHV-IV series vibrators, Vib Pro HD source controllers, and vibrator navigation system
support a variety of HPVS techniques including slip-sweep and Distance Separated Simultaneous Sweeping (DSSS™). These
proven techniques enable seismic contractors to acquire a greater number of sweeps per day – achieving even higher surface
sampling.
Using HPVS with a high channel count acquisition system achieves greater productivity and more in-depth knowledge of the
subsurface. These efficiency advancements are a result of shortening cycle times and using multiple simultaneous sweeps
during the cycle.
Slip Sweep
Slip sweep is a simultaneous source acquisition program introduced by Petroleum Development Oman that decreases cycle time
and increases productivity by recording data from a series of overlapping sweeps from multiple vibrator fleets (groups).
Operators do not wait for the reflected seismic waves to be fully recorded before another vibe fleet can start shaking.

User Manual
DSSS (DS³)
Distance separated simultaneous sweeping (DSSS or DS³), introduced by BP, enables several vibrators to record seismic data
concurrently without noise interference. By separating source vehicles with adequate distance and performing their sweeps
simultaneously, acquisition output is increased and since there is no loss in data integrity, the need for special data processing or
noise attenuation tools is eliminated. DS³ combined with slip-sweep or with dynamic fleet grouping can further increase
productivity gains versus using DS³ or slip-sweep individually. Dynamic fleet grouping allows vibroseis fleet cluster groups to be
formed automatically when individual vibes that meet the predefined distance constraints become available.
This technique requires a sufficiently large recording patch (super-patch) of receivers to provide adequate surface sampling and
produce unique and independent seismic records separated by distance.

Chapter 12 Slip Sweep & DSSS (HPVS)
Timing Diagram (HPVS)

User Manual
Define Slip Sweep Parameters
Note
Several fields are automatically populated by the system. Fields that are not applicable to slip sweep
operations are grayed out.
Encoder and Communications
• To setup the type of encoder and the communication protocols used between the G3i CRS and the encoder, navigate to
Parameters > Encoder and Communications... from the iX1 Vib drop menu. The Encoders and Communications
window displays.
Manufacturer Select INOVA from the drop menu.
1 - Encoder1 Model Select Vib Pro HD from the drop menu.
Harness Rev. Select 1.00 from the drop menu.
Enable GPS/PPS trim Check for HPVS operations.
Digital Radio Check if using Digital Radios.
Decoders Select Vib Pro HD.

2 - RTI
Enable 8ms Boundaries for HPVS. In this case, a Vib Pro HD Time Break always coincides with
8ms Boundaries Verify
seismic data samples.
Require Fleet Ready The system process the Ready message from vibrators as a Fleet Ready message.

Source Type
• To define the slip sweep parameters for the vibe fleets, navigate to Parameters > Source Table... from the iX1 Vib
drop menu. The Source Type tab is used to define the vibrators being used on the project.
Field Comment
Type Select Vibrator from the drop menu.
Encoders Select Encoder1 (Vib Pro HD) from the drop menu.
Decoders Select Vib Pro HD from the drop menu.
Mode Select Slip Sweep.
Sub-Project Select the current sub-project name from the drop menu.
Label Enter a name for this source type. The label displays in the command line.
Fleet Configuration
The Fleet Configuration sub-tab is used to create the vibrator fleets and define the parameters for each fleet.
Field Comment
Use the up/down arrows to select the number of fleets to use. The same number of fleet panels become
1 - Fleets active. Only eight panels can display simultaneously. If more than eight fleets are created, additional fleet tabs
automatically display (e.g., Fleet 1-8, Fleet 9-16, etc). A maximum of 32 fleets can be defined.
Click, hold, and drag vibes into the fleet panels.

Click in each applicable cell to enable (X) the expected amount of PSS blocks from every vibrator (depends
on PSS type):
2 - Vibs • ON - Enable for each vibe operating in the fleet
• GPS - Enabled by default (all vibrators must be equipped with GPS receivers)
• PSS - Enable to validate the received Post Sweep Service message
• CORR - Enable to validate the received correlation wavelet from the vibes (depends on PSS type)
3 - Fleet # Enter a fleet name above the active fleet panel.

User Manual
Vib Configuration
The Vib Configuration sub-tab is used to define the GPS quality tolerances and offset requirements.
QC Field Comment
Fleet Lists the number of each fleet by rows.
Lists the GPS quality that is currently evaluated. GPS fix is default.
Quality
To make GPS adjustments to individual fleets, disable the Lock to Project Parameters checkbox.
1 - GPS
Satellites Lists the minimum number of satellites required to pass
HDOP Lists the maximum Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) allowed to pass.
The Must Pass requirement for GPS quality must be “1” for slip sweep. If the system does not receive at
Must Pass
least one message that passes these tolerances, it will be unable to calculate the COG.
Unit Offset (M) Enter the offset value (refer to the client QC specifications).
2 - Unit Offset
Enter the pass/fail requirement as it refers to unit offset from the source point (refer to the client QC
Must Pass specifications). The Observer can accept the unit offset if it falls outside of the offset value.
NOTE: This value is CRITICAL for QC and cannot be overridden by the Observer.
COG Offset (M) Enter the COG offset (refer to the client QC specifications).
3 - COG
Enter the pass/fail requirement as it refers to the calculated COG offset from the source point (refer to the
Must Pass client QC specifications).
NOTE: This value is CRITICAL for QC and cannot be overridden by the Observer.
4 Ready Message Action Set automatically to Source Driven Operation
5 Acquisition Properties Start next composite by Ready Message Only
Refer to “Vib Configuration” on page 196 for additional information.

Recording Parameters
Aux (Auxiliary) Channels
Note
In HPVS mode, only PTB and ACOR are recorded to the SEG-Y file during the acquisition of production
shots.
• TREF must be activated to acquire the sweep file.
• WREF must be activated to acquire the wireline records.
Src Ctrl (Source Control)
Before the first production shot is fired, AX time must be measured. AX time is the time difference between the Internal Start
pulse (signal closure to VPE) and PTB (Zero Time) signal. This is accomplished by running the AX utility.
• Click Acquire and run AX utility to obtain the AX time value.

User Manual
Record
The Record sub-tab defines recording parameters and time distance rules for HPVS operations..
Record Length Select a value (in ms) to define the maximum length of each record (listening time).
Select to define Slip Sweep and DSSS parameters. Refer to “Time Distance Rules” on
Time Distance Rules
page 607
Sets the priority of PSS retrieval from the vibrators during HPVS operations.
Record Options PSS Priority • High - system attempts to poll the PSS from the vibrator 3 times.
• Low - system attempts to poll the PSS from the vibrator only 1 time.
Correlation • POST STACK only
The Sweep File must be acquired for HPVS operations.

Pilot Sweep Source
Refer to “Sweep Files” on page 205 for information on how to acquire a sweep file.
Enable the Uncorrelated Stack checkbox to output both a correlated and an uncorrelated
Output Files Uncorrelated Stack
internal format SEG-Y file after each shot.

Time Distance Rules
Slip Sweep
The user has two option to setup the slip sweep parameters.
1. Static Slip Time, where the slip time between two consecutive VPs doesn’t change during the acquisition.
2. Dynamic Slip Time, where the slip time between two consecutive VPs depends upon the distance between fleets
(shorter distance = longer slip time).
• Click Time Distance Rules button. The following popup displays.
Note
There are multiple source separation rules with specified slip time limits available.

User Manual
Static Slip Time
Dynamic Slip Time with the locked slip time between way points.
Dynamic Slip Time with the interpolated slip time between way points..

DSSS
The iX1 system supports Dynamic Fleet Grouping, where the system decides when to start the acquisition based upon the
number of fleets that meet a minimum distance criteria (up to 4).
• Click Time Distance Rules button to setup the DSSS rules.
• In the first row, enter a slip time value.
• If Slip Time is greater or equal than Sweep Time + Listening Time, the system runs DSSS.
• If Slip Time is less than Sweep Time + Listening Time, the system runs DSSS + Slip Sweep.
• In the second row, enter a minimum distance between fleets and 0 in the second field.
In this example, the system starts the DSSS when at least (2) fleets are ready and mutually separated by 12000m. The next
cluster of fleets begins to sweep after the defined slip time (24000ms) is expired.

User Manual
Create a Super-Patch
1. To create a super-patch, open iX1 Map and select the Patch Tab.
2. Click Build to open the Optimize Patches window and select the Super-Patch tab.
3. To define the shot points for a super-patch, click Define Shots.The cursor changes to an Edit arrow.
4. Click on the Map and define the area of shots to include in the super-patch.
5. Right-click to end the edit. The Map indicates which receivers and shots are included in the super-patch.
6. Click Exit to close the Optimize Patches window.
7. Save the changes to the sub-project in iX1 Map.
Important!
Important!
Super-Patch must be rebuilt if iX1 Map is updated with new coordinates and patches.

8. In iX1 Vib, select the Source Line and Shot Point in the sub-command line and click a number below Apply column
to configure the patch for the particular sub-command line.
• Click Apply to configure the Super Patch.
• Left-click on the sub-command line number to set the priority for the next fleet to fire.

User Manual

Chapter 13
RTI Time Delay Charts
Normal Vibroseis - Example 1

User Manual
Normal Vibroseis - Example 2

Chapter 13 RTI Time Delay Charts
Explosives

User Manual

IX1 Acquisition SW MAN00022 RevA Part1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IX1 Acquisition SW MAN00022 RevA Part1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

iX1 Seismic Acquisition Software

Chapter 1 Getting Started ............................................................................................................................... 1

Chapter 2 iX1 Hardware................................................................................................................................. 39

Chapter 3 iX1 Acquisition ............................................................................................................................. 49

Chapter 4 Project Parameters..................................................................................................................... 153

Chapter 5 iX1 Map ........................................................................................................................................ 223

Chapter 6 iX1 Channel and Sensor Tests .................................................................................................. 421

Chapter 7 iX1 ObNotes ................................................................................................................................ 445

Chapter 8 iX1 Media ..................................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 9 iX1 VideoPlot .............................................................................................................................. 519

Chapter 10 Correlation Theory ................................................................................................................... 595

Chapter 11 Diversity Stack.......................................................................................................................... 597

Chapter 12 Slip Sweep and DSSS (HPVS) ................................................................................................. 599

Chapter 13 RTI Time Delays ....................................................................................................................... 613

The iX1 Software can be installed on the following modules:

Microsoft Windows 7 or higher Microsoft Windows 2008 Enterprise R2 x64

Personal Computer (x64) SPM Standard PCIe

SPM Extended PCIe

SPM Lite PCIe

Network Test Unit (NTU)

Ensure each system meets the following requirements:

Hard Drive Space 8 GB 72 GB

• Install iX1 Demo software on the Quality Control Module (QCM).

iX1 Software Version 6.006.02 1

Installing INOVA iX1 Software

2. Copy iX1 software installation folder to SPM.

3. Open iX1 software installation folder.

2 iX1 Software Version 6.006.02

• iX1 - Installs the iX1 acquisition software package.

• Field Tool - Installs software on Hawk Field QC tool.

8. Click Next> on the Select Destination Location window.

iX1 Software Version 6.006.02 3

9. Click Next> on the Select Additional Tasks window.

The Installing window with progress bar displays.

11. Click OK for each popup that displays.

4 iX1 Software Version 6.006.02

14. Click Finish to restart the computer.

iX1 Software Version 6.006.02 5

Figure 1. iX1 Workflow Overview

1. Double-click iX1 Hardware.exe located on your desktop.

3. Click OK to save the configurations. Click Close to exit.

6 iX1 Software Version 6.006.02

4. From your desktop, double-click to open iX1 Acquisition.

7. Click Next or Previous to navigate among the displayed parameter windows.

iX1 Software Version 6.006.02 7

11. Select File > Save Sub-Project from the menu.

8 iX1 Software Version 6.006.02

The iX1 software allows users to:

• Control and monitor field seismic recording equipment

• Display and perform the quality control of acquired seismic data

• Monitor field seismic operations

iX1 G3i Standard Cable   

iX1 Software Version 6.006.02 9

Linked programs included in the iX1 Acquisition software are as follows:

10 iX1 Software Version 6.006.02

Figure 2. iX1 Software Block-Diagram

iX1 Software Version 6.006.02 11

logs Stores HawkSyncDebug files.

12 iX1 Software Version 6.006.02

iX1 Software Version 6.006.02 13

The complete system consists of:

• Central Recording System (SPM+TDM+PSU)

• Data Download System (Transcriber + Download Racks)

• Ground Equipment (G3i HD + Hawk FSU)